Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

Alamein Downtown Towers
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
23050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

0
23051 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
3
23051 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
6
23051 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
7
23051 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
8
23051 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
9
23052 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
3
23052 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
9
23054 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
8
23055 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3
23059 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
3
23071 DUCT INSULATION
3
23071 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
6
23071 HVAC PIPE INSULATION
9
23090 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
0
23090 INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
1
23211 HYDRONIC PIPING
3
23212 HYDRONIC PUMPS
3
23230 REFRIGERANT PIPING
0
23250 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
0
23311 METAL DUCTS
3
23313 AIR DUCT CLEANING
0
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 2

REV 00
23330 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

0
23341 AXIAL HVAC FANS
3
23341 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
6
23342 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
3
23343 AIR CURTAINS
3
23360 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
0
23371 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers)
3
23381 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
3
23570 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
0
23631 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
3
23641 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
6
23650 COOLING TOWERS
0
23720 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
0
23731 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
3
23741 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
3
23812 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
3
23812 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
6
23814 WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
6
23821 FAN-COIL UNITS
9
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 2

REV 00
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 ACCURACY OF DATA AND CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. The design drawings are diagrammatic and they may not show all physical
arrangements, offsets, bends, or elbows which may be required for installation of various
materials, equipment, piping, and ductwork systems in allotted spaces. The Contractor shall
examine these and other available drawings to determine space limitations and interferences. The
Contractor shall be responsible for making any minor changes in location of equipment, pipe and
ductwork from that shown on drawings and for all physical details required for installation.
Cost for adapting Contractor's work to jobsite conditions shall not be considered as basis of an
extra cost to contract. The Contractor shall get approval before proceeding with any change.
B. Information pertaining to new and existing conditions that are described in the
specifications or appear on drawings are based on available records. While such data has been
collected with reasonable care, there is no expressed or implied guarantee that conditions so
indicated are entirely representative of those actually existing or that unlooked for developments
may not occur. Such information is merely provided to assist the Contractor in his investigation of
conditions.
C. The Contractor must carefully examine the drawings, specifications and project
site, and verify all measurements, distances, levels, materials, equipment, etc. before starting
work.
D. Drawings shall not be scaled for determining exact dimensions or location of

equipment.
E. All works not shown on drawings in complete detail shall be installed in conformance
with accepted standard practice and manufacturer’s recommendations.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 1 of 28

REV 00
F. All items shall be installed in a manner and in locations avoiding all obstructions,
preserving headroom and keeping openings and passageways clear. Changes shall be made
to the location of equipment and materials as may be necessary in order to meet this requirement.
G. Work indicated on drawings, but not mentioned in Specifications, or vice versa,

shall be performed as if specifically mentioned or indicated by both
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors.

Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Climatic Conditions: The outdoor design conditions to be adopted for the project
are as follows:
1. Climatic Conditions:
a. Latitude: [Insert Northern Latitude] N
b. Longitude: [Insert Eastern Latitude] E.
c. Altitude: [Insert altitude above sea level] m.
2. Outside Temperatures:
d. Dry Bulb: [Insert dry bulb temperature] deg.C.
e. Wet Bulb: [Insert wet bulb temperature] deg.C.

REV 00
B. Indoor Design Conditions: Indoor comfort conditions are based on the
recommendations of ASHRAE Standard 55.
1. The following table represents the indoor design conditions adopted for the
project
SUMMER Winter Remarks

ROOM / AREA %RH %RH
Residential Areas
Living Rooms 40-50 (+-
Guest Rooms 40-50 (+-
Lounges/ Dining 40-50 (+-
Prayer rooms 40-50 (+-
Ball rooms 40-50 (+-
Toilets Ventilation Only [Indirect cooling

unless
indicated
otherwise]
[Insert
requirements]
Public Areas

ROOM / AREA %RH %RH
Bathrooms & Toilet Rooms Ventilation Only [Indirect cooling
unless
indicated
otherwise]
[Insert
requirements]
Computer Rooms
Lobbies and Corridors

Dining Rooms 40-50 (+-
Kitchens 40-50 (+-
Laundries 40-50 (+-
Health Club 20 - 24 40-50 (+-
Locker Rooms 40-50 (+-

REV 00
Lounges 40-50 (+-
Mechanical Equipment Rooms (MERs)
Boiler room
Storage Areas
Offices, Meeting Rooms 40-50 (+- [Heating for façade
offices only]
Public Assembly Areas, General 40-50 (+-
Retails
Indoor Swimming Pools Deck 40-50 (+-
Restaurants 40-50 (+-
Housekeeping [Indirect cooling]

[Insert
requirements]
Garbage room – Dry Trash room Ventilation only
50-60-
Trash refrigerator Walk in trash

refrigeration
Electrical rooms
Transformer room 30 ± 2
Elevator machine room 30 ± 2
Max
MV switchgear room 26 ± 2

ROOM / AREA %RH %RH
MDB / Emergency MDB room 26 ± 230 [50% of the load to
have stand-by
AC] [Insert
requirements]
MCC rooms 26 ± 230 50 ± 5 [50% of the load to

have stand-by
AC] [Insert
requirements]
Generator switchgear room 26 ± 2 50 ± 5

Floor electrical rooms 26 ± 2 50 ± 5
UPS room 22 ± 224 50 ± 5
ECBS rooms 22 ± 224 50 ± 5
Emergency Generator Ventilation Only

REV 00
Telecom rooms
SER (Telecom Server room) 20-23 [CRAC with
redundancy –
Dual coil DX
& Chilled + Stand-by
unit] [Insert
Requirements]
SP (Service provider room) 20-23 [Stand-by AC
required for the
main room]
[Insert Requirements]
GSM room 20-23 [Stand-by AC

required for the
main room]
[Insert Requirements]
IDF-(Intermediate Distribution 20-23 [Stand-by AC

Facilities) required]
[Insert
Requirements]
FCC (Fire command center)
room [Stand-by AC
required for the
main room]
[Insert
requirements]
NOC (Network operation center)

ROOM / AREA %RH %RH
SCR ( Security monitoring room)
Parks Ventilation Only
Loading dock Ventilation Only
Tolerances:
 Temperature : +/- 1°C

 Relative Humidity : +/- 5% (Uncontrolled unless noted otherwise)
1.5 SUBMITTALS

REV 00
A. Welding certificates.
B. Comply with the requirements of Section 013300, “Submittal Procedures”, and

additional requirements specified below and in different sections of division 23
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings shall be produced as required in the contract documents in
addition to the following points
2. Shop drawings shall be new drawings prepared by the Contractor and
shall not be reproductions or tracings of the contract drawings.
a. Drawings shall be overlaid with shop drawings of other trades and checked
for conflicts.
b. Shop drawings shall identify the related contract drawing number or related
reference drawing.
c. Shop drawings shall be fully dimensioned, including both plan and
elevation dimensions from building reference points.
d. Shop drawings shall show schedules and description of equipment, valves,
piping and fittings.
e. Shop drawings shall show complete system layout of equipment,
components, plumbing fixtures, piping, indicating service clearances, and pipe sizes,
fitting types and sizes and hanger support locations.
f. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-
stem movement.
g. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
h. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and
specialties, including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
i. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
j. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
k. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
l. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
m. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large
equipment into building during construction.
n. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls,
and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
o. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets
and inlets, light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling
access panels and other ceiling-mounted items.

REV 00
p. Mechanical equipment rooms.
q. Interstitial space.
r. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.
s. Pipe sleeves.
3. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
a. Complete HVAC floor plans with a minimum of 1/50 scale.

a. HVAC mechanical rooms to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
b. Sections of congested areas to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
c. Fabricated equipment to a minimum of 1/25 scale.
4. Submit shop drawings for review as required by the contract documents.

Additional shop drawings may be requested when it appears that coordination issues
are not clearly resolved, when there is a question as to whether contract documents are
being complied with or the design intent is not being met.
D. Product Data:
1. In line with contract documents and requirements specified in different

sections of division 21
2. The Contractor shall conform to any requirements with respect to ensuring
that products, components and materials comply with any referenced standard. Such
requirements may include, but not be limited to, samples, test results and supporting
documentation
3. The Contractor shall supply original authenticated certificates for each type
of material or equipment, confirming the standard they have been manufactured and tested
to.
E. Where operating or warning instructions are provided or specified they shall be

clearly denoted in English and the native language of the area where the project is located.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."

REV 00
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
D. Installer shall be qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation

experience on projects incorporating HVAC systems and equipment similar to that required for
the project.
E. All Material and equipment shall be new, unless stated otherwise and approved
by the employer.
F. Manufacturer’s written directions and recommendations shall be followed. If these

instructions are different from the contract documents or referenced international standards, the
more stringent requirements shall establish the minimum standard. Any conflict shall be brought
to the attention of the engineer for clarification, prior to the execution of the work.
G. All electrical work related to HVAC items shall be as specified under Division 26,
Electrical
H. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.
I. Equipment and materials to be installed outdoors shall be of the type that is designed,
manufactured and listed or approved for outdoor installation by being resistant to the adverse
effects of weather prevailing at the project location. The additional protective measures against
outdoor weather required by the manufacturers’ installation instructions and prevalent practice
shall be provided.
J. Where two or more equipment or components are of the same class, the same
manufacturer shall be used for selecting the equipment; component parts of the entire system need
not be products of the same manufacturer.
K. Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment

to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that
REV 00
might be encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and
braking of load.
L. Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely

affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with
equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.
M. Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors
N. All equipment with moving parts shall be protected against personal injury
O. [Compliance with the equivalent relevant EN/BS standards are acceptable subject to
submitting a comparison sheet showing equivalency of the requirements with the US standard for
engineers approval ]
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,
and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
C. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during
handling, transport, warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items, at no
additional cost, as instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it is proven
that the damage was caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies.
D. Protect stored pipes, tubes, flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture
and dirt. Elevate above grade.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building

components.

REV 00
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
C. For large equipment make provisions for the necessary openings in the building to
allow for admittance of all equipment before closing in.
D. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-

in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
E. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring
access for operation, service or maintenance that are concealed behind finished surfaces whether
indicated on plans or not. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access
Doors and Frames."
F. Coordinate connections of HVAC systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services where required.
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and

painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical
ceilings and similar concealment.
1.9 CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. All local codes and regulations shall become part of this specification and must be
adhered to where they exceed requirements as shown on the drawings or stated in the
specifications, without additional cost to the Contract. Contract documents may contain more
stringent requirements than the code.
1.10 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES
A. Do not interrupt or change existing services without prior written approval. When
interruption is required, coordinate length of service time with employer to minimize disruption
of occupant activities. Depending on the length of the service time temporary equipment or
pipe installation or relocation might be required and shall be provided to maintain continuity
of operation of existing facilities.
1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

REV 00
A. The Contractor shall provide operating and maintenance instruction manuals covering
each and every item of equipment and devices furnished or erected by the Contractor prior to
"Substantial Completion" as required by Division 1.
B. Each separate manual shall consist of the following:
1. Neatly typewritten table of contents including contractor's name, address and

telephone number; list of each product referenced in manual; and name, address and
telephone number of installing contractor and maintenance contractor for each product.
2. Tabbed sections of catalog data and literature for each product including
model number, description and component parts; operating procedures; maintenance
procedures; servicing and lubrication schedules; description of sequence of operations;
parts lists; illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance; any
additional drawings, diagrams, charts or written text which may be required to supplement
product data for particular installation; certified test and balance report; list of control point
labels, and wiring diagrams.
3. Copy of warranty, bond and/or service contract issued for each product
including an information sheet for operations personnel with proper procedures in event of
a product failure and instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
4. Full size sheets, if required, shall be folded into special holding pockets.
Faxed, handwritten, or illegible materials are not acceptable.
C. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct designated facility operating and
maintenance personnel on operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and
systems. Review contents of operating and maintenance manual with personnel in full detail to
explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
1.12 PROTECTION OF ROOF
A. Contractors are cautioned that they must exercise extreme care in any activity
involving contact with any installed roof membrane.
B. Construct protective plywood (3/4 in. thick) runways across the roof for moving,
setting, and installing equipment and piping systems. No activity on the roof will be permitted
without this protection. Start runways at the point of origin of any equipment placed on roof and
terminate at the point of installation on curb or base. Any and all repairs necessary to bring the
roofing system to its original condition shall be made by an approved Roofing Contractor and
paid for by the Contractor responsible for the damage

REV 00
1.13 WORK COORDINATION
A. All Trades shall work in cooperation with each other, and fit their work into the
structure as job conditions may demand. In general, priority shall be arranged as follows: (in
order of preference)
1. Recessed lighting fixtures

2. Piping which must be drainable
3. Sheet metal ductwork
4. Lighting fixtures
5. Plumbing waste lines, downspouts, vents and sprinkler piping
6. Gravity water lines
7. Heating hot and chilled water lines
8. Refrigerant lines
9. Plumbing water and gas and air lines
10. Electrical conduit
11. Control wiring conduit
1.14 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall verify the location of underground service, utilities,

structures, etc., which may be encountered or be affected by his work and shall be responsible for
any damage caused by neglect to provide proper precautions or protection.
1.15 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Training of Owner’s personnel shall include:
1. A minimum of [8] [12] [24] hours of on-site overview of the overall HVAC
System.
2. Refer to Division 23 sections for specific training on each of the
components of the HVAC System.
1.16 WELDING

REV 00
A. The below compliments other divisions of section 23
B. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:
1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization,

determine the suitability of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet
the required tests, and also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make
sound welds under standard conditions.
2. Comply with the set standards in the specification.
3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of
the piping and systems.
C. Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general requirements for
fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1, Welding: Qualify
processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX,
"Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1 /B2.1M, and / or, as approved by the
Qualifications."
D. Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Engineer, to determine the
ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for all
positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each
welder shall be allowed to weld only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required
to identify his welds with his specific code marking signifying his name and number as signed.
E. Provide the Engineer with a list of names and corresponding code markings. Retest
welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications. Disqualify welders, who fail
the second test, for work on the project.
F. Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame cutting.
Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and
oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.
G. Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes above
50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of weld spatter
reaching the interior of the pipe.
H. Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during
or after installation.

REV 00
I. Replace and re-inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding weld
material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for defective
welds must be re-qualified.
J. Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and
dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their coating.
1.17 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Refer to Division 23, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment section, for sound and vibration requirements.
B. Equipment is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound or

vibration. Noticeable sound outside the room in which moving equipment are installed, or
annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.
C. Conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved means and as

directed.
D. Vibration control shall be designed, tested and installed in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.
1.18 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Division 01 for all components and with special warranties listed in
individual section of Division 23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:

REV 00
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by the manufacturers specified.
B. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture, supply and servicing of the specified products for at least 5 years.
The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years
prior to bid opening. The 5 year experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that
has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures However, digital electronics devices, software and
systems such as controls, instruments, computer work station, shall be the current generation of
technology and basic design that has a proven satisfactory service record of at least 5 years
C. Material and equipment shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a

complete inventory of repair parts and is reasonably located within the project reach
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping sections for special and other approved
joining materials not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections
of division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of

piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness

unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated;
and full- face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

REV 00
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for
refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.

2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
dielectric fittings not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual
sections of division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
C. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum

working pressure at 180 deg F.
E. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or

300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

REV 00
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure
at 225 deg F.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
mechanical sleeve seals not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual
sections of division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve.
C. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
D. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
E. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless
steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
flexible connectors not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual
sections of division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail
B. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide
flexible pipe connections. Include 860 kPa (125-psig) minimum working-pressure rating, unless
higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and larger: Grooved for use with keyed
couplings.

REV 00
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel,

inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Stainless-Steel-Hose / Steel Pipe, Flexible
Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid.
Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-

steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or
flanges, welded to hose.
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with

multiple plies of NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 860 kPa (125-psig)
minimum working-pressure rating at 104. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.6 SLEEVES
sleeves not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of
division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
F. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
G. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

REV 00
H. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
escutcheons not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of
division 23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an
ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely
covers opening.
C. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-

plated finish.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-
plated finish.
F. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
G. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8 GROUT
grout not listed below. In case of conflicting information between individual sections of division
23 and this section, individual sections’ requirements shall prevail.
B. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-

staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.

REV 00
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.9 SCREWS
A. Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HVAC SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. All items shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings and strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. The installation shall comply fully with all applicable standards and codes listed in
individual sections of Division 23.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching"
B. Additional openings required in building construction shall be made by drilling or

cutting.
C. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the objects
passing through.
D. Do not pierce beams or columns without written permission from the structural
engineer and then only as directed.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections

specifying piping systems.

REV 00
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
K. Size reduction shall be made using reducing fittings; bushings are not acceptable.
L. Independently support piping so that its weight shall not be supported by the
equipment to which it is connected.
M. Mitered ells, notched tees, and orange peel reducers are not acceptable. On threaded
piping, bushings are not acceptable.
N. "Weldolets" and "Threadolets" may be used for branch takeoffs up to one-half

(1/2) the diameter of the main.
O. Cover ends of piping during installation to keep inside of piping clean.

REV 00
P. Piping shall not be routed through electrical rooms or transformer vaults, or above
transformers, panelboards, or switchboards, including the required service space for this
equipment, unless the piping is serving this equipment.
Q. Use only wrenches having square flat jaws, or non-metallic strap wrenches on brass
specialties; wrench marks not permitted.
R. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
S. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors in finished spaces.
T. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
U. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division
07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
V. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
W. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-
inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

REV 00
X. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Y. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.
Z. Conveniently locate control panels, hardware and devices, valves, gauges, cleanout
fittings, and other equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection,
repairs, or removal and replacement.
AA. Install thermometers and gauges to be easily read from floors, platforms, and walkways.
BB. Install piping at the required slope indicated in the specification and/or drawings
CC. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.
DD. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23
Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise

indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

REV 00
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,

and solvent cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and
PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC
pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Non-pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join
according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

REV 00
3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and
at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting

heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum
interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and

parallel to equipment shafts.
3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Refer to Division 23 specification section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."
B. Relocate devices Identifying the items for unobstructed view in finished construction

REV 00
3.8 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09

Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.9 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.10 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's

setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to
be embedded.

REV 00
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.11 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed
to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.12 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.

REV 00
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Complete all phases of work so the system, equipment, and components can be
checked out, started, calibrated, operationally tested, adjusted, balanced, functionally tested, and
otherwise commissioned. Complete systems, including all subsystems, so they are fully
functional.
B. Testing and commissioning shall be as required under the applicable sections of

Division 22.
C. Additional tests may be required in the case of products, materials, and equipment if:
1. Submitted items are altered, changed, or cannot be determined as exactly

conforming to the Contract Documents.
3.14 PROTECTION, CARE AND CLEANING
A. The following shall be provided:
1. Provide for the safety and good condition of materials and equipment
until Substantial Completion. Protect materials and equipment from damage.
2. Protect installed Work.
3. In case of damage, immediately provide repairs and/or replacements as
required.
4. Protect covering for bearings, open connections to tanks, pumps,
compressors and similar equipment.
5. Interior of piping shall be maintained free of dirt, grit, dust, and other foreign
materials.
6. Fixtures, piping, finished brass or bronze, and equipment shall have grease,
adhesive, labels, and foreign materials removed. Chromium, nickel plate, polished
bronze or brass Work shall be polished. Glass shall be cleaned inside and out.
7. Before Substantial Completion, piping shall be drained and flushed to
completely remove grease and foreign matter. Pressure regulating assemblies, traps,
strainers, boilers, flush valves, and similar items shall be thoroughly cleaned. Compressed
air, oil, and gas piping shall be blown out with oil-free compressed air or inert gas.

REV 00
END OF SECTION 230500

REV 00
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-

installed motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting

arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding
lug; and coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
A. Comply with IEC 60034-30-1 (IE-3).
B. Comply with IEC 60034.
C. Comply with IEC 60072.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - Page 1 of 6

REV 00
D. Comply with IEC 60034-5. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise

indicated.
B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
C. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC

60034-12, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer for high torque applications.
D. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and Larger: Three phase.
E. Motors smaller than 0.746 (1 HP): Single phase.
F. Frequency Rating: Determined by the frequency of circuit to which motor

is connected, refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings .
G. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is

connected, refer to Electrical Specifications and Drawings.
H. Service Factor: 1.15 according to NEMA MG1 or shall be duty type S1

- continuous running duty to IEC 60034-1, unless otherwise indicated. Motors used for
excessive intermittent periodic operation shall be suitably designed for the expected
number of starts. Motors’ dimensions shall comply with NEMA MG1 or IEC 60072 as
applicable.
I. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and

sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in
indicated environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding
nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
J. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC)

to NEMA MG1 or IC 411 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or
recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

REV 00
K. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled
(TEAAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable or totally enclosed,
water to air cooled (TEWAC) to NEMA MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable.
Enclosure type shall be as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer,
unless otherwise indicated.
L. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60034 for outdoor
use and IP54 to IEC 60034 for indoor motors as a minimum.
M. Temperature Rise: Shall comply with class F insulation and temperature rise
class B or Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient
temperature, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer for specific applications such as: overhead cranes or submersible pumps,
where temperature rise not exceeding 105 deg. C may be used.
N. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty
to NEMA MG1 or Class I to IEC 60034-18-41 and shall be classified as energy
efficiency to NEMA MG1 or high efficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30.
O. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree
of protection.
P. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s
degree of protection and shall be designed for differential CT's and/or surge protection
(surge arrestor and surge capacitor). Enough space shall be provided below main terminal
box for cable connection.
Q. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 /

RTD200 or PTC for winding protection for all low voltage motors rated 50 HP and above
and for all low voltage VFD motors.
R. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200

for winding and bearing protection for all medium voltage motors.
S. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor
controller suppliers to ensure compatibility, proper starting and satisfactory operation.
2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS

REV 00
A. Description: NEMA MG 1 or IEC 60034-30-1 (IE3) and IEC 60072,
induction motor.
1.Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1 or IEC Standards.

2.Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE3 to
IEC 60034-30, IE2 for motors of less than 0.7 kw unless otherwise indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings,
unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have
separate winding for each speed.
4.Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5.Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
6.Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class F for motors with temperature
rise 80 deg. C and Class H for motors with temperature rise 105 deg. C as
indicated in paragraph 2.1 M above.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal
box to suit control method. Maximum permissible starting current shall be 5 to 6.3 times
the Full Load Current (FLC). (NEMA starting code F or G) for motors rated 15 HP and
above. For motors rated below 15HP, starting current shall be as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics,

and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller

output.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with

1.25 minimum service factor to NEMA MG1, greased bearings, integral condensate
drains, and capped relief vents. Windings are insulated with nonhygroscopic material.
External finish is chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to

IEC:
1.Measurement of winding resistance.

2.No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3.Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4.High-potential test.
REV 00
5.Alignment.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to

suit starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1.Permanent-split capacitor.
2.Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3.Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4.Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B insulation may be used.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW
(1/20 hp).
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection

automatically opens power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a
safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device
automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors

with high radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other
single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.

REV 00
D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to
motor terminal box and use liquid tight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.
E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC or

NFPA recommendations for “Hazardous (classified) Locations”.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation.

Coordinate with the commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a part.
B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and

power.
C. Report unusual conditions.
D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.

REV 00
SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for HVAC piping
systems.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working

pressures, and temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between

anchors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1.Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection

and design of expansion fittings and loops.
2.Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and
methods of assembly.
3.Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 230516 - Page 1 of 7
REV 00
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for

each expansion fitting and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
1.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who
is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of expansion fittings and
loops that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure

rating, with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and
flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base,
2.Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows
and brass shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway:
Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless- steel-pipe end connections, and steel
shroud.

REV 00
4.Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and
carbon-steel shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating,

with internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1.End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2.End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3.Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
4.Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and

pressure rated for 1200 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1.Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external

control rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2.Types: Single and double sphere.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-

metal-hose legs joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet
elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1.Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.
a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid
bronze sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450
kPa at 232 deg C (500 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and
double- braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at
70 deg F) and 2170 kPa at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum
pressure ratings.
2.Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at

REV 00
pressure ratings.
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel

hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C
(275 psig at 70 deg F) and 1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F)
minimum pressure ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg C (165 psig at
pressure ratings.
2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint

designed for repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250
psig at 400 deg F) minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match
piping system, drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and flanged-end
connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1.Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2.Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition

packing, designed for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at 204
deg C (250 psig at 400 deg F) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9,
"Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing parts and
bolting.
1.End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2.End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3.Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection
minimum.
4.Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection
minimum.
2.3 GUIDES

REV 00
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base
for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for

use in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
1.Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2.Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3.Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with

hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
1.Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component

epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener
is to be installed.
2.Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud,
3.Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa

minimum. Refer to Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and
concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

REV 00
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
2.Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are
installed.
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as

required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in
temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1.Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow
fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

REV 00
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those

permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected
equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to
piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated,

or otherwise required, and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written

instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and
anchors installed on or in concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-
painted surfaces.
1.Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of

0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in
Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

REV 00
SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.Sleeves.
2.Stack-sleeve fittings.
3.Sleeve-seal systems.
4.Sleeve-seal fittings.
5.Grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and

equivalent to ductile- iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A

53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 230517 - Page 1 of 6

REV 00
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B,
Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.
D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-

mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description:
Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for

filling annular space between piping and sleeve.
1.Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of

pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3.Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for

imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with
center opening to match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-

adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

REV 00
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior

applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions,

roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size
large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete
slabs and walls.
1.Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as
new slabs and walls are constructed.
1.Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical

equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor
level.
2.Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without
sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2.Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

REV 00
3.Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint
sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
for sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1.Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2.Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with
membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in
Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50
mm) above finished floor level.
4.Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified.
5.Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe

penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-

grade at service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping
material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center
piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular
space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

REV 00
3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of

concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration

applications:
1.Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2.Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

with sleeve-seal system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear

space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

with sleeve- seal system.


REV 00
3.Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves

with sleeve-seal system.


with sleeve- seal system.

4.Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

5.Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves .

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

REV 00
SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.Escutcheons.
2.Floor plates.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and

setscrew fastener.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-

plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip

fasteners.
D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with

concealed hinge and setscrew.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 230518 - Page 1 of 4

REV 00
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and

exposed-rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2 FLOOR PLATES
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished

floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation
of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.Escutcheons for New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece,

deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished, chrome- plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type split-plate, stamped-
steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed
hinge.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

REV 00
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped- steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished
Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-
casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished, chrome-plated finish.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms:
One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-
plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.
2.Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed- rivet hinge.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-
plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting
brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped- steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished
Service Spaces: Split-casting brass type with
[polished, chrome-plated] [rough-brass] finish.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel
type with [concealed] [or] [exposed-rivet] hinge.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms:
Split-casting brass type with polished,
chrome-plated finish.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment

Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.
C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

REV 00
D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of
piping and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2.Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

REV 00
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for HVAC systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance

curves for each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale

range, fittings, and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages

certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified
requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Operation and maintenance Data: For meters

and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include data for the following:
1.Flow-measuring systems.
2.Flowmeters.
3.Thermal-energy flowmeters.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - Page 1 of 13

REV 00
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.Gages: for each type and size installed furnish extra material as per the
below:
a. From 1 to 9 gages installed:

Furnish 1 extra Gage
b.From 10 and above gages installed: Furnish 4 extra Gages
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

1.Heating Hot Water: 0 to 100 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to
212 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
2.Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0
to 100 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
3.Steam and Condensate: 10 to 205 deg C, with 3-degree scale divisions (50
to 400 deg F, with 5-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E1-07.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front,
spring secured, 230 mm (9 inches) long.

REV 00
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical

plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched

markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of

length to suit installation.
2.3 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter,

glass lens.

D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of

length to suit installation.
2.4 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.

REV 00
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter,
glass lens.
C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings.
E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to

suit installation.
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
2.5 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200; direct-mounting, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Stainless steel with 125-mm- (5-inch-) diameter, glass lens.

D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched

markings.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
2.6 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200, bimetal type.
B. Dial: 25-mm (1-inch) diameter.

REV 00
C. Case: Stainless steel.
D. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- (1/8-inch-) diameter, tapered-end stem

with nominal length of 125 mm (5 inches).
2.7 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe

fitting to hold fixed thermometer stem.
1.Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2.Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3.Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not
less than thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not
insulated.
4.Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5.Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6.Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.8 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe

fitting to hold test thermometer.
1.Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2.Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
less than thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not
insulated.
4.Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5.Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6.Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.9 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

REV 00
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with
threaded end for attaching thermometer.

less than thickness of exterior insulation.
2.Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not
less than thickness of insulation lining.
2.10 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with

bottom connection; dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets
and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter,

glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1.Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of

vacuum to 15 psig of pressure).
2.Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.11 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

REV 00
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-
resistant porous- metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.12 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD

probe from dial- type thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20
to 200 deg F), chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to
plus 275 deg F), ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial
thermometers, pressure gage and carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer

Ranges: Approximately two times the system's
operating conditions.
2.13 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. Description: For water meters connected to the IBMS please refer to

section 230900, approval and to suit installation requirements at site.
B. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing,

valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system
fluid.

REV 00
1.Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of

equipment or system where used.
2.Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
C. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or

bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-inch-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings
and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
1.Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2.Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
D. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
E. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design,

flow-element fitting made for installation in piping.
1.Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and

attached tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 (NPS 2)
and smaller elements and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger
elements.
2.Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
3.Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).
F. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for

insertion into piping.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe,

with brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
2.14 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation

in piping systems.

REV 00
1.Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic
pelton- wheel indicator.
2.15 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
A. Description: For water meters connected to the IBMS please refer to

section 230900, , approval and to suit installation requirements at site.
B. Instruments include electromagnetic or ultrasonic flow-sensor element and

meter, two temperature sensors, transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery
pack, integral stop valves, strainer, and magnetic trap.
1. Construction: Bronze body.

2.Pressure Rating: minimum 16 bar subject to suit operating pressure.
3. Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg C (32 to 250 deg F). PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's

written instructions for applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1.Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2.Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up
central systems.
3.Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4.Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
5.Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.

REV 00
6.Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
7.Each duct thermometer support flange.
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing

connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing
length.
D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed

thermometers are indicated.
1.Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2.Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test

thermometers are indicated.
1.Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2.Install with extension on insulated piping
3.Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct

thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on

pipe at most readable position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1.Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2.Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.

REV 00
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each
pump.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1.Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure

gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping

systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump,

at inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight

lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible

locations.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or

brackets in accessible locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and

meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

REV 00
3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return

line for remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to
support meter.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1.Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow

service and maintenance.
2.Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3.Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4.Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters

and devices.
C. Ground electrically operated meters.
1.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 26

Sections.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

REV 00
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after
installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces.

Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with
manufacturer's touchup paint.

REV 00
SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves and Motorized valves common to
HVAC piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design,
pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim
material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation
instructions. Include list indicating valve and its application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies

indicating at least 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in
successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance

manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting,
servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - Page 1 of 19

REV 00
B. ASME Compliance:
1.ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
criteria.
2.ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3.ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice

documents referenced.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2.Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3.Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.

4.Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5.Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6.Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1.Maintain valve end protection.

2.Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in
watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts.
Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

REV 00
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.Valves: for each type and size installed furnish extra material as per the
below:
From 1 to 4 valves installed: Not required

a. From 5 to 9 valves installed:
b. Furnish 1 extra valve
c. From 10 to 99 valves installed: Furnish 2 extra valves
d. From 100 and above valves installed: Furnish 2% of amount installed
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as
specified below.

REV 00
1.Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full
extension of rising stems.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed
under ground or above ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with
250 micron fusion bonded epoxy coating.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated in the

"Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures
and temperatures.
D. The indicated pressure is the minimum working pressure and shall be

verified across each building operating pressure and to be approved by the engineer.
E. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the

following special operator features:
1.Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2.Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller,
except for plug valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1
wrench for every 10 plug valves.
3.Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed
2400 mm (96 inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4.Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.
G. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended

stems arranged to receive insulation.
H. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain
connections.
I. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
J. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME
B16.24 for bronze valves.
K. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

REV 00
L. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
M. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of

access shall be provided.
2.2 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN50 (2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-
kPa (200-psi) cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP or
equivalent European standard; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze
wedge, copper- silicon alloy or brass rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze
packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-
iron or cast iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380-
kPa (200-psi) CWP or equivalent European standard, ASTM A 126 cast or ductile iron
body and bonnet, solid cast or ductile iron wedge, brass-alloy or stainless steel stem,
rising stem, teflon- impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged
end connections; and with cast or ductile iron handwheel.
2.3 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140-
kPa (600-psi) CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-
plated brass ball, standard port for DN15 (1/2-inch) valves and smaller and conventional
port for DN20 (3/4-inch) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon
seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1.Operator: Steel handwheel.

2.Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
3.Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
4.Operator: Lever operators with lock.
5.Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
6.Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.4 PLUG VALVES

REV 00
A. Plug Valves: non-lubricated MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa (175-psi) CWP, ASTM A

126 cast-iron body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged
or grooved end connections:
1.Operator: Lever.
2.Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
3.Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and
larger.
4.Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and
larger, 2400 mm (96 inches) or higher above floor.
2.5 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, DN50 (2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-
kPa (200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP or equivalent European
standard; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc,
silicon bronze-alloy or copper silicon alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze
nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
handwheel.
B. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125,
1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze
fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy or brass stem, outside screw and yoke,
teflon-impregnated or graphite packing with cast-iron follower, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa (150-psi)
maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet or equivalent
European standard, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N
sleeve and stem seals:
1.End connection for sizes up to DN300 (12 Inches): Lug, wafer or grooved
style.
2.End connection for sizes larger than DN300 (12 Inches): lug or Double
Flanged style.
3.Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron or stainless steel.

REV 00
4.Stem & Disc material: Nickel plated ductile iron.
5.Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Lever handle

with latch lock.
6.Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator
with position indicator and chain wheel.
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class
125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; horizontal swing,
Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or
composition seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class
125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-
swing, weighted non-slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126,
AWWA C508 having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air
cushioned side mounted cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis connected to ductile iron
disc arm, flanged or grooved connection.
D. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP or equivalent

European standard, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, non-slam, bronze disc/plates, stainless-
steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.
E. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main
components), horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, bronze disc or Buna N
rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded or soldered end connections.
F. Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves (For Circuits up to PN 16):

MSS SP-125; Class 150, ASTM A395/A395M or ASTM A536, or equivalent European
standard, ductile iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel springs.
G. Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves, DN 65 to DN 300 (For

Circuits higher than PN 16): MSS SP-125; Class 250, ASTM A126 or equivalent
European standard, gray iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel springs.

REV 00
H. Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves, DN 350 to DN 600 (For
Circuits higher than PN 16): MSS SP-125; Class 300, ASTM A395/A395M or ASTM
A536 or equivalent European standard, ductile iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel
springs.
I. Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves (For Circuits up to PN 16): MSS SP-

125; Class 150, ASTM A395/A395M or ASTM A536, or equivalent European standard,
ductile iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel springs, installed between flanges.
J. Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves, DN 65 to DN 300 (For

Circuits higher than PN 16): MSS SP-125; Class 250, ASTM A126 or equivalent
European standard, gray iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel springs, installed
between flanges.
K. Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves, DN 350 to DN 600 (For

Circuits higher than PN 16): MSS SP-125; Class 300, ASTM A395/A395M or ASTM
A536 or equivalent European standard, ductile iron body, bronze disc/plates, stainless-
steel springs, installed between flanges.
2.8 DOUBLE REGULATING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves, DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body, globe type,
1035 kPa working pressure, 107 deg C. maximum operating temperature, and having
threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or Venturi, connections for portable
differential pressure meter with integral seals, and are equipped with a memory stop to
retain set position.
B. Double Regulating and Commissioning Valves DN20-DN50:
1.Double regulating and commissioning valves with secured infinitely

adjustable presetting controllable at any time by means of the flow limiting device.
2.Lengths according to DIN EN 558-1 basic series 1 (corresponds to ISO 5752
series 1)
3.All functioning components on one level, pressure test point and fill and
drain ball valve interchangeable; PN16, - 20°C to + 150°C.
C. Calibrated Balancing 'Valves, DN65 and larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball
type, 1035 kPa working pressure, 107 deg. C maximum operating temperature, and having
flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or Venturi,
connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped
with a memory stop to retain set position.

REV 00
D. Double Regulating and Commissioning Valves DN65 and larger:
(Measuring technique "classic Tender specification):
1.Double regulating and commissioning valves with secured, infinitely

adjustable presetting controllable at any time by means of the flow limiting device.
2.Lengths according to DIN EN 558-1 basic series 1 (corresponds to ISO 5752
series 1)
3.All functioning components on one level, pressure test point and fill and
drain ball valve interchangeable; PN16, - 20°C to + 150°C.
2.9 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE (DPCV)
A. DPCV DN 20-DN50: Bronze or brass body BS EN 1982 (CC491K) and

bolted bonnet with bronze or brass fittings, brass or Stainless Steel BS EN 10088 - 1:
2005, stem EPDM diaphragm and seal. Maximum operational differential pressure ΔP
210 kPa, fixed female ISO (ISO7, DIN2999) end connection, PN16, - 20°C to + 120°C.
B. DPCV DN 65-DN150: Cast Iron body ASTM A48-CL30, Cast Bronze seat
and cone ASTM B584-C836, Spring Steel, Actuator Spindle Stainless Steel 304, cone
stem Stainless Steel 316, yoke Ductile Iron ASTM A536-65-45-12, EPDM diaphragm
and packing, Maximum operational differential pressure ΔP 150 kPa, flanged end
connections BS EN1092-2 PN16.
2.10 MOTORIZED VALVES
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.GENERAL
a. All valves shall be designed and manufactured for, continued operation

without seizure, cavitation, excessive vibration or strain; and requiring only that
degree of maintenance generally accepted as normal for the specific type of valve
required. Likewise the valves shall also be able to withstand long periods of
inactivity without detrimental effects on seals, etc.
b. The Contractor shall confirm with his offer the valve components that will
require to be replaced at each maintenance stage.

REV 00
c. The Contractor shall provide references to where similar design and size of
Isolation Valves assembly have been supplied and are in current operation.
d. All parts and components in a given type, size and rating of valve shall be
designed and built for inter-changeability so that replacement parts may be
installed without additional fitting or machining.
e. All pressure containing parts shall be designed to withstand the design
pressure, based on material thickness excluding corrosion allowances.
f. The mating surfaces of any sealing joints shall be fully machined after any
necessary stress relieving. A composite one piece gasket shall be used between the
mating surfaces. Metal-to-metal joints are not acceptable.
g. Joints requiring accurate re-alignment upon re-assembly shall have dowels
fitted, commensurate with valve size.
h. The Isolation Valves shall be required to operate under the chilled water,
heating water and condenser water design conditions as stated in the relevant
documents and drawings.
i. All valves of the same type, size and pressure rating shall have the same
face-to-face dimensions and the same flanges and shall be interchangeable.
j. Isolation Valves shall be designed to open and close against an unbalanced
pressure equal to the valve pressure rating.
2.MANUAL OPERATION
a. Where manual operation is specified, Isolation Valves shall be fitted with

lever arms or hand wheels, or stem caps for key operation. Lever arms and hand
wheels shall be positioned to be in either the horizontal or vertical plane. Suitable
gearing shall ensure that stem caps are presented in the vertical position for operation
by ring key and bar.
b. Hand wheels shall be sized such that the maximum force required to operate
the valve is 0.3 kN applied at the rim of the hand wheel, or in the case of ring key
operation, gearing shall be chosen such that the valve is operable by a standard ring
key and bar.
B. ELECTRICALLY ACTUATED VALVES
1.ELECTRICAL OPERATION
a. Electrically powered actuators for the operation of valves can be mounted

either directly or indirectly.
b. The actuator shall be suitably rated for the valve, the duty and the
Contractor's manufacturer recommendation regarding the torque requirements.
c. A clutch shall engage the hand wheel for manual use, and prevent hand wheel
rotation during powered operation.
REV 00
2.LOCAL OPERATION
a. Actuators shall be suitable for remote or local operation electrically by

push button, and be fitted with a hand wheel for manual operation. A pad-lockable
"local/off/remote" switch on the actuator shall allow the mode of operation to be
selected. Local electrical initiation of operation shall not negate actuator control
of valve speed or safety functions. A clearly identified actuator mounted stop button
shall allow powered operation to be stopped with one action. Local operation
shall not negate the remote indication of valve and actuator status and alarms.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that it is possible to operate the clutch to
disengage the motor drive in an emergency. The clutch lever shall be pad-lockable in
both the engaged and the disengaged positions. Hand wheel operation shall have the
facility to hammer the valve off, or onto the seat. The direction of rotation of the
hand wheel for closing shall be clockwise. A plate shall be mounted with the
direction of opening indicated, and the word "OPEN" written in both English .
Likewise a similar label shall indicate the closing direction with the word "CLOSE".
3.ACTUATOR MOUNTING
a. Mounting of the actuator to the valve or pedestal shall comply with ISO
5210/ISO 5211.
b. The drive mechanism shall be self-locking such that fluid and/or vibration
forces do not cause the valve, disc or gate, to move from any set position.
c. The drive arrangement shall be designed to transmit the maximum torque
induced by the drive motor.
4.SPEED OF OPERATION
a. Speed of operation shall be stated as the valve stroke time from fully
open to fully close.
5.ISOLATING OPERATION
a. Actuators that operate infrequently, i.e., at or less than one start per hour shall
be considered to be isolating duty.
6.FAILURE MODE

REV 00
a. Unless otherwise specified, actuators shall "stay put" in case the actuator
control systems fail.
7.MECHANICAL VALVE POSITION INDICATION
a. The valve actuator assembly shall have a mechanical means of indicating

the valve position. Actuators shall be fitted with limit switches to indicate the valve
position (either OPEN or CLOSE), over a PROFIBUS-DP interface with the
Chilled Water Plant PLC SCADA System.
b. Limit switches shall be fitted as required by the actuator manufacturer, or by
the requirements of the actuator control circuits.
8.ENCLOSURE
a. Actuator enclosures shall have a degree of protection to NEMA 6P. The

valve shall remain fully operational under any flooded condition.
b. Actuator enclosures shall have an inner watertight and dustproof O-ring seal
between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements of the actuator.
This
system shall fully protect the switch mechanism, motor and all other internal
electrical elements of the actuator, from ingress of moisture and dust should the
terminal cover be removed on site for cabling.
9.ELECTRIC MOTORS
a. Motors shall be of the squirrel cage rotor type, suitable for direct-on-line
starting. Enclosures shall be totally enclosed (non-ventilated).
b. Motors shall have Class "F" insulation, but with a temperature rise
restricted to that allowed for Class "B" as described by IEC 85. Motors shall be
rated with 4 starts per hour a minimum and shall permit the valve to be fully
stroked in the relevant time periods.
c. In-built thermal protection and anti-condensation heaters shall be provided.
10. MOTORS STARTERS AND CONTROL
a. Each actuator shall be provided with a mechanically and electrically

interlocked reversing contactor starter integral with the assembly. The starter shall
operate on 400 V (+ 10%), 50 Hz (+ 5%) three phase supply.
b. Internal wiring shall be of tropical grade PVC insulated stranded cable of
appropriate size for the control and 3-phase power. Each wire shall be clearly

REV 00
identified at each end. The terminal enclosure shall be separated from the inner
electrical components of the actuator by means of a watertight seal. All wiring
supplied as part of the actuator to be contained within the main enclosure for
physical and environmental protection. External conduit connections between
components are not acceptable. Terminal enclosure shall be provided with a
minimum of 2 threaded cable entries.
c. Switches and terminals having different voltages shall be segregated from
each other by insulating barriers.
d. Each actuator shall be provided with:
 Local/Off/Remote rotary selector switch (lockable)
 Momentary “Stop” push button (emergency only)
 Momentary “Open” push button (valve to open in local mode only)
 Momentary “Close” push button (valve to close in local mode only)
 Local valve position indicator
 Each shall be labelled in English.
e. The actuator mounted stop button shall be a red "mushroom" type. The starter
control circuit shall incorporate over torque and open/close limit switches for
tripping the electric motor during over torque or at fully open and fully closed
positions.
f. Torque and limit switches shall be set prior to despatch from the factory,
consistent with the calculated values corresponding to the maximum operating
conditions.
11. REMOTE CONTROL AND INDICATION
a. Remote indication and control facilities shall be provided over a PROFIBUS-

DP or Modbus interface compatible with the PLC SCADA System of the Chilled
Water Plant as follows:
 Open and close valve status from limit switches

 Open and close controls
 Emergency shutdown (ESD) control
 Valve “Actuator Fault” alarm status, which shall be initiated under
the following conditions:
▪ Phase fault
▪ Power supply failed
▪ Control supply failed
▪ Local “stop” push button
▪ Local/off/remote switch not in remote position

REV 00
▪ Motor tripped on overload
b. The facility shall be provided in each actuator to receive an 'ESD' signal.
This signal shall override all controls, local and remote and close the valve.
c. Labels in English shall be provided for:
 Warning of different operating voltages within the actuator enclosure
 Actuator controls and indications
12. AMBIENT CONDITIONS
a. Actuators shall be suitable for mounting in exposed locations having high

solar radiation, shade temperatures up to 65°C, windblown sand and dust and
occasional heavy rain. Actuators shall also be suitable for subsoil chamber
mounting conditions of high humidity.
13. COATINGS FOR ACTUATORS
a. Contractor’s standard heavy duty coating system(s) will be accepted

provided they comply with the following minimum requirements.
b. The Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed coating system(s)
for review and approval by the Engineer prior to award of any contract or
purchase order. The Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer shall include but not
necessary be limited to the following:
 Proven suitability of the coating system for an aggressive
environment, including UV resistance where required.
 The Contractor's procedures and specification for substrate surface
preparation, coating application and quality control.
 Recommendations for surface preparation and coating application.
 The mean dry film thickness for each coating application and for the
total coating system.
14. TESTING OF ACTUATORS
a. Direct mounted actuators shall be tested at the factory, mounted to the

valve as an integral part of the assembly. The testing shall be conducted to ensure
that all
requirements mentioned in this specification are met. Related test reports and
certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to shipment
to site. All actuator functions shall be tested, signals being simulated as needed to
complete testing.

REV 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc
movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides
and seats made accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check
bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size,
material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to

allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
REV 00
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the
pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above

finished floor elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1.Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2.Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3.Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a
steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and
outside of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition
discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the
shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on
contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or
overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint
with a cloth or brush.

REV 00
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve
internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads,

except where dry seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end
into which the pipe is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of

flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and
downstream for proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1.Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except
provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2.Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3.Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

REV 00
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty;
globe and ball valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for
specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1.Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body, for isolation where indicated.
2.Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and
memory stop, for instrumentation and drain where indicated.
3.Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
4.Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and
bronze disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze,
or epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6.Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
7.Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check
shall be Class 150 with bronze seat ring.
C. Steam and Condensate Return Systems: Use the following valve types:
1.Gate Valves: Class 300, bronze body; or Class 250, cast-iron body.
2.Globe Valves: Class 300, bronze body with teflon disc; or Class 250, cast-
iron body.
3.Check Valves: Class 300, bronze body swing check with composition
seat; Class 250, cast-iron body swing check with bronze seat ring; or Class 125,
cast-iron body wafer check.
D. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1.Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body, for isolation where indicated.
2.Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and
memory stop, for instrumentation and drain where indicated.
3.Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4.Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast- iron body.
5.Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-
coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.

REV 00
6.Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat;
Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check;
or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
E. Condenser Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1.Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2.Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with memory stop.
3.Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4.Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast- iron body.
5.Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze, epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM
sleeve and stem seals.
6.Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat;
Class 125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check;
or Class 125, cast-iron body lift check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put
into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

REV 00
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract and Di- vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings

Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for

Pipe Hangers and Supports."
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable
of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable
of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - Page 1 of 11
REV 00
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers
and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system
component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for

multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic calculations and design
calculations justify- ing forces, sizes, embedments and characteristics of components and
fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

operators.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional
engineer.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified
professional engineer.
1.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who
is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers, supports and
seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REV 00
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated

components. Re- fer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to
use specific hanger and support types.
1.Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not
have field- applied finish.
2.Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.
1.Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are

indicated.
2.Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-

strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
1.Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
2.Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate.
3.For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire
circumference of pipe.
4.For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of
pipe.
5.Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating
below ambient air temperature.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin

attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
REV 00
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and
shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and
galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged,

nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1.Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both

interi- or and exterior applications.
2.Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment

and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that
are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and

except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of

noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2.Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to
DN900 (NPS 4 to NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron
floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
3.Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type
support for pipes, DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is
required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4.Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750
(NPS 1 to NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur.
5.Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65
to DN500 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused
by expansion and contraction might occur.
REV 00
6.Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050
(NPS 2 to NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7.Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to
DN600 (NPS 2 to NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8.Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
DN50 to DN750 (NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during
installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified

in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2.Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe
risers, DN20 to DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified

in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
2.Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
3.Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to
450 deg F) piping installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom
flange of beams.
3.Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of
beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
4.Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
REV 00
5.Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom
of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6.Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For
attaching to structural steel.
7.Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for
suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated
loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).
8.Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam
is required.
9.Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject
to linear horizontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior

voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2.Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3.Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree

insert of high-density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-
repellent- treated calcium silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor
barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1.Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.
2.Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does
not exceed 32 mm.
3.Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
REV 00
4.Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5.Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6.Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of
piping system from base support.
7.Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load
and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of
piping system from trapeze support.
8.Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer
of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment
capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS
SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly
support piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1.Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs

of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1.Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above
for individual pipe hangers.
REV 00
2.Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural

steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.
Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is

placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool
manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating
manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods,
nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic

movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors,
and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar
units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and
dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and
so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not
exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may

project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-
hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
REV 00
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2.Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight- distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
3.Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight- distribution plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
4.Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and
1.22 mm (0.048 inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long
and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and
5.Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6.Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7.Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
REV 00
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above
or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth
bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel
trapezes and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld

connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded

metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work, and with the following:
1.Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.Remove welding flux immediately.
4.Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on

attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm

(1-1/2 inches).
3.6 PAINTING
REV 00
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as
used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-
painted surfaces.
1.Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of

0.05 mm (2 mils).
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in
Section "Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
REV 00
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration

isolation roof curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of
isolator specified. Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional

engineer, for the following:
1.Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design

of vibration isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
2.Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages
and attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary
motor slides and rails, and base weights.
3.Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints and
snubbers.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - Page 1 of 13
REV 00
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
registered and qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who
is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and
seismic restraints that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of

vibration and seismic restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that

all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance
Requirements" Article below. Include the following:
1.Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2.Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity

and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
A. Seismic restraints shall be selected, designed and installed for the non-
structural components in accordance with “EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code to calculate
loads and forces in structural and buildings works" for buildings included under the project
to sustain the following loads:
1.Seismic Loading Classification:
a. Given: Elastic Response Spectrum ‘Type 1’ as per EPC 201-2012 or

as directed by Structural engineer.
REV 00
1) Ground Type (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-1): [B] or as directed
by Geotechnical or Structural engineer.
2) Soil Factor (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-3A): 1.35 as per selected
Elastic Response Spectrum and Ground type.
3) Peak Ground Acceleration (PGA): 0.15g on type B ground.
4) Building Importance Class (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-9): III
5) Building Importance Factor (ɣ1) (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-9):
1
6) Importance Factor for non-structural elements (EPC 201-
2012 Section 8-7-5-3): 1.5 for life safety components and 1 for all
other non- structural components.
7) Response Modification Factors (qa) for non-structural
elements (EPC 201-2012 Table 8-8): Varies as applicable to subject
component
b. Seismic design forces shall be calculated for individual supports

using the above information and requirements of EPC 201-2012: Egyptian
code to calculate loads and forces in structural and buildings works
including applicable exemptions and exceptions.
2.Wind Loading:
a. 3 second gust wind speed of 33m/sec.
b. Wind design forces shall be calculated for individual supports using

the above information and requirements of EPC 201-2012: Egyptian code
to calculate loads and forces in structural and buildings works including
applicable exemptions and exceptions.
1.6 SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures

described in this section shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and systems listed
below.
B. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected

shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in other
Sections of the Specification:
1.Storage tanks for oil and water.
REV 00
2.Water, oil and gas piping.
3.Expansion air separator tanks.
4.Valves and fittings for piping.
5.Heat exchangers.
6.Water chiller units.
7.Cooling towers.
8.Air-cooled radiators.
9.Air and refrigerant compressors.
10. Refrigerant piping.
11. Air handling units.
12. Pumps with motors.
13. Ducts.
14. Exhaust and return fans.
C. Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as

required on the drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be
seismically protected in accordance with this Specification:
1.All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under
"Items Not Covered By This Section".
2.Chilled water distribution systems outside of buildings.
3.Fuel piping outside of buildings.
4.Condenser water piping outside the building.
5.Fuel storage tanks.
D. Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in

accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be performed by a
certified engineer. Resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be
accomplished without consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads.
E. Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints: Seismic restraints are not required

for the following items:
1.Gas piping less than 25 mm inside diameter.

2.Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 32 mm inside diameter.
3.All other piping less than 64 mm inside diameter.
4.Rectangular air handling ducts less than 0.56 m² in cross sectional area.
5.Round air handling ducts less than 711 mm in diameter.
REV 00
6.Piping suspended by individual hangers 1000 mm or less in length from
the top of pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member where the hanger
is attached. All hangers shall meet the length requirements. If the length requirement
is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the entire run shall be braced.
7.Ducts suspended by hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of the
duct to the bottom of the supporting structural member. All hangers shall meet the
length requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the
run, the entire run shall be braced.
8.Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be seismically protected in
accordance with the provisions of this Specification.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-

restraint devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and
partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation

bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Criteria:
1.Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall
not exceed following NC levels:
Type of Room LEVEL

Auditoriums, Theaters
REV 00
Auditoriums, Theaters (Court rooms with amplified speech)
Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms

Mosques
Conference Rooms
Corridors
Dining Rooms, Food Services/ Serving
Kitchens 35(Private) 45(Commercial)
Laundries
Lobbies, Waiting Areas
Locker Rooms 35 to 45
Offices, large open
Offices, small private
Shops
2.For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the
Contractor shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria, local
ordinance noise levels, and ASHRAE requirements are not exceeded. Selection
procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Applications 2015, Chapter 48,
Noise and Vibration Control.
3.An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to
compensate for the variation of Room acoustic absorption effect between room
test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which
may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as furniture. This
allowance may not be taken after occupancy. Room acoustic absorption effect is
defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and sound
pressure level in room.
4.In the absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment
noise levels 0.914 m from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise
generation.
B. Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in

the human work environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall not exceed 84 dB
A-weighted scale, continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound pressure-level,
impact or impulse, noise. Unless otherwise specified the maximum equipment airborne
sound power level in dB shall not exceed the following data and according to the approved
acoustic study prepared by the contractor:
Maximum Sound Power Level (dB) Octave Band

Level Center Frequency (Hz)
REV 00
pment
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air
EquiHandling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Air Conditioning Unit 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Cooling Tower 110 110 105 102 98 95 92 87
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37
Car Park Fans (Breakout) 94 83 83 84 84 76 80 72
C. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment:

Not to exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of 3.3 mm per second RMS,
filter in, when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical,
horizontal, and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are
concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the
mounting feet.
D. Materials: Rubber shall be natural rubber. Elastomer shall be chloroprene.

Shore A durometer measurement of both materials shall range between 40 and 60.
Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass encased in a
resilient moisture- impervious membrane may be used in lieu of specified natural rubber
and elastomers. Where this substitution is made, specified deflections shall be modified by
the manufacturing source to accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic materials
and to provide equal or better vibration isolation. Weather-exposed metal vibration-
isolator parts shall be corrosion protected. Springs shall be chloroprene coated.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of the equipment supported.
1.Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or

multiple layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient
stiffness to provide uniform loading over the pad area.
2.Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than
25 mm thick and precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated
load.
3.Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less
than 2 mm per 25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa (50 psig).
REV 00
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant
rubber or neoprene isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-
drilled and tapped top plate for bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for
bolted connection to structure. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.
1.Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed

height of the spring at rated load.
2.Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated
load.
3.Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4.Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
without deformation or failure.
5.Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit
floor loading to 690 kPa (100 psig).
6.Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7.Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally

stable, steel open- spring-type isolators.
1.Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring
extension due to wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate
for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber isolator pad attached
to the baseplate underside. Provide adjustable equipment mounting and leveling
bolt.
load.
4.Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.
6.Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Hot-dip galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or

neoprene isolator elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for
hanger rods. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
REV 00
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring
and elastomeric insert in compression.
1.Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow
for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
load.
4.Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.

6.Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate
capacity range.
2.3 SEISMIC CONTROLS
A. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil

spring and elastomeric insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
1.Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow
for 30 degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
load.
4.Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
5.Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate
capacity range.
B. Manufactured Seismic Snubbers: All-directional, double-acting snubbers.
REV 00
1.Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 19-mm thick,
replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 3-mm clearance in all
directions between rigid and resilient surfaces.
C. Fabricated Seismic Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes designed and

fabricated to restrain equipment or vibration isolation bases from excessive movement
during a seismic event. Design to resist gravity forces.
1.Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.Resilient Components: 19-mm thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene
insert.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections

made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping
bolts for cable engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E
488/E 488M.
2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and

fabricated by the isolation equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings,
power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1.Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes,

plates, and bars conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M. Include support brackets to
anchor base to isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and
auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.
2.Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height
with not less than 25-mm clearance above the floor.
3.Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame.

Pour concrete into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4.Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for
anchor bolts and equipment support.
5.Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6.Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7.Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
REV 00
2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight

curb designed to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-m/s
(125-mph) wind impinging laterally against the side of the equipment. Design restraints
to meet seismic requirements.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding,

unhoused, laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1.Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building

structure and include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material and 50
mm of rigid insulation on the inside of the assembly.
2.Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to
permit leveling of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a
rubber isolation pad. Locate spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment
at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of
the roof.
3.Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials,
attached to the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the
lower support assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-

control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify

actual locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
REV 00
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according

to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration

isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration

isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete,
and trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration

isolators.
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or

concrete inertia bases.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-

mounted piece of equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the vibration isolators
and bolt to supporting structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At

trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend
across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with

ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze
anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging
equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
REV 00
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at

normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so
they are out of contact during normal operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and

stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at
operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within

normal mode of operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written

recommendations to resist seismic forces.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and

seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.
REV 00
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract and Di- vision 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes identification for HVAC piping and equipments.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for

each identification material and device.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond

paper. Tabu- late valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room
or space location of valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for
emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish copies for maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1 aside from mounted copies.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping

Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - Page 1 of 8

REV 00
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering

and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Sections.

If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with

data engraved or stamped.
1.Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2.Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to

recommendations of ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 30 mm for ducts, and 20 mm
for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
1.Material: Brass.
2.Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd gloss black enamel, unless otherwise
indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in
colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-

coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
E. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees

around pipe at each location.

REV 00
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by
Engineer.
1.Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to

accommodate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate
direction of flow.
G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the

following color codes:
1.Green: Cold-air supply.

2.Yellow: Hot-air supply.
3.Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors
and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
5.Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply,
return, and exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.
H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-

adhesive, vinyl tape, at least 0.08 mm thick.
1.Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65
mm for larger pipes.
2.Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system
abbreviation and 13- mm sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.
1.Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.

2.Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
K. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with

abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm center
hole for attachment.
L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on

masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.

REV 00
1.Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm,
single- thickness glass.
M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-

base, phenolic- resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic
core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes
required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.
1.Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
2.Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3.Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the

following color codes:
1.Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2.Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3.Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4.Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5.Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME
A13.1.
6.Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and
leaving conditions, and speed.
7.Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by 150
mm for equipment.
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags,

of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1.Size: 85 by 145 mm.

REV 00
2.Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3.Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or
DO NOT OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other

designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated.
Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and
maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1.Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple

systems of same name are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal

direction of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by

following method:
1.Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 20 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and
covering full circumference of pipe.
D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and

larger by following method:
1.Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less
than 40 mm wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and
covering full circumference of pipe.
E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings,
and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following:

REV 00
1.Near each valve and control device.

2.Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and
terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3.Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4.At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5.Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6.Spaced at a maximum of 15-m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to
7.5 m in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7.On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit
intermediately spaced markers.
3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check

valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, and HVAC
terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of units. List tagged valves in valve
schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape,

color scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1.Chilled Water: 40 mm, round.

2.Heating Water: 40 mm, round.
3.Condenser Water: 40 mm, round.
4.Gas: 40 mm, round.

5.Steam: 40 mm, round.
E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1.Chilled Water: Blue.
2.Heating Water: Yellow.

REV 00
3.Condenser Water: Green.
4.Gas: Yellow.
5.Steam: White.
F. Letter Color: According to the following:
1.Chilled Water: Black.

2.Heating Water: Black.
3.Condenser Water: Black.
4.Gas: Black.
5.Steam: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each

major item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of
equipment:
1.Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
2.Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
3.Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption
units.
4.Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
5.Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
similar equipment.
6.Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
7.Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, VAV boxes, fan coil
units, controls and components.
8.Tanks and pressure vessels.
9.Strainers, filters, humidifiers, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in

exposed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above
acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.

REV 00
1.Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in

unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts
with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of
flow.
1.Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed
spaces and at maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed
or concealed by removable ceiling system.
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become

visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

REV 00
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce
design objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including

submains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and

equipment are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system
and equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such
as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - Page 1 of 33

REV 00
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,

branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more
factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more
heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted

conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance

ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan
was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or
leaves the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

REV 00
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to

Commence, submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this
Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the
"Quality Assurance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's Notice
to Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of
this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report
forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports

prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing
report forms.
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by

either AABC or NEBB, or another agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's and the
Engineer's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of
testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service

REV 00
representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance
notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing,

adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the
approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced
in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent's report forms as approved by the Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national

standards , NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification".
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more

frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the building
before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Employer's operations.

REV 00
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and

equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and
water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to

discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing
of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract of the

Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project

Record (As- Built) Documents."
D. Examine Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of

design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

REV 00
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create
undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance
tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--
Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections
have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated

balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their
locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting

and balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed,

bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is
ready for operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to

verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight.
Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting
or mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.

REV 00
P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction

piping.
Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended

controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness
of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units,
mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way
mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of
sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract
Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system
reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-
step procedures.
B. Complete
system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:

REV 00
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are
required and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations
can be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the

procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing"
and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes
to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
Project.
C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification

material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and
similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet
factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

REV 00
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the
return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and

exhaust-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-
duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional
procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed
by the fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as

practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.

REV 00
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the
fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound
traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in
design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the
Engineer. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure
fan- motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
design airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper

and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for

Pitot- tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified
tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

REV 00
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet
manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at the air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of
design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct
run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to
overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase the airflow at the fan.
B. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows:
1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and
observing the air temperature and volume changes.
2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments.
3. Adjust mixing box to design airflows within specified tolerances. Measure
the airflow by Pitot-tube traverse readings, totaling the airflow of the outlets; or by
measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by the box manufacturer.
C. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct
run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to
overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box.
D. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-

volume dual- duct systems, and adjust each mixing-box maximum- and minimum-airflow settings.
3.7 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

REV 00
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more
than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum
setpoint airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of
the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the
branch ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have

been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at

a position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and
static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static
pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit
manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed
to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written
instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition
but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and
inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-
pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure
is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record the final fan performance data.
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

REV 00
1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-
volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify
operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air
outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air
systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan
if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition
but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of

terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow
controller set at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and
continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal
unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and
inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

REV 00
3.8 MULTIZONE SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.
B. Adjust each zone damper to design airflow.
3.9 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at
pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest
vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at
design flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure.
Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless
several terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing
device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
3.10 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

REV 00
A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following
procedures, except for positive- displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure
differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage
heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that
the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential
across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump
discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake
horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare
calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions
where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-

pressure- drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve
flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as

follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design
flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest
percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over
design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage,
voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air
temperature.

REV 00
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of

balancing.
3.11 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
3.12 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL

PROCEDURES
A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.
3.13 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure. Check the setting and operation of automatic
temperature- control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves.
E. Record safety valve settings.
F. Verify operation of steam traps.
3.14 MOTORS
A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

REV 00
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Drives: Test for proper operation at speeds

varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the drive, if specified
under Division 26 section “Motor Control Centers”, to prove proper operation. Record
observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.15 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
Record compressor data.
3.16 BOILERS
A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
3.17 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed
for less than 3540 L/s (7500 cfm).

REV 00
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each
incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
3.18 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.19 FUME HOODS
A. Determine total airflow into the room where the fume hood is located and balance
systems to ensure adequate air supply to all hoods.
1. Set fume-hood door opening at position of normal use.

2. Energize the exhaust fan and adjust airflow to provide the indicated
average fume- hood face velocity at hood opening.
3. Measure exhaust airflow volume by measuring airflow by Pitot-tube duct
traverse.
4. Measure air velocity using Pitot-tube traverse method.

REV 00
5. Record each face velocity measurement taken at 100- to 150-mm increments
over the entire hood door opening.
6. Calculate the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements.
7. Calculate the airflow volume of exhaust-hood face velocity by multiplying
the calculated average face velocity by the opening area. Compare this quantity with
exhaust volume at exhaust fan and report duct leakage.
8. Measure airflow volume supplied by makeup fan. Verify that the makeup
system supplies the proper amount of air to keep the space at the indicated pressure with the
exhaust systems in all operating conditions.
9. Retest for average face velocity. Adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other
parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity and the indicated
auxiliary air-supply percentages.
10. Retest and adjust the systems until fume-hood performance complies with
Contract Documents.
3.20 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device
positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response
to input changes.
G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

REV 00
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer
operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system
operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.21 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.22 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract

Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of
design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and
additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring
and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed

procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each
system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.23 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond

paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

REV 00
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified
testing and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the
following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include
approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following
data in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary
from design values.

REV 00
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the
following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic

distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the
following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
REV 00
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
i. Outside airflow in L/s (cfm).
j. Return airflow in L/s (cfm).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.

REV 00
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c. (fins per inch).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
h. Tube size in DN (NPS).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).

b. Average face velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Air pressure drop in Pa (inches wg).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C (deg F).
h. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
i. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa (psig).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg C (deg F).
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa (psig).
H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's
factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
f. Fuel type in input data.

REV 00
g. Output capacity in kW (Btuh).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).

b. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Air temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
e. Entering-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
g. Air static-pressure differential in Pa (inches wg).
h. Low-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
i. High-fire fuel input in kW (Btuh).
j. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg C (deg F).
l. Operating set point in kW (Btuh).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in kW (Btuh).
I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils
installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in kW (Btuh).

REV 00
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
i. Face area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
j. Minimum face velocity in m/s (fpm).
a. Heat output in kW (Btuh).

b. Airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
c. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm

(inches).
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

REV 00
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm (inches), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in mm
(inches).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

b. Total system static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Suction static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
e. Duct size in mm (inches).
f. Duct area in sq. m (sq. ft.).
g. Design airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
h. Design velocity in m/s (fpm).
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
j. Actual average velocity in m/s (fpm).
k. Barometric pressure in Pa (psig).
L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

REV 00
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. m (sq. ft.).

b. Air velocity in m/s (fpm).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in L/s (cfm).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s (fpm).
e. Final airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
f. Final velocity in m/s (fpm).
g. Space temperature in deg C (deg F).
M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

b. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Water pressure drop in kPa (feet of head or psig).

REV 00
e. Entering-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg C (deg F).
N. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-
alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units,
include the following:
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in kg (lb).
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg C (deg F).
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).

b. Outlet-duct static pressure in Pa (inches wg).
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg C (deg F).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).

j. Condenser water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in kPa (psig).
o. Suction pressure in kPa (psig).
p. Suction temperature in deg C (deg F).

REV 00
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in kPa (psig).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg C (deg F).
s. Oil pressure in kPa (psig).
t. Oil temperature in deg C (deg F).
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. The kW input.
x. Crankcase heater kW.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in L/s (cfm).
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. cc.Condenser fan
motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
O. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For

steam, chilled water and hot-water heat exchangers, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Ratings.
2. Steam Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Inlet pressure in kPa (psig).

b. Condensate flow rate in kW (lb/h).
3. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
REV 00
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
4. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the
following:
a. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).

b. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
c. Entering-water pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
d. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
e. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
P. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller
size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
f. Water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
g. Water pressure differential in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm (inches).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in kPa (feet of head or psig).

REV 00
b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
c. Actual impeller size in mm (inches).
d. Full-open flow rate in L/s (gpm).
e. Full-open pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
g. Final suction pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
h. Final total pressure in kPa (feet of head or psig).
i. Final water flow rate in L/s (gpm).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
Q. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
f. Fuel type and input in kW (Btuh).
g. Number of passes.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
a. Operating pressure in kPa (psig).
b. Operating temperature in deg C (deg F).

c. Entering-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg C (deg F).
e. Number of safety valves and sizes in DN (NPS).
f. Safety valve settings in kPa (psig).

REV 00
g. High-limit setting in kPa (psig).
h. Operating-control setting.
i. High-fire set point.
j. Low-fire set point.
k. Voltage at each connection.
l. Amperage for each phase.
m. Draft fan voltage at each connection.
n. Draft fan amperage for each phase.
o. Manifold pressure in kPa (psig).
R. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.24 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional

testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not
performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections,
testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

REV 00
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching
insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and
sealing compounds.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion,

soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state.
Materials to be used on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements.
Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by

NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation
materials, except cellular elastomers, shall have a maximum flame-spread classification
(FSC) of 25 and a smoke-developed classification (SDC) of 50. Flame-contributed
classification (FCC) shall be as specified for the application. These maximum values shall
be determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.
C. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.

Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings
suitable for the entire range of working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they
are to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - Page 1 of 19

REV 00
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both

factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1.Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2.Application of field-applied jackets.
3.Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each
sample material.
1.Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each
type of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to

Engineer, indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers

comply with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft

training program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials

identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, or NFPA
225, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation
and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed rating of 50 or less.

REV 00
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-
spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke- developed rating of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of

insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups according to the following requirements, using materials indicated
for the completed Work:
1.Include the following mockups:
a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.

b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.
2.Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application

details for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3.Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
4.Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
5.Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6.Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
7.Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8.Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed
at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer

with appropriate ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and
maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION

REV 00
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation
application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation

application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable
chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified

as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
D. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
E. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-
service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl
film.
1.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2.Density : 48kg/m3.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-
film.

REV 00
1.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2.Density : 24kg/m3.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type II for sheet materials.
1.Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
3.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg F).
4.Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5.Water Vapor Permeability : 0.15 perm-inch.
6.Noise Reduction: Up to 27 L for 20mm thick insulation.
H. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of

noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
I. Rockwool Insulation: Rockwool Duct wrap/Duct slab, nominal density 64

kg/m3, having a factory applied reinforced aluminum foil facing. Joints to be securely
taped with 75mm minimum wide soft aluminum self-adhesive tape. The insulation on
the underside of the ducting to be additionally secured by suitable insulation hangers at
300 mm. Comply with Type IVB, Category 1 in ASTM C547, C553, C612 or EN
Equivalent and ASTM E84, E119, E136 OR EN Equivalent
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and

substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A,

Type II, Class I.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

REV 00
D. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with

a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-
3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.3 MASTICS

substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient
services.
1.Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm

(0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
2.Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus
82 deg C).
3.Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by
weight.
4.Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below

ambient services.
1.Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-
mil (0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
2.Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
weight.
4.Color: White.
2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

REV 00
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be
compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors
to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.
3.Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4.Color: White.
2.5 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and

substrates.
2.Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
121 deg C).
4.Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

substrates.
121 deg C).
4.Color: White.
2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02

perms, (measured before factory application or installation), minimum puncture resistance
50 Beach units on all surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm width. Jackets used
on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without
sizing.

REV 00
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all

purpose, kraft paper and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum

alloy complying with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded
moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation.
1.Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor
installation and 0.8 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
2.Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel

complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

2.Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.
2.7 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, woven glass-fiber fabrics,

plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
B. Tape: Vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.Tape Width: 100 mm.
C. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with

jacket:
1.Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.

2.Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3.Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4.Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5.Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.

REV 00
D. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or

1.6-mm, soft- annealed, galvanized steel.
E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate,

pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin
length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1.Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for

surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding
capacity of 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove

materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

REV 00
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the
manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free
of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets,
and thicknesses required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket
in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams

staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to

receive a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams
and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and
vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations

in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder
mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1.Pull jacket tight and smooth.

REV 00
2.Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3.Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic
on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive

vapor retarders.
1.Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with
vapor- retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
retarder seal.
2.Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and
secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same
facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even

with top of roof flashing.
1.Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2.Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation
ends.
3.Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously

through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition

Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper
sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and

at floor support at top of floor.
1.For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal
insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.

REV 00
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1.Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates

per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2.Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of
fittings and transitions.
3.Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal
ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end
joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm
o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional
pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,
rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4.Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5.Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
6.Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps
to adjacent
insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-
sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
7.Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams and
end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 450 mm
o.c.
8.Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full
insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct
elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9.Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate
REV 00
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 150 mm o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for
insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with
adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2.Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of
fittings and transitions.
3.Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end
joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm
o.c. each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply
additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross
bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal,
rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
5.Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps
to adjacent insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with
pressure- sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
6.Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full
insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as
possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and
flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7.Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the
insulation surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 150 mm o.c.
8.Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for

REV 00
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:
1.Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2.Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
duct and plenum surface.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as

follows:
1.Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten

bands without deforming the insulation material.
2.Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least
75 mm. Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure
outer layer with stainless-steel bands.
3.On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim
coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation.
When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass
cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive
over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
3.7 ROCKWOOL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as

follows:
1.Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten

bands without deforming the insulation material.
2.Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least
75 mm. Secure inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure
outer layer with stainless-steel bands.

REV 00
3.On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim
coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation.
When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass
cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive
over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or

insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1.Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and
joints.
2.Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3.Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw
insulation.
3.9 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint

insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Sections "Interior Painting" and
"Exterior Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured,

apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to
allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
3.10 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of

this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in

schedules at the end of this Section.

REV 00
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1.Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

2.Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
3.Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
4.Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of
building exterior.
5.Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of
building exterior.
6.Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
7.Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
8.Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork.
9.Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to

the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1.Fibrous-glass ducts.
2.Metal ducts with duct liner.
3.Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4.Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and
sections.
5.Flexible connectors.
6.Vibration-control devices.
7.Testing agency labels and stamps.
8.Nameplates and data plates.
9.Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.11 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.
1.Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.
3.Number of Layers: One.

REV 00
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed;

aluminum jacket where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
5.Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Return-air ducts and Exhaust air ducts connected to heat recovery
units.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.
C. Service: Outside-air ducts across air conditioned spaces.

2.Thickness: 25 mm.
5.Vapor Retarder Required: No.
D. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts.

1.Material: Calcium Silicate or Rockwool.
2.Thickness: 50 mm.
4.Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; stainless steel jacket
where exposed to view.
E. Service: Rectangular, dishwasher exhaust ducts.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.
aluminum jacket where exposed to view.
REV 00
F. Service: Rectangular, laundry equipment exhaust ducts (dryers, flatwork

ironers, etc…)
2.Thickness: 50 mm.
aluminum jacket where exposed to view.
3.12 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply-air ducts.
1.Material: Mineral-fiber board.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.
4.Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: 64 by 16 mm.
B. Service: Return-air ducts and Exhaust-air ducts connected to heat recovery

units.
1.Material: Mineral-fiber board.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.


REV 00
3.13 BOILER BREECHING AND CONNECTOR APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Exposed.
1.Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.
3.Number of Layers: Two.

B. Service: Concealed.
1. Material: Calcium silicate or Rockwool.

2.Thickness: 50 mm.
3.Number of Layers: Two.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.

REV 00
SECTION 230716 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating

cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

1.Field application for each equipment type.

2.Removable insulation sections at access panels.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each
sample material.

Engineer, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials,
sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of
tests.
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 230716 - Page 1 of 17

REV 00
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed

a craft training program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, or NFPA


a. One chilled-water centrifugal pump.

b. One small tank, vessel or heat exchanger.
c. One balancing or pressure regulating valve.

Engineer.
REV 00

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation

application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where

required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on
segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as

possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

REV 00
E. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-
film.
1.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2.Density: 48 kg/m3.
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-
film.
1.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2.Density: 24 kg/m3.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type II for sheet materials.
1.Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation

2.Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4.Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5.Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6.Noise Reduction : Up to 27 L for 20mm thick insulation.
H. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed,

rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.
1.Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

2.Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3.Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.

REV 00
I. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded,

closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
J. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of

noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM

C 196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing

Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a

service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive

containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus
200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C).
C. Phenolic and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with

a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A,

Type II, Class I.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with

a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).

REV 00
G. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-
3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
H. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
2.4 MASTICS

substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient
services.
1.Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm

(0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
82 deg C).
weight.
4.Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below

ambient services.
1.Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-
mil (0.9-mm) dry film thickness.
2.Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
weight.
4.Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be


REV 00
1.For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of
<Insert value> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
2.Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors
to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.
3.Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).
4.Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:

substrates.
2.Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3.Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F (Minus 73 to
plus 149 deg C).
4.Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

substrates.
121 deg C).
4.Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

substrates.
121 deg C).
4.Color: White.

REV 00
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 0.5 mm thick; roll

stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
1.Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2.PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum

alloy complying with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded
moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation.
1.Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor
installation and 0.8 mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, woven glass-fiber fabrics,

plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.

adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

jacket:

REV 00

E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate,

pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to equipment with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1.Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for

surface temperatures of equipment, and breechings; and to achieve a holding
capacity of 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION


corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove


REV 00

manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free
of voids throughout the length of equipment.
and thicknesses required for each equipment system.
in either the wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams

staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and
vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations

mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

REV 00
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2.Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor

retarders. Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and
pressure-sensitive tape
having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or
mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
O. Insulate the following indoor equipment:
1.Chilled-water air separators (small tanks).

2.Chilled-water compression tanks (small tanks).
3.Chilled-water centrifugal pump housings.
4.Chilled water heat exchangers.
5.Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
6.Heating hot-water and steam air separators (small tanks).
7.Heating hot-water compression tanks (small tanks).
8.Heating hot-water heat exchangers.
9.Steam-to-water converters, not factory insulated.
10. Condensate receivers, not factory insulated.
11. Steam flash tanks.
12. Boiler feed unit tanks.
13. Chilled water, steam and hot water valves and accessories.
P. Insulate the following outdoor equipment:
1.Aboveground water storage tanks.

REV 00
Q. Omit insulation from the following:
2.Testing agency labels and stamps.
3.Nameplates and data plates.
4.Manholes.
5.Handholes.
6.Cleanouts.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure
insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2.Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the
equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for
tight joint. Stagger end joints.
3.Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4.Install adhesive-attached anchor pins and speed washers on sides of tanks and
vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. On tank and vessel, 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and
400 mm
o.c. in both directions.
c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads
of tanks and vessels.
5.Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing
7.Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.

REV 00
8.Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
9.Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and
other elements that require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME
stamps, and nameplates.
11. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels:

Apply insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's
1.Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's

2.Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1.Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and
coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted
flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-
inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box
sections together using a latching mechanism.
2.Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3.For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and
penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor
barrier.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PHENOLIC INSULATION
A. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)

intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
B. Install two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at

least 3 inches (75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-
inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals.

REV 00
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or

joints.
insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1.Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2.Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3.Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4.Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
5.Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom
of tanks and vessels for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints
with manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1.Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under
lap and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
D. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth

jacket as specified in Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

REV 00
apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to Engineer, to

perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,
jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1.Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Engineer.

2.Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent
of chilled-water pumps, whichever is greater.
3.Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of
small tanks, whichever is greater.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection

reveals noncompliance with requirements. Engineer could require removing defective
Work and all fittings and to be replaced with new materials according to these
Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for

inspection according to these Specifications.
3.9 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in

schedules at the end of this Section.
3.10 EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

REV 00
A. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.
B. Equipment: Chilled-water air separators, compression tanks, chilled water

pumps and chilled water heat exchangers.
1.Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2.Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket.
3.Insulation Thickness: 50 MM


6.Finish: None.
C. Equipment: Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.



6.Finish: None.
D. Equipment: Heating hot-water air separators and compression tanks.
1. Operating Temperature: 38 to 93 deg C (100 to 200 deg F).


REV 00


6. Finish: None.

REV 00
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation;

insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion,

soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state.
Materials to be used on stainless-steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements.
Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by

NFPA 220. Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation
materials, except cellular elastomers, shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25,
and a smoke- developed classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255. Coatings and sealants shall be
nonflammable in their wet state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

HVAC PIPE INSULATION 230719 - Page 1 of 19

REV 00
1.Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each
type of insulation and hanger.
2.Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3.Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4.Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for
each type of insulation.
5.Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1.Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).

2.Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
3.Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).


Engineer, indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed

a craft training program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723 or NFPA

REV 00


a. One 3-m section of DN50 (NPS 2) straight pipe.

b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One DN50 (NPS 2) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.

Engineer.

REV 00
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields

specified in Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation

application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where

required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin
on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as

possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

REV 00
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin

complying with the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM

C 547, Type 1, with factory- applied, all-purpose, vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
2.Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3.Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following

classes and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-
fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding
lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
4.Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for

indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5.Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating
Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-
Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply
with ASTM C 449.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-

rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I for tubular materials and
Type II for sheet materials.
1.Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation

2.Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3.Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

REV 00
4.Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3 or as recommended by insulation manufacturer
maintaining the specified thermal performance.
5.Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6.Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insulation.
G. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450

for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant all

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 0.5 mm thick; roll

stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

2.PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured

from 0.5-mm thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1.Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories for the disabled.
E. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting
and forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), 3003 alloy,
H-14 temper.
1.Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.

3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows;
same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

REV 00
F. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and
roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

2. Elbows: Gore type, for 45- and 90-degree elbows in same material,
finish, and thickness as jacket.
3.Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.
A. Glass Cloth: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth woven glass-
fiber fabrics, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.

adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136

jacket:


2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS


REV 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION


corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove

manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids
throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
and thicknesses required for each piping system.
in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe
runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams

staggered.

REV 00
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings,
and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous

thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special
instructions for applying insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations

mastic.
1.Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments.
2.For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3.Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by
the insulation material manufacturer.
4.Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the
hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are

indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage

rate.

REV 00
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2.Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along
both edges of strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3.Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation
with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-
sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a

vapor retarder.

on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5.At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and
seal voids with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even

with top of roof flashing.
1.Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2.Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation
ends.
3.Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50
mm below top of roof flashing.
4.Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-

grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal
terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously

through walls and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition

Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

REV 00
1.Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Sections
"Penetration Firestopping" and "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1.For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1.Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape,
or bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints
with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of
4.5 to 6 m to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3.For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
staples at 150 mm o.c.
4.For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1.Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2.Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3.Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
4.Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlapping seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1.Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's

REV 00
2.When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply
mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness
equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or
bands.
3.Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with
manufacturer's attachement and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1.Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight

segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's
2.When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber
blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and
to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange
insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3.Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4.Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams
with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
5.For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal
insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1.Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2.Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air
to the pipe surface.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1.Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2.Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange
and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.

REV 00
3.Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
4.Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1.Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2.Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to
the pipe surface.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1.Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe

insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2.Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation
arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
3.Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4.Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that
will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or

joints.
insulation.

REV 00
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1.Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2.Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.

3.Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4.Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint
strips at end joints.
5.Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 25-mm overlap at longitudinal

seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal

seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints
with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth

jacket as specified in Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

this Section.

REV 00
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to
the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1.Flexible connectors.
3.Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
4.Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5.Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to Engineer, to

perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,
jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after

installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with
requirements:
1.Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2.Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is
less, for various pipe sizes.
3.Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is
less, for various pipe sizes.
C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection

reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new
materials according to these Specifications.
D. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for

inspection according to these Specifications.
3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials,

vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets.

REV 00
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges
and material, thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Condensate drain piping.

2.Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
3.Insulation Thickness: 19 mm.
4.Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket where exposed to view or in
mechanical rooms.
6.Finish: None.
B. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.

2.Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
3.Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
[a.] Pipe, all sizes: 3250 mm.

6.Finish: None.
C. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

a. Pipe, DN50 (2-inch NPS) and Smaller: 25 mm.

[b.] Pipe, Larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS): 328 mm.

REV 00
6.Finish: None.
D. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

a. Pipe, all sizes: 19 mm.
4.Field-Applied Jacket: None.

6.Finish: None.
E. Service: Steam and condensate.
1.Operating Temperature: 232 deg C (450 deg F) and lower.


6.Finish: None.
3.12 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building.

Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in piping distribution Sections.

REV 00
B. Service: Refrigerant suction.


5.Finish: None.
C. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.


6.Finish: None.
D. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

a. Pipe, DN50 (2-inch NPS) and Smaller: 25 mm.

b. Pipe, Larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS): 50 mm.

6.Finish: None.

REV 00
E. Service: Condensate drain piping.

3.Insulation Thickness: 19 mm.
6.Finish: None.
F. Service: Steam and condensate.
1. Operating Temperature: 232 deg C (450 deg F) and lower.


6. Finish: None.

REV 00
SECTION 230900 - BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
PART 1 - GENERAL

Contract and Division 1, Division 14, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division
26, Division 27, Division 28 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The BAS sub-contractor shall provide the Building Automation System

(BAS), shall implement all features called for in this specification and shall implement
the necessary sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Building Automation System sub-contractor shall be responsible for the

integration of the BAS with the other low voltage building systems as detailed hereafter
in Scope of Works and the remainder of specifications.
C. The BAS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical

contractor and shall be a BAS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.17 "BAS
installer qualifications".
1.3 RELATED WORKS
A. The following disciplines contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. HVAC
2. Plumbing
3. Electrical
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS) 230900 - Page 1 of 119

REV 00
A/C - Air Conditioning
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers
ASC - Application Specific Controller
BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device BTL -
BACnet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block BAS -
Building Automation System
BSI - British Standards Institution
CCR - Central Command Room
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers CPU -
Central Processing Unit
DCP - Distributed Control Panel
DDC - Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller
DDR - Double Data Rate

ELV - Extra Low Voltage
EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System HMI - Human Machine
Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning IBMS -
Integrated Building Management System ICT- Information and
Communication Technology ISO - International Standards Organization
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society
for Measurement and
Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fume MATV - Master Antenna
Television MCC - Motor Control Centre
NAC - Network Automation controller, BTL Certified as
BACnet Building Controller.

REV 00
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NPT -
National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification) ODBC -
Open Data Base Connectivity
OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer
OIW - Operator Interface Workstation
OLE - Object Linking and Embedding
OPC - OLE for Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
PABX - Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect
PE - Pneumatic-to-Electric
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PDA - Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module
POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon)
RAID - Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks
RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference
RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association
SCADA - Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SCBA - Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type
SCSI - Small Computer System Interface
SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging)
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT - Standard Network Variable Type

SOAP - Simple Object Access Protocol
SQL - Structured Query Language
SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee
SVGA - Super Video Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
REV 00
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
UC - Unitary Controller
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type
UNVT - User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV - Variable Air Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts
VPN - Virtual Private Network
VFD - Variable Frequency Drive WAN - Wide Area
Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical

problem.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity,

etc.).
C. BACnet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol

communication standard developed by ASHRAE (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016) and which
is now an ISO and ANSI standard. BACnet can operate over multimedia including
Ethernet, ArcNet and MSTP. The BACnet components shall be fully compliant with
British standards BS EN ISO 16484-5 (Building automation and control systems. Data
communication protocol), BS EN 13321-1 (Open data communication in building
automation, controls and building management. Home and building electronic system.
Product and system requirements), ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016 and all other applicable
codes.
D. BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated

properties such as a temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current value,
maximum and minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.
E. BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for

communicating information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of requirements to
be met in order for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There are 6 levels of
REV 00
conformance for standard BACnet objects and services. The higher the conformance
class the more features that are covered. The BACnet devices furnished under this sub-
contract shall, at minimum, be conformance class 4.
F. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB’s): A BIBB defines a small

portion of BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBB’s come in pairs,
A and B, which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the client, i.e. the
device requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB represents the
server, i.e. the device furnishing the information or executing the command. For 2 devices
to be interoperable the A BIBB and the B BIBB must be the same.
G. BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol

communication standard which complies with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016 and ASHRAE
135.1-2013 standards.
H. Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON”

condition and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
I. BAS: This shall mean the complete Building Automation System including
the components at the Field, Automation and Management Levels.
J. Component: Any individual element of the BAS furnished under this sub-
contract including hardware, software and materials.
K. Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install
complete HVAC control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors,
PE and EP switches and like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node,
nodes to all sensors and points defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or
specified herein and required to execute the sequence of operation. This does not include
line voltage power wiring.
L. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and

isolate system and component malfunctions.
M. Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-

based controllers to field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level
instrumentation are converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be used
in software logic. Control signals are determined by software logic and they are
converted from digital to analogue format so that the final control elements can be
adjusted.

REV 00
N. Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized
and independent of a central computer.
O. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor,

complete with every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.
P. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to

translate input data from one communications protocol to output data in a second
communications protocol.
Q. Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the

operator to manage, command, monitor and program the system.
R. BAS: This shall mean the Building Automation System including the
components at the Field and Automation Levels as specified in specification section
230900.
S. IBMS: This shall mean the Management Level of the Building Automation
System, and the Integrated Management Software that shall act as a common platform for
the Building Automation System, Fire Alarm System and Security Systems.
T. Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer

between two devices based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standard based
gateway.
U. Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of

different types to share information with each other without losing any of their independent
functional capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
V. Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the
BAS controllers and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not
require a gateway for protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a
peer-to-peer network using one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet,
ARCNET, MS/TP or BACnet/IP.
W. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a

communication bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control
units. Additionally, a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system
from any distributed control unit location.

REV 00
X. Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer
programs and which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting,
compilation, storage assignment, data management and related services.
Y. Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW, which is part of the

IBMS, consists of a high-level processing personal computer and peripheral I/O devices
that enable access to the PC and to the entire Management Level Network.
Z. Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that

operate on the same communications level of a network without intervention from any
intermediary devices such as a host or server.
AA. Peripheral I/O: Input / Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the
computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals include
graphical display, printers, hard drives, disk drives and modems, etc.
BB. Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate
network management, node commissioning, diagnostics and general operator interface
with the BAS.
CC. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application. An
application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and
downloaded to the device.
DD. Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.
EE. Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power
line, twisted pair, fiber, coax and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.
FF. Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical
committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.
GG. Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the
computer systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications
programs, operating sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted to
include firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not exclude
the use of read-only memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable criteria
detailed in these specifications.

REV 00
HH. Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability
to
process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside on
the BAS server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent from the
server to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates and sends
operator entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to the server for
execution.
II. Application Specific Controller: A controller generally designed for a

specific application and for a single piece of equipment.
JJ. Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and other
technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
KK. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.
LL. XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up
Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information
over HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.
MM. The above definitions shall apply to the words:
1. When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when
they are capitalized.
2. In the singular and in the plural.
3. In all grammatical tenses.
1.6 BAS ARCHITECTURE
A. The following is a general description of the BAS architecture. This

description is not intended to indicate the number of components and neither is it intended
to be the only acceptable BAS configuration. The description of the system architecture
is provided to illustrate the relationship between the various components. Different BAS
Specialists may have a slightly different topology that generally will be acceptable

REV 00
provided that it meets the intent of these specifications. For the purpose of describing the
BAS architecture it is divided into 3 levels:
1. BAS Management level (Integrated Building Management System)

2. BAS Automation Level
3. Field Level
B. The Management Level
1. The Integrated Building Management System (IBMS), supplied by

the Integrated Building Management System sub-contractor, shall act as an
integrated management platform for the Building Automation System, Life
Safety Systems and Security Systems to enable centralized collection,
processing and management of data within the building, so as to promote
better operation and better interoperability between the ELV systems within
the building. Systems integrated with the IBMS shall be referred to as IBMS
sub-systems herein after.
2. This integrated management platform shall provide a master and
unified interface for control and Monitoring of all of the IBMS sub-systems
within the building.
3. Whereas the Building Automation System shall be responsible for
controlling and/or monitoring the building’s MEP equipment, the
Integrated Building Management System shall act as the Management Level of
the Building Automation System, and shall provide a means of integrating
the building’s Fire
[4.]
Alarm System, Security Systems and Building Automation System into a
common operator interface.
4.[5.] The BAS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the IBMS specialist to
ensure seamless integration between the two systems, and shall provide
comprehensive and complete documentations of the BACnet objects IDs,
properties and descriptions and any other pertinent information.
5.[6.] The scope of work of the IBMS shall be defined in specification
section 230901.
C. The Automation Level
1. The automation level shall, primarily, include the DDC controllers

that interface with the field sensors and final control elements. It is anticipated
that there will be 2 types of Automation Controllers within the BAS
architecture:

REV 00
a. Advanced Application Controllers (AAC).

b. Application Specific Controllers (ASC).
2. The BAS Automation Level Networks shall be BACnet throughout.

No other protocols shall be used at the BAS Automation Level. All AACs and
ASCs shall communicate on the same protocol.
D. The Field Level
1. The Field Level shall include the instrumentation interfaced to the

Automation Level DDC controllers such as the temperature, humidity, level,
pressure sensors and switches etc.
2. It shall also include the final control elements such as the valve
and damper actuators and the control relays.
3. All field level cables shall be in containment.
4. The control and monitoring signals between the Automation
Level controllers and the Field Level components shall be via industry standard
analogue ranges, except where detailed below, such as 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 4 to
20 mA, switched 0 and 5V, switched 0 and 10V, etc.
1.7 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. Provide a complete BAS turnkey installation as detailed in the sections of

this specification. The BAS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:
1. BAS Portable Operator Terminals (POT)

2. Local Area Networks (LAN)
3. Network Automation Controller (NAC)
4. Distributed Control Panels (DCP)
5. Advanced Application Controllers (AAC)
6. Application Specific controllers (ASC)
7. Field Instrumentation including intelligent sensors
8. Automatic Valves
9. Dampers
10. Actuators for automatic valves and dampers

REV 00
11. Routers, Hubs, Switches, gateways, software as well as all other
accessories or equipment necessary to implement the required interfaces with
third party systems.
12. Software as detailed herein
13. Low Voltage Cables (Less than 240V)

14. All power supplies, interlocking and control relays and other
components as well as material and services required for a complete and
fully operational turnkey BAS installation in line with the specifications.
15. The BAS subcontractor shall coordinate the interface between his
network and the building’s converged data network installed by the ICT
specialist.
B. The BAS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the IBMS specialist to

ensure seamless integration between the two systems, and shall provide
comprehensive and complete documentations of the BACnet objects IDs, properties
and descriptions and any other pertinent information.
C. The BAS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the IBMS specialist for all
variables and parameters that need to be enabled for operator intervention, through
the IBMS workstations, during the IBMS GUI and the BAS Sequence of operation
development. The BAS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the BACnet
Objects’ writing permissions and priorities as requested by the Engineer without
additional costs until the substantial completion of the entire BAS.
D. The BAS shall meet the following general criteria:
1. Computer based.
2. Fully networked.
3. Real time.
4. Distributed processing.
5. No single point of failure.
E. All components of the BAS at the automation level, except for the
Application Specific Controllers (ASC), shall operate on UPS. The BAS contractor shall
not provide the UPS. The BAS contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical contractor
the UPS outlets dedicated for the BAS as indicated on the electrical design drawings.
1. The BAS contractor shall show the power supply / UPS load
requirements for each DCP on the submitted riser diagram

REV 00
2. The BAS contractor shall submit the calculated UPS loads for
Engineer’s approval.
F. The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the
BAS manufacturer that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any
components that become available before the on-site commencement of installation then
these shall be offered by the BAS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the
Employer. The Employer shall have the option to accept or decline the offer. The
components offered shall have been in successful operation in at least 2 similar
applications for a minimum of 12 months.
G. The BAS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the legal
operation of the BAS.
H. Provide adequate earthing on all equipment to prevent the build-up of

electromagnetic voltage potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices, or
components that emit interferences. All monitoring and control and communication cables
shall be screened with one end earthed.
I. Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-contract:
1. Warranty and service during the defects liability period.
2. Submittals, samples and record documentation.

3. Comprehensive commissioning and testing.
4. Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the
Supervisors and Operators.
5. Coordination with other site Specialists.
6. Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and
timely execution of the Work
7. Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and
method statement for third party systems. The BAS Specialist shall provide
separate interoperability documentation at the end of execution of the project,
which shall detail integrating BACnet objects, controllers or gateways into the
IBMS servers, This document shall also include the BACnet Object ID of all
the objects captured or generated by the system, database documentation,
querying methods and full documentation to read and write BACnet data
with another system.
1.8 BAS COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

REV 00
A. The BAS sub-Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the
work of all other trades on the project.
B. Any task related to the BAS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified
in this document as being the responsibility of another trade shall be the responsibility
of the BAS sub- Contractor.
1.9 BAS EXPANSION
A. The BAS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent (20%)

additional hardware (field) points without adding controllers. The number and type of the
installed spare points shall be uniformly distributed between the installed controllers.
B. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of

new sub networks and associated routers, gateways, etc.
C. Each BAS as installed shall be expandable, at minimum, to incorporate

the following in addition to the above:
1. A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points

with the addition of NAC, DCP, Routers, Gateways and ASC.
[2.] A minimum of 200 %percent additional system diagrams in
addition to those required to meet these specifications.
2.[3.] A minimum of 10 No. additional interfaces to low voltage
building systems of a similar nature to those integrated under this
contract.
D. Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above:
1. The BAS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and

shall meet all performance criteria detailed in these specifications.
2. Equipment installed under this sub-contract shall not become
redundant as a result of implementing these BAS expansion requirements.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS

REV 00
A. Prepare an itemized listing of all shop drawings and equipment
documentation submittal data for the Project including all required submissions identified
throughout the Contract Documents. The itemized listing shall include a shop drawing
sheet number or equipment documentation submittal number, reference to the specific
Specification section and description of the shop drawing or equipment documentation
submittal item. Submit the itemized listing within two (2) weeks after commencing work.
B. Prepare all shop drawings, diagrams, equipment and device schedules,

equipment technical data sheets and software information necessary to ensure compliance
with the Specifications. Submit all shop drawings and equipment documentation submittal
data for the work within 1 months of receiving the notice to proceed except the cable and
containment shop drawings detailed below which shall be submitted within 15 days of
the notice to proceed.
C. The following information shall be included on the cover page for each
shop drawing and equipment documentation submittal:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Submittal number and re-submittal (revision) number as appropriate.
4. Name and address of Engineer.
5. Name and address of Employer.
6. Name and address of BAS contractor.
7. Name and address of supplier or vendor if appropriate.
8. Name of manufacturer.
9. Reference to the applicable Specification Section by name and
number.
10. Stamped and signed coordination certification stamp.
D. Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, minimum A1 plot size.

Drawings shall include diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures,
equipment details and software descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed.
At minimum, the shop drawings shall include:
1. BAS topology schematic.

2. Installation drawings and schedules.
3. DCP, ASC and other panel layouts, including floor plan location and
interconnection drawings.
4. Field instrumentation locations on floor plan drawings.
5. Schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations.
6. Installation details.
REV 00
7. Schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types.
8. Composite drawings of all motor starter terminal strips and damper
terminal strips indicating all existing and new wiring by all contractors on
the motor terminal strip.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment submittals shall include design, performance and installation

details for all aspects of the system to be installed. At minimum, the equipment
documentation submittals shall include:
1. Equipment technical data sheets with mounting and installation

details.
2. Central monitoring and control equipment details.

3. Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
4. Software specifications and descriptions including operating
sequences.
5. Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets.
6. Dampers, damper actuators and Damper Interface Unit (DIU)
drawings.
7. Valves and valve actuator specification sheets and valve schedules.
8. Details of PID and other appropriate control algorithms.
B. The BAS sub-contractor shall not implement Operating sequences until

the Engineer has given approval. The BAS sub-contractor shall make any changes to the
operating sequences as requested at the shop drawing stage and as requested by the
Engineer following their implementation up to the issue of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion at no additional cost to the Employer.
C. All literature pertaining to a particular item, piece of equipment or

installation shall be submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this
project. General sales information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment
documentation submittal shall be properly marked with service or function, any options
available that are not to be provided shall be crossed out or options that will be provided
shall be highlighted.
D. Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from

the specifications will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the
specification requirements shall be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials

REV 00
are installed, they shall have submittals that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or
“Approved as Noted”. Submittals stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall
not relieve the contractor from the requirements to comply with the complete
requirements of the Specifications. Corrections or modifications to the work because of
errors and/or omissions shall be at the contractor’s expense.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor

prior to submission to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a
rubber stamp that states: "I hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop
drawing, product data and or sample, complies in all respects with the requirements of the
Specifications for this Project. I further certify that all data shown hereon as to
performance, dimensions, construction, materials and other pertinent items is true and
correct."
(Name of the BAS sub-Contractor) Signed:

Position: Date:
1.12 WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and

Contractor are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective
components of the warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and
workmanship. Warranty shall include:
1. Defective materials and installation.

2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical
specifications.
3. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
4. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering and use.
6. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are
disturbed and that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective
items. Coordinate with Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent
disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not cancelled due to the repair
work.

REV 00
B. The warranty period for all components of the BAS and their installation
shall be 2 years following the date of substantial completion of the project.
C. Any material furnished by the BAS sub-contractor which is defective or

fails during normal operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired)
immediately by the BAS sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the
period prior to the issue of the certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
D. Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.
E. Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period. The cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability
Period shall be provided separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.
F. Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer

placing a system trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component,
non-functioning controller, etc.).
G. Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be

within 24 hours for items not requiring immediate attention.
H. Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the BAS system or

component failure shall begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and Employer.
I. Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard
product offerings from the BAS Specialist and/or BAS equipment vendors during the
Defects Liability Period shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together with the
cost and, if the Employer wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time during
the Defects Liability Period, software patches that correct software errors become
available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall be made available to
the Employer at no additional cost.
1.13 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY

PERIOD (OPTIONAL PRICE)
A. Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the

initial warranty period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base
tender pricing. The maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance and
shall not include emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be covered by
the warranty.
REV 00
B. Schedule maintenance and repair works with the Employer’s representative

to prevent interference with normal building activities.
C. During routine maintenance components of the BAS shall be selectively

inspected and serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum,
preventative service inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects
Liability Period. Perform, at minimum, the following during each preventative service
inspection:
1. Power supplies
2. Verify proper operation of each digital controller and network. Clean
enclosures.
3. Verify the satisfactory operation of at least 25 percent of each type of
field device including valves and dampers. All field devices shall be checked at
least once during the initial Defects Liability Period and shall be calibrated and
adjusted as necessary.
4. Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating
the results of each inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
5. Perform complete backup of all software.
D. The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall
include 20 hours per year of programming changes to the BAS as requested by the
Employer.
E. Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the

Works as necessary to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the
Defects Liability Period.
F. Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance

during the Defects Liability Period in the tender submittal.
G. The BAS Specialist shall maintain an inventory of common components in

the local office for the replacement of failed components as detailed under “Spare Parts”.
H. Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the
following components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.
BAS Component Delivery Time

ASC and DDC. Two (2) days

REV 00
Temperature sensors. One (1) days

Any other items of instrumentation. Two (2) days
I. During the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall maintain
a minimum of 10% spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site under
this contract. At the end of the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall
hand over DDC, NAC and ASC of each type to the Employer which shall, at
minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each
type installed on site under this contract.
J. During the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall maintain
a minimum of 10% spare sensors of each type installed on site under this contract.
At the end of the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall hand over
sensors of each type to the Employer, which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of
the number of installed sensors of each type installed on Site under this contract.
1.14 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY

PERIOD EXTENSION (OPTIONAL PRICE)
A. Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the
maintenance during that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance
service contract shall be an all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves
the right to obtain parts from alternative sources.
B. The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as
those detailed in paragraphs "warranty and services during the defects liability period" and
"routine maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
C. The BAS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer
to provide the maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The
Employer shall have the option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The BAS
Specialist shall submit the cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the
following ways:
1. A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out

between labor and parts, OR
2. A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with
a break-out between labor and parts for the first year and:
3. A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of
the cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years

REV 00
4. And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion
of the cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, or A
fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out
between labor and parts for the first year with the annual increase for labor
and parts over the succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual percent
increase in a cost of living index from one year to the next, the cost of
living index to be used is to be specified by the BAS Specialist in the tender
submittal.
D. If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that
correct software errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and
they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
E. During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BAS Specialist shall
maintain a minimum of 10% spare DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on site
under this contract. At the end of the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall
hand over DDC, NAC and ASC of each type to the Employer which shall, at minimum,
be equal to 10% of the number of installed DDC, NAC and ASC of each type installed on
site under this contract.
F. During the Defects Liability Period Extension the BAS Specialist shall
maintain a minimum of 10% spare sensors of each type installed on site under this
contract. At the end of the Defects Liability Period the BAS Specialist shall hand over
sensors of each type to the Employer, which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the
number of installed sensors of each type installed on Site under this contract.
1.15 CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL
A. Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and
certificates shall be made available to the Employer.
B. The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other

authorities having jurisdiction shall be met.
C. Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance

underwriters' requirements.
D. All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Section “Basic

Electrical Materials and Methods”.

REV 00
E. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such
that live components cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be,
at minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP
65 to IEC 60529 unless specifically noted otherwise within these documents.
F. The BAS Specialist shall only offer equipment that is UL listed or CE

Marked for their intended use.
G. All electrical installation work shall conform to the requirements specified

in the electrical trade contract documents. Where there is any conflict between the
requirements of the different project trade contract documents, statutes, codes, regulations,
local ordinances and any requirement of an agency having jurisdiction over the project, the
most stringent requirement shall apply unless determined otherwise by Engineer.
Advise the Engineer of any discrepancy between the various requirements for the project.
H. Each component shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Manufactured by experienced manufacturers of the specific

component and facilities.
2. Designed to minimize the requirement for field repair or
maintenance.
3. Modular design.
4. Electronic components shall have internal failure diagnostics.
5. Each component shall be maintainable without significantly affecting
the ongoing operation of the other components.
6. Components, test ports and cable terminations shall be readily
accessible.
7. Damage caused by the failure of one component will be limited to
the component that has failed without affecting the ongoing operation of the
other components.
8. Analytic software applications to optimize the building’s
performance, fault detection and diagnostics shall be adopted by the BAS
contractor.
I. Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance

requirements of the specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
1. Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.

2. VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal
portable or fixed transmitters.
3. AM signals as generated from transmitters.

REV 00
4. Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and
harmonics.
5. The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to
the correct operation of The Employer’s on-site equipment.
6. The BAS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and
components shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-6-3 (General
Emission Standard) and IEC 61000-6-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard),
the requirements of the Federal Communication Commission rules and
regulations Part 15, sub part J and all other applicable codes and statutes with
respect to the radiation and conduction of radio frequency interference.
1.16 SCHEDULE
A. Complete all requirements of the BAS sub-contract in accordance with the

project program and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
B. Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.
C. Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work,

durations of individual tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and
detail any interface that must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
D. Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable

to the Engineer. An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
E. Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing

or work overtime as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere
with other on-site Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule.
Confirm, prior to tender submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services
proposed are available and will be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project
Schedule.
F. Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer

when specific information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For
Information notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the
information.
1.17 BAS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

REV 00
A. The BAS specialist shall:
1. Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of

trained personnel capable of giving instructions and providing routine and
emergency maintenance on the BAS, all components and software/firmware
and all other elements of the BAS.
2. Have a proven record of experience in the supply and
installation of equivalent systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years
in the project area.
3. Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the
total BAS that shall be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours,
7 days a week.
4. Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to,
supplies of essential expendable parts.
5. Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance
personnel as per the Employer’s requirements.
1.18 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety
Commission and with all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
1.19 UNIT PRICES
A. The BAS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete BAS. In
addition, the BAS specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment installed
under the contract in sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the contract to
be priced by the Employer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the

term "equal and approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer
will be allowed, but the substituted product must conform to all specified requirements.
The Engineer’s determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved
REV 00
substituted equipment shall conform to available space requirements. Substituted
equipment that does not conform to the available space requirements shall be replaced or
required modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All
components of one type shall be products of one manufacturer (temperature sensors,
dampers, etc.).
C. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is

available that does not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as
determined by the Engineer, a written application shall be made by the BAS Specialist to
the Engineer providing all relevant details concerning a proposed product or material that
contains hazardous material prior to installation.
D. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to

Substantial Completion, the BAS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and
materials installed, and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCB).
2.2 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
A. The BAS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that
all components proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
1. Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall

not be affected when the building electrical distribution system experiences
disturbances of the type and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of
this nature.
2. An independent testing laboratory has verified that the VAV terminal
unit Application Specific Controller meets the performance requirements
detailed in these specifications. If so required by the Employer, the testing
laboratory shall test a project VAV terminal unit complete with the BAS
Application Specific Controller and the BAS Specialist shall demonstrate that
the VAV terminal unit ASC can meet all of the requirements for monitoring
and control accuracy and can undertake all of the sequences of operation
associated with the VAV as detailed in these specifications. The independent
testing laboratory test report is to be submitted with the shop drawings.
3. Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage
showed that all components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped
to 75% or less of the nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed
when the voltage returned to less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage.
Following these brownout conditions the components were free of any stress

REV 00
and/or damage, operated as normal and no data at the PC, NAC, DCP,
DDC, Gateways and/or ASC was lost or corrupted.
2.3 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior

applications that shall be capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at
minimum, the following ambient conditions:
B. 0 Deg. C. (41 Deg. F.) to 50 Deg. C. (131 Deg. F.) temperature.
C. 10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
D. Electrical power service of single phase 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz nominal

with tolerances in compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the
contract Documents
B. Accept products on site and verify damage.
C. Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in

conditioned space.
2.5 SPARE PARTS
A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment

furnished. Data to include a complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts
and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase
of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished
as part of the sub-contract

REV 00
B. Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure
efficient operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing
shall not relieve the Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
2.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.
B. Provide two of each plug in circuit board.
C. Provide 5000 sheets of continuous form paper.
2.7 LABELING
A. Provide labeling for all DDC controllers, NAC, DCP, Gateways, Routers,
Hubs, field level components, etc, panels and enclosures. Labeling shall meet, at
minimum, the following requirements:
1. Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or

enclosure with rivets or permanent adhesive.
2. Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background
colour.
3. Consistent throughout the project.
4. Indicated on the record documentation.
B. Provide labeling of all cabling and containment. Labeling shall meet, at

1. Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.

2. Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and
laminated record drawing within the panel enclosure.
3. The BAS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and
installed by the ICT Specialist for the use of the BAS Specialist.
2.8 WARNING NOTICE

REV 00
A. Provide warning notices at all equipment controlled by the BAS and at all
associated motor starters and MCC panels where notices of a similar manner have not been
provided by other trades. Warning labels shall be installed, at minimum, at the following
locations:
1. AHU access doors.

2. AHU motor starter and VFD controllers.
3. Pump motors.
4. Pump motor starter and VFD controllers.
5. Fan enclosure or access panel.
6. Fan motor starter and VFD controllers.
7. Chiller control panel.
8. Chiller disconnect/power panel.
9. Cooling tower access ladders.
10. Cooling tower MCC.
11. All other equipment and installations that are monitored and/or
controlled by the BAS.
B. The warning notices shall be 75 mm by 125 mm (3in. by 5in.) minimum,

with yellow background and with black lettering. The notices shall state the following:
HIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START OR STOP

T
AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING.
C. The warning notices shall be securely attached to the equipment at a location

approved by the Engineer and shall be highly visible. Submit a sample with shop
drawings.
2.9 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the BAS except where
it is specifically identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be
furnished by another trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be

lockable with the same key.

REV 00
2. Vent louvers, ventilation fans and dust filters shall be provided, to
prevent excessive heat built-up for all outdoor panels and whenever required,
as follows:
a. Each Panel should have redundant (or two) fans triggered on by a
thermostat switch located within the panel.
b.The Panel high temperature alarm & fan status contacts shall be
wired to the Panel DDC as alarm inputs.
3. Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain
relief.
4. Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for

diagnostics, maintenance, removal or replacement.
5. Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for
which it is to be installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to
IEC 60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529
unless specifically noted otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
6. Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of
BAS controllers.
B. Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the drawings

and at Engineer approved locations.
C. The BAS Specialist shall not furnish MCC panels, motor starters, variable
speed controllers and local disconnect switches. The trade furnishing the motor starters and
variable frequency drives shall provide an interface terminal strip in a dedicated
enclosure which may be a separate external enclosure or may be a compartment within the
motor starter enclosure. Refer to the sub-contract documents for the trade furnishing the
motor starter and the variable speed controllers for the details of the enclosures. The
DDC controllers shall not be located in the MCC panels
2.10 CONDUIT, TRUNKING AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with Division 26, Specifications Sections: Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems” and “Cable Trays for Electrical Systems”.
2.11 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. General Cable requirements: Size and type as recommended in writing by

system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
REV 00
B. All input/output field cables shall be at least 18AWG (0.8sqm) where a

multi-pair cable shall not share analog and digital signals or digital outputs and digital
inputs, wiring shall follow the following rule:
1. One multi-pair cable for Analog Input / Output only

2. One multi-pair for Digital Outputs only
3. One multi-pair for Digital Inputs only
C. All the cables carrying analog signals shall be screened and shall have a drain
wire.
D. Comply with the following Specification Sections – as applicable to power,

control and data signal transmission cables:
1. Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables.”
2. Division 27 Section “Communications Horizontal Cabling.”
E. LSZH: For use in plenum installation as per adopted Standards for

the Project. Refer to Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables” for LSZH cables for installation in Plenum areas.
F. Fire Resistant Cables: For use with life safety installations interface.
Refer to Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.
G. Grounding Components: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
H. Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire

nuts shall not be acceptable. Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.
I. Cable within panels or enclosures shall be installed in wiring guides.
J. All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal

stripes and shall be identification tagged on both sides of the terminal strip.
K. Cable run in vertical trunking shall have means of cable support, at

minimum, every 2m.
REV 00
2.12 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
A. The POT’s devices shall not be used by the BAS Specialist for
commissioning the BAS or for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the
Employer immediately prior to the acceptance testing.
B. Provide a jack at each DDC controller and at each mechanical and

electrical room for the plug connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug
connection for each POT. The operator shall be able to communicate with the BAS via
the POT using the same operator interface as that at any OIW PC.
C. The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. 4th generation Intel® Core™ i7-4710HQ Quad Core Processor

(2.5GHz, turbo up to 3.5GHz) with 6MB Cache and Hyper Threading
2. 512 GB PCIe SSD.
3. 8GB DDR3 1600 MHz RAM.
4. 100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
5. Wi-Fi® Wireless networking (802.11b/g/n/ac) with Bluetooth® v3.0
6. 14.0" IPS FHD 1920x1080p.
7. 40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).DVD SuperMulti (+/-R
double layer) drive.
8. Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
9. Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
10. Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
11. Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that
ensures adequate protection.
12. POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also be
powered by a 220/240 Vac, nominal 50/60 Hz source. Provide batteries
adequate for a minimum of 4 hours of operation.
D. When connected to the BAS Automation Level at the DDC controllers or

at a network data port, the POT shall be able to undertake all of the control and monitoring
functions that can be performed at the OIW. One of The POT’s shall be used to configure
the system components, and access the BACnet Objects presented on the IBMS network
when connected to the data network, or the system components when connected directly to
the DDC/ NAC.

REV 00
2.13 CONSOLES
A. The Contractor shall provide the enclosure’s furniture of the Tower IBMS
control rooms as shown in the design drawings and specified in this specifications.
Workstations referred to as consoles. The work-surface height shall be 72cm above the
finished floor.
B. The consoles shall accommodate the display, and the operator interface’s
devices.
C. The consoles shall satisfy the functional, ergonomic and aesthetic

requirements of the operational environment.
D. The consoles shall be of modular design, facilitating future equipment

retrofits and full reconfigurations without major modification to the structure or to the
exterior elements.
E. The consoles shall have the possibility to customize the mounting positions
in order to suit both the operator and the equipment’s requirements.
F. The consoles shall be provided with ventilation, task lighting, bottom

cable entry, cable management system, power bars, adjustable monitor height and angle.
G. The Contractor shall provide pre-production review drawings of the console

arrangements in order to verify the equipment layout, exterior finish, architectural,
mechanical and electrical elements:
H. The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console
assembly showing the location of all the specified electronics in isometric view in
addition to top and front views.
I. The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a
tolerance of 1.5mm as maximum.
J. The Console shall be comprised of end and intermediate frames with

horizontal stringers and decorative end panels.
K. The Console shall feature a hinged dual-channel duct cover with integrated
aluminum mounting system for LCD monitor arrays.

REV 00
L. The Console shall have a minimum 30mm thick MDF core PVC work
surface. The work surface shall be not less than 580mm deep overall and should include a
45mm deep beveled edge covering the work surface's entire front width.
M. All components within the console shall be:

1. Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a
series of independent sectional compartments.
2. Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturer’s model numbers.
3. Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following
installation. The assembly of the console shall be accomplished without the need
for either welding or carpentry work.
4. Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of
intermediate and end frames connected by horizontal stringers. External
decorative side panels shall be available in TruForm or laminated MDF core.
N. The self-supporting skeleton framework shall:
1. Be installed at the site in advance of any external finishing panels.

The framework shall be fully capable of supporting all specified electronics
without the need for attachment of any external panels.
2. Be capable of being supplied to site in knockdown (flat packed) form
and be capable of assembly using bolts and fastening system without welding or
carpentry work.
3. Include front and rear horizontal stringers constructed of 2.5mm
formed sheet metal. Stringers will connect, and span, 2mm end frames and/or
intermediate frames to form a complete structure.
O. Components
1. Intermediate and end frames shall be a minimum of 40mm in
width and capable of supporting fully loaded console. Intermediate and end frames
shall incorporate 10mm diameter threaded adjustable glides and 50mm vertical
slots for mounting two and four gang electrical boxes.
2. End frames shall feature an anti-tip extension and the intermediate
frames shall feature four grommet holes.
3. 2.5mm formed sheet metal horizontal stringers with fastening system
shall be 50mm high and available in 600mm, 1200mm, and 1800mm widths.
4. 1.5mm stationary steel shelf shall extend 450mm from the front of
the console and shall feature four grommet holes and has a load capacity of 90kg.
5. Doors shall be supplied with a keyed-alike locking lever latch and
integrated cable management. Doors shall be able to accept an optional CPU shelf
or file/storage bin for convenient swing-out access.

REV 00
6. 15, 45, and 90 degree 2.5mm steel corner fillers shall be available.
Corners fillers will feature Insta-Lock fastening system for ease of installation.
Corners shall be available in concave and convex configurations.
7. 1.2mm steel hinged duct cover shall conceal, and allow easy
access to, dual cable raceway so signal and power cords can be separated.
8. 2mm angled data/power rail shall include cable grommets and
openings for a universal data mounting plate and/or duplex power box. The
data/power rail shall incorporate Insta-Lock fastening system and, combined with
2mm shelf brackets shall support the work surface.
9. Fully integrated black anodized aluminum track system shall be
capable of supporting a wide variety of monitor arrays while providing simple
horizontal adjustment. Constructed of extruded 6105-T5 aluminum with a T-slot
profile. Monitor array support posts shall be available in 380mm, 725mm, and
1000mm heights. The support posts shall be 48mm in diameter with a wall
thickness of 2.8mm. Monitor arrays shall be mounted to the Versa-Track with ball
spring drop-in T-nuts.
P. Chair: Provide 6 No. scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back

rest type, with gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet
castors for base and back to Engineer's approval
Q. Finish and Color: All exterior and frame steel components including doors,
rack turrets, duct covers, and shelving shall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black
powder coat textured finish.
R. Optional Accessories: A full range of optional accessories shall be

available such as fans, electrical boxes, CPU shelves, file bins, rack mount turrets,
monitor mounts, and LED task lighting with VESA mount or magnetic base.
S. Instructions: Fully detailed assembly instructions at least in English language

shall be supplied with both written and pictorial descriptions for each item/model
numbered component.
T. Packaging: Each component part number shall be independently marked

and packed into double or triple ply corrugated outer cartons and shall be suitable for
storage and shipping to site without damage.
U. Warranty: Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall

provide a written 10 years guarantee against defects of all component parts, material and
workmanship under normal use.

REV 00
2.14 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS
A. The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers.
B. Where terms are used, such as “operator determined”, “operator

changeable”, etc., which indicate an operator originated decision; it shall mean that an
operator shall be able to amend a value, such as a setpoint, alarm limit, time delay,
etc. through an interactive approach. The term "interactive" is used to mean that the
system shall operate in a conversational mode whereby the operator shall receive
English language prompts in the form of:
1. Tables into which the operator enters data.

2. Questions that are responded to by the operator.
3. Selections that are made by the operator based on a list of suggested
alternatives that is generated by the BAS.
C. The procedure by which an operator amends a value or implements a

selection shall be such that the operator can readily execute the task without reference to
instruction manuals and without knowledge of the BAS control language.
D. All setpoints, alarms limits, dead-bands, software time delays, report

configuration and requests, operating time limits, schedules, etc. shall be operator
definable through an interactive procedure via the IBMS and POT. In addition, the
setpoints and schedules shall be changeable via the IBMS/web facilities.
A. The operator shall be able to modify, using the POT, a sequence, add a sequence and
delete a sequence.
E. The equipment that is fed from emergency power and which is controlled
by the BAS shall operate normally under emergency power conditions and shall be
monitored and controlled by the BAS under emergency power conditions. Ensure that all
equipment furnished under this sub-contract that is associated with the control of
equipment on emergency power is fed from the emergency power service and can maintain
normal equipment operations when the equipment is on emergency power. Following a
loss of normal power, the BAS shall resume normal equipment control and monitoring
functions for that equipment on emergency power within 20 seconds of the availability
of emergency power and similarly when there is a return to normal power. If necessary
provide an uninterruptible power source in order to meet this 20 seconds resumption of
operation requirement.

REV 00
F. The BAS Specialist shall identify on the cable and containment shop
drawings which components are to be fed from emergency power and which components
are to be fed from a UPS source.
G. The BAS Specialist shall provide an easy to use means of defining the
operating sequences such as a high-level control language or a graphical/flowcharting
facility.
H. The means provided for the creation of the operating sequences shall be
suitable for the implementation of the sequences detailed on the control diagrams that
form a part of these sub-contract documents.
I. If the BAS Specialist requires additional instrumentation to that indicated

in the BAS Point Schedules and Diagrams in order to implement the operating
sequences as detailed on the control drawings then the BAS Specialist shall include such
additional instrumentation within the tender price. Such instrumentation shall meet the
requirements detailed in the Section titled "BAS Field Instrumentation" or, where
specifications are not provided, details of such instrumentation shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
J. The operating sequences shall be written in a readily understandable high

level control language such as Pascal, Basic, C or equivalent or they shall be constructed
using an easily understood graphics interface package. Provide adequate English language
notation in the software to assist the operator understand the intent of the programmed
sequences.
K. The control language shall be capable of implementing 32-bit floating-point

calculations using. At minimum, the following arithmetic operators:
1. Addition
2. Subtraction
3. Multiplication
4. Division
5. Roots
6. Exponentials
7. Natural logarithms
L. The control language shall, at minimum, be able to implement the following

logic operations and relational operations:
1. and
REV 00
2. or
3. not
4. nand
5. nor
6. If then else statement
7. less than
8. less than or equal to
9. equal to
10. greater than or equal to
11. greater than
12. not equal to
M. The BAS Specialist shall be responsible for the stable operation of all control
loops. The BAS Specialist shall provide self-tuning PID control algorithms. Verify that
the control loops are stable.
N. If any BAS or system component should fail during the operation of a

system, then the BAS shall execute the procedure detailed in the sequences of operation.
Where a failure mode is not provided for a BAS controlled item of equipment the BAS
Specialist shall obtain details of the required failure mode from the Employer.
O. Any information required by the BAS Specialist for the implementation of

the software shall be requested in writing from the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the
time it is required. Submit the request for information in the form of tables or forms for
the Employer’s personnel to complete and return.
P. The operating sequences detailed in this section shall only apply when the
BAS is controlling and monitoring the system in the BAS software control mode.
Q. In cases where outside air duct cross-sectional area exceeds a certain amount,
multiple damper sections rather than a single section shall be furnished and shall be
controlled in groups. Refer to the mechanical trade documents to determine the number of
damper sections and the number of actuators.
R. Where indicated on the control diagrams, the BAS Specialist shall interlock
motorized dampers with fans such that when the dampers are closed the associated fans
stop.

REV 00
S. The BAS Specialist shall provide any modifications to the operating
sequences as requested by the Engineer without additional costs until the substantial
completion of the entire BAS.
T. The sequences of operation are detailed on the control drawings that

form part of these documents. Where sequences have not been specifically identified for
a mechanical, electrical or public health system/component, the BAS Specialist shall
obtain instruction from the Engineer and shall implement the required sequences at no
additional cost to the Employer.
2.15 BAS OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLERS MONITORING &

CONTROL SOFTWARE
A. Scan rates at the DDC and/or ASC shall meet the following requirements:
1. Each analogue and digital input point shall be scanned at least

once every 5 seconds.
2. If a point is in alarm, then the alarm shall be annunciated at the
IBMS within 2 seconds of the termination of the time delay period following
detection of the alarm condition.
B. DDC outputs shall be updated at a frequency defined by the operator. The

operator shall be able to select a frequency, at minimum, in the range of 2 seconds to 256
seconds.
C. The operator shall be able to define a minimum time delay between

successive starts of equipment so that disturbances created on the building electrical
system are minimized in frequency and amplitude.
D. BAS analogue and digital outputs shall change as the result of either an
operator entered command or a BAS generated software command. These two modes
of BAS output are referred to as the BAS MANUAL CONTROL mode and the BAS
SOFTWARE CONTROL mode and differ as follows:
1. In the BAS manual control mode, the signal to a final control

element such as a valve or a damper actuator and to a relay such as a
motor control relay shall change as the result of a command manually entered
at one of the operator terminals. When an output is in the BAS manual control
mode, there shall be no means by which it can switch to the BAS software
control mode or by which the value or state of the BAS output can change
without operator intervention.

REV 00
2. In the BAS software control mode, the signal to the final control
element or relay shall be changed automatically as the result of software
such as a schedule, operating sequence or Applications Package such as the
Optimized Scheduling feature.
E. The operator shall be able to select the mode of output control for each
analogue and digital output.
F. The operator shall be able to define the minimum time delay between the
stopping of a piece of equipment and its subsequent restart. This time delay shall be in
effect for motors in the BAS software control mode and for motors in the BAS manual
control mode.
G. If there is a discrepancy between the actual and BAS commanded state of a

motor then, unless the discrepancy arises because of control of the motor by the fire alarm
system or because of a power failure, the motor control relay shall be set automatically to
the OFF state, an alarm shall be generated and the motor shall be placed in the BAS
manual control mode.
1. If the discrepancy has arisen because of override control by the fire

alarm system, then the motor shall be restarted by the BAS in accordance
with the procedure detailed in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart
Following a Fire Alarm".
2. If the discrepancy has arisen because of a power failure, then the
motor shall be restarted by the BAS in accordance with the procedure detailed
in the paragraph titled "Equipment Restart Following a Power Failure".
3. In all cases a motor shall only restart following an operator
manually entered command
H. The BAS shall not override any hardwired interlocks such as those provided
at motor starters for overload protection, damper interlock, pressure interlock, etc. and
those provided to facilitate control by the Fire Alarm System regardless of the BAS output
control mode.
I. Unless stated otherwise elsewhere in these Specifications, the modulation of

final control elements by the BAS in the BAS software control mode shall be based on
a Proportional- Integral-Derivative (PID) control algorithm. The control constants for
the PID algorithm shall be definable by the operator. If self-tuning algorithms are
provided, it shall still be possible for the operator to manually tune the control loops. The
software shall incorporate facilities to enable the bump-less transfer of a modulating output
from BAS manual control to BAS software control and vice versa and the prevention of

REV 00
integral wind-up. PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within the desired
tolerance around the setpoint. Setpoint tolerances shall be as follows:
1. Supply air temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.

2. Space temperature control, ± 0.5 Deg. C.
3. Duct static pressure control, ± 50 Pa
4. Water differential pressure, ± 15 kPa.
5. Space static pressure control, ± 10 Pa
6. Relative humidity, ± 3%
J. Software shall automatically inhibit the generating of an alarm on an

analogue input when the status of an associated digital input indicates that an alarm
condition is to be expected. Such would be the case, for example, when an air handling
unit is off as it would be expected that the supply air temperature would be outside the
alarm limits established for the operating state. An interactive procedure shall enable the
operator to link any analogue value to a digital input so as to inhibit unnecessary alarms.
Points with their alarms locked out shall continue to be displayed on reports and graphical
displays. The alarms shall remain locked out for an operator defined time delay following
the start-up of the associated equipment
K. If for any reason the operator wishes to terminate the monitoring of a

particular digital or analogue input, then it shall be possible to take the point out of
service via an interactive procedure. If the point is the monitored variable in a control
loop, then the control loop shall be disabled, any sequence dependent on the point shall
also be disabled and all associated BAS outputs shall go to the BAS manual control mode.
L. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to add, delete and modify
points monitored and controlled by the BAS.
M. An interactive procedure shall enable the operator to configure control

loops. The operator shall define Setpoints for control loops or they shall be derived
from software logic as detailed in the sequences of operation.
2.16 OPERATING SYSTEM: CONTROLLER APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. Applications software functions associated with the control and monitoring

of the mechanical and electrical systems by the BAS shall be resident at the DDC
controllers. The application of these features shall be in accordance with the details
provided in the Sequences of Operation. The BAS Specialist is to implement all
applications programs. Where additional information is required the BAS Specialist shall

REV 00
request the information in writing to the Employer at least two weeks before it is required
by the BAS Specialist.
B. These application software packages shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1. Provide the following programs for the optimization of energy usage:
a. HVAC control
2. Provide the following programs for the calculation of data:
a. Electrical Energy usage and demand

b. Psychrometric properties
c. Equipment operating time
3. Provide the following programs for the restart of building mechanical

systems:
a. Equipment restart following a fire alarm

b. Equipment restart following a power failure
C. Energy Management Features: BAS controllers shall perform all energy

management functions specified herein to reduce energy consumption. The system shall
provide energy supervisory management routines that improve the energy efficiency of the
building HVAC systems. These routines shall coordinate the execution of all energy
management application features, acting as an executive software system for them, and as
an interface for their control strategy with other application features in the system. These
energy management functions to be categorized under HVAC control. These features shall
reside at the DDCs and are to operate independently of the POT. Energy harvesting type of
peripherals may be used also.
D. HVAC Control
1. BAS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal

Run (start/stop) Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover
Optimization applications.

REV 00
2. Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy
supervisory management routines. These routines to coordinate control action
required by optimization applications between themselves, all other energy
features, and all application features within the system.
3. Each control system to support English or metric units of
measurement and be assigned a unique identifier which is to be used to
request operator-relevant HVAC control status data. Each control system to be
capable of supporting Optimal Run Time, Supply Air Reset, and Enthalpy
Switchover Optimization.
4. Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be
online definable. Any additions, modifications or deletions to be made online.
Each system to be individually identified with a unique English language
descriptor.
5. Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to
document, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Period start date as defined by operator

b. Calculated optimal start time daily saving values
c. Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
d. Calculated optimal start time daily saving values during
current period
e. Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during
current period
f. Calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
g. Calculated SAR saving values during current period
h. Calculated ESQ (Enthalpy Switch-over) daily saving values
i. Calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
j. These documented savings values to be
automatically historically stored for the current defined period
and a minimum of twelve past periods.
6. Optimal Run Time (ORT) Program is to:
a. Control start up and shutdown of HVAC control

equipment
b. Provide the most efficient operation during
potentially energy wasteful periods of the day based on
occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal
requirements and interior room mass temperatures
c. Startup systems by using outside air temperature and
room temperatures to "learn" the building's thermal
characteristics through a dynamic adaptive modeling technique

REV 00
d. Predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system
for how long building takes to cool down under different
conditions, using the adaptive model
e. Determine how early it can shut down the system
without adversely affecting ventilation, by using the outside air
temperature
f. Automatically determine the seasonal mode and
worse case condition for each day, by analyzing multiple
building mass sensors
g. Analysis to require only easily obtained
occupancy schedule data and desired mass temperatures for
implementation.
7. Supply Air Reset (SAR) Program is to:
a. Monitor cooling loads in building spaces

b. Monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures
c. Adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the
most energy efficient levels that still satisfy the measured load
d. Raise cooling temperatures to highest possible
value, and still cool and dehumidify the warmest monitored
room served by fan.
E. Electrical Energy Usage and Demand
1. Provide software to monitor and report electrical energy usage and

instantaneous energy demand. This feature shall also store data for recall via
the historical data trend package.
2. The BAS shall monitor the demand kW, kVA and kWh at the
switchboards. The BAS shall also monitor and provide reporting on kWh
usage of controlled equipment within the building based on equipment
operating time and monitored kW for each piece of equipment. If an item of
equipment is not monitored then it shall be possible for the BAS Specialist to
input the kW of the equipment as a constant to be used in the calculation. The
kW value shall be obtained from the manufacturer’s literature and shall be
verified by the manufacturer.
3. This software feature shall generate a report available on demand and
on a scheduled basis:
a. Demand (at each meter) at time of report.

b. Usage for present day to time of report.

REV 00
c. Usage on previous day.
d. Usage for present week to time of report.
e. Usage for previous week.
f. Usage for present month to time of report.
g. Usage for previous month.
h. Usage for year to time of report.
i. Usage for previous year.
j. Peak demand for the present day, week, month and year to
time of report.
k. Peak demand for the previous day, week, month and year.
4. In addition to the above reporting of data the operator shall be able to

assign any monitored or calculated value to the real-time plotting and
historical data trend features.
5. As part of the work of this sub-contract the BAS Specialist shall
implement all energy management calculations as requested by the Employer.
Submit in writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the
acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on the energy
management calculation feature. The written request will clearly indicate the
information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to be
provided.
F.Psychrometric properties
1. Provide a software package to determine the following properties of

ambient air:
a. Wet bulb temperature.

b. Dew point temperature.
2. The above parameters shall be calculated using the monitored values

of ambient air-dry bulb temperature and relative humidity
3. This software package shall also calculate the enthalpy of ambient air
and ducted return air on the basis of the dry bulb temperature and relative
humidity monitored in ambient air and the ducted return air.
4. These psychrometric calculations shall be based on sea level data and
shall cover the dry bulb temperature range of +10 Deg. C. to +60 Deg. C.
5. The psychrometric chart shall be displayed on the OIW and shall
be dynamic. With the input of any two variables all other psychrometric data
shall be automatically displayed on the psychrometric chart.

REV 00
G. Equipment operating time
1. Provide a software package that will accumulate the operating times

for motors as selected by the operator using an interactive procedure. Any
piece of equipment that has its status monitored by the BAS shall be
selectable for inclusion in this feature. It shall be possible to concurrently
monitor the accumulated operating time for every item of equipment
monitored and/or controlled by the BAS. Data shall be stored at the local
controllers and shall be uploaded to the IBMS at regular intervals. In the
event of loss of communications between the IBMS and the local controller
the local controller shall continue to monitor and store data such that the data
can be downloaded when the communication is restored. The number of starts
and stops of motors shall also be accumulated.
2. The operator shall be able to establish on-line, using an interactive
procedure, a value for the accumulated operating time at which a suitably
worded message shall be output to the operator advising that the reporting
limit has been reached for a specific motor. The message shall be output at
the designated alarm printer.
3. The operator shall be able to change the accumulated total for any
motor to any value.
4. The accumulated operating times shall be updated at least every 15
minutes.
5. The operator shall be able to obtain a report on demand and on a
scheduled basis detailing the accumulated operating times.
6. Operating times and the number of equipment starts/stops shall be
input by the BAS equipment-scheduling program to the Employer's Facility
Management System and shall be the basis of maintenance programming.
H. Equipment restart following a fire alarm
1. Provide and implement a software program that will restart

equipment, following the return to normal condition that was shut down by
the FAS or by the BAS as the result of a fire alarm. The only equipment
that shall be shut down by the BAS as the result of a fire alarm shall be the
VAV terminal units and FCU. The FAS shall shut down all other equipment
on an as required basis.
a. If an item of equipment is shut down by a source

other than the BAS when there is a fire alarm in effect then the
BAS shall assume that the cause of the shutdown is the FAS
and shall not indicate an alarm.

REV 00
b. The FAS shall communicate to the BAS a list of all
equipment that it has shut down as the result of a fire alarm.
c. If an item of equipment was presumed by the BAS to
have shut down as a result of the fire alarm but is not on the
FAS list then an alarm shall be annunciated for that item of
equipment to indicate equipment failure. An alarm shall also be
generated if an item of equipment on the list does not have the
required status.
2. Following the receipt by the BAS of a return to normal message

from the fire alarm system the operator shall be able to initiate the restart
of all equipment shutdown by the FAS and BAS with individual manually
entered commands to each item of equipment and with a single command that
shall restart all equipment scheduled to be operational at the time of the
operator restart command. Prior to the return to normal of the fire alarm
system the operator shall not be able to execute the restart command. The
restart of the equipment shall be subject to all the software protection such
as the minimum "off" time
and the operator defined time delay requirements between successive

equipment starts.
implement the restart following a fire alarm function. Submit in written to
the Employer, at least 4 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for
the order in which motors are to be restarted, the delay times between
successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times. The written
request will clearly indicate the information required from the Employer
and the format in which it is to be provided.
I. Equipment restart following a power failure
1. Provide and implement a program that will facilitate the restart

of equipment following a power failure.
2. This program shall be based on the BAS detection of a power
failure and the return of power. This feature shall operate on a per BAS
basis and not a site wide basis and shall be implemented for both emergency,
normal power and UPS power.
3. When there is a loss of normal power, the BAS shall de-energize all
units under its control. When power is restored the BAS shall restart
equipment on the basis of the following as selected by the operator:
a. Manually entered operator command. A single

command shall initiate the start of all equipment controlled by

REV 00
a BAS or the equipment shall be started individually as selected
by the operator.
b. Automatically by the BAS when the return of
power is detected by the BAS, either utility power.
4. Whichever method of restart is selected the motors shall be started in

a predetermined order and the startup shall be subject to all the software
protections such as the minimum "off" time and the operator defined time
delay requirements between successive equipment starts, to prevent surges in
the electrical distribution system.
implement the restart following a power failure function. Submit in written to
the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for
the order in which motors are to be restarted, the delay times between
successive motor starts and the minimum “off” and “on’ times. The written
request will clearly indicate the information required from the Employer and
the format in which it is to be provided.
6. In the case of standby power, the BAS shall only restart equipment
that is scheduled to operate at that time of day and which is permitted to
operate under standby power conditions.
2.17 CONTROLLERS: GENERAL
A. There shall be 3 types of BAS Controllers:
1. NAC: Network automation Controller, BACnet Building Controller

(B-BC)
2. DDC: Direct Digital Controller, BACnet Advanced Application
Controller (B- AAC)
3. ASC: Application Specific Controllers (ASC)
B. All BACnet controllers shall be based on native BACnet and shall support all
applicable BIBB’s from the data sharing, alarm event, schedule, trend and device
manager groups. Standard BACnet object types supported by the controllers shall include:
1. Binary input and output and value

2. Analogue input, output and value,
3. Multi-state input and output
4. Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule,
group, event enrolment and device.

REV 00
5. Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically
approved by the Employer.
C. Network Automation Controllers (NAC) shall allow for 20% expansion in

terms of communication cable distance and number of communication nodes.
D. Following a loss of power the PC, NAC, DDC and ASC shall reboot in an
orderly fashion and attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of
power. This shall be accomplished without operator intervention.
E. The BAS can be used for smoke management applications if all the
DDC’s are certified in accordance with UL864 UUKL requirements.
F. DDC may be used for any equipment monitored and controlled by the BAS.
A dedicated DDC shall be provided at minimum to monitor and control the following:
1. A single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall have a dedicated DDC).
2. Other major items of equipment.
2.18 BACnet BUILDING CONTROLLER (B-BC)
A. General: Building Controllers shall combine both network routing functions

and control functions into a single unit. B-BC's shall route communications between the
BACnet/IP network, the BACnet 8802.3 network, BACnet PTP network and the BACnet
MS/TP network. The BC shall be responsible for monitoring and controlling directly
connected HVAC equipment such as large AHU's, Chillers or Boilers. A sufficient number
of B-BC's shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the
attached point list. Each B-BC shall be classified as a "native" BACnet device,
supporting the BACnet Building Controller (B) profile. Controllers that support a lesser
profile such as B-AAC are not acceptable. BC's shall be tested and certified by the
BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Building Controllers (B-BC).
B. Hardware Specifications:
1. Memory: The operating system and the application programs for the
B-BC shall be stored in non-volatile FLASH memory. The B-BC shall
support up to 256 MB Flash memory and up to 512 MB of RAM.
2. Communication Ports: Each B-BC shall provide communication to
both the Server(s) and the field buses. The B-BC shall have on-board at least
one 10/100bT Ethernet port, an RS-232 Port and at least two RS-485 ports.
REV 00
It shall support communications to a maximum of 32 MS/TP master devices
per port.
3. Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular I/O
field interface (sensors, actuators, etc.) design to allow easy expansion of
the field interface device Input and Output capacity. It shall be possible to
add I/O modules as
desired to meet the I/O requirements for individual control applications.

These modules shall be capable of being installed up to 100 feet from the B-BC
4. Inputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal inputs, if
required, with a minimum of 12-bit analog to digital conversion. Each
input shall have over- voltage protection.
5. Outputs: The B-BC shall have 16 on-board universal outputs, if
required, with a 12-bit digital to analog conversion.
a. Optional output cards for the following outputs:
1. 24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.

2.N.C. Form A relay output.
3.N.O. Form A relay output.
4.4 to 20mA.
5.0 to 10VDC analog output.
6. Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum, LED

indication of CPU status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status.
7. Real Time Clock (RTC): Each B-BC shall include a battery or
capacitor backed, real time clock for 72 hours, accurate to 1.5 minutes per
month. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year,
and day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings
time and leap years.
8. Power Supply: The power supply for the B-BC's shall be 24 or
220/240 volts AC (-15%, +20%, 25 VA max.) power. Line voltage below the
operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller
shall have over voltage surge protection without additional AC power signal
conditioning.
9. Automatic Restart after Power Failure: Upon restoration of power
after an outage, the B-BC shall automatically and without human intervention:
update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current
synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as
required.
10. Battery Backup: The B-BC shall include an on-board battery to
back up the controller's RAM memory. In the case of a power failure, the B-

REV 00
BC shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted
or unusable, then the B-BC shall restart itself from its application program
stored in its FLASH memory.
C. Software Specifications:
1. General: The B-BC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the
resident operating system and application programming. Each B-BC shall be
capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously.
Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program
shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This
execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user
communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the
program for storage, routing communications, etc.
2. User Programming Language: The application software shall be user
programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control
algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English
language-based and programmable by the user.
D. Control Software:
1. The B-BC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested
control algorithms:
a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)

b. Two Position Control.
c. Digital Filter.
d. Ratio Calculator.
e. Equipment Cycling Protection.
2. Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of

performing basic mathematical functions (+, -, x, /), squares, square roots,
exponential, logarithms, trigonometric functions, Boolean logic statements or
combinations of all. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex
logical statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or,
etc. These shall be able to be used in the same equations with the
mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses deep.
3. Energy Management Applications: B-BC's shall have the ability to
perform any or all of the following energy management routines:
a. Time of Day Scheduling.

REV 00
b. Calendar Based Scheduling.
c. Holiday Scheduling.
d. Exception Scheduling.
e. Temporary Schedule Overrides.
f. Optimal Start.
g. Optimal Stop.
h. Night Setback Control.
i. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer).
j. Peak Demand Limiting.
k. Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling.
l. Heating/Cooling Interlock.
m. Hot/Cold Deck Reset.
n. Free Cooling.
o. Hot Water Reset.
p. Chilled Water Reset.
q. Condenser Water Reset.
r. Chiller Sequencing.
E. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any

input, output, calculated value, etc. over user defined time intervals (1 second minimum
time). Up to 256 values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the
instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be
downloadable to the IBMS for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals,
or manual command.
F. Alarm Management: For each system point, alarms can be created based on
high/low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the BC
and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Up to 8 alarms can
be configured for each point in the controller. Alarms will be generated based on their
priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided. If communication with the
Operator IBMS is temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in
the B-BC. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the IBMS.
Alarms shall be capable of being routed to any BACnet IBMS that conforms to the B-
AWS device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol.
G. Router Function: The B-BC shall be capable of routing traffic between two
BACnet MS/TP ports, one BACnet PTP (Point to Point) port, four (logical) BACnet IP
ports and one (logical) BACnet Ethernet port. The BC shall support BACnet IP Foreign
Device Registration and BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). The B-BC
shall support

REV 00
PTP modem communications and perform IP Packet Assembling/Disassembling (PAD)
Routing for up to four BACnet IP PAD networks.
H. Each B-BC shall have the following standard features:
1. Each of the four BACnet IP ports can be configured for BACnet

IP, BBMD, Foreign Device Registration or PAD.
2. The Firmware shall be upgradeable through the Ethernet connection
via FTP without physical access to the B-BC for easy updates as future
enhancements expand functionality.
3. Accept up to four expansion I/O cards.
4. Expansion I/O modules shall be connected with twisted pair wire or
pluggable on the controllers backplane.
5. Shall dynamically allocate memory resources to provide flexible use
of its memory.
6. Shall contain up to 32 user defined control programs.
7. Shall employ at minimum a 32-bit microprocessor.
8. Shall meet or exceed the specifications in the ANSI/ASHRAE
BACnet Standard 135-2016 for BACnet Building Controllers.
9. Shall have removable screw terminal blocks that can accommodate
wire sizes 14- 22 AWG.
10. Shall support pulse counting up to 16 Hz with accumulator objects.
11. Shall support direct connections up to 64 inputs, 32 outputs.
12. Shall support up to 1000 Analog Value Objects, 1000 Binary Value
Objects and up to 256 Multi-state Value Objects.
13. Shall support up to 32 Loop Objects.
14. Shall support up to 32 Program Objects.
15. Shall support up to 32 Schedule Objects and up to 32 Calendar
Objects.
16. Shall support up to 256 Trend Objects.
I. Embedded Web Server: Each B-BC shall have an embedded Web Server
that provides the following capabilities as standard features.
1. Serve and display optional custom graphics and tabular web pages
containing any set of desired I/O values from the entire BAS.
a. The B-BC shall have capacity for at least 50 unique

graphical web page backgrounds.

REV 00
b. Each background may be re-used multiple times
with different sets of similar data such as for a VAV terminal or
FCU to provide many more unique displayed data sets.
2. Provide a built-in alarm summary that displays selected FMCS

system alarms in a tabular summary page.
3. Provides a minimum of 3 levels of web browser password protected
user access.
4. The B-BC shall be capable of being configured over the data network
by using a standard Internet Browser without any additional software.
2.19 BACnet ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLER (B-AAC)
A. Controllers shall be microprocessor based BACnet Advanced Application

Controllers (B- AAC) in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2016. The
Native BACnet AAC's shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Heat Recovery Units,
Chilled and Hot Water Control, Pumps and other applications as shown on the
drawings. The application
control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry,
which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier shall provide a PICS
document showing the installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
135-2016.
B. AAC's must be BTL-listed as a B-AAC, shall be fully application

programmable and shall at all times maintain their BACnet compliance. Controllers
offering application selection only (non-programmable) are not acceptable. Control
sequences within or programmed into the BACnet B-AAC's shall be stored in non-volatile
memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.
C. Whether stand-alone or networked, the BTL Listed Advanced Application

Controllers (B- AAC) shall be used to provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment
and other connected equipment. In addition to their standalone capabilities to execute the
operating sequences, they shall also be capable to be networked in a peer-to-peer,
BACnet MS/TP field network to other BACnet B-AAC's, or as part of a complete
integrated management system which integrates multiple field networks. These controllers
may be used to optimize the energy consumption by implementing various Energy
Management strategies such as demand limiting, duty cycling, outside air optimization,
temperature setup/setback, optimum start/stop routines, etc.
D. Standard features for field devices shall include:

REV 00
1. Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities as MS/TP

Masters, slave devices are not acceptable.
2. BACnet MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to
76.8k baud.
3. Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software
selectable as analog or digital with standard and custom ranges. Pulse counting
shall be available for 30% of the inputs up to 16Hz frequency.
4. All Outputs to be Universal Outputs with 10 bit resolution -
software selectable for analog (0-10V and 4-20mA) or digital with standard
and custom ranges.
5. 40 BV points and 40 AV points minimum.
6. Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet Loop Objects. Minimum of 1 Loop
Object for each output.
7. Retains Last To Normal/To Off Normal Event for each object.
8. 10 User definable program areas.
9. 8 BACnet Trend Log Objects, minimum sample interval of 1 second.
10. 8 BACnet Schedule Objects.
11. 3 BACnet Calendar Objects.
12. BACnet Intrinsic Alarm Reporting.
13. Sensor conversion tables for creating linear curves.
14. Compatible with "Smart Sensor" specified below.
15. For BACnet B-AAC's designed to control larger HVAC equipment
including AHUs, Exhaust Fans, Chiller Plants, and Boiler Plants, the following
shall apply in addition to the standard features:
a. Optional output cards for the following outputs:
1. 24 VAC Zero crossing Triac.

2.N.C. Form A relay output.
3. N.O. Form A relay output. 4. 4-20mA.
5.0-10VDC analog output.
6.RTD
E. One B-AAC may only serve a single Air Handling Unit (each AHU shall
have a dedicated controller).
2.20 BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC): General

REV 00
A. Each ASC controller shall be a dedicated, stand-alone, microprocessor-based,

application- specific unitary controller designed to control the HVAC plant, control
sequences, and point configurations. The ASC shall operate with a high-speed 16-bit
processor. ASC must be BTL-listed as a B-ASC (BACnet-Application Specific
Controller) conforming to ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
B. ASC controller shall utilize user programmable function modules as required

to meet the functional intent of all control sequences on a stand-alone basis.
C. Universal inputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. Five universal inputs per controller.

b. Configurable for 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, RTD, or dry
contact type input signals with 12-bit resolution.
D. Digital outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. FCU ASC: At least Five (5) relay outputs per

controller, where three of them shall be suitably rated for the
FCU fan Operation.
b. VAV ASC: At least Two (2) relay outputs per controller
E. Analog outputs shall include the following minimum requirements:
a. Three (3) analog outputs per controller configurable

for 0-10VDC or 4- 20mA.
b. Floating analog outputs are not accepted.
F.Communication Networks:
a. ASC shall utilize optically isolated, 2-wire twisted

shielded EIA-485 line signaling for portable operator terminal,
color graphic operator station, or NAC and shall utilize the
BACnet MS/TP communications protocol designed to control
the HVAC plant, control sequences, and point configurations.
b. ASCs shall communicate at speeds up to and
including 76.8k baud and shall utilize a token passing scheme to
accommodate concurrent communication with multiple network
devices.

REV 00
c. Failure of one ASC shall not affect the performance
of other ASCs on the network.
G. Nonvolatile Memory: All ASC's operating parameters, setpoints, and

schedules shall be stored in flash memory or other nonvolatile memory.
H. ASCs firmware shall be upgradeable through flash memory over MS/TP

without application interruption.
I. Input Power: Input power requirements for the ASC shall be line voltage
or 24VAC, 50/60 Hz, 20 VA maximum. The controller power supply shall be separate
from any other used for motor control contractor coils.
J. Mounting: ASC shall be readily mounted by using pre-drilled holes or

integral mounting lugs such as DIN rail.
K. BAS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC):

VAV TERMINAL UNITS
1. VAV Controller shall be equipped with an integrated proportional

(0-10V or 4- 20mA) damper actuator and the damper actuator shall operate
with Motor Management Technology (MMT) for monitoring, identifying, and
correcting motor shorts. VAV controller must be BTL-listed as B-ASC
(BACnet- Application Specific Controller) conforming to ANSI/ASHRAE
135-2012.
2. Provide differential pressure transducers for the monitoring of the
terminal unit airflow rate. The sensors shall be an integral component of the
ASC. The differential pressure transducer shall meet, at minimum, the
requirements:
a. Monitor the differential pressures generated by a
multi-point averaging device located in the air duct.
b. The terminal unit manufacturer as part of the
factory installation shall provide tubing from these sensors to
the multi-point averaging devices.
c. The differential pressure sensors shall monitor the
flow rates with an accuracy of ± 1 percent over the full scale.
d. Provide a one-micron filter on the pressure
differential sensor if it monitors a moving air stream.
3. Each VAV terminal unit shall have an ASC. The number and
location of terminal units and airflow rates shall be as indicated on the
Mechanical Drawings.
REV 00
4. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide the following
components for each VAV terminal unit for interface and mounting of the
ASC:
a. Suitable means of mounting the ASC inside or on the

exterior of the VAV terminal unit. The terminal unit
manufacturer shall provide a suitably constructed enclosure with
electrical barriers as required by the applicable codes and
standards.
b. Multi-point averaging type flow sensor at the air
inlet to the terminal unit and calibration curve (differential
pressure versus flow rate). Calibration curve shall be
maintained in a sturdy plastic pouch that shall be available on
the underside of the terminal unit.
5. The BAS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each
VAV terminal unit to the VAV terminal unit manufacturer for factory
installation by the VAV terminal unit manufacturer:
a. Application Specific Controller. (This shall

incorporate a pressure transducer as required to monitor the
differential pressure signal generated by the multi-point
averaging type flow sensor at the inlet to the VAV terminal
unit).
b. 24 Vac control transformer.
c. Any required temperature sensor or control device
6. Provide the terminal unit manufacturer with the following

documentation to coordinate the mounting of the ASC and related
components:
a. Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing

the wiring and tubing of the ASC and other control equipment
installed on the terminal devices.
b. Written instructions and drawings containing
sufficient information to enable the terminal unit manufacturer
to undertake the installation satisfactorily.
7. The BAS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's

facility before commencement of fabrication to ensure that the terminal unit
manufacturer's installation procedures are satisfactory. The terminal unit
manufacturer shall prepare a drawing of the wiring for the ASC and all
associated instrumentation and final control elements based on the information

REV 00
provided by the BAS Specialist. The terminal unit manufacturer and the
BAS Specialist shall both certify on the drawing that the drawing is
correct and the drawing shall be submitted as a shop drawing for review by
the Engineer.
8. ASC for each production run shall be at the terminal unit
manufacturer’s factory at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled shipment dates
to the job-site. Obtain the terminal unit shipping dates from the MEP
Specialist.
9. The BAS Specialist shall visit the terminal unit manufacturer's
facility at the completion of the initial production run, prior to the shipping
of any terminal units to the project site, to inspect the installation of the
ASC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
10. The BAS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC and shall test the
ASC at the factory. The BAS Specialist shall calibrate the pressure sensor and
the flow rate reported by the controller at the factory and shall recheck these
values following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling plenum.
This shall be done in conjunction with the air-balancing Specialist and shall be
based on the flow sensor calibration curve (differential pressure versus flow
rate) provided by the terminal unit manufacturer. The BAS Specialist shall
calibrate the temperature sensors.
11. It shall be the responsibility of the BAS Specialist to verify the
following with the VAV terminal unit manufacturer prior to the tender
submittal:
a. The pressure differential generated by the multi-

point sensors is compatible with the instrumentation to be
provided by the BAS Specialist for the specified accuracy
requirements.
b. The damper assembly is compatible with the
actuator to be provided by the BAS Specialist.
12. Provide a wall mounted space smart sensor for the monitoring of the
terminal unit space temperature. The smart sensor shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
a. RTD sensors.
b. Temperature reported at the IBMS shall have an
accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C.
c. Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white.
There shall be no logos, trademarks or names visible on the
enclosure and there shall be no evidence of their removal.
d. The Smart Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature
reported at the LCD shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg.
C. and the difference between the LCD and the IBMS reported
REV 00
temperatures shall not differ by more than 0.2 Deg.C. Cover
shall be removable to allow access to the plug for the POT.
e. The functions displayed by LCD via selector button

shall be space temperature and space temperature set point.
f. The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval and shall be amended as instructed by the Engineer at
no cost to the Employer.
g. Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent
and shall only communicate with their associated ASC via a
digital communications network over screened twisted pair or
equivalent communication cable independent from the BAS
LAN. This communications network may use a proprietary
protocol.
h. If requested by the engineer the smart sensor
enclosure shall be temporarily mounted alongside the VAV box
and shall be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out
design. The wall mounted smart sensors shall be located 1500
mm above finished floor level. Coordinate exact locations with
Architectural Plans.
13. The VAV box ASC shall each have the capability of monitoring and
controlling the following parameters for VAV terminal units:
a. Space temperature.
b. Air flow rate.
c. Damper modulation.
14. PI or PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5
Deg. C. of the space temperature setpoints.
15. The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT
to the secondary LAN at the space smart sensor enclosure. If there is a wall
mounted smart sensor it shall not be necessary for the operator to obtain access
to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator interface to the ASC. At
minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake the following functions via
the POT when connected to the ASC at the associated smart sensor enclosure,
the DDC and the NAC and via the IBMS:
a. Change a space temperature setpoint for a single terminal

unit.
b. Change a space temperature setpoint for a group of terminal
units.
c. Change an alarm limit/value.
REV 00
d. Change the operating mode for a single terminal unit.
e. Change the operating mode for a group of terminal units.
f. Change the schedules for a single terminal unit.
g. Change the schedules for a group of terminal units.
h. Set the air damper on a terminal unit to:
1.The maximum cooling flow rate setpoint.

2.The closed position.
3.The fully open position.
4.Minimum cooling flow rate setpoint.
i. Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single powered VAV terminal

unit.
j. Turn the fans ON/OFF for a group of powered VAV terminal
units.
16. The POT shall be plug connectable at the smart sensor housing.
17. The BAS Specialist shall install data into the ASC as necessary
for the correct operation of the terminal unit including:
a. Terminal unit-ASC MS/TP address.
b. Air damper flow rate setpoints.

c. Occupied mode space temperature setpoints.
d. Unoccupied mode space temperature setpoints.
e. Control constants.
f. Engineering units conversion factors.
g. Select the button to be an occupied/unoccupied switch.
h. Default operating schedules.
i. Definition of terminal unit type.
j. Other parameters as necessary to define the
operation of the terminal unit in accordance with these
specifications.
18. Following installation of the terminal unit, the BAS Specialist shall
calibrate on- site the instrumentation associated with the following monitored
parameters:

REV 00
b. Airflow rate sensor.
19. Following the installation of the terminal unit in the ceiling space the
BAS Specialist shall undertake the following tasks:
a. Physically connect the ASC into the BAS LAN.

b. Enter all parameters as detailed above.
c. Verify that the ASC modulates the air duct
dampers from fully open to fully closed and vice versa within
the specified time and verify either visually or by feel that the
damper closes fully under ASC control.
d. Verify that the terminal unit-ASC is satisfactorily
integrated into the BAS LAN.
e. Verify that the operating sequences are correct and
that there is stable modulation of the air damper.
f. Assist the Air Balancing and MEP Specialists as
required for the complete commissioning, calibration and
operational verification of the AC and terminal unit systems.
L. BAS CONTROLLERS: APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC):

FAN COIL UNITS
1. Each fan coil unit shall have an ASC. The number, type and
location of FCU shall be as indicated on the Mechanical Drawings.
2. The BAS Specialist shall furnish the following components for each
FCU to the MEP Specialist for installation by the MEP Specialist:
a. Application Specific Controller.

b. 24 Vac control transformer if required.
c. Interposing relays for fan speed commands AC-3
rated according to the FCU fan current requirement.
d. Temperature sensors for those FCU that have the
temperature sensor located in the recirculation port.
e. Chilled water valve and actuator. The MEP
Specialist shall install the valve.
3. Provide a wall mounted smart sensor for the monitoring of the space
temperature and for the user commands associated with the FCU. The sensor
shall meet the following minimum requirements:

REV 00
a. RTD sensors.
b. Temperature reported at the IBMS shall have an

accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C.
c. Enclosure shall be rugged plastic and shall be white.
There shall be no logos, trademarks or names on the enclosure
and there shall be no evidence of their removal.
d. Sensor shall have an LCD. Temperature reported at
the LCD shall have an accuracy of + or – 0.5 Deg. C. and the
difference between the LCD and the IBMS reported
temperatures shall not differ by more than 0.2 Deg.C. Cover
shall be removable to allow access to the plug for the POT.
e. The functions displayed by LCD via selector button
shall be space temperature, space temperature set point and fan
speed.
f. The enclosures shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval and shall be amended as instructed by the Engineer at
no cost to the Employer.
g. Smart sensor housings with LCD shall be intelligent
and shall only communicate with their associated ASC via a
digital communications network over screened twisted pair cable
or equivalent and shall be independent from BAS LAN. This
communications network may use a proprietary protocol.
Enclosures associated with FCU that have speed control shall
also incorporate speed selection buttons.
h. If requested by the engineer the smart sensor
enclosure shall be temporarily mounted alongside the FCU and
shall be subsequently relocated as required by the fit-out design.
The wall mounted smart sensors shall be located 1500 mm
above finished floor level. Coordinate exact locations with
Architectural Plans.
4. Provide the MEP Specialist with the following documentation within

2 weeks of receiving the request from the MEP Specialist:
a. Multi-color point to point wiring diagram detailing

the wiring of the FCU controller and other control equipment
installed on the terminal devices.
b. Written instructions and drawings containing
sufficient information to enable the MEP Specialist to undertake
the installation satisfactorily.
c. The BAS Specialist shall provide a list of all FCU
that shall have the temperature sensor located in the
recirculation port.
REV 00
5. The BAS Specialist shall meet with the MEP Specialist before
commencement of the ASC installation and cabling to ensure that the
proposed installation procedures are satisfactory. The MEP Specialist shall
prepare a drawing of the wiring for the ASC and all associated instrumentation
and final control elements based on the information provided by the BAS
Specialist. The MEP Specialist and the BAS Specialist shall both certify on
the drawing that the drawing is correct and the drawing shall be submitted
as a shop drawing for review by the Engineer.
6. The BAS Specialist shall periodically meet with the MEP Specialist
to inspect the installation of the ASC and to verify proper operation via a POT.
7. The BAS Specialist shall enter all data into the ASC at the site after
the FCU has been installed.
8. The ASC shall monitor and control the following parameters for
FCU:
b. Fan ON/OFF and Speed control.

c. Cooling and Heating coils valve.
d. Electric reheat coil
e. Fresh air damper
f. Setpoint reset (applicable only to those units with
wall mounted enclosures having a setpoint reset capability)
g. Fan speed control selection (applicable only to those
units with wall mounted enclosures having a setpoint reset
capability)
9. PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within ± 0.5

Deg. C. of the space temperature setpoints.
10. The operator shall be able to access the ASC by connecting the POT
to the ASC LAN at the smart sensor enclosure. It shall not be necessary for the
operator to obtain access to the ceiling plenum in order to obtain an operator
interface to the ASC. At minimum, the operator shall be able to undertake the
following functions via the POT when communicating with the BASIBMS
Network or when connected at the smart sensor housing, at the DDC and at the
NAC and via any IBMS:
a. Change space temperature setpoints for a single

FCU.
b. Change an alarm limit/value.
c. Change the operating mode for a single FCU.
REV 00
d. Change the schedules for a single FCU.
e. Turn the fan ON/OFF for a single FCU.
f. Override the fan speed.
g. Set the cooling or heating coil valve to fully open
and fully closed and any intermediate position.
h. Enable / disable the reheat coil
11. The BAS Specialist shall install data into the ASC on site as
necessary for the correct operation of the FCU including:
a. FCU-ASC MS/TP address.

b. Occupied space temperature setpoints.
c. Unoccupied space temperature setpoints.
d. Control constants.
e. Engineering units conversion factors.
f. Default operating schedules.
g. Definition of FCU type.
h. Other parameters as necessary to define the
operation of the FCU in accordance with these specifications.
12. The BAS Specialist shall calibrate the space temperature sensor at
the project site.
13. Following the installation of the FCU the BAS Specialist shall
undertake the following tasks:
a. Physically connect the ASC into the BAS LAN.

b. Enter all parameters that may not have been
entered before shipment of the FCU to the site.
c. Verify that the ASC modulates the cooling or
heating coil valve from fully open to fully closed and vice
versa.
d. Verify that the FCU-ASC is satisfactorily integrated into the
LAN.
e. Verify that the operating sequences are correct and
that there is stable modulation of the cooling coil valve and fan
speeds
f. Calibrate the temperature sensor.

REV 00
14. ASC shall have opto-isolation or equivalent protection.
M. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER: COMPATIBILITY TESTS

FOR TERMINAL UNITS:
1. Prior to shipping any VAV/CAV terminal units to site, the BAS

Specialist and the VAV/CAV terminal unit manufacturer shall perform the
tests and inspections detailed herein. A full report must be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before shipping the equipment. The Engineer may reject
any result that is found to contradict the sub-contract requirements.
2. Physical Inspection:
a. Inspect installation of damper actuator on the unit

(Verify rigid installation. Observe full open to full close
stroking of actuator motor without binding.
b. Inspect installation of cabling and sensor tubing from
the Application Specific Controller (ASC) to end devices.
c. Inspect mounting of controller on unit. Verify
accessibility for service after installation.
3. ASC Flow Rate Performance (VAV boxes only):
a. Verify all ASC software parameters are provided to

meet the specifications.
b. Verify the ability to provide complete shut off of the air-
cooling damper.
c. Verify the accuracy of the multipoint flow sensor is
within specification tolerances at various air positions between
the minimum and maximum ranges of the terminal unit. Use at
least six damper positions (lab reading vs. controller reading vs.
damper position). Chart this performance on a table indicating
accuracy deviations and also chart on a graph (l/s or m³/s vs.
% damper position) indicating lab and controller readings on
the same graph.
d. Move the flexible air duct inlet (simulate a kink in
the flexible ductwork) to verify there is not a requirement for
straight lengths of ductwork to maintain airflow rate sensor
accuracy.
e. Verify the controller operation is stable at low flow
inlet conditions (less than the multipoint flow sensor rated
accuracy limit). Record minimum inlet velocity at which
accurate sensor accuracy and control was maintained.

REV 00
f. If cold air is available in a controlled and
conditioned space, verify that the controller can maintain space
conditions at ± 0.5 Deg. C. around the setpoint (VAV boxes
only).
g. Set the air damper to maintain a fixed flow rate
setpoint. Vary the inlet static pressure from 25 to 400Pa. in 25
Pa upward increments. Record the flow rate setpoint, ASC
controller reading of airflow rate, and the laboratory reading at
each setpoint. Vary the inlet static pressure from 400 Pa to 25 Pa
in 25 Pa downward increments noting the same readings. Plot
the performance of this test to verify lack of hysteresis effects.
Perform this test at minimum and maximum air-cooling flow
rate setpoints.
4. ASC Electrical Performance:
a. Reduce the input voltage on the ASC to below

85% for an extended period. Note if controller performance is
affected.
b. Reduce the input voltage on the ASC slowly to
witness at what voltage the ASC will shut down and verify that
the shutdown was orderly.
c. Increase the input voltage on the ASC slowly to
witness at what voltage the ASC will re-enable itself and verify
that the restart was orderly.
d. Verify that during the operation of the ASC,
electrical noise is not induced back into the electrical system.
This shall require an oscilloscope.
2.21 BACNET ROUTERS
A. Provide all BACnet routers as necessary to meet the requirements of these

specifications.
B. BACnet routers shall be native BACnet only. Proprietary and other standard
protocols shall not be provided. Routers shall be provided as necessary to connect one
medium to another,
e.g. BACnet ARCnet to BACnet MS/TP, etc.
C. The BACnet routers shall, at minimum, support BIBB’s for data sharing,
alarm and event management, scheduling, trending and device and network management.

REV 00
2.22 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL PANELS (DCP)
A. The DCP’s shall be standalone, shall reside on the automation level and
shall meet the following requirements:
1. DCP shall house the DDC’s and shall meet the requirements detailed
in Paragraph titled “Panels and Enclosures” of these specifications. The DCP
shall be placed at the same location as the equipment they control. The BAS
Specialist shall provide a suitably rated enclosure for all associated BAS
components, including the controllers, relays, wiring guides, terminal strips,
etc.
2. Each DCP shall have its own power supplies that shall be rated such
that they will adequately accommodate all foreseeable uses of the DCP
including DDC controllers and field devices.
3. Each DCP shall have an AC Mains Socket outlet rated 1000
Watts. If all the sockets in the DCP’s are connected to the UPS, no more
than two sockets shall be used at the same time therefore a 2kW additional
load shall be considered in the main UPS selection.
4. All field instrumentation and final control elements cable shall be
terminated at the DCP on terminal strips.
5. All Power circuits (220/240VAC, 24VAC, 24VDC, 15VDC etc)
supplying any type of equipment or field devices from the DCP, shall be
fused. Outgoing power cables shall be terminated on Fused Terminals inside
the DCP.
6. Cabling shall be terminated on rugged and easily accessible terminal
strips. Each termination shall be clearly marked and shall be as detailed in
the shop and record drawings.
7. Provide and install as-built wiring diagrams to indicate the control
points on all equipment. Also provide laminated point lists in all DCP’s
2.23 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Outside Air Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1. Ventilated white PVC sun screen.

2. Wall mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
3. 100 or 1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature
coefficient of resistance of 0.00375 ohm/ohm/Deg. C.

REV 00
4. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5
Deg. C. (1.0 Deg.F.).
5. Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to
meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire
configuration
6. Temperature Range of 0 Deg. C to 50 Deg C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg.
F).
2.24 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – SINGLE POINT
A. Provide duct mounted, single point, temperature sensor as follows:
1. In ducts less than 1 m2 in cross-sectional area.
2. In ducts greater than 1m2 in cross-sectional area if there is no heating

coil and no cooling coil and no mixing of air flows of different temperatures
upstream.
B. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Stainless steel probe of length between one-third and two-thirds of

the duct width.
3. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 Deg.
C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
4. Provide a two wire 4-
20 mA RTD transmitter. Where necessary to meet
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
5. Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
6. Temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F to 122 Deg.
F).
2.25 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED – AVERAGING TYPE
A. Provide duct mounted, averaging, temperature sensor as follows:
1. In ducts greater than 1 m² in cross-sectional area.

REV 00
B. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Probe length of 3.66m (12 feet) minimum or 3.25m per m2. (One
linear foot per square foot) of duct cross-sectional area, whichever is greater.
2. Copper sheathed construction.
4. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 1.0 Deg.
C. (2.0 Deg. F.)
configuration.
6. Duct mounted moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
7. Suitable supports at all bends and at intermediate points to prevent

movement in the air stream.
F.).
2.26 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: WALL MOUNTED – PUBLIC SPACES
A. Provide wall mounted temperature sensor that meet the following:
1. White protective enclosure. There shall be no manufacturer's

logos, name or thermometer on casing.
2. Location shall be selected by the Engineer. No sensor shall be
mounted until the Employer gives specific location instructions.
3. 100/1,000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature
4. Monitored temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5
Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
configuration
6. Temperature range of 10 Deg.C. to 60 Deg.C.
7. Sensor shall have and LCD.

REV 00
2.27 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: THERMOWELL MOUNTED
A. Thermowells mounted temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the

following requirements:
1. Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is, at minimum, 20%

of the pipe width.
3. BAS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of ±
0.25 Deg. C. (0.5 Deg. F.) accuracy.
4. Provide a two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a
temperature range that is appropriate for the application.
5. Range for chilled water between 0 Deg.C. and +70 Deg.C. (+32
Deg.F. and +160 Deg.F.)
6. Range for condenser water between 0 Deg.C. and +120 Deg.C. (+32
Deg.F. and
+250 Deg.F.)
7. Range for hot and heating water Between 0 Deg.C. and +120 Deg.C.
(+32 Deg.F. and +250 Deg.F.)
8. Where necessary to meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide
a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
9. Moisture/waterproof housing with conduit fitting.
10. Stainless steel thermowell.
11. Provided with thermal grease to aid temperature sensing.
12. Sensors required for the determination of temperature differential
shall be matched with a maximum variation over the entire temperature range
of 0.1 Deg. C. (0.2 Deg. F.).
2.28 TEMPERATURE SENSOR: STRAP-ON
A. Provide strap-on mounted temperature sensors as indicated within the Field

termination schedules and/or control diagrams or where thermo well mounted sensors
cannot be mounted. Temperature sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. 6.35mm (0.25”) Stainless steel probe, 50 mm (2”)

2. RTD compatible with BAS, sealed in probe with a three part
moisture protection system

REV 00
3. BAS shall report the monitored temperature with an accuracy of
0.5Deg. C (1.0 Deg. F).
4. ABS housing with conduit entrance. (Optional metal or weather
proof available)
2.29 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: OUTSIDE AIR
A. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Non-corroding outdoors screen to minimize wind effects and solar

heating.
2. Wall mounted weatherproof enclosure with conduit fitting.
3. Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to relative humidity range of
0% to 100%.
4. 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5. Humidity sensor shall be replaceable.
6. Operating temperature range shall be appropriate for the climate.
Sensor and transmitter shall be rated for operation in ambient temperatures of,
at minimum,
5 Deg.C. (9 Deg.F.) below and above the lowest and highest recorded
temperatures for the location respectively.
2.30 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
A. Duct mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the

1. Duct mounted moisture resistant enclosure with conduit fitting.

0% to 100%.
4. 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5. 8 inch probe length.
6. Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F
to 122 Deg. F.)

REV 00
2.31 RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR: INDOOR AIR - WALL MOUNTED
A. Wall mounted relative humidity sensors shall meet, at minimum, the

1. Wall mounted enclosure with

white cover. There shall be no manufacturer's
logos, name or thermometer on casing.
0% to 100%.
4. 2% accuracy (5 - 95% RH).
5. Operating temperature range of O Deg. C. to 50 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F

to 122 Deg. F.).
6. With LCD.
2.32 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS:

OUTSIDE AIR
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor
for exterior wall mounting. Web bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at
1. Stainless steel probe with an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an

exterior housing.
2. Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum wet bulb
temperature range of -7 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (+20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
3. Two wire, 4-20 mA output proportional to minimum dry bulb
temperature range of -29 Deg.C. to +49 Deg.C. (-20 Deg.F. to +120 Deg.F.).
4. Monitored dry bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy of
± 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
5. Monitored wet bulb temperature shall be reported with an accuracy
of ± 3% of reading.
6. Sensor shall have a solar screen.
COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED

REV 00
B. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor
for duct mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing

for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior
housing.
± 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
6. Probe shall be a minimum of 200mm.
2.33 COMBINATION RELATIVE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE SENSORS:

INSIDE AIR
A. Provide a combination wet bulb temperature and dry bulb temperature sensor
for duct mounting. Wet bulb temperature/dry bulb sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Stainless steel probe with an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing.

± 0.5 Deg. C. (1.0 Deg. F.).
2.34 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: DUCT MOUNTED
A. Duct mounted static pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:

REV 00
1. Input range shall be appropriate for the application. Select range
such that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of
the duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the
maximum static pressure that could be encountered in the duct relative to the
duct exterior. Typically:
a. For low pressure duct consider using a range of 0 to 500Pa (0

to 2” wc.)
b. For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6”
wc.)
c. For high-pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500 Pa (0 to 10”
wc.).
2. 4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input range

compatible with the BAS.
3. 1% Full scale output accuracy
4. Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
6. Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input
or 7 kpa (20 psi) whichever is greater.
7. LCD
2.35 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: SPACE
A. Space mounted static pressure sensors shall be designed for room pressure
monitoring applications with all electrical and pressure connection on back of unit. I
addition, unit shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Input range of –50 to +50 Pa. (-0.2” to + 0.2” wc.)

2. 4-20mA, 0-5 or 0-10Vdc output proportional to pressure input
range compatible with the BAS.
3. 1% accuracy of range
4. Operating temperature range of 0ºC to 60ºC (32ºF to 140ºF).
5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero adjustment.
6. Minimum over pressure input protection of two times rated input
or 7 kpa (20 psi) whichever is greater.
7. LCD

REV 00
2.36 STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR: WATER
A. Pressure sensors shall meet the following requirements:
1. Input range of 0 to 1400 kPa

2. 4-20 mA output proportional to water pressure.
3. 0.5% accuracy of range.
F.).
5. Easily accessible, integral non-interacting zero and span adjustment.
6. Over pressure input protection of two times rated input.
7. An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application
and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
8. Stainless steel wetted parts.
9. Burst pressure of 5 times rated input
10. Long-term stability of .25 percent of full scale.

11. Construction of pressure transmitter and associated components shall
be rated for at least twice the maximum static pressure.
2.37 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR – AIR
A. Differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1. Output shall be 4-20mA, 0-10Vdc or 0-5Vdc output proportional
to pressure input range compatible with BAS.
2. Select range as required, taking into consideration pressure drop
across filter or coil. Typically 0 to 500Pa (0-2” wc) range for low-pressure
commercial duct.
3. Operating temperature range of 0 DEG C to 60 DEG C (32 DEG F
to 140 DEG F).
4. With LCD
2.38 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR - WATER

REV 00
A. Water differential pressure sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1. Cast aluminum an IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an

interior application and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2. Output of 4-20 mA proportional to the pressure sensed.
3. Over pressure protection of five times the rated input.
5. Operating range shall be suitable for the application. Select range
such that it covers from zero differential pressure up to a differential static
pressure of between 20% and 50% in excess of the maximum static pressure
that could be encountered. Remember that if the sensor is used for the
control of a chilled water bypass and is located across, for example, a
chilled water AHU coil, the pressure drop of both the coil and the associated
valve at full design flow have to be taken into account.
6. Accuracy of ± 2% of full-scale reading.
7. Valved
tapings shall be installed by the Mechanical contractor. Furnish
the valves to the Mechanical contractor.
2.39 MULTIPOINT AVERAGING AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION –

DUCTS, PLENUMS, FAN INLETS.
A. Multipoint averaging airflow measuring station shall meet, at minimum, the

1. Sensor and sensor measuring flow range shall be appropriate for the
application.
2. Multipoint averaging flow sensor complete with sensor, sensor
housing and mounting brackets. Sensor tubing shall be connected or removed
without removing ductwork.
3. Sensing grid shall be of stainless steel construction.
4. Internal materials of the transducer shall be suitable for contact with
air.
5. Integral signal integrator to minimize primary signal to noise
from the output signal.
6. Output signal of 4-20 mA proportional to input pressure, into a 600
OHM load.
7. Temperature range of -18 Deg C to 60 Deg C (0 Deg F to 140 Deg
F).

REV 00
8. 5% accuracy of the measured value.
9. With LCD.
2.40 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - AIR
A. Air differential pressure switch shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1. An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application

and an IP65 to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing.
2. SPDT switch rated for 10 amps minimum at 120 Vac.
3. Setpoint trip adjustment with scale to indicate setting. Switches used
for filter differential pressures shall also have a display of the monitored
differential pressure.
4. Dead band adjustment.
5. Select range such that it covers from zero duct static pressure
relative to the exterior of the duct up to a static pressure of between 20% and
50% in excess of the maximum static pressure that could be encountered in the
duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically:
a. For low pressure commercial duct use a range of

0 to 500pa (0 to 2 inches w.g.)
b. For medium pressure duct use a range of 0 to 1500Pa (0 to 6
inches w.g.)
c. For high pressure duct use a range of 0 to 2500Pa (0 to 10
inches w.g.)
6. Temperature range of -18 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (0 Deg. F. to 160

Deg. F.).
7. Manual reset.
2.41 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH - WATER
A. Water differential pressure switches shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:

REV 00
1. 316 stainless steel body.
2. Local display gauge.
3. End to end accuracy not to exceed ± 1.0% over entire range.
5. Over pressure input protection to a minimum of five (5) times rated
input.
6. The differential pressure transducer shall be rated to withstand
the maximum rated pressure of the system in which it is installed.
7. Range to be coordinated with the chilling unit manufacturer.
2.42 DAMPER END SWITCH
A. Damper end switch shall meet the following:
1. Adjustable axle mounted collar for easy setup and adjustment

2. Electrical enclosure with ½" knockout allowing for easy installation
3. Dual, opposed switches for fully opened or fully closed position
4. Switches will have the option to be set as normally closed (NC) or
normally opened (NO) by user.
2.43 LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
A. Liquid level float switches shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1. Polypropylene float, PVC cable, hermetically sealed mercury switch.

2. 13 amp running current @ 120 VAC, 11 amp current @ 240 VAC.
3. SPDT type.
4. Operating temperature of 0 Deg. C. to 71 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F. to 160
Deg. F.).
5. Operating pressure of 180 kPa
2.44 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER
A. Electromagnetic flow meter shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
REV 00
1. No moving parts.
2. Microprocessor-based.
3. 4-20 mA output.
4. Full lugged flanged.
5. Accuracy shall better than 5% of flow rate over a 33:1 turndown at
all flow rates above 1 fps.
6. The integrally mounted meter housing and flow meter sensor with an
IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65
to IEC 60529 housing for an exterior housing. The flow sensor coil housing
shall be steel and withstand 3500 kPa external pressure in all conditions.
7. Electronics shall be remote mounted within the central plant either
wall or column mounted adjacent to the bypass piping area.
8. Flow meter transmitter shall be furnished in an IP54 to IEC
60529 transmitter housing for an interior application and an IP65 to IEC
60529 housing for an exterior housing, with a character, 2 line 16 digit backlit
display. The alphanumeric display shall indicate user-defined flow units and
flow rate. All menu advice and commands shall be visible on this display.
9. The flow meter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -
40 Deg F to 200 Deg F and at pressures from full vacuum to 2100 kPa.
10. The meter shall feature non-volatile sensor memory (EEPROM))
which shall contain all the characteristics of the sensor (i.e. calibration factors,
coil frequency, gain settings) as well as user defined parameters on site. This
memory shall facilitate automatic transfer of pre-programmed data to new
electronics in the event of a transmitter fault, without requiring renewed
calibration/programming.
11. The flow meter shall have a switching power supply having an
operating range from 77-265 VAC 50/60 Hz (12-60 VDC). Power
consumption shall not exceed 20 VA.
12. Carbon steel body.
13. Flow meter shall distinguish between directions of fluid flow.
14. Construction of flow-meter and associated components shall be rated
for at least twice the maximum static pressure.
15. Flowmeters used in drinking water networks shall be certified
according to NSF/ ANSI 61 standard or an equivalent standard applicable for
drinking water applications.
2.45 THERMAL ENERGY METER (BTU METER):
A. The thermal energy meter (also called BTU Meter), in accordance with EN
1434 and OIML R75, should be designed specifically to capture energy consumption in
heating and cooling applications and integration into Automatic Meter Reading

REV 00
(AMR)/BAS network and Billing Software. The BTU meter shall be supplied with two
RTDs (Matched Pair) and two stainless steel thermowells.
B. The thermal energy meter should offer the most advanced BTU measurement
by using state- of-the-art ultrasonic or Electromagnetic flow measurement technology and
thus should not have moving parts. The body should be made of Bronze for sizes up to
DN40 and Cast Iron for flanged connection Meters sizing from DN50 and above.
C. The straight through sensor design should lead to zero blockage and
minuscule pressure drops and be ideal for cooling and heating applications even when
measuring the dirtiest liquid.
D. The meter should provide networking solutions using M-Bus, Modbus,

pulse, and BACnet protocols.
E. The meter should detect reverse flow.
F. The calculator should be Clamp On and Wall Mount type. Thermal

energy is calculated according to OIML R75 standard. The lithium battery should be
recharged over the M-Bus network, if M-Bus protocol is used.
G. For sizes below DN40, the meter should have a straight-through meter
containing a flow guide that extends the sound path, allowing for more precise
measurement. This reflector less design should ensure overall accuracy enhancement.
H. For large size meters (larger than DN50), the meter should be equipped
with Two/four pairs of ultrasonic transducers mounted on the flow sensor body to
interrogate the flow from two/four different paths or the it should be an
electromagnetic type meter achieving the specified accuracy
I. The Thermal Energy Meter should respect the following operating condition:
1. Operating Pressure: 16 bars

2. Static Current: <10uA
3. Battery Life: 10 years at tBAT< 30°C
4. Battery Type: Lithium,3.6V
5. Network Power Supply: Automatically switch to M-Bus or RS485
Power if available.
6. Accuracy Class: Class 2 (OIML R75 Compliant)
7. Back Flow Detection: yes
REV 00
8. Flow Temperature: 0°C to 95°C/130°C
9. Ambient Class: Class B.
10. Calculator protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
11. Flow Sensor Protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
12. AMR Connectivity: M-Bus, MODBUS, BACnet, Pulse
2.46 ULTRASONIC WATER METER:
A. Provide water meter as indicated in the water riser diagrams and control
diagrams. The water meters shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements.
B. The water meter should offer the most advanced measurement by using state-
of-the-art ultrasonic flow measurement technology and thus should not have moving parts.
The body should be made of Bronze for sizes up to DN40 and Cast Iron for flanged
connection Meters sizing from DN50 and above.
C. The sensor should have a non-obstructive sensor design which should lead
to zero blockage and minuscule pressure drops and be ideal for cooling and heating
applications even when measuring the dirtiest liquid.
D. The sensor should remain proactive and identify leakage in order to capture
lost revenue by detecting leak as low as a few drops per second.
E. The meter should provide networking solutions using M-Bus, Modbus,

pulse, and BACnet protocols.
F.The meter should detect reverse flow.
G. The calculator should be Clamp-On or Wall Mount type. The lithium

battery should be recharged over the M-Bus network, if M-Bus protocol is used.
H. For large size meters (larger than DN50), the meter should be equipped
with Two/four pairs of ultrasonic transducers mounted on the flow sensor body to
interrogate the flow from two/four different paths.
I. Flowmeters used in drinking water networks shall be certified according to

NSF/ ANSI 61 standard or an equivalent standard applicable for drinking water
applications.

REV 00
J. The Meter should respect the following operating condition:
1. Operating Pressure: 16 bars

2. Static Current: <10uA
3. Battery Life: 10 years at tBAT< 30°C
4. Battery Type: Lithium,3.6V
5. Network Power Supply: Automatically switch to M-Bus or RS485
Power if available.
6. Accuracy Class: Class 2 (OIML R75 Compliant)
7. Back Flow Detection: yes
8. Flow Temperature: 5°C to 95°C
9. Ambient Class: Class B.
10. Calculator protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
11. Flow Sensor Protection: IP68 waterproof, submersible
12. Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) Connectivity: M-Bus, Modbus,
BACnet, Pulse
2.47 M-BUS CONCENTRATOR:
A. The concentrators should be used with an Automatic Meter Reading (AMR)

system to facilitate the communication between the data center and the M-Bus utility
meters of the Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) system. The concentrator should support
BTU meters, water meters and electricity energy meters.
B. The M-bus Concentrator should have BACnet/IP interface to the BAS and
M-BUS and RS- 485 ports to connect the M-bus meters to the Automatic Meter Reading
(AMR) meter reading master station.
C. The Communications parameters can be configured.
D. The concentrator can connect different quantity meters: 60pcs, 150pcs,

250pcs.The power supply: 12V or 24V.
E. The concentrator should follow the international standard M-BUS (Meter-

BUS, EN1434-3). The wire line can be connected random as per topological structure.

REV 00
F. The two cores cable connection can finish data communication at the same
Time and the max transmission range can reach 1000m.
G. The M-Bus concentrator with no memory can be used as a repeater.
H. The major M-Bus concentrator can be equipped with memory.
I. As per requirement, the M-Bus concentrator has to be equipped with, M-Bus

port or RS-485 Modbus port or BACnet MS/TP.
2.48 WATER METER
A. Water meters for monitoring shall meet, at minimum, the following

requirements:
1. Internal materials of the flow meter shall be suitable for the

application.
2. Pulsed output signal proportional to flow, transmitted to the BAS.
3. Minimum operating pressure of 1050 kPa.
4. 1 1/4 inch size with screwed NPT connections.
5. Accuracy of 2 %.
6. Maximum pressure drop of 42 kPa.
2.49 CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
A. Current sensing relays shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
1. Rated and sized for the applicable load.

2. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its
complete operating range.
3. Current relay shall have input and output isolation via current
transformer.
4. Current relay shall be self-powered with no insertion loss.
5. Relay shall be housed a dustproof enclosure.
6. Accuracy to be <2% of full-scale max.

REV 00
7. Temperature rating of –15 Deg C to 60 Deg C (5 Deg F to 140 Deg
F).
8. Option: Provide LED indication of relay status.
B. Whenever the status of a motor cannot be monitored though a differential

pressure switch it shall be done via a current sensing relay. The BAS contractor shall
provide current sensing relays at the MCC starters or at the local starters.
2.50 VOLTAGE SENSING RELAY
A. Voltage sensing relays shall continuously monitor 3-phase power lines for
phase loss, phase reversal and low voltage. Voltage sensing relays shall meet, at
1. Dustproof ABS plastic housing.

2. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its
complete operating range.
3. Relay shall have over current and over voltage protection.
4. Automatic reset with adjustable reset delay.
5. Adjustable trip delay.
6. Transient protection - 2500 VRMS for 10 ms.
7. Accuracy - ± 0.1% of setpoint.
8. Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20
Deg. F. to 120 Deg. F.).
9. Accuracy - ± 0.5% of FS voltage.
10. Operating temperature range of -29 Deg. C. to 49 Deg. C. (-20
Deg. F. to 120 Deg. F.).
2.51 KW AND KWH TRANSDUCER
A. Provide kW and kWh transducers as identified in Field termination

sheets and/or control drawings. Transducer shall include, at minimum, the following:
1. True RMS conversion.

2. 24 Bit DSP signal processor.
3. On board potential transformers for up to 600 Vac applications.

REV 00
4. Configurable via RS-232C on personal computer.
5. RS-485 data port for communication with BAS.
6. 4-20 mA proportional to KW demand output.
7. Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc
@150mA for kWH output.
8. Opto-isolated open collector solid state form a relay rated at 30 Vdc
@150mA for phase loss output.
9. Accuracy 1% or better of full scale.
10. Operating temperature of 0ºC to 70ºC (32ºF to 158ºF).
11. Provide disconnect/shorting bar and Current Transformer compatible
with amperage being sensed.
12. With LCD.
2.52 CONTROL RELAYS – LATCHING
A. Latching Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Pickup rating, time and hold rating as required for individual

applications.
2. Rated for a minimum of ten (10) million mechanical operations and a
minimum of 500,000 electrical operations.
3. Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital
output.
4. Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
5. Malfunction of a BAS component shall cause the controlled output
to fail to the positions identified in the failure procedure within the operating
sequences.
6. 10 amp contact rating.
7. Pin type terminals.
2.53 CONTROL RELAYS – MOMENTARY
A. Momentary Relays shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Coil ratings of 240 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VAC/VDC, 40 mA as

suitable for the application.
2. Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital
output.
REV 00
3. Located in the DCP, DDC, ASC or other local enclosures.
4. 10 amp contact rating.
5. LED status indication.
2.54 AIR QUALITY SENSOR – WALL MOUNTED
A. Provide wall mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the Field
termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Measurement of volatile organic compounds (VOC) containing, at

minimum, the following gases:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
f. Ammonia
2. Microprocessor based using a semiconductor element based on the

Taguchi gas principle.
3. White attractive ventilated cover.
4. 20-30 Vac/dc power supply, 100mA @24Vdc, 220mA @24Vac,
6VA max.
5. Analog stepped output standard (0-10 Vdc) or optional 4-20mA and
adjustable relay.
6. Programming and selection via internal push buttons and jumpers.
7. Temperature range of 0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF).
2.55 AIR QUALITY SENSOR – DUCT MOUNTED
A. Provide duct mounted air quality sensors as indicated within the field
termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Sensors shall meet, at minimum, the

REV 00
1. Measurement of air stream volatile organic compounds (VOC)
containing, at minimum, the following gases:
a. Methane
b. Ethylene
c. Hydrogen
d. Carbon Monoxide
e. Propane
2. Ammonia
3. Microprocessor based using a semiconductor element based on the
Taguchi gas principle.
4. 20-30 Vac/dc power supply, 100mA @24Vdc, 220mA @24Vac,
6VA max.
5. Analog stepped output standard (0-10 Vdc) or optional 4-20mA and

adjustable relay.
6. Programming and selection via internal push buttons and jumpers.
7. Temperature range of 0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)
8. 200 mm (8”) duct probe.
2.56 CARBONE DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSOR
A. Provide a space or duct carbon dioxide gas detection sensor as indicated

within the field termination schedules and/or control diagrams. Carbon dioxide detection
sensors shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. A non-dispersive infrared sensor set-up to be fully microprocessor

based via plug and play LCD.
2. 4-20 mA, 0-10 or 0-5 Vdc output compatible with BAS proportional
to 0 to 2000 ppm (adjustable to 10,000 ppm in 500 ppm increments) of carbon
dioxide concentration
3. Power supply to be 20-30Vac/dc @ 80 mA max for 24 Vac and 36
mA avg @24 Vdc.
4. No maintenance or period sensor replacement needed. The sensor
shall have a 5- year calibration interval, utilizing the Automatic Calibration
Logic Program (ACLP).

REV 00
5. The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop
drawing stage and shall be amended as directed by the Employer and/or
Engineer.
6. Standard accuracy to be 3% of reading or 75 ppm, whichever is
greater.
7. Operating temperature of 0ºC to 50ºC (32ºF to 122ºF).
2.57 CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) SENSOR (FOR BOILER ROOMS)
A. Provide CO monitoring system for the boiler rooms with the following
minimum requirements:
1. Sensors shall be of the electrochemical type.

2. Locate sensing points on walls and columns at 1.5 to 2m (5-6ft)
above floor level. Locate one sensing point per 700 m2 (7500 ft²).
3. Sensor range shall be of 0 to 300 ppm for 7% accuracy cell or 500
ppm for 3% accurate cell.
4. Provide two (2) relay contacts, at minimum, per sensor, to indicate
CO warning level (initially set at 50ppm) and CO alarm level (initially set at
200ppm) for each sensing point.
5. Unit shall be complete with 85 db audible alarm and have visual
output reading via an LCD of the gas sensed.
6. Provide 4-20mA, 0-10 or 0-5Vdc output of Carbon Monoxide sensed
compatible with BAS.
7. The proposed sensor locations shall be submitted at the shop
drawing stage and shall be amended as directed by the Employer and/or
Engineer.
8. Sensor shall be factory calibrated and will only require calibration
after a minimum one (1) year service.
2.58 DOOR AND WINDOW SWITCHES
A. Description: Balanced-magnetic switch, installed on frame. Encapsulated

reed switch shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign magnetic fields.
B. Flush-Mounted Switches: Unobtrusive and flush with surface of door and

window frame.

REV 00
C. Overhead Door Switch: Balanced-magnetic type, listed for outdoor
locations, and having door mounted magnet and floor-mounted switch unit.
D. Reed switch shall have a life expectancy of one million operations.
2.59 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION MONITORING
A. Provide refrigerant leak monitoring as identified within the point schedules

and/or control diagrams. Refrigerant leak detection monitors shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Power consumption: AC - 325 mA, DC - 250 mA.

2. Operating temperature range of 0 Deg. C. to 70 Deg. C. (32 Deg. F.
to 158 Deg. F.).
3. Operating humidity range: 10% to 95% non-condensing.
4. Measuring range of 0-1000 ppm proportional to 4 to 20mA output
range for each sampling point.
5. Volt free contacts to indicate an alarm condition.
6. Meeting all applicable BSI standards including BSI standard
97/700630 DC (Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and
environmental requirements. Refrigerant compressors (prEN 12693))
7. Refrigerant gas system detection supplier/contractor shall be familiar
with standard practices of safety and installation for refrigerant gas detection
systems.
8. Submit details of refrigerant monitors, breathing apparatus, control
panel and diagrams as part of the submittal process.
9. System shall detect the presence of the following types of
refrigerants regardless of refrigerant type using sequential sampling and multi-
point monitoring method:
a. CFC
b. HCFC
c. HFC
10. Diluted samples due to ventilation airflow currents shall employ

multi-point monitoring techniques strategically located according to regulation
guidelines. In multiple chiller applications it shall be considered whether
mechanical room size and layout can adequately be monitored to comply
with regulation with a multi-point system. System design considerations shall

REV 00
also be incorporated in leak detection monitoring sensing locations for early
warning indication to prevent a major loss of refrigerant without alarm should
a leak occur. Sensing ports shall be piped in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations with 8mm (1/4") copper tubing and fittings.
11. System shall annunciate to the BAS and locally alarm (audible and
visual) upon detection of alarm conditions. Provide silencing alarm button at
control panel. Provide approved appropriate signage at all entry points to
the chiller room. Initial alarm shall comply with recommended Allowable
Exposure Level (AEL). Adjustable 3 level alarms for each point shall be
supplied with common alarm
output contacts. Provide local digital indication of ppm level for a minimum of
X 3 sample points. A sample point shall be located close to each chiller and the
refrigerant pump out unit location. Engineer shall approve each location.
Sample point if in alarm shall flash the associated LED. Provide local alarm
horns and visual (stroboscopic) beacons at the following locations to
activate upon alarm to an approved detail:
a. Outside of entrance doors to chiller machine room.

b. Inside rooms without an escape route other than through the
chiller room.
c. At each chiller location.
d. At any other location in the chiller room as
necessary to ensure that a person at any location in the chiller
room and room that can be entered from the chiller room can
see the visual alarm and hear the audible alarm and at any
other location required to meet the applicable codes.
12. System shall shut down all electrical equipment (chiller systems
and associated pumps, AHU, FCU, SRAC, etc.) and sequence emergency
extract equipment as required to meet regulations. Where combustion
equipment is employed, refrigerant vapor monitoring system shall
automatically shut down the combustion process in event of refrigerant
leakage if other alternative acceptable conditions are not applied. Ventilation
system, chiller and associated pumps and other equipment shut down as a
result of the refrigerant leak alarm shall return to normal operation when the
refrigerant monitoring system is no longer detecting refrigerant levels above
setpoints and alarms have been silenced.
13. Oxygen deficiency shall not be acceptable in lieu of TLV-TWA
monitoring for human safety exposure. At the TLV-TWA level the system
shall activate purge ventilation equipment.
14. Analyzer shall be microprocessor based and employ infrared (IR)
sensor technology to sense to one part per million (ppm) and shall be
compound specific and/or monitor multiple compounds and be calibrated for
refrigerant in use by approved chiller system. Any installed unit shall be

REV 00
switchable to monitor another refrigerant type by changing one part and re-
calibration. System shall be factory calibrated.
15. Provide a sequential sampling system integrated into one or more
analyzer enclosures. Microprocessor shall sequentially control required flow
valves and communicate output signals to allow monitoring from multiple
remote sampling locations. Unit shall read and hold output value of infrared
sensor and control corresponding four point sequential sampling assembly.
Each sampling point shall have adjustable sampling time and adjustable levels
of alarm with sample line capability up to 500 feet.
16. System shall auto zero calibrate at one hour intervals and/or via
operator control. Zero calibration shall be achieved by drawing clean
uncontaminated air. Sampling of outside intake plenum shall be acceptable if it
meets requirements. Include built-in sample pump and differential
pressure flow switch for low flow indication. Provide a separate 4-20 mA
dc analogue output for each sampling point for BAS monitoring or one
digital communications link for the output of refrigerant level for BAS
monitoring. Unit shall be insensitive to vibration and temperature variations
and shall provide for a continuous sample. Intermittent dump and purge, batch
type samples with long response time shall not be acceptable. Response time
shall be 20 to 90 seconds typical. Electrochemical sensing technology
employing depletion sensors and short-term life sensors, which deplete as a
normal part of their operation or storage shelf life shall not be acceptable.
17. System shall have self-diagnostics and supply common malfunction

output. Loss of sample flow at either sample or ZERO line and electrical
malfunction shall annunciate to the BAS.
18. Provide two (2) additional particulate filters and zero gas filter
cartridges.
19. Provide self-contained breathing apparatus that is OSHA approved
and certified meeting the following requirements:
a. Certified for 60 minutes of use.

b. Complies with BSI requirements.
c. Furnish in clearly marked wall mount metal

enclosures to be located inside each room that does not have
an escape route apart from through the chiller room, outside
one exterior door serving the chiller machine room, within the
chiller room at locations such that no point in the chiller room
is more than 20 meters from an escape door or a SCBA and at
all other locations required by the code. Locations of SCBA to
be approved by the Engineer.

REV 00
20. Provide an emergency shut-off control button outside each chiller
plant room entrance/exit door. Button shall be mounted at 1200mm above
finished floor adjacent to refrigerant leak detection alarm light. Activation of
any one of the buttons shall de-energize all chillers and other electrical
equipment within the chiller plant room. Button shall be manually reset.
2.60 WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM FOR SERVERS ROOM
A. Provide water leak monitoring as identified within the Field termination

schedules and/or control diagrams. Water leak detection monitors shall meet, at
1. Water leak detection and locating system to give the earliest

warning of a leak from Pipework and Ventilation equipment fitted with drip
trays etc.
2. The system shall Provide an alarm giving an accurate location of
a leak at a specific zone at high or low level within drip trays etc., (where
fitted) above / below racks, A/C Units, UPS equipment etc.
3. The system shall comprise a network of sensing devices connected
to a locally mounted control panel. The sensing device shall consist of water
sensing cables, the liquid must touch a sensing device for an alarm to be
activated.
4. The leak detection system will continuously monitor the network of
sensing devices and give an alarm in the event of detecting a leak or
system/sensing device malfunction, damage or disconnection.
5. A control panel will be capable of monitoring up to 200% of the
required area and required length of cable sensors.
6. The length and/or number of sensing cable or devices and their
installation disposition shall be as recommended by the specialist sub-
contractor or supplier in accordance with the general requirement set down in
the schedule and drawings
7. The system shall be capable of reporting the location of a leak to a
sufficiently accurate position to enable the operator to locate and identify the
activated section of detection cable quickly and accurately
8. A control panel shall be capable of providing the level of accuracy of
leak detection required. This may be achieved by applying a contiguous
number of separately reporting zones of appropriate length. Wherever possible
the allocation and installation of zones shall be arranged to coincide with
defined
areas or “land-marks”, individual rooms, partition walls or other easily

identifiable features. This is to facilitate speedy and positive leak location.

REV 00
B. Leak Detection sensor Cable/Tape
1. The sensor cable shall be made from Low Smoke and Fume –
Zero Halogen (LSF0H) materials for smoke reduction and low toxicity.
The cable shall be made from durable, non-deteriorating materials and have
no exposed metallic parts. It shall not be adversely affected by the buildup of
dust or other dry dirt/debris.
2. In the event of damage or irrevocable contamination the affected part
of the cable should be capable of on-site repair. It should not be necessary
to replace the whole length.
C. Leak detection cable installation
1. In drip trays suspended above / below Racks A/C Units, AHU’s,

water pipework, UPS equipment etc.
2. In Conduit at high / low level above Power Supply Boards within
each area.
3. The cable will be fixed to the tray at approximately 0.5 meter
intervals and at every change in direction. Acceptable fixings will be self-
adhesive clips or cold adhesive or other approved fixing. Adhesive fixings will
only be used where the floor finish is clean, stable and non-dusting.
4. Identification/warning tags will be attached to the cable every 1 - 2
meters. Tags will state purpose of cable and will show any relevant
information (such as zone number or distance reference) to confirm the
location of that particular part.
5. Special ‘Plug & Play Auto Zone Changeover Couplers (Type –
RJ48) will be used for zone changes and connection to leader cables. To
confirm location the Zone Couplers will be labeled showing its reference
number and the preceding and following zone numbers.
6. Appropriate connectors will be used to join separate cable lengths
and leader/ jumper cables. To confirm location the connectors will be labeled
showing any reference number and relevant location information.
D. The water leak detection system will be applied and mapped in such a way as
to make the part of the sensor network detecting the leak easy to identify and physically
locate. This may be achieved by sub-dividing the sensor network into a series of
separately reporting zones displayed on the control. In any event the zone displayed by the
control panel shall be cross- referenced to a map, chart or diagram which shall clearly
show the routing of the sensor network, its relationship to the building layout and any
fixed zone positions or cumulative distance marks.
E. The leak detection cable shall be:

REV 00
1. Supplied in rolls for cutting and jointing according to site

requirements or
2. Supplied as pre-connected standard lengths.
3. Capable of repeated re-use - (wetting then drying).
4. Robust construction - resistant to moderate physical abuse
5. Resistant to temperatures up to 100 Deg.C
6. No exposes metal parts
7. Not affected by dust and debris
8. Capable of being attached directly to bare metal surfaces or pipes
without “shorting” or other interference.
9. Capable of being monitored along its entire length for damage or
disconnection.
F. Leader cables will be LSF Zero Halogen double insulated, multi-core, 7/0.2
strands (or solid equivalent) or similar. All leader cables must be monitored along their
entire length for damage or disconnection.
G. The Control Panel will give a full range of status indicators - mains
/battery etc. and visual and audible alarms:
1. LEAK – showing affected zone / leak location

2. SYSTEM FAULT - detection device and/or leader cable damage:
a. Short circuit or disconnection /break

b. Open circuit. Both occurrences will show the
affected zone / fault location
H. The Control Panel should be able to locate, accept, display and store
concurrent and/or consecutive multiple alarms and show the exact status of all zones
at all times (Leak, System Fault or Quiet).
I. Outputs and Communication:
1. Volt free contact changeover relay outputs will be provided for

connection to BAS or other remote alarm or monitoring system. As a
minimum these will include: Common Leak, Common System Fault, Mains
Fail/All Fail, Zone alarms.
2. The option for individual zone outputs should also be available.

REV 00
J. The Control Panel should be mains operated (220/230VAC 50/60Hz) and

must include a trickle charged sealed lead-acid stand-by battery capable of maintaining
the system for 24 hours in quiet monitoring mode.
K. The sensitivity of the system must be adjustable to suit particular site

conditions.
L. The system must conform to FCC or local EMC regulations, and shall be
tested and marked by and international testing laboratory.
2.61 AMBIENT LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR
A. Provide ambient light level sensors as indicated within the field termination
schedules and/or control diagrams. Light level sensor shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Light
sensor shall have a 12 – 35 Vdc power at maximum 22mA
current draw.
2. 4-20 mA output proportional to the ambient light level where 4 mA
is light and 20 mA is dark.
3. Photo sensitive resistor with analog transducer.
4. Mounted on the exterior of a North wall on the roof.
5. Temperature range of -25ºC to 75ºC (-13ºF to 167ºF)
2.62 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided at the supply and return ducts of all
AHU’s and at the ducted branches from ceiling voids used as return air plenums to the
main ducted return air system. To initiate closing of dampers and/or shutting off of
fans having the following features:
1. Photo-electric type for duct mounting

2. Adjustable sensitivity
3. Housing of die-cast aluminum for mounting on outside of duct
wall with air sampling tubes extending into air duct, fitted with filters.

REV 00
4. Reset switch and indicator lamps for power ON and/or alarm
5. Integral switching relay (2No SPDT Contacts) for energizing an
alarm panel and for de-energizing air handling devices.
6. UL Listed.
7. Alarm response time less than 10 seconds.
8. Air Velocity range 0.5 to 20 m/s.
9. Operating temperature 0 to 55 DegC.
10. Operating humidity 10 to 95% (Non Condensing)
B. All duct smoke detectors shall be connected to the building’s Fire Alarm
System.
C. Supply duct smoke detector installation should be downstream of fans, filters,

coils, heaters, and humidifiers
D. Duct smoke detectors in the return air stream should be located at every
return air opening within the smoke compartment, or where the air exits each smoke
compartment or in the duct system before air enters the return air system common to more
than one compartment.
E. Exception: Additional smoke detectors are not required in ducts where the
air duct system passes through other smoke compartments not served by the duct.
F. Location of detectors mounted in or on air ducts should be downstream from

any duct openings, deflection plates, sharp bends or branch connections.
G. Exception: Where it is physically impossible to locate the detector

accordingly, the detector can be positioned where pressure differentials are within
those established by the manufacturer for the proper operation of the detector, usually as
far as possible from the opening, bend or deflection plates.
H. Detectors should be listed by a third party testing laboratory for the

environment measured in the duct and room at the installation site. Relocate the detector if
measurements fall outside of rated limits.
I. An access panel or door is incorporated in the duct side walls and is used
during installation and for maintenance and test.
J. Duct smoke detectors should be located at a minimum of 3 meters

downstream from humidifiers
REV 00
2.63 CONTROL VALVES GENERAL
A. Furnish all valves controlled by the BAS as detailed in the mechanical trade
documents and as indicated on the control drawings which form part of these sub-contract
documents. The contractor shall install valves, except those for instrumentation.
B. Refer to the Mechanical plans and drawings and to the control drawings
which form part of these sub-contract documents for the design conditions on which to
base sizing and ratings of the valves and their actuators.
C. The complete valve (body and trim) shall be rated for a pressure that is at
least 50% greater than the maximum pressure to which it will be exposed. Where noted
in this Section, the valve shall be rated for a higher pressure. The complete valve shall be
rated for a temperature that shall be at least 50 deg. C. (90 deg. F.) greater than the
maximum temperature to which it will be exposed. The Manufacturer shall certify that
each complete valve is suitable for and meets all relevant standards for the application.
D. All valves shall be rated appropriately for the fluid, temperature and pressure
and, at minimum, shall have a 16 bar rating. Valves shall comply with BS EN 60534.
E. Valves of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer.
F. Valves shall have the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating clearly
marked on the outside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer's name and
valve pressure rating shall be engraved on a minimum 50mm (2 inch) diameter stainless
steel tag that shall be attached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot
be unintentionally removed.
G. Valves 13mm to 50mm (0.5 inch to 2 inches) shall have screwed ends.
Screwed ends shall comply with BS EN 10226 (Specification for pipe threads for
tubes and fittings where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads - metric
dimensions). Valves 63mm (2.5 inches) and larger shall have flanged ends. Flanged
valves shall be furnished complete with companion flanges, gaskets and bolting
materials. Flanges, gaskets and bolting materials shall meet the appropriate BS EN
requirements.
H. Verify and certify that the materials of construction of the pipe, weld, flange,
bolts and valve will not cause any galvanic corrosion.
I. Valves shall be suitable for continuous throttling.

REV 00
J. Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the
following for each valve:
1. Associated system.
2. Manufacturer and model number.
3. Valve size and line size.
4. Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design
conditions
5. Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at
design conditions and pressure drop across the associated mechanical
equipment, e.g., coil, heat exchanger, etc., at design conditions.
6. Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
7. Leakage rate.
8. Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
9. Actuator manufacturer and model number.
10. Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
11. Normally open/closed and failure positions.
K. Where necessary to achieve the required performance and pressure drop a

control valve may be sized up to two nominal sizes below line size.
L. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, carbon steel, brass, stainless steel or bronze
subject to requirements for valve body pressure and temperature rating and suitability of
material for application. Valve stem and trim shall be stainless steel.
M. Valve seats shall be replaceable. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled
PTFE or equivalent and must assure tight seating.
2.64 TWO WAY CONTROL VALVES
A. All 2 way control valves shall be dynamic, modulating, pressure

independent control valves (PICV) and shall be provided by the same
manufacturer. PICVs shall be installed on each cooling (or heating) coil as indicated on
the drawings and/or contract documents. The valve shall be a combination of balancing
valve and control valve and differential pressure control valve and shall be able to control
the flow independent of the system pressure fluctuation.

REV 00
B. Balancing valves and associated balancing shall not be used where pressure
independent modulating control valves are installed. The control valve must have the
ability to limit flow to the maximum design flow specific for each coil at all valve
differential pressure ranges of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar) ) or higher as per maximal system
differential pressure.
a. Valves shall be robust, rated as per operating & testing pressure requirements of the project.
The operating differential pressure across the valve shall be 6 bars. If the pump head is
less than 3.5 bar, operating differential pressure 4 bar can be considered
C. Each control valve shall be individually flow tested and factory verified to
deviate no more than ±5% through the entire operating pressure range of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34
to 4 bar) or higher as per maximal system differential pressure. All valves shall be
tested on a test stand calibrated and verified with traceability to NIST standards. All
testing must be performed at 5 PSI (0° through 90° at 10° increments), 15 and 60 PSI (45°
and 90°). Test reports must be provided if requested.
D. Valve shall require no more than 5 PSI (0.34 bar) to be operated pressure
independent. Flow shall not vary more than ±5% through the entire operating pressure
range of 5 to 60 PSI (0.34 to 4 bar).
a. The differential pressure controller shall be of EPDM diaphragm mechanism

and not cartridge type constriction, to minimize blockage. And NO any plastic part will be
acceptable.
b. The leakage rate of the valves shall be in the range of 0.05% - 0.10% of the
maximum flow.
E. Each control valve shall be factory commissioned. A calibrated performance

tag shall be provided with each valve listing the measured flow rate in 10° rotation
increments.
F.Control valve range ability shall be a minimum of 100:1 through the operating
pressure range.
G. Valve bodies 2” [50mm] and smaller shall be brass. Valve bodies 3”

[80mm] through 8” [200mm] shall be ductile iron. All internal parts shall be brass,
carbon steel, stainless steel or Teflon®.
H. All valves shall have at least two (2) factory installed

pressure/temperature ports to allow field verification of flow and pressure independent
REV 00
operation based on Kv-methodology at every presetting. If the test points are not available
or flow measurement based on Kv- methodology is not possible separate orifice plate
shall be provided and installed in series with each PICV.
I. Valve flow characteristics may be modified in valves 8” [200mm] and

smaller without removal from the piping system.
a. The valve shall have a linear characteristic, which shall be converted to equal percentage by
the actuator and linear improved controls between Input Signal vs. Heat Output. The
control valves used for Terminal Units should have a Logarithmic control characteristic.
The control valves used for Heat Exchangers should have a linear control characteristic.
J. With the valve it should be possible to set the maximum flow for balancing
from 100% to 0% (infinite control). The setting, which can be locked, should be visible
from the top for valves DN 32 and from the side for DN 40-250.
K. For stable and accurate modulating control the stroke of the valve shall be ≥
4mm for valves DN15-20 and ≥ 6.5mm for valves DN25 and above.
L. Valve differential pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than the

associated pump’s design head pressure. Valve assembly and actuator torque shall be
selected to close off against this differential pressure.
M. For large pipe sizes (>DN200), where PICV is not available, 2 nos. of
PICVs installed in parallel shall be provided even if not indicated on the drawings or
separate DPCV (Differential Pressure Control Valve), Orifice plate and 2 Way Globe
Modulating Control Valve to achieve pressure independent controls.
2.65 THREE WAY CONTROL VALVES
A. Provide three-way globe control valves as indicated on the mechanical trade

documents.
B. Pressure drop shall not exceed 0.35 bar and shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. Valves shall be selected such that the valve authority (N) shall not
be less than

REV 00
1.5 for diverting valves and 0.3 for mixing valves as defined by the
relationship: N=P1/(P1+P2) where:
a. P1= pressure drop across the fully open valve

b. P2= pressure drop across the remainder of the circuit (e.g. a
coil)
C. Three way control valves shall be of the mixing or diverting pattern type as
indicated in the mechanical documents. The inner valve shall have a V-port parabolic or
linear plug and stainless steel trim. Valves shall have metal-to-metal stainless steel seats to
assure tight seating.
D. Mixing valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each inlet port
and the outlet port and diverting valves shall be capable of tight shut-off between each
outlet port and the inlet port when operating at system pressure.
2.66 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly valves shall be the full lug type.
B. The pressure drop across modulating butterfly valves at maximum design

flow shall not exceed 0.2 bar
C. Disc pins, where required to secure shaft to disc, shall be 316 stainless steel.
D. The butterfly valve manufacturer shall certify compliance with bubble tight
shut-off requirements at a differential pressure not less than the full rated design
working pressure and temperature specified with the downstream flange removed with
flow in either direction.
E. Valve manufacturer shall guarantee zero leakage to the shaft.
F. Where indicated in the Mechanical Trade documents provide linked butterfly

valves that shall comprise two butterfly valves meeting the above requirements mounted
on a flanged cast iron tee with a single actuator which shall modulate one valve open as
it closes the other such that when one is fully open the other is fully closed and vice versa.
2.67 VALVES ACTUATORS - ELECTRIC

REV 00
A. The contractor shall provide actuators for valves that are compatible with
the BAS and the selected control valves. All control valve actuators shall be modulating
type.
a. The Pressure Independent Balancing & Control Valve and the Modulating Actuator shall be
from the same manufacturer in the range from DN 10- 250.
B. Actuator shall be motor driven type. Valve stem position shall be adjustable
in increments of one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.
C. Actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical travel

stops and two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
D. Actuator gear assembly shall be made of hard-anodized aluminum or

steel or material of equivalent durability. No plastic components shall be acceptable for
the gear drive assembly. Disassembly of the gears shall not be required to remove the
motor.
E. Actuator shall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of
220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz or 24 V.
F. Actuator housing shall have a minimum IP 54 to IEC 60529 rating.

Actuators on valves located in mechanical rooms or outdoors shall have covers of
aluminum or a material of equivalent strength and shall have captive bolts to eliminate
loss of bolts when removing the cover from the base. Housings for valves located in a
plenum and used for terminal unit or fan coil unit heating/cooling coils, may be
constructed of reinforced plastic. Materials of construction for all actuator components
shall be non-corroding.
G. Actuator motor shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance.
H. Actuator shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating

at the maximum system differential pressure and with the installed system pump operating
at shut-off head.
I. Actuator shall control against system maximum working pressures.
J. Provide spring return for all PICV actuators, so that PICVs serving AHUs
and FCUs, powered from normal power source, shall close in case of power or control

REV 00
signal loss, and PICVs serving AHUs and FCUs, powered from Emergency power source,
shall open in case of power or control signal loss.
K. Actuator shall accept control signals compatible with the BAS analogue or
digital output subsystem as appropriate. The valve stem position shall be linearly related
to the control signal.
L. Actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output

shaft and valve position.
M. Actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open
position and vice versa in less than two minutes.
N. Actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration without

operations failure. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.
O. Actuator shall be equipped with an integral position potentiometer to indicate

the stem position of the valve where required by the control sequences. All valve
actuators shall have integral end position switches.
P. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the

location/orientation approved by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly
indicate the valve location.
Q. Actuator shall have a manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of

the valve. It shall be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in
mechanical rooms in the event of loss of power. The operator shall be able to manually
modulate the valves without having to climb a ladder or other non-permanent structure. It
shall be ensured that the valve installation is such that the valve cannot declutch under
the influence of gravity and/or vibration.
2.68 VALVES FOR INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrumentation, such as pressure sensors and flow rate monitors, which is

provided for the monitoring of parameters associated with liquid in pipes or tanks, shall
be removable and replaceable without the requirement to shut down a pump and
without the requirement to drain the pipe or tank and without causing liquid to leak
from the pipe or tank. To facilitate this, the BAS subcontractor shall furnish valves
for installation by the mechanical trade.

REV 00
B. Instrumentation that is mounted external to the pipe or tank and which is
connected to the pipe or tank by one or more sampling lines shall have a manual two-
way on/off valve in each sampling line meeting the following requirements:
1. Ball type valve

2. Valve body shall be 316 stainless steel
3. Ball and stem shall be 316 stainless steel
4. Zero leakage.
5. Rated for 1050 kPa or for a pressure 50% greater than the system
working pressure, whichever is greater.
6. Rated for a minimum of 50 deg. C (90 deg. F.) greater than the
highest fluid temperature.
7. Brass or stainless steel trim.

8. Valve seats shall be metal, reinforced TFE or equivalent and must
assure tight seating.
C. Valves for insertion flow meters shall be full port gate valves sized for the
flow meter in accordance with the flow meter manufacturer’s instructions. If the flow
meter manufacturer offers the valve as an accessory then it shall be purchased by the
BAS subcontractor from the insertion flow meter manufacturer and shall be installed by
the mechanical trade in accordance with the insertion flow meter manufacturer’s
instructions. The valve shall meet the pressure and temperature requirements detailed for
the control valves and shall have zero leakage at the system maximum pressure.
D. DAMPERS GENERAL
E. Provide actuators for all motorized dampers excluding motorized fire

and/or smoke rated dampers. All motorized damper actuators furnished by the BAS
Specialist shall be on/off or modulating dampers as per the BAS design drawings.
F. Multiple section two position dampers shall be controlled by one BAS output
unless indicated otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
G. Multiple section modulating dampers shall be controlled in sequence unless

indicated otherwise within the Point Schedules or Sequences of Operation.
H. Actuators shall be mounted to allow complete access for maintenance and

removal. Wherever possible provide damper actuators mounted on the exterior of the
duct/damper section. The installation of actuators within air streams will be permitted
only where damper configurations and site conditions require. Obtain approval for
REV 00
proposed installations of actuators within ductwork, plenums, airstreams, etc. Furnish
access doors where required to allow access.
I. Damper actuators shall be configured for normal and failure positions as

indicated in the operating sequences and as indicated on the MEP Specialist
Mechanical Drawings and Specifications. Provide damper end switches on 2-position
actuators and position feedback for modulating damper actuators.
J. Provide actuators sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations

and industry standards for accurate and stable control of airflow in each application.
K. Provide damper actuator installations to comply with the acoustical

requirements for the project. Noise generated from damper actuators in air streams
shall not be detectable in occupied building spaces.
L. Damper actuators shall be controlled by the BAS where necessary to meet the
required sequences of operation. If the FAS also controls a damper then the FAS
control shall override the BAS control of the damper.
M. Dampers shall be provided by the Mechanical Specialist.
2.69 DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Provide electric damper actuators for all motorized dampers. Electric

actuators shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Stroke by the rotating motion of a reversible, overload-protected

synchronous motor. Actuators shall be directly coupled to damper drive blades
with no intermediate linkages or shall be rotary type actuators directly
coupled to the damper drive shaft.
2. Protected against overload by an integral magnetic clutch or stall
protection by non-overloading impedance protected motor.
3. 240 Vac ± 10%, 50/60 Hz or 24 Vac power supply with 2 limit
switches with electrically isolated contacts
4. One actuator for each damper section. Provide additional actuators to
ensure sufficient torque to meet the specified close off leakage requirements.
Damper actuators shall not be stacked.
5. Actuators shall be motorized/driven in both the open and closed
directions. Where required by the sequences of operation, actuators shall have
a spring return to the de-energized position upon loss of power. Damper

REV 00
normal and failure positions shall be as identified within the sequences of
operation.
6. BAS controlled actuators for modulating Motorized Dampers shall
be controlled by a 0-10 Vdc, or 4-20mA signal. Provide actuators that are
fully compatible with the BAS analogue output subsystem. BAS controlled
actuators for two position dampers shall be controlled by 24Vac, 24Vdc or
single-phase 240 Vac power switched by the BAS.
7. Complete with mounting brackets suitable for extended shaft
mounting or direct damper drive shaft mounting.
8. Stroke dampers from fully closed to fully open in accordance with
the following:
9. Service Timing Requirement
a. Two position normal

service 75 seconds
b. Modulating normal
service 120 seconds
c. E
mergency service (stair pressurization, smoke containment,
etc.) 15
seconds
10. Actuators for non-fire and/or smoke rated dampers shall be rated for
operation at ambient temperatures of minus 40 Deg.C. to 50 Deg.C. (-40 Deg.
F. to 122 Deg. F.).
11. Complete with damper/actuator stroke position indicator.
12. Manual drive release mechanism and manual positioning mechanism.
B. Actuators shall be quiet in operation such that noise from actuator operation
is not detectable in any occupied spaces.
2.70 DAMPER ACTUATORS HARDWIRED INTERLOCKS
A. Provide all required hardwired interlocks between fans and any motor
actuated dampers as identified within these sub-contract documents.
B. Power for interlocked dampers shall be obtained from the associated air
handling fan motor control circuit. Coordinate actuator power supply wiring and fire
alarm system override control of dampers with MEP Specialist.

REV 00
C. Where dampers are specified to be hard wire interlocked with fan motors the
BAS Specialist shall provide the damper position switches. Provide the damper end
switch(s) hard wire interlocked to achieve the operational requirements as specified in the
Point Schedules and the sequences of operation, and as indicated in the MEP Specialist
Drawings and Specifications. Provide damper end switches hard wire interlocked to
prevent fan motor operation in both the hand and auto position of hand/off/auto
motor control circuit. Damper position switches shall be set to indicate the open
position when they are open by more than 80%.
D. Provide for each damper that is controlled by both the BAS and the
FAS, a terminal strip and associated control relays such as to allow control and
monitoring as follows (as applicable):
1. BAS two position open-closed control - contact closure of a BAS

relay, thermostat or interlocking device shall control the damper.
Contact opening shall close the damper.
2. BAS modulating control - modulating signal from the BAS of 0-
10 Vdc or 4-20 mA output to achieve the required sequence.
3. Damper open/closed status - allows FAS monitoring or interlock
of damper open and damper close status.
4. Damper open/closed status - allows BAS monitoring or interlock
of damper open and damper close status.
5. Override open control - contact closure of a FAS command
relay or localized smoke detector shall override any BAS modulating or
open/closed control to open the damper.
6. Override closed control - contact closure of a FAS command
relay or localized smoke detector shall override any BAS modulating or
open/closed control to close the damper.
7. Furnish and terminate cabling as follows:
a. Between all damper actuators and the associated

damper terminal strip.
b. Between the BAS and the damper terminal strip
for any damper monitored and/or controlled by the BAS.
c. Between the damper terminal strip and
interlocked motors, thermostats, pressure switches,
generators, pumps, etc.
E. Coordinate exact FAS interface requirements and terminal strip

locations with the MEP Specialist.

REV 00
2.71 INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
PROVISIONS
A. Refer to the IBMS specification section no. 230901, in coordination with

the IBMS specialist, for the data points and functions to be provided as part of the
integration with the IBMS. The IBMS will provide operation management functionality
for the BAS where all monitoring and control points will be accessible by the IBMS.
B. A demonstration shall be performed for the Engineer, as a proof that a bench

test integration has been conducted between the system and the IBMS platform prior to
materials submission.
C. The BAS shall be interfaced with the IBMS through one of the following
open standards communication protocols.
1. BACnet.
2. OPC.
D. Provide all Servers, Network Interface Unit, communication gateways,

accessories, cabling, etc... as required to ensure seamless integration between the system
and the IBMS.
E. Provide full Read and Write capabilities including, but not limited to, the
following functions:
1. System Scheduling.
2. Data Trending.
3. Alarm monitoring and routing.
4. Monitoring of diagnostic data.
5. Time synchronization.
6. Graphics. (These shall reside at IBMS application servers).
7. Operation and maintenance.
F. Coordinate with the IBMS specialist for proper implementation of the above
requirements and the requirements stipulated in the IBMS specification section no.
230901.
G. Provide confirmation and full compliance report that the system shall be
seamlessly integrated with the IBMS as per the functions and requirements stipulated in
this specification section and the IBMS specification section, prior to any commitment.
REV 00
H. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations regarding the

requirements of the integration with the IBMS, including databases, Object IDs and
description, component addresses and any other pertinent information.
I. Validate all functions, with the IBMS integrator, prior Engineer hand over.
2.72 THIRD PARTY INTERFACES GENERAL
A. The BAS supplier shall provide the NAC, gateways, communication modules
required to map Third Party systems’ data, as per the BAS design drawings, into
BACnet/IP Objects to enable the interface with the BAS Automation Level. The BAS
supplier shall provide all data and information regarding the BACnet/IP Objects,
including Objects IDs, descriptions, properties, attributes and any other pertinent data of
the third party BACnet/IP Objects.
B. Third party systems interfaced with the BAS Automation Level, shall be
further integrated as part of the BAS, into the IBMS. Refer to the BAS design drawings for
the exact Third Party systems that shall be interfaced with the BAS Automation Level and
the Third Party systems that shall be directly interfaced with the IBMS.
C. At minimum the third party protocols shall include Modbus, J-Bus, OPC, M-
Bus and LonWorks.
D. The third party ELV building system shall have a communications port
and shall exchange information with the Management Level Network in a BACnet/IP
format.
E. The BAS Supplier Scope shall include the following:

1. Provide the Network Automation Controller (NAC) that shall map
the third party data into BACnet/IP Objects.
2. Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between
the Network Automation Controller (NAC) or the Distributed Control Panel
(DCP) and the Third Party System Gateway.
3. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations of the third

party system Objects/ registers IDs, description, component addresses,
properties and any other pertinent information required for seamless
integration between the third party system and the IBMS.

REV 00
F.The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:
1. Provide third party controller with a communication data port and an

open standard communication protocol such as BACnet, Modbus, LonWorks,
etc...., necessary for the data exchange with the BAS Automation Level.
2. Provide comprehensive and complete documentations of the
third party system Objects/ registers IDs, description, component
addresses, properties and any other pertinent information required for
seamless integration between the third party system and the BAS NAC.
G. THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION TESTS
1. The interface between the BAS and each third party ELV building
system shall be demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the
mechanical contractor who shall liaise with each party concerned. It shall be
conclusively demonstrated that the IBMS can communicate with the third
party system and vice versa through the BAS NAC.
2. The testing of the interface between the BAS Automation Level
Network and the third party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
a. All data communicated from the third party system

to the IBMS is in the form of BACnet Objects that comply
completely with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
b. All data points mapped from the IBMS Network to
the third party system are displayed correctly on the third party
system monitor.
c. All mapped points are identical with regard to
value, the engineering units and significant digits on the third
party system and the NAC.
d. All points mapped from the third party system to
the BAS Automation Level meet all of the specifications
detailed in the BAS specifications for points directly
monitored/controlled by the BAS.
e. Communications speed between the two systems is
satisfactory.
f. Both systems restart and communications between
the two systems resume following a power failure without
operator intervention.
H. INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BAS AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY

DRIVES (VFD)

REV 00
1. The variable frequency drive (VFD) controller shall be
microprocessor based and shall have a data port that enables the exchange of
data between the VFD controller and the BAS Automation Level.
2. The interface between the variable frequency drive controller and the
Automation level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following
information to be transferred to the BAS Automation Level:
a. Speed Reference Feedback.

b. Motor Operating Status.
c. VFD alarm.
d. VFD status
e. Motor power in kW.
f. Motor kWh.
g. Motor current.
h. Motor voltage.
i. Hours run.
j. DC link voltage.
k. Thermal load on motor.
l. Thermal load on VFD.
m. Heat sink temperature.
n. Any other information available from the VFD
controller as selected by the Employer.
3. The interface between the VFD controller and the Management

level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be
transferred from the Management Level Network to the VFD controller:
a. Speed Control Signal.

b. Start/Stop Control Signal.
c. Speed Feedback
d. VFD Fault
e. General Alarm
I. INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BAS AND THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

REV 00
1. The Fire Alarm System shall be directly integrated into the IBMS,
however if it is required by the local applicable codes and standards or
required by the Authority having jurisdiction the BAS shall be able to
automatically shut down all terminal units and FCU serving the zone of
incidence in the event of a fire alarm and shall automatically restart equipment
following a return to normal message, as detailed in the Part titled “Equipment
Restart Following a Fire Alarm” in this Section of the documents.
2. The BAS shall receive the alarm signals form the Fire Alarm System
or the IBMS through BACnet/IP software interface, and all the logic used to
shut down the terminal units shall reside on the BAS NACs and not on the
IBMS server.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING
A. Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as

assigned by the employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions
in at least one-half day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session
and any prerequisite requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training
outline shall be submitted with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training
shall not commence unless the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be
coordinated with the Employer’s designated training coordinator.
B. Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on"
instruction and shall be given by the Specialist at the BAS Specialists facilities and
on-site as detailed below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the
manufacturer, shall be experienced with the hardware and software and shall be
experienced trainers. The resumes of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer and
Engineer for approval. The resumes shall indicate clearly the experience and expertise of
the proposed training staff with regard to both their technical and training capabilities. The
BAS Specialist shall certify the
proposed training staff as specialist trainers. The BAS Specialist shall advise the Employer
of the recommended qualifications for the potential trainees.
C. Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the BAS Specialist’s
facilities. These training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they
shall be presented in accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the
Employer. Follow up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the
installed components that shall be given during the period immediately prior to the

REV 00
acceptance testing. Further follow up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site
during the warranty period. These training sessions during the warranty period shall be
scheduled with the Employer.
D. Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and

any audiovisual equipment required to execute the training.
E. Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of

the attendees and prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students. Training
sessions shall be designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the attendees
scheduled to participate and shall differentiate between the requirements of supervisory,
operations and maintenance personnel. The training shall be specific to this project and
shall cover, at minimum, the following:
1. Operating sequence programming.

2. Operator interface features.
3. An overview of the BAS topology.
4. Information access.
5. Executing operator commands.
6. Event message generation and modification.
7. Maintenance and calibration of instrumentation (Maintenance
personnel only)
8. Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT).
9. Interfaces between the BAS Automation Level and the Third Party
systems.
10. Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance
and supervisory staffs will be able to operate the BAS without any on-going
assistance from any outside party.
3.2 BASBORING AND PATCHING
A. Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install
BAS components shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the BAS Specialist shall
provide boring and patching of work in those instances where the BAS Specialist has
caused damage requiring boring and patching. The BAS Specialist shall provide boring
and patching for all installation work undertaken by the BAS Specialist. Boring and
patching shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1. Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's

approval.

REV 00
2. Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be
inconspicuous in covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally
accessible to the tenants.
3. Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
3.3 FIRE STOPPING
A. The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by
the MEP Specialist on behalf of the BAS Specialist but if the BAS Specialist damages
fire stopping
installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the BAS Specialist requires that
fire stopping be replaced or added, the BAS Specialist shall seal all conduit, cable, or cable
tray penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at minimum, the
1. Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory

requirements.
2. Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
3. Firesafing system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of
electrical cables passing through it.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with

the manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment
within which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of
components with all trades.
B. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat

and workmanlike manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. General Requirements:

REV 00
1. All components shall be tested by the BAS Specialist to ensure
compliance with the specifications before they leave the BAS Specialist's
premises and shall be tested again on-site by the BAS Specialist before the
commencement of acceptance testing. The BAS Specialist shall not ship
components to the project site until they have been found to be fully compliant
with the specifications and the BAS Specialist shall not request the
commencement of acceptance testing until such time as the BAS Specialist has
made a complete and thorough checkout of all equipment on site.
2. Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made

available for inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of
any component by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance
of the system or acceptability of any component. Availability and
demonstration of the systems shall not be withheld and the use of components
shall not imply the start of the Defects Liability Period.
3. Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be
included in this scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
4. The BAS Specialist shall make available all equipment, calibrated
instruments and ladders, as necessary to satisfactorily demonstrate the
acceptability of the components and systems. Instrumentation to be used for
the verification of monitored parameters shall be calibrated or supplied by an
approved laboratory or manufacturer. Provide copies of the calibration data
with the component test sheets.
5. Installation, engineering, software and system personnel shall be
available on-site during the commissioning tests. These personnel shall be
familiar with the installation and shall undertake all tests as requested by the
Engineer in order to verify that the BAS components individually and in total
meet the specifications.
6. The BAS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be
conducting the commissioning tests on behalf of the BAS Specialist has been
actively involved
(on site) throughout the commissioning of the control system. Software shall
be developed, tested and demonstrated over a time span short enough to
guarantee continuity of personnel.
B. Off-Site Tests/Software Tests:
1. Provide samples of each Control Panel arrangement/ category,

along with the corresponding wiring details, to the Engineer for approval. The
BAS Sub- contractor shall notify the Engineer that the samples are ready
for inspection prior delivery of any materials to the site.
2. Functional test shall be made by the contractor at his facility for
every type of BAS control panel/ hardware assemblies.

REV 00
3. When the BAS Specialist has written and tested the software and
prior to loading software into controllers on site, the BAS Specialist shall
demonstrate to the Engineer that the software functions in accordance with the
specifications and sequences of operations. This shall be accomplished by in-
house simulation of plant operating conditions using switches, potentiometers,
voltmeters and lamps etc...BAS
4. Moreover, the contractor shall demonstrate the ability of the interface
to the third party systems
5. The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations
on a clause-by-clause basis with the specification, with reference to all
applicable correspondence, and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
6. Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no
additional cost to the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the
project site.
7. The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any
scheduled Off- Site testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time
whether the Engineer shall witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the
tests shall be witnessed the Employer shall select a representative and the
BAS Specialist shall pay the costs of the representative to attend the tests.
C. Inspection During Installation:
1. Prior to commissioning tests, the BAS shall be available for use by

the Employer and Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply
acceptance of any component of the BAS or the commencement of the Defects
Liability Period.
2. Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the
installation period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work.
The Engineer will generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the
inspection. The Engineer shall advise the BAS Specialist during the inspection
of any concerns noted with respect to the installation and shall repeat the
concerns in writing as soon as possible after the inspection is completed. The
BAS Specialist shall take corrective action to meet the requirement of the
specifications.
3. Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during
inspections shall not relieve the BAS Specialist of any of the specification
requirements and shall not imply that a deviation from the specification has
been accepted.
D. IBMS integration testing:

REV 00
1. The BAS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required
for the interface between the BAS and the IBMS prior to the delivery of the
associated hardware and software components to the project site. There shall be
no
software development on site except that associated with the entry of

database items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2. Mapping of the BACnet Objects into the IBMS server shall be
tested in the presence of both the BAS sub-contractor and the IBMS specialist
and shall undertake the following tests:
a. Mapping of the BACnet Objects into the IBMS

server.
b. Time synchronization between the IBMS and the BAS
controllers.
c. Event/ alarm notification at the IBMS following the
requirements of the IBMS specification section 230901.
E. Component Testing/Point To Point Testing:
1. Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the

Engineer, perform a complete and detailed operational check of each BAS
component. Tests shall be documented as detailed below and shall cover all
of the testing requirements detailed in this Section for the commissioning
tests. The Engineer shall undertake such random testing as the Engineer
considers necessary to verify the acceptability of the components.
2. All components testing involving the verification of air and water
flow rate monitoring shall be scheduled in conjunction with the air and water-
balancing Specialists. In particular, this shall apply to the verification of all
control and monitoring parameters for terminal units.
3. The test shall be conducted with the presence of the IBMS sub-
contractor engineer where point to point checks shall be proven from the field
device/interface operation to the controller/outstation and from the controller to
the presentation of the point on the IBMS. The results from the point-to-
point tests shall be submitted for approval on pre-defined schedules.
4. Point to point checks shall verify:
a. Correct location of the field device for the

application.
b. Correct installation of the control device/interface
with reference to the manufacturer’s literature and check that
sufficient access has been provided for maintenance.

REV 00
c. That the control device has the correct range for the
application, that the range is correctly entered in the controller
and the display of values is correctly engineered on the
operator's terminal.
d. Correct operation of the controls device/interface,
including any associated alarm and alarm text.
e. Correct installation of each valve and damper
actuator, and ensure that each valve and damper actuator is
stroked correctly when checked against the BAS output.
f. Calibration of the control device.
g. Labels provided on the control devices and
mechanical equipment are correct.
F.Systems Testing:
1. Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has
been successfully undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
2. System testing shall be undertaken by the BAS Specialist and the
BAS Specialist shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system
performance verification sheets. The completed system performance
verification test sheets shall be submitted to the Engineer.
3. The BAS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system

performance verification tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests
for the verification by the Engineer shall not be scheduled until the BAS
Specialist has verified that all systems are operating in accordance with the
specifications.
4. The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the BAS
Specialist and shall be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the
Engineer’s portion of the system performance verification test sheets as each
test is successfully undertaken. The BAS Specialist shall remedy any
deficiencies that are observed during the system performance verification tests
and retesting shall be scheduled at a time suitable to the Engineer. If there are
deficiencies remaining after the follow-up systems performance verification
testing that require further testing by the Engineer, then the expenses of the
Engineer incurred in providing the additional follow-up tests to verify
compliance with the specifications, including travel, subsistence,
accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by the BAS
Specialist at no additional cost to the Employer.
5. The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:
a. Each and every point on the system including

calibration checks and the stroking of actuators.

REV 00
b. All system programs comply with the specification
under the normal modes of operation, emergency power,
building fire detected and fireman's override operating modes.
c. All system alarms comply with the specification.
d. System stability.
e. Dynamic tests to prove control stability and that the
environmental conditions are being maintained.
G. Test Coordination:
1. Testing of the BAS during the systems and integrated testing shall be
coordinated with all other trades associated with the system being tested. The
system shall be tested as a complete entity during these tests. The BAS portion
of the systems shall not be tested in isolation.
H. Testing of Third Party Interfaces:
1. The BAS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required
for the interface between the BAS and equipment furnished by others prior to
the delivery of the associated hardware and software components to the project
site. There shall be no software development on site except that associated
with the entry of database items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control
constants and schedules.
2. The third party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer
at the BAS Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any BAS
microprocessor based components at the project site. The demonstration shall
include all hardware and software components associated with the interfaces.
3. The third party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the
testing and acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
4. The BAS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects
are provided at the IBMS network in accordance with the requirements of
these specifications.
I. Test Documentation:
1. Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets
shall be prepared in an appropriate format for the various categories of
component and system to be tested. Component test sheet forms included
within this section indicate a minimum acceptable standard. The final format
of the proposed test forms shall be submitted by the BAS Specialist for
approval at the shop drawing stage. The component and system performance
verification sheets attached to this Section of the sub-contract Documents

REV 00
are provided to the Specialist for information and to serve as a guide for the
minimum standards required. These attached examples of component and
system test sheets are generic in nature and may not accurately reflect the
actual sequences of operation that are to be implemented and not all systems
and component types are covered by these example test verification sheets. It
is the responsibility of the BAS Specialist to provide test verification sheets
for each component and system that accurately reflect the sequences of
operation and appropriate data for the components and systems as furnished
under this sub-contract.
2. Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each
BAS component within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together
with a proposed schedule for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks
prior to the proposed system commissioning tests. The Engineer shall
determine on the basis of the BAS Specialist's component testing, whether or
not it is appropriate to commence system-commissioning tests. It shall be the
Engineer’s decision as to whether the system commissioning tests can proceed
as proposed by the BAS Specialist or whether deficiencies have to be remedied
and additional testing undertaken before the system commissioning tests can
proceed.
3. At minimum, component test sheets will be prepared to cover each of
the following items:
a. Digital input point

b. Digital output point
c. Analogue input point
d. Analogue output point (one for each type of final
control element, e.g. valve, damper, etc.)
4. System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum,
each of the systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets shall
be based on the sub-contract requirements and not on the system as installed.
5. All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and
in hard copy.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system

acceptance, the following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with
requirements of Division 1:
1. System user manual.

REV 00
2. Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece
of equipment, trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance instructions,
technical data sheet for each instrument referenced for each application.
3. As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings,
equipment wiring and or piping connection drawing.
4. Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of
system supplied. This to include:
a. System block diagram (hardware).

b. Software "functional" flow diagram.
c. Memory map of all units.
d. Specific tasks performed by each processor,
especially where a distributed processing architecture is
provided. These are to be clearly indicated in functional form.
e. Source and object lists of software program.
f. Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in
the systems.
g. Password at all levels.
h. Meets ASHRAE SSPC 135 standard.
i. Interoperability documentation.
j. System construction inspection procedures.
k. Points calibration procedures.
l. Calibration technical procedures.
m. Plant operational system test procedures.
n. Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
B. The BAS sub-contractor shall handover all programs, database,

configuration and network data to the Employer.
C. All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.
D. The BAS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods

and techniques required to connect additional DDC controllers, gateways, routers and any
other BAS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to export the
data in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system. The system
documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the BAS’s incorporation into
another BACnet system in the future.
E. The BAS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for the

BACnet components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along with

REV 00
their respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS, BIBBS,
addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of the
components with another system in future.
F. Provide latest copy of ANSI/ASHRAE 135-20162 and ASHRAE 135.1-2013standards.

REV 00
SECTION 230901 - INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
PART 1 GENERAL

Contract and Division 1, Division 14, Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division
26, Division 27, Division 28 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The IBMS sub-contractor shall provide the Integrated Building Management

System (IBMS), shall implement all features called for in this specification and shall
implement the necessary sequences for satisfactory operation of the system.
B. The Integrated Building Management System sub-contractor shall be

responsible for the integration of the IBMS with the other low voltage building systems as
detailed hereafter in Scope of Works and the remainder of specifications.
C. The IBMS sub-contractor shall be a sub-consultant to the mechanical

contractor and shall be a IBMS specialist and meet the requirements of section 1.14
"IBMS installer qualifications".
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A/C - Air Conditioning

ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASC - Application Specific Controller
BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device BAS - Building
Automation System
BTL - BACnet Testing Laboratory
BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block BSI - British
Standards Institution
CCR - Central Command Room
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS) 230901 - Page 1 of 119

REV 00
CIBSE - Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers CPU -
Central Processing Unit
DCP - Distributed Control Panel DCP - District Chillers Plant
DDC - Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller DDR -
Double Data Rate
ELV - Extra Low Voltage
EP - Electric-to-Pneumatic
FAS - Fire Alarm System
FCU - Fan Coil Unit
FMS - Facility Management System HMI - Human Machine
Interface
HVAC - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning IBMS -
Integrated Building Management System
ICT - Information and Communication Technology ISO -

International Standards Organization
ID - IDentification
I/O - Input/Output
ISA - Instrument Society of America (now International Society
for Measurement and
Control)
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode LON - Local Operating Network
LSF - Low Smoke and Fume MATV - Master Antenna Television
MCC - Motor Control Centre
NAC - Network Automation Controller, BTL Certified as BACnet
Building Controller.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NIU -
Network Interface Unit
NPT - National Pipe Taper (pipe thread specification) ODBC -
Open Data Base Connectivity
OEM - Original Equipment Manufacturer OIW- Operator Interface
Workstation OLE - Object Linking and Embedding OPC - OLE for
Process Control
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act PABX - Private
Automatic Branch eXchange PC - Personal Computer
PCI - Peripheral Component Interconnect PE - Pneumatic-to-
Electric

REV 00
PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PDA -
Personal Digital Assistant
PIM - Process Interface Module POT - Portable Operator Terminal
PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene (Teflon) RAID- Redundant Array of
Inexpensive Disks RAM - Random Access Memory
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference RH - Relative Humidity
RTD - Resistance Temperature Device
SAMA - Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association SCADA -
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition SCBA - Self
Contained Breathing Apparatus
SCPT - Standard Configuration Property Type SCSI - Small
Computer System Interface
SMS - Short Message Service (cellular phones text messaging) SNMP -
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNVT - Standard Network Variable Type SOAP - Simple
Object Access Protocol SQL - Structured Query Language
SSPC - Standing Standard Project Committee SVGA - Super Video
Graphics Adapter
TDS - Technical Data Sheets
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter UC -
Unitary Controller
UCPT - User-defined Configuration Property Type UNVT -

User-defined Network Variable Type
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply VAV - Variable Air
Volume
VDU - Video Display Unit
VFC - Volt Free Contacts VPN - Virtual Private Network
VFD - Variable Frequency Drive WAN - Wide Area Network
XIF - eXternal Interface File
XML - eXtensible Mark-up Language
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical

problem.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity,

etc.).

REV 00
C. BACnet: The Building Automation and Control Network open protocol

communication standard developed by ASHRAE (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016) and which
is now an ISO and ANSI standard. BACnet can operate over multimedia including
Ethernet, ArcNet and MSTP. The BACnet components shall be fully compliant with
British standards BS EN ISO 16484-5 (Building automation and control systems. Data
communication protocol), BS EN 13321-1 (Open data communication in building
automation, controls and building management. Home and building electronic system.
Product and system requirements), ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016 and all other applicable
codes.
D. BACnet Object: A physical or virtual point with a set of associated

properties such as a temperature sensor that has properties including, name, current
value, maximum and minimum values, high and low alarm levels, etc.
E. BACnet Conformance: A description of the capabilities of a device for

communicating information to other BACnet devices. It is usually a set of requirements to
be met in order for a device to conform to BACnet standards. There are 6 levels of
conformance for standard BACnet objects and services. The higher the conformance class
the more features that are covered. The BACnet devices furnished under this sub-contract
shall, at minimum, be conformance class 4.
F. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBB’s): A BIBB defines a small

portion of BACnet functionality needed to perform a particular task. BIBB’s come in
pairs, A and B, which reflect the client/server nature. The A BIBB represents the
client, i.e. the device requesting information or commanding an action. The B BIBB
represents the server, i.e. the device furnishing the information or executing the
command. For 2 devices to be interoperable the A BIBB and the B BIBB must be the
same.
G. BACnet/IP: The building automation and control network open protocol

communication standard which complies with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
H. Binary: A two-state system where a high signal level represents an “ON”

condition and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
I. BAS: This shall mean the Automation and Field levels of the Integrated
Building Management System (IBMS).
J. Component: Any individual element of the IBMS furnished under this sub-
contract including hardware, software and materials.

REV 00
K. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and
isolate system and component malfunctions.
L. Direct Digital Control (DDC) involves the connection of microprocessor-

based controllers to field level sensors and actuators. The signals received from field level
instrumentation are converted from analogue to digital format so that the data can be
used in software logic. Control signals are determined by software logic and they are
converted from digital to analogue format so that the final control elements can be
adjusted.
M. Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized

and independent of a central computer.
N. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the appropriate installing sub-contractor,

complete with every appurtenance, document, commission and warranty.
O. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to

translate input data from one communications protocol to output data in a second
communications protocol.
P. Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the

operator to manage, command, monitor and program the system.
Q. IBMS: This shall mean the Management Level of the Building Automation
System, and the Integrated Management Software that shall act as a common platform
for the Building Automation System, Fire Alarm System and Security Systems.
R. Integration: Establishing communication and meaningful data transfer

between two devices based on a standard protocol or through the use of a standard based
gateway.
S. Interoperability: The ability of systems from different manufacturers and of

different types to share information with each other without losing any of their
independent functional capabilities and without the need for complex programming.
T. Native BACnet: This term is used to imply that BACnet devices (i.e. the
IBMS controllers and workstation) only communicate in BACnet protocol and do not
require a gateway for protocol conversion. The BACnet devices shall be connected on a
peer-to-peer network using one of the approved LAN technologies such as Ethernet,
ARCNET, MS/TP or BACnet/IP.

REV 00
U. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a

communication bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all control
units. Additionally, a network provides central monitoring and control of the entire system
from any distributed control unit location.
V. Operating System (OS): Software that controls the execution of computer

programs and which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls, accounting,
compilation, storage assignment, data management and related services.
W. Operator Interface Workstation (OIW): The OIW consists of a high-level

processing personal computer and peripheral I/O devices that enable access to the PC and
to the entire Management Level Network.
X. Peer-to-Peer Communication: Communication directly between devices that

operate on the same communications level of a network without intervention from any
intermediary devices such as a host or server.
Y. Peripheral I/O: Input / Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and

from the computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files.
Peripherals include graphical display, printers, hard drives, disk drives and modems, etc.
AA. Portable Operator Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate network
management, node commissioning, diagnostics and general operator interface with the
IBMS.
BB. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in application.
An application creation software tool is required for an application to be created and
downloaded to the device.
CC. Provide: Furnish, install, commission, test and warrant. Refer to the definition of “furnish”.
DD. Router: A device that routes messages destined for a node on another segment sub-net or
domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic based on node address
and priority. Media converters which serve as communication links between power line,
twisted pair, fiber, coax and RF media are sometimes referred to as Routers.
EE. Standing Standard Project Committee (SSPC): ASHRAE terminology for a technical
committee that oversees the maintenance of a standard.

REV 00
FF. Software: Generic term used for those components of the computer systems that are
intangible rather than physical. The term "software" is used to refer to the programs
executed by the computer systems as distinct from the physical hardware of the
computer systems and encompasses any programs such as operating systems, applications
programs, operating sequences and databases. The term "software" shall be interpreted
to include firmware if, in the context in which it is used, the term "software" does not
exclude the use of read-only memory and the use of firmware meets all of the applicable
criteria detailed in these specifications.
GG. Thin Client: Thin client technology involves delivering windows applications to client
workstations from a centrally based server. The thin client workstation has the ability
to process information but data storage, applications and administrative functions reside
on the IBMS server. The applications run on the server and screen updates are sent
from the server to the client. The thin client workstation displays the screen updates
and sends operator entered requests/commands via the keyboard and mouse back to
the server for execution.
HH. Application Specific Controller: A controller generally designed for a specific

application and for a single piece of equipment.
II. Virtual Private Network (VPN): This is a network that uses encryption and
other technologies to provide secure communications over the Internet or an Intranet.
JJ. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.
KK. XML/SOAP: Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) is a simple eXtensible Mark-up
Language (XML) based protocol that enables applications to exchange information
over HTTP. Or more simply: SOAP is a protocol for accessing a Web Service.
LL. The above definitions shall apply to the words:

1. When they are in upper case, when they are in lower case and when
they are capitalized.
2. In the singular and in the plural.
3. In all grammatical tenses.
1.5. IBMS ARCHITECTURE
A. The following is a general description of the IBMS architecture of the

Project. This description is not intended to indicate the number of components and neither
is it intended to be the only acceptable IBMS configuration. The description of the
system architecture is provided to illustrate the relationship between the various
REV 00
components. Different IBMS Specialists may have a slightly different topology that
generally will be acceptable provided that it meets the intent of these specifications.
B. Building Level IBMS:

1.The Integrated Building Management System, supplied by the Integrated
Building Management System sub-contractor, shall act as an integrated management
platform for the Building Automation System, Life Safety Systems and Security
Systems to enable centralized collection, processing and management of data within
the building, so as to promote better operation and better interoperability
between the various control systems within the building. Systems integrated with
the IBMS shall be referred to as IBMS sub-system herein after.
2.In addition to the IBMS sub-systems, the IBMS shall interface with the
stand-alone Third Party systems serving the MEP equipment such as Elevator
systems, UPS, etc..., these systems shall be interfaced with the IBMS through
communication interface in accordance with the design drawings and as detailed
in the Third Party interfaces section.
3.It shall be the responsibility of each IBMS sub-system supplier, to provide all
hardware required to make the system’s data available in an open standard
communication protocol that shall be determined in coordination with the IBMS
sub- contractor in the project early construction phases. The IBMS sub-contractor
shall provide all NACs/ NIUs found to be necessary for providing seamless
integration between the IBMS and its sub-systems or Third Party systems.
4.It shall be the responsibility of each IBMS sub-system supplier, such as
the Fire Alarm System, to coordinate with the IBMS sub-contractor to enable
seamless integration of his field devices with the IBMS. Each IBMS sub-system
supplier shall provide comprehensive and complete documentations regarding the
requirements of the integration with the IBMS, including databases, Object IDs and
description, component addresses and any other pertinent information.
1.5 SCOPE OF WORKS
A. Provide a complete IBMS turnkey installation for the Building and

integrate it at the project.
B. The IBMS shall provide remote monitoring and control for all the IBMS
Sub-systems and Third-Party System.

REV 00
C. All design services, drawing and specifications, equipment, materials, labor

and services, not specifically mentioned or shown, which may be necessary to
complete the design and installation of the IBMS.
D. Software application and licenses and any other software that may be
required to make the system fully integrated and operational as specified including
the provision of databases, interfaces and any other required configuration. The
Building IBMS shall comprise at minimum, the following components:
1.Dual Redundant IBMS Server.
2.Operator Interface Workstations (OIW) as shown in the IBMS design
drawings.
3.Portable Operator Terminal (POT).
4.Network Interface Unit (NIU).
5.Network Automation Controller (NAC).
E. Whenever required, the IBMS sub-system supplier shall provide dedicated

server(s)/softwares for his controllers/ field devices so that the contractor be able to
comply with all of the IBMS sub-system requirements detailed within this specification
section. IBMS sub-system dedicated servers shall be integrated with the IBMS, as
detailed within this specification section.
F. The following systems shall be considered as an IBMS sub-system, where

these systems are seamlessly integrated into the IBMS integrated management level, and
all monitoring, reporting, control and diagnostics functions of these systems shall be
available at the IBMS by providing the corresponding application module add-on:
1.Building Automation System
2.Fire Alarm System
3.Video Surveillance Systems
4.Access Control System
G. The Fire Alarm System workstation located at the Fire Command Center,
and its associated software, shall not be part of the IBMS scope of works and shall be
provided by the Fire Alarm System supplier.
H. The following systems shall be considered as Third Party systems which

shall be interfaced with the IBMS through communication interface via NIUs/ NACs:
1.Car Park Ventilation Control System (CPVCS) (if exists)
2.CRAC Units
REV 00
3.MDB Main Incoming Circuit Breakers.
4.Digital Power Meters serving the MCC/ MCP Incomer Circuit Breaker.
5.ECB
6.UPS
7.Lighting Control System
8.Elevators/ Escalators
9.Car Park Management System (if exists)
10. Automated Parking System (if exists)
11. Lighting Control System (if exists)
I. The contractor shall engage in a comprehensive selection process of the

IBMS and the IBMS sub-systems, in the early stages of the project, to ensure that the
selected systems shall be seamlessly integrated in to the IBMS Integrated Management
Platform with the least effort needed. The contractor shall then demonstrate to the
Engineer his selection criteria and the features and functions of each IBMS sub-system to
be performed from the IBMS, prior to any commitment from the systems suppliers.
J. The contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of all of the

software requirements called in within this specification section, including the software
requirements dedicated for each IBMS sub-system, and shall provide all servers, software,
licenses, hardware and accessories required for successful implementation of these
systems according to the requirements of this specification section.
K. The IBMS specialist shall provide all NACs/ NIUs required to provide
interface with the above mentioned Third Party interfaces, in accordance with the design
drawings and the requirements of this specifications.
L. Map the IBMS sub-systems data into the IBMS servers and present their data
using a common and a unified Graphical User Interface (GUI).
M. The IBMS shall enable cross-system sequence of operation, where data

shall flow between the various IBMS sub-systems to perform Management Level
operations. The IBMS specialist shall implement such sequence of operations as requested
by the Client or Engineer, during the project’s construction stages and up to the issue of
the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
N. The IBMS shall meet the following general criteria:

1.Open system architecture.
2.Real time.
3.Integration with a diverse range of devices and control systems.
REV 00
4.Support for leading open standards: BACnet, LonMark, OPC, Modbus,
ONVIF and SNMP.
5.Web-based user interface provides operators or facility engineers easy access
and puts the user more in control.
6.No single point of failure.
O. The IBMS application servers, located within each building, shall make all of
the IBMS data available as OPC objects, in order to provide an open system architecture
capable of integrating with other management platforms such as Computerized
Maintenance Management System (CMMS).
P. All components of the IBMS shall operate on UPS. The IBMS

contractor shall not provide the UPS. The IBMS contractor shall coordinate with the
Electrical contractor the UPS outlets dedicated for the IBMS as indicated on the electrical
design drawings.
1.The IBMS contractor shall show the power supply / UPS load requirements
for each component.
2.The IBMS contractor shall submit the calculated UPS loads for Engineer’s
approval.
Q. The components furnished shall be the most recent products offered by the
IBMS manufacturer that meet the specifications. If there are improved models of any
components that become available before the on-site commencement of installation then
these shall be offered by the IBMS Specialist to the Employer at no additional cost to the
Employer. The Employer shall have the option to accept or decline the offer. The
components offered shall have been in successful operation in at least 2 similar
applications for a minimum of 12 months.
R. The IBMS Specialist shall provide all software licenses necessary for the
legal operation of the IBMS.
S. Provide adequate earthing on all equipment to prevent the build-up of

electromagnetic voltage potentials. Provide screening of panels, enclosures, devices, or
components that emit interferences. All monitoring and control and communication cables
shall be screened with one end earthed.
T. Provide the following support for all components furnished under this sub-
contract:
1.Warranty and service during the defects liability period.
2.Submittals, samples and record documentation.
3.Comprehensive commissioning and testing.

REV 00
4.Detailed theoretical and practical training services for the Supervisors and
Operators.
5.Coordination with other site Specialists.
6.Reporting to the Employer and Engineer for the coordinated and timely
execution of the Work
7.Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation and method
statement for IBMS sub-systems and Third Party systems. The IBMS Specialist
shall provide separate interoperability documentation at the end of execution of the
project, which shall detail integrating controllers or gateways from any
manufacturer, connecting all the hardware of the proposed system to another
BACnet system server or link all the data in the proposed IBMS to another system
with all their attributes. This document shall also include the BACnet and OPC
Object IDs of all the objects captured or generated by the system, database
documentation, querying methods and full documentation to read and write BACnet
data with another system.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. The IBMS sub-Contractor shall coordinate the work of this contract with the
work of all other trades on the project.
B. Any task related to the IBMS turnkey installation that is not clearly identified
in this document as being the responsibility of another trade shall be the
responsibility of the IBMS sub-Contractor.
1.7 IBMS EXPANSION
A. The IBMS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent (20%)

additional data points without upgrading the software license or the addition of NAC.
B. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of

new sub networks and associated routers, gateways, etc.
C. Each IBMS as installed shall be expandable for a minimum of 200

percent additional data points, with the addition/ upgrading the software license. At
minimum, to incorporate the following in addition to the above:
1.A minimum of 200 percent additional points with the addition of NACs and
Gateways.
2.A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those
required to meet these specifications.

REV 00
3.A minimum of 10 No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems
of a similar nature to those integrated under this contract.
D. Subsequent to the potential expansion detailed above the IBMS performance

shall not be degraded in any manner and shall meet all performance criteria detailed in
these specifications.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment submittals shall include design and performance for all aspects of
the system to be installed. At minimum, the documentation submittals shall include:
1.Equipment technical data sheets.
2.Operator terminal specifications and data sheets.
3.Software specifications.
4.Proposed Graphical Display schematics.
B. The IBMS specialist shall demonstrate and submit to the Engineer all the
possible cross- system sequence of operations for his approval, in the shop-drawings
phase. The IBMS specialist shall make any changes to the operating sequences as
requested by the Engineer or Employer, during the commissioning stage and, up to the
issue of the Certificate of Substantial Completion at no additional cost to the Employer.
C. All literature pertaining to a particular item or piece of equipment or

installation shall be submitted at one time and shall be specifically prepared for this
project. General sales information brochures shall not be acceptable. Each equipment
documentation submittal shall be properly marked with service or function, any options
available that are not to be provided shall be crossed out or options that will be provided
shall be highlighted.
D. Comply with the requirements of the specifications. Any deviations from the
specifications will not be allowed. Submittals not in accordance with the specification
requirements shall be rejected. Before equipment, devices and materials are installed, they
shall have submittals that are stamped by the Engineer “Approved” or “Approved as
Noted”. Submittals stamped “Approved” or “Approved as Noted” shall not relieve the
contractor from the requirements to comply with the complete requirements of the
Specifications. Corrections or modifications to the work because of errors and/or
omissions shall be at the contractor’s expense.
E. Each submittal shall be reviewed, stamped and certified by the contractor

prior to submission to the Engineer. The certification shall be in the form of a rubber
stamp that states: "I hereby certify that the equipment shown on this shop drawing,
product data and or sample, complies in all respects with the requirements of the

REV 00
Specifications for this Project. I further certify that all data shown hereon as to
performance, dimensions, construction, materials and other pertinent items is true and
correct."
(Name of the IBMS sub-Contractor) Signed:
Position: Date:
1.9 WARRANTY AND SERVICES DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD
A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are
jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or replace all defective components of the
warranted item. Warranty shall include both, materials and workmanship. Warranty shall
include:
1.Defective materials and installation.
2.Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
3.Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
4.Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
5.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.
6.Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7.Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and
that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate
with Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that
their warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.
B. The warranty period for all components of the IBMS and their installation shall be 2 years
following the date of substantial completion of the project.
C. Any material furnished by the IBMS sub-contractor which is defective or

fails during normal operation of the system, shall be remedied (replaced or repaired)
immediately by the IBMS sub-Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer, during the
period prior to the issue of the certificate of completion, and during the warranty period.
D. Repair work shall only be undertaken at times approved by the Employer.
E. Repair work shall not include routine maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period. The cost of providing routine maintenance during the Defects Liability
Period shall be provided separately as an Optional Price as detailed below.

REV 00
F. Respond and be on site within 4 hours of the Engineer and/or Employer
placing a system trouble call for items of an immediate nature (e.g.: failed component,
non-functioning controller, etc.).
G. Response to warranty call out by the Engineer and/or Employer shall be

within 24 hours for items not requiring immediate attention.
H. Work to troubleshoot and identify the cause of the IBMS system or

component failure shall begin immediately and shall continue until repaired to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and Employer.
I. Any software upgrades and new software programs that become standard
product offerings from the IBMS Specialist and/or IBMS equipment vendors during
the Defects Liability Period shall be brought to the attention of the Employer together
with the cost and, if the Employer wishes, he shall purchase the software. If at any time
during the Defects Liability Period, software patches that correct software errors become
available the Employer shall be notified immediately and they shall be made available to
the Employer at no additional cost.
1.10 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE DURING THE DEFECTS LIABILITY

PERIOD (OPTIONAL PRICE)
A. Submit an alternate price to provide routine maintenance services during the

initial warranty period. Provide the pricing as an add-on price not included in the base
tender pricing. The maintenance services shall cover routine preventative maintenance
and shall not include emergency maintenance or the cost of materials that are to be
covered by the warranty.
B. Schedule maintenance and repair works with the Employer’s representative

to prevent interference with normal building activities.
C. During routine maintenance components of the IBMS shall be selectively

inspected and serviced during the Defects Liability Period. Provide, at minimum,
preventative service
inspections at least once every 3 months during the Defects Liability Period. Perform,
at minimum, the following during each preventative service inspection:
1.Verify the proper operation of the workstations including:
2.Cooling fans
3.Power supplies
4.PC diagnostics

REV 00
5.Verify proper operation of each NAC. Clean enclosures.
6.Provide a comprehensive written report to the Employer indicating the results
of each inspection and all repairs and adjustments made.
7.Perform complete backup of all software.
D. The routine maintenance services during the Defects Liability Period shall
include 20 hours per year of programming changes to the IBMS as requested by the
Employer.
E. Update as-built documentation, submitted at the time of taking-over of the

Works as necessary to reflect any changes that may have been introduced during the
Defects Liability Period.
F. Detail the minimum number of hours to be spent on routine maintenance

during the Defects Liability Period in the tender submittal.
G. Provide replacement components within the specified time periods for the
following components. The Specialist shall guarantee to the Employer that the delivery of
replacement components will be provided within the specified time periods.
IBMS Component Delivery Time

Workstation Computer Equipment:
a. Server computer components. Five (5) days
b. Operator Workstations and components. Five (5) days
c. Management level IBMS communication One (1) day
LAN components
including
any hubs, network interface cards,
bridges,
routers, protocol converters,
NAC/ NIU. Two (2) days
H. During the Defects Liability Period the IBMS Specialist shall maintain a
minimum of 10% spare NAC of each type installed on site under this contract. At the
end of the Defects Liability Period the IBMS Specialist shall hand over NAC of each
type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of the number of
installed NAC of each type installed on site under this contract.
1.11 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AFTER THE DEFECTS LIABILITY

PERIOD EXTENSION (OPTIONAL PRICE)

REV 00
A. Submit an Optional price to extend the Defects Liability Period and the
maintenance during that period for ten (10) one (1) year periods. The maintenance service
contract shall be an all-inclusive labor and parts contract but the Employer reserves the
right to obtain parts from alternative sources.
B. The requirements during each additional year shall be exactly the same as
those detailed in paragraphs "warranty and services during the defects liability period" and
"routine maintenance during the defects liability period (optional price)".
C. The IBMS Specialist shall enter into a direct contract with the Employer to
provide the maintenance services for a minimum period of ten (10) years. The Employer
shall have the option to renew each year if the Employer so wishes. The IBMS Specialist
shall submit the cost for the maintenance service agreement in one of the following ways:
1.A fixed price for a ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between labor
and parts, OR
2.A fixed price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a
break-out between labor and parts for the first year and:
3.A percent value or a table of percent values that the labor portion of the cost
would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years
4.And a percent value or a table of percent values that the parts portion of
the cost would be escalated at during the succeeding nine (9) years, or A fixed
price for the first year of the ten (10) year Agreement with a break-out between
labor and parts for the first year with the annual increase for labor and parts over the
succeeding nine (9) years based on the annual percent increase in a cost of living
index from one year to the next, the cost of living index to be used is to be specified
by the IBMS Specialist in the tender submittal.
D. If at any time during the maintenance service contract, software patches that
correct software errors become available the Employer shall be notified immediately and
they shall be made available to the Employer at no additional cost.
E. During the Defects Liability Period Extension the IBMS Specialist shall
maintain a minimum of 10% spare NAC of each type installed on site under this
contract. At the end of the Defects Liability Period the IBMS Specialist shall hand
over NAC of each type to the Employer which shall, at minimum, be equal to 10% of
the number of installed NAC of each type installed on site under this contract.
1.12 CODES, PERMITS AND APPROVAL
A. Obtain all required permits and inspection certificates. All permits and
certificates shall be made available to the Employer.

REV 00
B. The latest requirements of all national, county, municipal and other

authorities having jurisdiction shall be met.
C. Work shall be performed in compliance with Employer's insurance

underwriters' requirements.
D. All electrical work shall comply with Division 26 Section “Basic

Electrical Materials and Methods”.
E. All components shall be IP 2X finger protected to IEC 60529 such that

live components cannot be accidentally touched. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum,
IP 45 to IEC 60529 and exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529
unless specifically noted otherwise within these documents.
F. The IBMS Specialist shall only offer equipment that is UL listed or CE

Marked for their intended use.
G. All electrical installation work shall conform to the requirements specified

in the electrical trade contract documents. Where there is any conflict between the
requirements of the different project trade contract documents, statutes, codes,
regulations, local ordinances and any requirement of an agency having jurisdiction over
the project, the most stringent requirement shall apply unless determined otherwise by
Engineer. Advise the Engineer of any discrepancy between the various requirements for
the project.
H. Each component shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

1.Manufactured by experienced manufacturers of the specific component and
facilities.
2.Designed to minimize the requirement for field repair or maintenance.
3.Modular design.
4.Electronic components shall have internal failure diagnostics.
5.Each component shall be maintainable without significantly affecting the
ongoing operation of the other components.
6.Components, test ports and cable terminations shall be readily accessible.
7.Damage caused by the failure of one component will be limited to the
component that has failed without affecting the ongoing operation of the other
components.
8.Analytic software applications to optimize the building’s performance, fault
detection and diagnostics shall be adopted by the IBMS contractor.

REV 00
I. Equipment, devices and materials shall conform to all performance

requirements of the specifications when exposed to the following interferences:
1.Project lighting, telephone and elevator equipment.
2.VHF and UHF signals as generated by external or internal portable or fixed
transmitters.
3.AM signals as generated from transmitters.
4.Electrical noise on the building power system, both spurious and harmonics.
5.The installations shall not radiate signals that cause interference to the correct
operation of The Employer’s on-site equipment.
6.The IBMS and all individual electrical equipment, devices and components
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61000-6-3 (General Emission Standard)
and IEC 61000-6-1 and 2 (General Immunity Standard), the requirements of the
Federal Communication Commission rules and regulations Part 15, sub part J and
all other applicable codes and statutes with respect to the radiation and
conduction of radio frequency interference.
1.13 SCHEDULE
A. Complete all requirements of the IBMS sub-contract in accordance with the

project program and prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date for each phase.
B. Attend project meetings as requested by the Engineer.
C. Provide to the Engineer a schedule indicating the sequence of work,

durations of individual tasks, delivery dates for all material, devices and equipment and
detail any interface that must be coordinated with any other Specialists.
D. Provide written status reports at required intervals and in a format acceptable

to the Engineer. An updated schedule of work shall be included in each status report.
E. Comply with the Project Construction Schedule. Provide additional staffing

or work overtime as required to comply with the Project Schedule so as not to interfere
with other on-site Specialists in their effort to comply with the Project Schedule.
Confirm, prior to tender submittal that all equipment, devices, material and services
proposed are available and will be delivered accordingly to comply with the Project
Schedule.
F. Provide written Request For Information (RFI) notices to the Engineer when
specific information or clarification of the specifications is required. Request For

REV 00
Information notices shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to the need for the
information.
1.14 IBMS INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. The IBMS specialist shall:

1.Have a local staff, within 50 kilometers of the project site, of trained
personnel capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency
maintenance on the IBMS, all components and software/firmware and all other
elements of the IBMS.
2.Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of
equivalent systems over a minimum period of ten (10) years in the project area.
3.Have comprehensive local service and support facilities for the total IBMS
that shall be capable of responding to Client call-out within 2 hours, 7 days a week.
4.Maintain local, or have approved local sub-contracted access to, supplies of
essential expendable parts.
5.Undertake to maintain necessary project staff and maintenance personnel as
per the Employer’s requirements.
1.15 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. Work shall comply with all the requirements of the Health and Safety
Commission and with all of the instructions of the Engineer and Project Manager.
1.16 UNIT PRICES
A. The IBMS specialist is to provide a tender price for the complete IBMS.
In addition, the IBMS specialist shall provide unit prices for all items and equipment
installed under the contract in sufficient details to enable additions and deletions to the
contract to be priced by the Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. IBMS subsystems including Fire Alarm, Access Control, Video Surveillance,

etc… are to be from the same IBMS system manufacturer or from Ecosystem/Technology

REV 00
Partner certified by the IBMS main provider enabling seamless integration between
IBMS and each IBMS subsystem within the tower.
2.2 GENERAL
B. When a specific reference to a manufacturer of a product is made, and the

term "equal and approved" is used, substitutions of a product by another manufacturer
will be allowed, but the substituted product must conform to all specified requirements.
The Engineer’s determination on the acceptability of substitutes shall be final. Approved
substituted equipment shall conform to available space requirements. Substituted
equipment that does not conform to the available space requirements shall be replaced or
required modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Employer.
C. All equipment and materials shall be new and without any defect. All
components of one type shall be products of one manufacturer.
D. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is

available that does not contain asbestos, PCB, or other hazardous materials as
determined by the Engineer, a written application shall be made by the IBMS Specialist
to the Engineer providing all relevant details concerning a proposed product or material
that contains hazardous material prior to installation.
E. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to

Substantial Completion, the IBMS Specialist shall certify in writing that products and
materials installed, and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated
biphenyls (PCB).
2.3 PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION
A. The IBMS Specialist shall certify in writing with the tender submittal that
all components proposed for this project comply with all of the following requirements:
1.Complete and thorough testing has proven that performance shall not be
affected when the building electrical distribution system experiences disturbances of
the type and magnitude normally encountered in buildings of this nature.
2.Power line disturbance tests involving the cycling of mains voltage showed
that all components operated satisfactorily when the voltage dropped to 75% or
less of the nominal mains voltage and normal operation resumed when the
voltage returned to less than 85% of the nominal mains voltage. Following these
brownout conditions the components were free of any stress and/or damage,

REV 00
operated as normal and no data at the PC, NAC, and Gateways was lost or
corrupted.
2.4 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Provide equipment, devices and materials for interior and exterior

applications that shall be capable of withstanding and operating satisfactorily in, at
minimum, the following ambient conditions:
B. 0 Deg. C. (41 Deg. F.) to 50 Deg. C. (131 Deg. F.) temperature.
C. 10-95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
D. Electrical power service of single phase 220/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz nominal

with tolerances in compliance with the applicable statutes, codes and regulations.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the
contract Documents
B. Accept products on site and verify damage.
C. Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in

conditioned space.
2.6 SPARE PARTS
A. Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data
to include a complete list of the sources of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are
either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or
specified hereinafter as EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the sub-contract

REV 00
B. Submit a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure
efficient operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing
shall not relieve the Specialist of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
2.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide special hardware and software tools required for maintenance.
B. Provide two of each plug in circuit board.
C. Provide 5000 sheets of continuous form paper.
2.8 LABELING
A. Provide labeling for all NAC, Gateways, Routers, Hubs, panels and
enclosures. Labeling shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1.Plastic laminated label that shall be affixed to the panel or enclosure with
rivets or permanent adhesive.
2.Lettering 6mm (0.25 inch) high that sharply contrasts the background colour.
3.Consistent throughout the project.
4.Indicated on the record documentation.
B. Provide labeling of all cabling and containment. Labeling shall meet, at

1.Identified with permanent tag or self-adhesive label within the panel.
2.Cross referenced on the associated record documentation and laminated

record drawing within the panel enclosure.
3.The IBMS Specialist shall provide labelling for all cable furnished and
installed by the ICT Specialist for the use of the IBMS Specialist.
2.9 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

REV 00
A. Provide panels and enclosures for all NACs of the IBMS, except where
it is specifically identified within these contract documents that the enclosure shall be
furnished by another trade. Panels and enclosures shall meet, at minimum, the following
requirements:
1.Painted steel panels with locking door. All panels shall be lockable with
the same key.
2.Ventilated to prevent excessive heat build-up, where required.
3.Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. Provide strain relief.
4.Internal components shall be installed to allow easy access for diagnostics,
maintenance, removal or replacement.
5.Panel or enclosure shall be suitable rated for the environment for which it is
to be installed. Interior enclosures shall be, at minimum, IP 45 to IEC 60529 and
exterior enclosures shall be weather proof IP 65 to IEC 60529 unless
specifically noted otherwise within these sub-contract documents.
6.Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of IBMS
NACs.
B. Panels and enclosures shall only be located as indicated on the shop drawings
and at Engineer approved locations.
2.10 IBMS SERVER (IBMSS)
A. General
1.All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system requirements
given are the minimum requirements. The Contractor's product shall meet or exceed
these requirements. Additionally, and due to the rapid advancement and antiquation
of hardware technology, the supplied hardware shall be the “contemporary technical
and operational equivalent” of the specified hardware. The following requirements
shall be met:
a. Contemporary technical and operational equivalent shall be
based on a comparison of technology at the time of Contract to the
technology at the time of ordering the equipment for each phase.
b. Hardware shall be ordered as close to the actual installation
date for a given phase as possible. Final hardware approval and scheduled
order date shall be at the sole discretion of the Employer.
c. Hardware equivalence shall be based on both technical
equivalence and operational equivalence.
d. Contemporary technical equivalence shall be based on device
performance and class specifications.
e. Contemporary operational equivalence shall be based on
industry standards and function.

REV 00
2.Environmental Rating: Equipment shall be rated for continuous operation
under the ambient environmental temperature, humidity, and vibration conditions
encountered at the installed location.
3.To ensure compatibility among devices, all hardware equipment shall be

supplied by a single manufacturer. Solutions which are based on sourcing
equipment from different manufacturers, are not acceptable.
4.All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a
recognized manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest
time possible without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is
state- of-the-art and is based on the latest proven technology. All PC shall be
suitable for rugged and continuous operation.
B. Hardware specification
1.Hot redundant fault tolerant servers shall be installed at the building’s Data
Center.
2.The Contractor shall design servers that are able to cope with the foreseen
workload; the Contractor shall indicate the workload’s increase percentage that the
servers will be able to cope with.
3.Contractor shall deliver Rack servers or Blade servers and shall configure
them accordingly.
4.Processor:
a. Contractor shall provide an Intel Xeon processor - family E5.
Latest available family’s version at the time of ordering shall be provided;
if E5 v4 family is launched, processors from E5 v3 family are not
accepted.
b. Bus type: QPI.
c. Instruction set: 64-bit.
d. Instruction Set Extensions: AVX 2.0
e. Memory specifications:
1) Memory type: DDR4. All latest versions by Intel (E3 v5, E5
v4 and E7 v3 families) support DDR4 memory type.
2) Maximum Memory Bandwidth: 59.7 GB/s or higher. Max
Memory bandwidth is the maximum rate at which data can be
read from or stored into a semiconductor memory by the processor
(in GB/s).
3) Maximum Memory size: 1536 GB or better.
f. Supported Intel Data Protection Technology:
1) Intel AES New Instructions.
2) Secure Key.
g. Supported Intel Platform Protection Technology:

REV 00
1) OS guard.
2) Trusted Execution Technology.
3) Execute Disable Bit.
5.Expansion slots’ technology: PCIe 3.0
6.Hot-swappable cooling fans shall be provided.
7.Calculation:
a. Based on the IBMS manufacturer’s recommendations and
the physical total number of I/O points, Contractor shall provide by
justified calculations - for each of the servers - the choice of the:
1) Processor’s number of cores. Contractor shall not use the
Hyper- Threading technology in order to meet the required number
of cores; Contractor shall provide a physical number of cores equal or
greater than the required number.
2) CPU frequency.
3) RAM.
4) Storage capacity (calculated at maximum frequency).
b. The total average CPU load shall not exceed 40%.

Contractor shall increase the CPU number of cores and RAM in order to
maintain the required average CPU load.
c. The server storage hardware shall be calculated for 5 years,
configured using hardware RAID 5 and designed to use less than 60%
of the available space. Calculation shall clearly state the analog tags’,
the discrete tags’, and the string tags’ number in addition to the update’s
rate.
8. Hard drives: HDD/SSD: SAS Server RAID System shall have
integrated RAID 5 with on board RAID
controllers. Software RAID instead of a dedicated RAID controller chip is not
acceptable.
9.Servers shall be rack mounted in a standard 19” racks complying with
EIA/ECA-310- E and IEC 60297 Mechanical structures for electronic equipment
- Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series:
a. IEC 60297-3-100 Part 3-100: Basic dimensions of front
panels, subracks, chassis, racks and cabinets
b. IEC 60297-3-101 Part 3-101: Subracks and associated plug-
in units
c. IEC 60297-3-102 Part 3-102: Injector/extractor handle
d. IEC 60297-3-103 Part 3-103: Keying and alignment pin
e. IEC 60297-3-104 Part 3-104: Connector dependent interface
dimensions of subracks and plug-in units
f. IEC 60297-3-105 Part 3-105: Dimensions and design aspects
for 1U chassis

REV 00
10. Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for
providing fans, shelves, drawers, special power wiring, ground connections, cables,
connectors, appurtenances, and adapters of any kind necessary to accommodate the
system installation, operation, testing, or maintenance.
C. Operating System
1.The latest supported version of the Operating System shall be provided.
2.The following Operating Systems shall be supported:
a. Microsoft Windows Server.
b. Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
c. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES).
d. VMware.
e. Citrix XenServer.
2.11 OPERATOR INTERFACE WORKSTATIONS (OIW)
A. The OIW shall comprise a PC and associated peripheral operator I/O

devices. The OIWs shall be located at the Tower IBMS Control Room.
B. All of the OIWs shall be considered as Thin Client for the IBMS servers.
C. The OIW PC, shall have the latest release of Microsoft Windows professional
operating system at the time of implementation and shall have, at minimum, the following
facilities:
1.Intel® Core™ i7-6700 3.4GHz (up to 4.0GHz) 8M 4C TWR CPU or a better
performing model.
2.At least 1 TB RAID 1 Mirrored Array Configuration.
3.16 GB DDR4-2133 ECC Unbuffered RAM.
4.100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
5. 1GB DDR4 [DVI, HDMI.].

6.4 USB ports.
7.SuperMulti DVD Burner.
8.Real time software or hardware clock.
9.Tower Case with minimum of 4 external 5¼” and 3 Internal 5¼” drive bays,
400 watt or greater capacity rated power supplies, internal cooling fan and
external keyboard lock.

REV 00
10. All necessary mounting hardware and cables for all components.
11. Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
12. Sound card for the annunciation of audible WAV and MP3 file tones
or pre-recorded messages at the integral graphical display stereo speakers.
A. Provide an alarm to uniquely identify a PC communication failure. One

way that this might be accomplished is by using a watchdog timer at a NAC.
B. Following a power failure, all PC shall return to a fully operational status

without operator intervention within two (2) minutes of the return of mains power.
Software changes, including modifications to database(s), shall not be lost in a power
failure.
C. All PC shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be from a
recognized manufacturer of PCs. Purchase of the PC shall be delayed until the latest
time possible without causing a delay in the schedule in order to ensure that it is state-
of-the-art and is based on the latest proven technology. All PC shall be suitable for rugged
and continuous operation.
D. The following peripheral I/O devices shall be provided at each OIW:

1.Keyboard and mouse.
2.Flat panel LCD video display unit.
3.Alarm printer
E. The IBMS OIW at each location shall have 1No. Report Printer. Where
there are multiple OIW at one location the printer shall be networked such that they are
available to each OIW.
2.12 PERIPHERAL OPERATOR I/O DEVICES
A. Printers: General
1.The operator shall be able to direct the hardcopy output to any printer.
The IBMS Specialist shall set up the system such that all IBMS generated
messages such as alarms, returns to normal, etc. are directed to the appropriate
alarm printers and all IBMS automatically generated and operator requested reports
are output to the appropriate report printer.
2.The printers at one location shall be accessible from any OIW such that an
operator at one location can generate a hardcopy message at any other location.

REV 00
B. Printers: Alarm Printers
1.The alarm printer shall meet the following specifications:
a. Minimum print speed of 300 characters/second. Slower

speed printers shall not be acceptable when printing in normal quality.
b. Selectable character sizes
c. Sprocket paper feed.
d. Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
e. The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a
width equivalent to A3 size (297 mm by 420 mm).
f. Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
g. 24 x 24 dot matrix printer
C. Printers: Report Printers

1.The report printer shall meet, at minimum, the following specifications:
a. Minimum print speed of twelve pages per minute black and
three pages per minute color. Slower speed printers shall not be
acceptable when printing in normal quality.
b. Scalable fonts.
c. Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3
size (297mm x 420mm) and A4 size (210mm x 297mm).
d. Page feed and page discharge controls.
e. Color and black and white printing capability without
changing ink or toner cartridges.
f. 1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi color.
g. Laser jet technology.
D. Keyboard:
1.Provide a keyboard for operator access at each OIW and server. This
shall be in addition to any other operator input device such as a mouse.
2.The keyboard shall be in a standard typewriter (QWERTY) configuration
with a full alphanumeric standard ASCII character set and with additional
dedicated keys for other functions associated with the IBMS such as print screen.
E. Mouse:
1.Provide a mouse at each OIW and server and configure the system such
that cursor control can be undertaken from both the keyboard and mouse as
selected by the operator.
2.Mouse shall be latest optical technology.

REV 00
F.Graphical Display:
1.Provide a Full HD resolution LCD with LED backlight graphical display at
each OIW and server. The monitor shall be a flat panel type with standard HDMI
Input.
2.The graphical display shall be used for the display of operator entered and
requested data and the output of IBMS generated alarm and other information.
3.The graphical display shall have a minimum screen diagonal measurement of
25 inches.
4.The graphical display shall be full HD 1080P having a minimum resolution
of 1920 by 1080 pixels with 100 Hz minimum refresh rate.
5.The unit shall be capable of displaying both schematic and alphanumeric
data at the same time.
6.A minimum of 16.7 million discrete colors shall be available for display
selection.
7.Integral stereo speakers.
2.13 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
A. The POT’s devices shall not be used by the IBMS Specialist for
commissioning the IBMS or for any other purpose and shall be delivered new to the
Employer immediately prior to the acceptance testing.
B. Provide a jack at each at each mechanical and electrical room for the plug
connection of the POT. Provide two spare cables for plug connection for each POT. The
operator shall be able to communicate with the IBMS via the POT using the same
operator interface as that at any OIW PC.
C. The POT shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:

1.4th generation Intel® Core™ i7-4710HQ Quad Core Processor (2.5GHz,
turbo up to 3.5GHz) with 6MB Cache and Hyper Threading
2. 512 GB PCIe SSD.
3.8GB DDR3 1600 MHz RAM.
4.100/1000Mbps Ethernet adapter.
5. Wi-Fi® Wireless networking (802.11b/g/n/ac) with Bluetooth® v3.0 6.
14.0" IPS FHD 1920x1080p.

REV 00
7.40X Speed CD-ROM drive (interchangeable).DVD SuperMulti (+/-R double
layer) drive.
8.Integral power supplies which shall be suitably rated for the service.
9.Integral QWERTY keyboard with full ASCII character set.
10. Weight, including carrying case, not to exceed 3.5kg.
11. Provide a carrying case designed specifically for the POT that
ensures adequate protection.
12. POT shall be powered by a rechargeable battery and shall also
be powered by a 220/240 Vac, nominal 50/60 Hz source. Provide batteries
adequate for a minimum of 4 hours of operation.
D. When connected to the network data port, the POT shall be able to undertake
all of the control and monitoring functions that can be performed at the OIW.
2.14 CONSOLES
A. The Contractor shall provide the enclosure’s furniture of the Tower IBMS
control rooms as shown in the design drawings and specified in this specifications.
Workstations referred to as consoles. The work-surface height shall be 72cm above the
finished floor.
B. The consoles shall accommodate the display, and the operator interface’s
devices.
C. The consoles shall satisfy the functional, ergonomic and aesthetic

requirements of the operational environment.
D. The consoles shall be of modular design, facilitating future equipment

retrofits and full reconfigurations without major modification to the structure or to the
exterior elements.
E. The consoles shall have the possibility to customize the mounting positions
in order to suit both the operator and the equipment’s requirements.
F. The consoles shall be provided with ventilation, task lighting, bottom

cable entry, cable management system, power bars, adjustable monitor height and angle.

REV 00
G. The Contractor shall provide pre-production review drawings of the console
arrangements in order to verify the equipment layout, exterior finish, architectural,
mechanical and electrical elements:
H. The contractor shall supply five sets of scaled drawings for each console
assembly showing the location of all the specified electronics in isometric view in
addition to top and front views.
I. The specification of sizes and dimensions shown in the drawings shall have a
tolerance of 1.5mm as maximum.
J. The Console shall be comprised of end and intermediate frames with

horizontal stringers and decorative end panels.
K. The Console shall feature a hinged dual-channel duct cover with integrated
aluminum mounting system for LCD monitor arrays.
L. The Console shall have a minimum 30mm thick MDF core PVC work
surface. The work surface shall be not less than 580mm deep overall and should include a
45mm deep beveled edge covering the work surface's entire front width.
M. All components within the console shall be:

1.Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a series of
independent sectional compartments.
2.Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturer’s model numbers.
3.Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following installation.
The assembly of the console shall be accomplished without the need for either
welding or carpentry work.
4.Constructed of a steel super-structure framework consisting of intermediate
and end frames connected by horizontal stringers. External decorative side
panels shall be available in TruForm or laminated MDF core.
N. The self-supporting skeleton framework shall:

1.Be installed at the site in advance of any external finishing panels. The
framework shall be fully capable of supporting all specified electronics without
the need for attachment of any external panels.
2.Be capable of being supplied to site in knockdown (flat packed) form and be
capable of assembly using bolts and fastening system without welding or carpentry
work.
3.Include front and rear horizontal stringers constructed of 2.5mm formed sheet
metal. Stringers will connect, and span, 2mm end frames and/or intermediate frames
to form a complete structure.
REV 00
O. Components
1.Intermediate and end frames shall be a minimum of 40mm in width and
capable of supporting fully loaded console. Intermediate and end frames shall
incorporate 10mm
diameter threaded adjustable glides and 50mm vertical slots for mounting two
and four gang electrical boxes.
2.End frames shall feature an anti-tip extension and the intermediate frames
shall feature four grommet holes.
3.2.5mm formed sheet metal horizontal stringers with fastening system shall be
50mm high and available in 600mm, 1200mm, and 1800mm widths.
4.1.5mm stationary steel shelf shall extend 450mm from the front of the
console and shall feature four grommet holes and has a load capacity of 90kg.
5.Doors shall be supplied with a keyed-alike locking lever latch and
integrated cable management. Doors shall be able to accept an optional CPU shelf
or file/storage bin for convenient swing-out access.
6.15, 45, and 90 degree 2.5mm steel corner fillers shall be available. Corners
fillers will feature Insta-Lock fastening system for ease of installation. Corners shall
be available in concave and convex configurations.
7.1.2mm steel hinged duct cover shall conceal, and allow easy access to,
dual cable raceway so signal and power cords can be separated.
8.2mm angled data/power rail shall include cable grommets and openings for a
universal data mounting plate and/or duplex power box. The data/power rail
shall incorporate Insta-Lock fastening system and, combined with 2mm shelf
brackets shall support the work surface.
9.Fully integrated black anodized aluminum track system shall be capable of
supporting a wide variety of monitor arrays while providing simple horizontal
adjustment. Constructed of extruded 6105-T5 aluminum with a T-slot profile.
Monitor array support posts shall be available in 380mm, 725mm, and 1000mm
heights. The support posts shall be 48mm in diameter with a wall thickness of
2.8mm. Monitor arrays shall be mounted to the Versa-Track with ball spring drop-in
T-nuts.
P. Chair: Provide 7 No. scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back

rest type, with gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet
castors for base and back to Engineer's approval
Q. Finish and Color: All exterior and frame steel components including doors,
rack turrets, duct covers, and shelving shall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black
powder coat textured finish.

REV 00
R. Optional Accessories: A full range of optional accessories shall be
available such as fans, electrical boxes, CPU shelves, file bins, rack mount turrets,
monitor mounts, and LED task lighting with VESA mount or magnetic base.
S. Instructions: Fully detailed assembly instructions at least in English language

shall be supplied with both written and pictorial descriptions for each item/model
numbered component.
T. Packaging: Each component part number shall be independently marked

and packed into double or triple ply corrugated outer cartons and shall be suitable for
storage and shipping to site without damage.
U. Warranty: Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall

provide a written 10 years guarantee against defects of all component parts, material and
workmanship under normal use.
2.15 IBMS NETWORK INTERFACE UNIT
A. The IBMS sub- contractor shall supply one or more Network Integration
Units (NIU) as part of this contract where required to provide an OPC, ODBC or server-
to-server interface with an IBMS sub-system or a Third Party system such as the
Lighting Control System. The number of NIU’s required will be dependent on the
type and quantity of the Third Party system Automation Level controllers and the
number of points. It is the responsibility of the IBMS Contractor to determine the
number of NIU’s required. The number of nodes connected to a NIU shall not exceed
80% of the manufacturer’s stated maximum capability. The NIU shall be the latest
product of the manufacturer and shall have the latest software version available. The
NIU shall be based on the same operating system as the IBMS server.
B. The NIU shall provide global supervisory control functions over the IBMS
sub-system or Third Party systems. The NIU shall be capable of executing application
control programs to provide:
1.Calendar functions.
2.Scheduling.
3.Trending.
4.Alarm monitoring and routing.
5.Time synchronization.
6.Integration of Modbus, EIB, LonWorks and BACnet Automation Level
controller data.

REV 00
C. The NIU shall provide multiple Operator access to the system and support for
ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NIU shall be an ODBC-compliant database.
D. The NIU shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet.
It shall support a minimum of 32 simultaneous Operators.
E. Event Alarm Notification and actions

1.The NIU shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management,
and analysis to supplement the distributed capabilities of the Automation Level
controllers.
2.The NIU shall be able to route any alarm condition to the IBMS Application
Servers.
3.Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and
acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to:
a. Point in alarm
b. Return to normal
c. Hardware or software fault
4.Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the
purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
5.Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
6.Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts
for equipment maintenance. The Operator shall be able to reset runtime or event
count values with appropriate password control.
F.Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
G. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NIU and the IBMS
Application Servers and shall be available for review by the Operator.
H. Data Collection and Storage - The NIU shall have data storage and
collection capabilities as follows:
1.The NIU shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object
and store this data for future use.
2.The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NIU
that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
a. Designating the log as interval or deviation.
b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of
day, day of week and the sample collection interval.

REV 00
c. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the
deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will
initiate logging of the object.
d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number
of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting
when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis.
e. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a
time-Based event or by an Operator-defined event or action. The IBMS
Contractor shall set the NIU to download the data to the IBMS Data
Servers at a pre-defined time. The time shall be changeable by an
Operator having the required password access level.
3.All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NIU and the data
shall be accessed from the IBMS servers.
4.All log data, when accessed from the server, shall be capable of being
manipulated using standard SQL statements.
5.All log data shall be available to the Operator in the following data formats:
a. HTML.
b. XML.
c. Plain Text.
d. Comma or tab separated values.
6.Systems that do not provide log data in XML formats at a minimum shall not
be acceptable.
7.The NIU shall have the ability to archive its log data at the IBMS Data
Servers. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a
minimum:
a. Archive on time of day. The IBMS Contractor shall set the
NIU to download the data to the IBMS Data Servers at 0200 hours
every day. The time shall be changeable by an Operator having the
required password access level.
8.The NIU shall act as an OPC client and shall support the integration of
device data from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server shall be Ethernet
IP as required by the device. Provide the required objects in the library to
support the integration of the OPC system data. Objects provided shall include
at a minimum:
a. Read/Write OPC Analogue Input Object
b. Read/Write OPC Analogue Output Object
c. Read/Write OPC Binary Input Object
d. Read/Write OPC Binary Output Object
e. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Input Object

REV 00
f. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Output Object
g. Read/Write OPC String Input Object
h. Read/Write OPC String Output Object
i. The NIU shall perform scheduling, alarming, logging and
global supervisory control functions, of the OPC system devices.
2.16 IBMS NETWORK AUTOMATION CONTROLLER.
A. The IBMS NAC shall provide the interface functions whenever a

gateway is required to provide integration between the IBMS and a Third Party system.
B. The NAC shall be used to integrated Third Party systems offering only serial
communication protocol such as BACnet/MSTP, Modbus, M-BUS, LonWorks, KNX,
etc....
C. The NAC shall allow for 20% expansion in terms of communication cable
distance and number of communication nodes.
D. The NAC shall be based on native BACnet and shall be a BTL BACnet
Building Controller (B-BC) and shall support all applicable BIBB’s from the data sharing,
alarm event, schedule, trend and device manager groups. Standard BACnet object types
supported by the controllers shall include:
1.Binary input and output and value
2.Analogue input, output and value,
3.Multi-state input and output
4.Loop, calendar, notification class, command, file, program, schedule, group,
event enrolment and device.
5.Proprietary object types shall not be used unless specifically approved by the
Employer.
E. Following a loss of power the NAC shall reboot in an orderly fashion and
attain a normal operating status within 2 minutes of the return of power. This shall be
accomplished without operator intervention.
F.Hardware Specifications:
1.Memory: The operating system and the application programs for the B-BC
shall be stored in non-volatile FLASH memory. The B-BC shall support up to 256
MB Flash memory and up to 512 MB of RAM.
2.Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum, LED indication of
CPU status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status.

REV 00
3.Real Time Clock (RTC): Each B-BC shall include a battery or capacitor
backed, real time clock for 72 hours, accurate to 1.5 minutes per month. The
RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of
week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap
years.
4.Power Supply: The power supply for the B-BC's shall be 24 or 220/240
volts AC (- 15%, +20%, 25 VA max.) power. Line voltage below the operating
range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall have over
voltage surge protection without additional AC power signal conditioning.
5.Battery Backup: The B-BC shall include an on-board battery to back up the
controller's RAM memory. In the case of a power failure, the B-BC shall first try
to
restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the B-
BC shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH memory.
G. Software Specifications:
1.General: The B-BC shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident
operating system and application programming. Each B-BC shall be capable of
parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program
may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full
access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall
not be interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation,
program entry, printout of the program for storage, routing communications, etc.
2.User Programming Language: The application software shall be user
programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control
algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English
language-based and programmable by the user.
H. Control Software:
1.The B-BC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control
algorithms:
a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)
b. Two Position Control.
c. Digital Filter.
d. Ratio Calculator.
e. Equipment Cycling Protection.
2.Mathematical Functions: Each controller shall be capable of performing
basic mathematical functions (+, -, x, /), squares, square roots, exponential,
logarithms, trigonometric functions, Boolean logic statements or combinations of
all. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements
including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These shall be able to

REV 00
be used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five
parentheses deep.
3.Energy Management Applications: B-BC's shall have the ability to perform
any or all of the following energy management routines:
a. Time of Day Scheduling.
b. Calendar Based Scheduling.
c. Holiday Scheduling.
d. Exception Scheduling.
e. Temporary Schedule Overrides.
f. Optimal Start.
g. Optimal Stop.
h. Night Setback Control.
i. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer).
j. Peak Demand Limiting.
k. Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling.
l. Heating/Cooling Interlock.
m. Hot/Cold Deck Reset.
n. Free Cooling.
o. Hot Water Reset.
p. Chilled Water Reset.
q. Condenser Water Reset.
r. Chiller Sequencing.
I. History Logging: Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any

input, output, calculated value, etc. over user defined time intervals (1 second minimum
time). Up to 256 values shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the
instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logged data shall be
downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-
defined time intervals, or manual command.
J. Alarm Management: For each system point, alarms can be created based on
high/low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the BC
and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports. Up to 8 alarms
can be configured for each point in the controller. Alarms will be generated based on their
priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided. If communication with the
Operator Workstation is temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and
buffered in the B-BC. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the
Operator Workstation. Alarms shall be capable of being routed to any BACnet
workstation that conforms to the B-AWS device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol.

REV 00
K. Router Function: The B-BC shall be capable of routing traffic between two
BACnet MS/TP ports, one BACnet PTP (Point to Point) port, four (logical) BACnet
IP ports and one (logical) BACnet Ethernet port. The BC shall support BACnet IP
Foreign Device Registration and BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). The
B-BC shall support PTP modem communications and perform IP Packet
Assembling/Disassembling (PAD) Routing for up to four BACnet IP PAD networks.
L. Each B-BC shall have the following standard features:

1.Each of the four BACnet IP ports can be configured for BACnet IP, BBMD,
Foreign Device Registration or PAD.
2.The Firmware shall be upgradeable through the Ethernet connection via FTP
without physical access to the B-BC for easy updates as future enhancements
expand functionality.
3.Accept up to four expansion I/O cards.
4.Expansion I/O modules shall be connected with twisted pair wire or
pluggable on the controllers backplane.
5.Shall dynamically allocate memory resources to provide flexible use of its
memory.
6.Shall contain up to 32 user defined control programs.
7.Shall employ at minimum a 32-bit microprocessor.
8.Shall meet or exceed the specifications in the ANSI/ASHRAE BACnet
Standard 135- 2016 for BACnet Building Controllers.
9.Shall have removable screw terminal blocks that can accommodate wire sizes
14-22 AWG.
10. Shall support pulse counting up to 16 Hz with accumulator objects.
11. Shall support direct connections up to 64 inputs, 32 outputs.
12. Shall support up to 1000 Analog Value Objects, 1000 Binary Value
Objects and up to 256 Multi-state Value Objects.
13. Shall support up to 32 Loop Objects.
14. Shall support up to 32 Program Objects.
15. Shall support up to 32 Schedule Objects and up to 32 Calendar
Objects.
16. Shall support up to 256 Trend Objects.
M. Embedded Web Server: Each B-BC shall have an embedded Web

Server that provides the following capabilities as standard features.
1.Serve and display optional custom graphics and tabular web pages containing
any set of desired I/O values from the entire BAS.
a. The B-BC shall have capacity for at least 50 unique
graphical web page backgrounds.
REV 00
b. Each background may be re-used multiple times with
different sets of similar data such as for a VAV terminal or FCU to
provide many more unique displayed data sets.
2.Provide a built-in alarm summary that displays selected FMCS system
alarms in a tabular summary page.
3.Provides a minimum of 3 levels of web browser password protected user
access.
4.The B-BC shall be capable of being configured over the data network by
using a standard Internet Browser without any additional software.
2.17 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GENERAL
A. The IBMS Specialist shall provide a site-wide software license that shall
permit the Employer to add a PC to the IBMS Management level Network without the
requirement to obtain an additional software license.
B. The IBMS shall have an “off-the-shelf” software package (Middleware) that

shall be able to import and export data in, at minimum, the following protocols over an
Ethernet TCP/IP backbone:
1.BACnet.
2.LonTalk.
3.Modbus.
4.SNMP.
5.XML/SOAP.
6.OPC.
7.KNX.
8.ONVIF
9.Shall be able to communicate with any DDE compliant application.
C. The IBMS shall also have an “off-the-shelf” open API platform, embedded
Microsoft SQL server, and SQL reporting services to enable enterprise integration with
other SCADA and Facility Management Systems.
D. The IBMS software shall be a modular platform, allowing for adding and
application module add-on for each integrated IBMS sub-system.
E. The following sections describes the overall functions, features and

requirements of the IBMS software, while sections 2.31, 2.32 and 2.33 includes

REV 00
functions, feature and requirements applicable for the Video Surveillance, and Access
Control respectively.
F. Data shall be output from the IBMS in the appropriate protocol to the
appropriate ELV Building System. Note that it shall be possible to output the same data
in different protocols to different ELV Building Systems.
G. Information shall be output from the IBMS when:

1.Requested by the operator. This includes requests made by the operator for
the immediate output of specific information and requests for information that are
optional and have been pre-programmed by the operator for display.
2.Scheduled by the operator. An example of this might be the output of a
report at an operator-defined time of day.
3.An alarm condition has been detected by the IBMS. All alarm conditions
detected by the IBMS shall be annunciated as detailed elsewhere in this section.
H. The operator interfaces for the Operator Interface Workstation and the
Portable Operator Terminal shall be the same.
I. The graphical user operator interface shall be "user friendly". The interface
shall be such that there is no need for the operator to reference documentation other than
"help" menus on the system in order for the operator to perform his normal duties after the
training has been received, as detailed in these specifications.
J. The operator interface shall be English language with metric units. The
system shall be capable of converting all engineering unit displays into the equivalent
English values and displaying such values with the appropriate unit identifiers. The
switchover from metric to English and vice versa shall be done with a single operator
command. The engineering unit switchover shall be for all measured and displayed
variables and calculated points. Unit conversion and display shall be carried through all
possible display view including graphical displays, text base displays, and software
application packages.
K. The performance criteria detailed in these specifications for the operator

interface shall apply when all IBMS are in their completed form and all software and
hardware functions are operational.
L. The software shall be acceptable to all potential IBMS Specialists. The IBMS
server software package shall have a successful history of use with BACnet/IP and
shall incorporate all drivers required to meet these specifications.

REV 00
M. The programs shall be designed to provide industrial quality real time data
presentation. The software shall enable the IBMS Specialists to develop customized
graphical views of the mechanical and electrical systems and shall contain an advanced
graphics library that contains all potentially required images.
2.18 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS CONTROL
A. Access to the IBMS at the OIW, the POT and any other I/O device shall
be protected by a password based access system. An operator shall not be able to access
information or perform any tasks at the IBMS until a valid password has been
entered. Access shall terminate when an operator signs off or after a predetermined
time-out period, initially set at 10 minutes after the last operator access, whichever occurs
first. The password shall not be echoed at any terminal when it is entered. Any
operator functions, whether or not detailed within these specifications, shall be subject
to the operator's password being of a sufficiently high level to enable the operator to
perform the function.
B. Each password shall have up to 6 No. alphanumeric characters, at minimum,

with at least 500 million different combinations and it shall be possible to have a
minimum of 10,000 active passwords at any time.
C. It shall be possible to define the following for each password:

1.I/O terminals that can be used for access. This shall be defined for any
terminal that has access to the IBMS (including the web browsing facility).
2.Functions that can be performed.
3.Points that can be accessed.
D. If the system has fixed defined function levels then there shall be at least five
(5) levels. Only the highest level shall be able to undertake changes to the passwords.
E. An operator with the highest level of password shall be able to make

additions, deletions and changes to the passwords on-line using an interactive procedure
including the changing of the time-out period. An operator with the highest level of
password shall be able to obtain a report detailing the passwords assigned to each
operator and all relevant details of the access privileges associated with each password.
2.19 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ACCESS GENERAL

REV 00
A. An operator with the suitable level of access shall be able to access the
network to perform the following IBMS functions:
1.Observe values of IBMS monitored points, IBMS outputs and IBMS
calculated values.
2.Observe and change control modes for motors, i.e. IBMS manual control
mode and IBMS software control mode.
3.Observe, add, delete and change a database including a database that defines
a monitored, controlled or calculated point, a database that defines schedules or a
database that is created to meet any of the many functions detailed in these
documents.
4.Issue commands to change the status of a digital output or the value of an
analogue output.
5.Observe and acknowledge IBMS determined alarm conditions.
6.Initiate the outputs of add, delete and change reports.
7.Observe, add, delete and change graphical display system diagrams.
8.Observe, add, delete and change control algorithms including PID control
constants.
9.Other functions as expressly detailed in the IBMS specifications or as
required, even if not expressed, in order to meet the intent of these specifications.
B. Operator access shall be by penetration through a hierarchy of menus and/or

system displays on the graphical display using cursor control and by means of a series
of alphanumeric inputs at a keyboard. The menu selections shall be self-evident and
shall easily guide the operator through the execution of any of the functions. The
alphanumeric input shall comprise short English language statements and/or readily
understood abbreviations. Whichever approach is used, the process shall be via the most
direct path and shall involve as few operations as possible. It shall not be necessary
for the operator to know the location, i.e. the DDC controller, at which a point is
monitored/controlled in order to access any information concerning that point.
C. Following the completion of all steps by the operator performing an operator

access function, the function shall commence within two (2) seconds and shall be
completed within ten (10) seconds apart from those functions that are subject to the
limitations of the output rate of the printers.
D. An operator shall be able to edit his keyboard entries prior to attempted

execution using standard keys such as "delete" and "backspace". However, if an operator
makes an incorrect entry then the IBMS will display a message that clearly details the
nature of the error and identifies the appropriate "help" menu that will assist the operator
to successfully complete the entry.
E. All operator entries shall be echoed, except passwords, the OIW, servers and
on the screen on the POT depending on where the operator entry is made.

REV 00
2.20 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: PROGRAMMING AND UPDATES
A. The IBMS Specialist shall provide documentation detailing the methods and
techniques required to connect additional workstations, DDC controllers, gateways,
routers and any other IBMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as
well as to export the data in any of the previously mentioned standards to another system.
B. The system documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the

IBMS’s incorporation into another BACnet system in the future.
2.21 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR REQUEST FOR

INFORMATION
A. Each monitored, controlled and calculated point in the system shall be

accessed via the menu and the alphanumeric approaches as detailed in these
specifications.
B. Access using the system schematic displays, as detailed in the previous

sections, with the addition that once the system display level is reached it shall be
possible to progress to the individual monitored, controlled or calculated point. Once a
menu or system display selection is made it shall take no more than five (5) seconds
before the next menu or display level appears on the graphical display.
C. Access using the alphanumeric approach shall enable an operator to access

any point via a unique point name that may be a short English language descriptor or a
readily understandable mnemonic of the type used to identify points in the points
schedules and system diagrams.
D. Either approach shall enable the operator to observe or change any parameter
associated with a point and to add and delete points.
2.22 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATOR COMMANDS
A. The operator shall be able to place any output in the IBMS manual control
mode and when in that mode the operator shall be able to place any output to any required

REV 00
value subject to any hardwired interlocks and any software interlocks that are specified
to apply in the IBMS manual control mode.
B. The operator shall be able to place any setpoint that is determined by

software into the manual mode and to manually assign a value to the setpoint.
C. The operator shall be able to initiate the restart of equipment following a fire
alarm and following a power failure. Refer to the paragraphs titled "Equipment restart
following a fire alarm" and "Equipment restart following a power failure".
2.23 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: OPERATING SEQUENCES
A. The sequences of operation shall be resident at the controllers, however the

operator shall be able to implement a cross-system sequences, either at the IBMS servers
or at the NAC/ NIU linking the various IBMS sub-systems together and forming an
overall/ master sequence of operation through the software interface between the IBMS
sub-systems.
B. The operator shall be able to assign sequence/scenario of operation to each

individual door. Where required access-controlled doors shall be configured based on
business hours (e.g. door at main entrances may be required to be unlock during
business hours and be looked after business hours). Local card readers shall be able to
reverse the scenario as required. Contractor shall provide all necessary software and
hardware module for achieving the requirement.
2.24 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA BASES
A. Alarm data will be stored locally within the Building Level IBMS Servers
database.
B. Log data will be stored locally within the Building Level IBMS Servers
database for a period of 1 year.
C. The Database software will be compliant with the requirements; the

minimum specifications for the Database software are as follows;
1.The proposed databases for IBMS will be ORACLE™ (11.g or later),
Microsoft SQL Server (2008 or later), or similar and will include real time
database mirroring and on-line archiving;

REV 00
2.Data Encryption capability will be provided for the IBMS database objects
such as tables or views and will use a strong encryption technique such as Rivest
Cipher Five (RC5). RC5 encryption is an industry standard, and allows for different
levels of encryption; the implementation of which for the IBMS would be RC5-
32/12/26, therefore, as a minimum it would be as strong as 256-bit Data
Encryption Standard (DES) encryption.
D. The database will be defined using a Global Data Dictionary (GDD),

containing information on the structure of the database. The GDD will be maintained and
viewed using a database management tool; this will be used to maintain configuration
control of the database and the deployed version on the operational servers. The
database definition generated from the GDD will be installed on the operational servers.
The data dictionary itself is held within a set of tables and defines the following:
1.The owner of the data;
2.Entity names and descriptions;
3.Table-space definitions;
4.Table names and descriptions;
5.View names and definitions;
6.Table and index sizing and storage parameters;
7.Foreign key and check constraints;

8.User extensions meta-data.
E. The database(s) configuration will meet the following requirements:

1.Provide read consistency (data seen by a statement is consistent with
respect to a single point-in-time);
2.Provide creation of a read-consistent set of data when a table is being
queried (read) and simultaneously updated (written);
3.Provide original data values upon query when updated transaction remains
uncommitted;
4.Utilise rollback methodology for uncommitted transactions;
5.Utilise record locking mechanisms to prevent simultaneous updates to the
same record. Only the record(s) being updated will be locked;
6.Provide support for both distributed processing and distributed multiple
databases along with standard operations, including queries, inserts, updates, and
deletes of remote table data;
7.Provide support for automatic recovery from system or network failures (i.e.,
automatically commits or rolls back any in-doubt distributed transactions
consistently on all involved nodes when a failure occurs);
8.Provide support for transactions queuing and load balancing;

REV 00
9.Provide referential integrity for all data such that modifications do not affect
historical data;
10. Provide capability of online “live” backup of all database objects;
11. Provide capability of “point of failure” recovery of all database
objects within one hour of the failure (i.e., dump transaction logs hourly) with a
native utility package.
F. All database records will be identified by unique identification using creation

date, time and key index
G. The IBMS will provide automatic archive and backup of data and
housekeeping of database tables and disc files.
H. The archive mechanism will be activated by a system event which runs at a

configurable time during a quiet time. It will use a configurable set of Archive Rules,
which can be set up for any database table to perform one of the following actions:
1.Copy data from one table to another, then delete the copied data from the
first table. This process is known as archiving and is typically used to move live
records into historical tables. The same process will be used to archive certain
system tables, such as system logs and transaction logs;
2.Export the data to a disk file and then delete the exported data from the
table. This process is known as exporting, and is commonly performed on
historical tables, so that a predefined amount of data is kept in the online table and
the rest is backed up to a disk file;
3.Delete data from a table without archiving or exporting it, often referred to as
housekeeping. This is commonly performed on tables which grow over a period, but
which contain data that need not be retained; Historical ELV / low current
system data will be retained for a configurable period of time with a maximum of
5 years.
After this period it will be archived to disk. I.e. It will be possible to query
the historical data for a maximum of 5 years, and after that the historical data would
need to be manually restored from the archive in order to query it.
I. The backup process performs three main functions to provide a disaster

recovery backup of the dynamic data in the IBMS database. All database tables will be
backed up to disk in two ways:
1.As a Structured Query Language (SQL) script that can be run to re-insert the
data;
2.As an export file.

REV 00
J. Both backup files are put into a specified back up folder on the file server.
K. Mirroring is the process of copying the archive and backup files from
the Master to the Standby server, and vice versa, so that both servers have a full copy of
the backed-up data on disk.
L. Files in the Back-up folder will be written to a tape device following

export/file creation from the database.
2.25 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: ALARMS
A. Alarms shall be generated by the IBMS upon the occurrence of one of the
following events:
1.Failure of a PC, DDC controller, or any other IBMS hardware components.
2.Failure of communications between nodes on any LAN or the IBMS
Management level Network.
3.A monitored status indicates a discrepancy between the actual and the
required value.
4.A monitored value does not meet criteria established by the operator.
5.The deviation of a variable from setpoint exceeds operator-established
criteria.
6.The output to a final control element is outside operator-established criteria.
7.A digital input is in the state defined by the operator as indicating an alarm
condition.
8.Software failures and errors shall be diagnosed and annunciated by the
IBMS.
B. The failure of an IBMS hardware component, including communications

failures, shall generate an alarm that shall be differentiated from process alarms. If the
failure of a PC cannot be annunciated at a printer or graphical display at the OIW
because of the IBMS topology then provide an alternative means such as a "watchdog
timer" at a NAC. The alarm message generated by the IBMS shall clearly identify the
component that has failed and the location of a communications failure shall also be
clearly indicated.
C. In the event that the IBMS detects a disparity between the actual and the
required status of a digital input, the IBMS shall generate an alarm and shall set the
control relay to the off state. This shall occur when the digital output is in both the
IBMS manual control mode and the IBMS software control mode and shall automatically
place the output in the IBMS manual control mode.
REV 00
D. The operator shall be able to define alarm conditions for each analog input,
at minimum, as follows:
1.The high limit above which the variable is in alarm.
2.The low limit below which the variable is in alarm.
3.An end or range alarm. This shall occur when the analogue signal goes to
zero or to its maximum value.
E. The operator shall be able to assign deviation limits to setpoint values. An

alarm shall be generated when a controlled variable deviates from setpoint by more
than an operator- defined amount.
F. The operator shall be able to assign alarm limits to analogue outputs. The
IBMS shall generate an alarm when an analogue output reaches or exceeds an operator
assigned high limit and reaches or goes below an operator assigned low limit.
G. The operator shall be able to designate one state of a digital input as an alarm
state.
H. The operator shall be able to assign a time delay following detection by the
IBMS of an alarm condition such that if there is a return to normal during the assigned
time delays the alarm shall not be annunciated. If at the end of the time delay period
the alarm condition still exists then the IBMS shall annunciate an alarm within two (2)
seconds (end-to-end time). The time delay shall be individually assignable to each
alarm condition. All monitored points shall meet these alarm annunciation criteria
regardless of type of panel used to monitor the point.
I. The operator shall be able to assign a dead-band to all analog high and low
alarm limits so as to minimize the too frequent and unnecessary annunciation of alarms.
An analogue alarm limit shall not have returned to normal until it has returned beyond
the alarm limit by a sufficient amount to have also cleared the dead-band. The same shall
also apply to analogue output high and low alarms.
J. A report shall be available to the operator detailing points in alarm and a

further report shall be available to the operator detailing the alarm limits established for
the monitored, controlled and calculated points.
K. Designated alarms shall be output on the alarm printer.

REV 00
L. The occurrence of designated alarms shall initiate a visual alarm at the OIW.
A switch, button or keyboard key shall be dedicated to the acknowledgment of alarms
at the OIW. The visual alarm shall cease after acknowledgment of an alarm unless
another alarm is awaiting acknowledgment. All alarms shall be acknowledged
individually and the acknowledgment shall be recorded on the alarm printer. The alarm
message shall uniquely identify the cause of the alarm together with the time of detection
by the IBMS. The operator shall be able to associate an "event message" with any alarm
occurrence. The operator shall be able to designate at which workstation(s) the alarm shall
be annunciated.
M. Alarms shall be allocated priorities by the operator on-line using an

interactive procedure. If there are concurrent alarms then they shall be annunciated in
order of their priority. An icon shall appear on the graphical display when there are alarms
other than those displayed. The cursor and icon shall enable the operator to bring up an
alarm report on the graphical display at any time. There shall be at minimum, three levels
of alarm priority. Alarms shall be prioritized in the following categories, with the
following actions taking place:
Category Action Taken
Critical. Printout on alarm printer and display on

the graphical display. Clearly distinguish critical
alarms on hard copy printouts and graphical
displays and reports.
Non-critical. Display.
IBMS component. Printout on alarm printer and display.

Clearly
distinguish IBMS components alarms on hard copy
print outs and graphical displays and reports.
N. Alarms shall remain on the OIW graphical display alarm queue until the
alarm has been acknowledged by the operator and returned to the normal state. If the
alarm returns to normal before operator acknowledgment, then it shall be identified as
such via different color designation on the alarm queue. If the alarm is acknowledged
before it has returned to normal, then it shall also be identified via a different color
designation.
O. It shall only be necessary to acknowledge an alarm at one OIW.

REV 00
P.It shall be possible to assign alarms to different OIW on a scheduled basis.
Q. The IBMS Specialist shall configure the alarms and their priorities in
accordance with the requirements of the Employer.
2.26 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: REPORTS
A. Reports shall be output when requested by the operator and when scheduled
by the operator.
B. Reports shall be provided as detailed throughout these specifications and

shall be output at the OIW, the printer designated by the operator at the report printer or
the screen at the POT whichever is selected by the operator. The default output device
for reports shall be the report printer at the OIW.
C. The operator shall be able to select reports to be output in the following

manner:
1.For a specific point.
2.For a specific item(s) of equipment.
3.For all points located on a specific floor or area of the building.
4.For all equipment serving a particular floor.
5.For all points monitored, controlled and calculated.
6.For afterhours operation of the AHU.
7.For a specific schedule.
8.For a specific or group of trended points.
9.For a specific or group of totalized points.
D. Reports shall all have the time and date at which they were output recorded
on them. Reports shall be formatted in such a manner as to make them easily
understandable to the operator.
E. A menu of reports shall enable the operator to access any report on the
IBMS. Each report shall contain the date and time.
F. The operator shall be able to configure customized reports. Standard and

customized reports shall be configured through the IBMS.

REV 00
G. The IBMS Specialist shall configure the reports in accordance with the
requirements of the Employer.
H. It will be possible to generate report data in an ODBC format such that data
can be output via an ODBC compliant report program such as Crystal Report.
I. Each report filename will contain by default a predefined structure, including

a prefix for the report type, and the date and time. An operator will be able to select an
alternative filename when generating an ad-hoc report.
2.27 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: EVENT MESSAGES
A. The operator shall create messages up to 64 characters in length, at minimum,

which shall be displayed upon the occurrence of a particular event. There shall be
capacity for 1000 event messages at any one time and the operator shall be able to
associate a single message with more than one occurrence and shall be able to associate
more than one event message with a particular event.
B. The event message shall be output at all devices selected on-line by the
operator using an interactive procedure.
C. The operator shall be able to associate one or more event messages with the
following events:
1.An alarm
2.A change of status.
3.The return to normal of an alarm condition.
4.An operator entered schedule.
5.Any other event initiated by the IBMS or monitored by the IBMS.
2.28 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
A. High Definition graphical displays of system diagrams are discussed in the

Section titled “Graphical Display system diagram” of these specifications.

REV 00
B. Graphical Displays shall form the basis of the menu penetration means of
operator access.
C. The time and date and the building kW shall appear on the display at all
times and when there are system diagrams displayed on the OIW, the outside air
temperature and relative humidity shall be displayed.
D. Icons shall be used in conjunction with cursor control where possible to

simplify access to data and the execution of operator commands.
E. System diagrams shall appear on the graphical displays complete with all
associated data within five (5) seconds of the completion of the operator entry/ menu
selection.
2.29 SOFTWARE OPERATING SYSTEM: WEB ACCESS
A. Operators and other authorized personnel shall have access to specific

functions of the IBMS via a standard web browser interface, subject to password access
assigned by the Employer.
B. Web based access to the IBMS shall provide monitoring and limited
control specific to the user. The information displayed on the web pages shall be
refreshed at least once every 10 seconds.
C. Where a Web page provides for the operator to input changes, the
activation of the changes shall require the operator to click on a "submit" button or similar
feature before the changes are sent. All web access actions shall be immediately echoed to
all other OIW.
2.30 IBMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA ANALYSIS AND STORAGE

SOFTWARE
A. Data analysis and storage software shall reside at the IBMS servers such
that all PC on the IBMS Management level Network can present data in the same
format. These features shall comprise the following:
1.Dynamic Trending
2.Historical data trends

REV 00
B. Dynamic Trending
1.Provide a software package that emulates, at minimum, a 3No. point strip
chart recorder. This program shall concurrently display 3No. or more (maximum
of 6) plots of variables in a graphical format. The graphs shall be plotted as the
values are sampled in a similar fashion to a chart recorder and when the plot
reaches the right hand side of the X-axis, the X-axis shall scroll to the left so as to
accommodate newly sampled data.
2.The variables to be plotted shall be selected by the operator from any
input, output point, IBMS calculated value or any setpoint. It is envisaged that the
primary use of this facility will be for the tuning of control loops and the observance
of control loop performance. Typically this would require, for example, the
concurrent plotting of the loop setpoint, the monitored variable and the IBMS
output to the final control element.
3.Each of the plotted variables shall be uniquely and clearly identified using a
means of differentiation such as different colors for each variable or different
symbols for the plotted points for each variable.
4.The X-axis shall be the time axis and shall have a scale selected by the
operator using an interactive procedure or shall be scaled automatically to
accommodate a minimum of 30 plotted points for each variable. The plot rate shall
be selected by the operator using an interactive procedure and shall have the
following minimum ranges:
a. Plot rates for monitored variables shall range from their
IBMS scan rate to at least once per day.
b. Setpoints shall be plotted at the same rate as the associated
variable.
c. Plot rates for IBMS outputs shall range from their IBMS
update rates to at least once per day.
d. Plot rates for calculated points shall range from the rate at
which the calculation is performed to at least once per day.
5.The Y-axis shall be the value of the plotted variable. If plotted variables
have different ranges then provide separate Y-axes. The Y-axis for each plotted
variable shall be defined by the operator using an interactive procedure or shall be
scaled automatically using a technique that displays the data in an optimum manner.
6.It shall be possible to have a minimum of 100 active trend plots at any
OIW on the network.
7.As part of the work of this sub-contract the IBMS Specialist shall implement
all trend logs as requested by the Employer. Submit in writing to the Employer,
at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request for points to be placed on
the dynamic trending function. The written request will clearly indicate the
information required from the Employer and the format in which it is to be
provided.
C. Historical data trends

REV 00
1.Provide a software facility for the collection and storage of data at the IBMS
servers and its subsequent retrieval and display in tabular and graphical form as
selected by the operator.
2.The operator shall be able to assign on-line, using an interactive procedure,
any IBMS input or output point, calculated variable or setpoint to the historical data
trend facility. It shall be possible to have data collection and storage concurrently, at
minimum, for 250,000 variables and it shall be possible to have data collection
for each variable at 2 separate sampling rates.
3.Each variable shall be sampled at an operator-defined frequency using an
interactive procedure. The sampling frequencies shall be in the following ranges at
minimum:
a. For IBMS monitored points the sample rate shall be
selectable individually for each variable at between once per day and
once per second or once per scan, whichever is the less frequent.
b. Setpoints shall be sampled at the same rate as their
associated variable.
c. For IBMS outputs the sample rate shall be selectable
individually for each variable at between once per day and once per
second or once per output change, whichever is the less frequent.
d. For calculated points the sample rate shall be selectable
individually for each calculated value at between once per day and once
every calculation.
4.Storage shall be provided for at least 10,000 pieces of sampled data for each
variable assigned to this feature. Recall of data shall be in either a tabular
form or in a graphical form and shall be displayed on the OIWs or output on one of
the printers as selected by the operator. Whichever form of output the operator
selects it shall be possible to concurrently output data for a minimum of 3No.
variables. The time period to be covered by the data output shall be selected by
the operator using an interactive procedure. When the storage capacity for a
variable is full, the newly sampled data shall over-write the data first stored for
that variable. It shall be possible to store data for the same point at different
collection rates. For example, it shall be possible to store 10,000 values of
ambient temperature collected once per hour and it shall be possible to store 10,000
values of ambient temperature collected every noon and midnight.
5.Data output in tabular form shall clearly distinguish between the variables
and shall indicate the time and date at which each piece of data was sampled.
6.Data output in graphical form shall meet the same requirements as detailed
above for the real-time plotting of data.
7.It shall be possible at any time to obtain a listing of which points have been
assigned to this feature and their sampling rates.
8.It shall be possible to output the historical data in a Microsoft Excel format in
a hardcopy and in an electronic format.
9.As part of the work of this sub-contract the IBMS Specialist shall
implement all historical data storage as requested by the Employer. Submit in

REV 00
writing to the Employer, at least 2 weeks prior to the acceptance testing, a request
for points to be placed on the historical data trending function. The written request
will clearly indicate the information required from the Employer and the format in
which it is to be provided.
2.31 IBMS OPERATING SYSTEM: DATA PRESENTATION SOFTWARE
A. Data presentation software shall reside at the IBMS servers such that all
PC on the IBMS Management level Network can present data in the same format.
B. Graphical System Diagram Displays

1.Each GUI page will be sized to exactly fit the native resolution of each of the
monitors utilized by the OIWs. The navigation of GUI page displayed by each
monitor will be independent of each other allowing each Operator to select the most
appropriate GUI page for their role.
2.The mimic displays will be based on AutoCAD drawings provided by the
ELV / low current Building Services Systems Contractors.
3.Provide a software package to enable the operator to configure, modify
and delete system diagrams similar in scope to those on the control diagrams that
form part of these sub-contract documents. Real-time data shall be superimposed on
the system diagrams and shall be updated at intervals between 10 and 20 seconds.
The data shall be positioned on the display at points indicative of the
instrumentation locations on the system.
4.Provide a library of commonly used symbols in accordance with CIBSE
standards including all symbols used in the compilation of the system diagrams for
this project.
5.Each system diagram shall indicate real-time data including analogue
and digital input and output points, setpoints and calculated values of the associated
system. The IBMS Point Schedules and System Diagrams detailed on the control
diagrams shall provide a guideline for the selection of data to be displayed on a
particular system diagram. Preferably the status of motors, e.g. on, off, failed, etc.,
shall be indicated by color changes such as green for on, blue for off and red
for failed. The system diagrams shall also distinguish between outputs in the
IBMS manual control mode and in the IBMS software control mode. Where
necessary to enhance the understanding of the data displayed use alphanumeric text.
The graphics shall be fully animated such that they clearly indicate the status of
motors.
6.Provide a hierarchy of display pages that will enable an operator, for
example, to progress from a diagram of the building, to a particular floor in the
building and to a particular zone on the floor. The selection at each stage shall be
by cursor control using a mouse or keyboard arrow buttons.
7.Provide icons on displays to enable easy access from one display to a related
display. For example, provide a target box on the system diagram for a group of
REV 00
VAV terminal units that will enable one-step access to the associated air-handling
unit.
8.A system diagram shall be provided, at minimum, for the following:

a. Each of the systems detailed in the point definition
sections of these sub- contract documents. This shall include at minimum
each air handling unit and each extract and supply fan system, each chilled
and condenser water system and each system monitored and controlled
via a Third Party interface.
b. Each VAV/FCU terminal unit. This shall show the location
of each VAV and FCU on the floor, the zone temperatures, the mode
of operation, e.g. occupied mode, unoccupied mode, standby mode, etc.
of the terminal units. The zones covered by each VAV and FCU terminal
unit shall be outlined and zones with temperatures in alarm shall be red.
c. As for above but for the lighting.
d. As for above but for the combined lighting and VAV/FCU
terminal units.
e. As for above but for the FAS.
f. As for above but for the security devices.
g. Combined security, FAS and lighting on each floor. This
shall show the location of each security and fire alarm device on the floor,
the status of each security and fire alarm device and the status of each
zone of lighting. A device(s) that has indicated a security or a fire alarm
shall be clearly identified. It shall be possible by clicking on the
appropriate icon on the full floor display for the operator to zoom in on
half of a floor.
h. For each other IBMS sub-system and Third Party system, not
detailed above.
i. All other schematics as detailed throughout these sub-
contract documents.
9.The IBMS Specialist shall submit a complete set of the proposed system
diagrams at the shop drawing stage of the project. The IBMS Specialist shall modify
the system diagrams as requested by the Engineer following shop drawing review at
no additional cost to the Employer.
2.32 IBMS SUB-SYSTEMS INTEGRATION: GENERAL
A. The IBMS shall be provided with a ready to use add-on software modules for
each integrated IBMS sub-system that shall enable the full integration of the systems
included in section 1.6.B, in accordance with this specification and the specifications of
the IBMS sub-systems.
REV 00
B. The IBMS sub-contractor shall comprehensively demonstrate that the

IBMS is capable to seamlessly integrate all of the IBMS sub-systems, into its unified
management platform enabling full monitoring and/ or control of the IBMS sub-systems,
harnessing all diagnostic features and control functions of the sub-systems. This
demonstration shall be presented to the Engineer for approval prior any commitment from
the IBMS sub-contractor.
C. The IBMS shall be interfaced and integrated with the life safety and security
systems by any of the following means, in order to implement all features and
functions defined in this specification section:
1.Direct to controllers/ field devices:
a. The controllers/ field devices shall be interfaced directly with
the IBMS through IBMS vendor certified drivers/ SDKs.
b. The controllers/ field devices shall be interfaced directly with
the IBMS through open standard communication protocol such as ONVIF
or BACnet/IP using Network Automation Controllers (NACs).
2.Server-to-Server (in case a dedicated server is provided by the IBMS
sub-system supplier as per clause no. 1.5.H); Separate dedicated Network Interface
Units (NIUs)
shall be provided for the IBMS sub-system, to enable full monitoring and control
of the IBMS sub-system from the IBMS. The NIU shall host the IBMS subsystem
D. The contractor shall comply with all the video surveillance and access
control software and application requirements, specified in the following sections 2.31
and 2.32 regardless of the integration method, and shall provide a unified GUI for all
IBMS sub-systems.
E. Minimum data to be transferred between the Video Surveillance sub-

system and the IBMS shall be as follows:
1.All camera feeds and recorded videos.
2.PTZ control
3.Pop-up Alarms Panels troubles & Alarms.
F. Minimum data to be transferred between the Access Control sub-system and

the IBMS shall be as follows:
1.All doors’ alarms and logs.
2.All panels troubles & alarms.
3.Control & Remote door release.

REV 00
4.Credential information.
2.33 IBMS - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SOFTWARE/HARDWARE MODULE
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.The VSS Software shall be compatible with provided VSS hardware, please
refer to Specification section 282300.
5.It shall provide digital video capture, transportation, management, recording,
live viewing, playback, and storage of the video. The system shall be based on
capturing and processing Ethernet transmission of video signals from cameras. The
entire system shall be capable of being partitioned and allow sharing of selected
video signals between Security personnel and other operational personnel as
required.
6.It shall include video management and archiving software, virtual matrix
surveillance system and network based digital video recording system.
7.It shall have the capability to allow live video monitoring via web browsers
or wireless devices. Access shall be restricted by two-factor authentication and
encryption as directed by Employer. The cameras and video accessible via web
browser or wireless devices shall be limited based upon user and shall be
configurable by the System Administrator to limit access by person and by device or
by access method.
8.It shall include video recording and archiving servers, as specified herein
and as indicated on the Drawings. The camera management and recording servers
shall be connected to the network.
9.It shall include an Intelligent Video Analysis System (IVAS). The IVAS shall
apply automatic, persistent artificial intelligence to video signals in an effort to
improve the efficiency of Operators by directing them immediately to events that
need attention and provide them an easy way to determine the appropriate action.
10. It shall include IVAS video analytics specifically for the Perimeter.
Detections shall cause an alarm event in the SACS and provide camera call-up in
Tower IBMS Control Room. For IVAS specification, Refer to Section 282300,
Video Surveillance.
11. It shall include Facial Recognition (FRS) System that is an advanced

real-time security tool used to
a. Help spot wanted individuals from watch lists and alerts security
personnel of their whereabouts immediately.
b.Issue alert messages when an employee enters areas of facility for
which he/she is not authorized or to recognize frequent travelers and
provide them with enhanced services.
c. For FRS specification, Refer to Section 282300, Video Surveillance.

REV 00
12. The Operator shall have the full control of the cameras. Local
terminals and clients shall be provided at specific locations within and outside the
towers for on-site operation and security monitoring.
13. The system shall communicate, receive and record video image
streams from IP addressable cameras.
14. The system shall record and communicate simultaneously with
mixed format IP cameras and encoders on the same server.
15. All System configurations, changes, setups and operation shall be
password protected and always available to the System administrator for access and
use.
16. The system shall support an Application Programming Interface
(API), and shall provide a Software Development Kit (SDK), for integration with
3rd party software systems.
17. The system shall support DNS entries for camera naming of IP
addresses from network DHCP server.
18. Minimum requirements of Servers shall be confirmed by relevant
manufacturer/supplier and shall comply with Division 27, Section “Virtual
Servers Environment (VSE)”.
19. The processing server receives camera IP streams from cameras,
converts the video stream into a compressed video format, and then writes the
video to the long term storage device. The processing server shall be able to
provide compression of all cameras received by the server at twenty five (25)
frames per second at a minimum resolution of 2MP for each cameras. The
processing server shall be able to interface with large network storage arrays or
drives subject to Employer/Authority requirements. Each server shall be able to
log multiple drives or partitions, but the intent is that each server will log only a
single partition for storage of all camera video for cameras assigned to that
server. The intent is that the storage size and cameras per partition shall not be
limited by the system software. Each server shall have the capability of logging
multiple partitions or drives, but only one partition is expected at this time. A
storage solution shall be provided for the CCTV system as described under
“Storage Considerations” Article.
20. The application/control server tracks all live video clips and stored
video. The application/control server shall be a dual, fully redundant configuration
which is comprised of two identical servers located in physically diverse racks.
21. The VMS must be compatible with City Command and Control
Center (CCC) platforms. The (CCC) must have an access for all indoor cameras for
any facility with bandwidth equivalent to at least 20% at a time to control any
incident or situation. The CCC must have an access for locally hosted outdoor
cameras related to compounds and BMS at any time with bandwidth equivalent to at
least 10% at a time to control any incident or situation. Authorization will be
obtained from an Authorized person depending on the facility type and its
sensitivity.
B. SOFTWARE FEATURES

REV 00
1.The system shall be based on open architecture software and shall allow
the use of any industry standard computer hardware, LAN hardware, and data
storage equipment (non-proprietary hardware). Systems requiring the use of
proprietary hardware shall not be acceptable.
2.The system shall be an entirely plug-and-play IP/Ethernet based system
which shall allow the display of live video streams, the recording and playback of
digital video streams from multiple video surveillance IP cameras simultaneously on
the System’s Operator console and/or on clients. Clients may include selected
workstations, laptops, or other devices.
3.The system shall provide the capability to integrate IP fixed and PTZ
cameras, video encoders, and management and storage servers on a standard
IP/Ethernet network.
4.The system shall operate Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) hardware and
on industry standard server operating system with all the controls done via keyboard
and mouse.
5.The software installed in both servers and workstations shall be similar in

Graphical User Interface, therefore, an Operator shall need to learn only one
interface for both control and programming of the system and functions, offering the
ability to remotely configure most system components from any recorder or
workstation.
6.The Server software shall be a package that shall be installed on a Server
running a database server software platform, and combined with the hardware, shall
function as an IP based digital video surveillance and recording server.
7.The recorder shall also offer a full multi-user authorization logon application.
This application shall offer levels of authorization based on defined sites and
functions. In addition, a full setup utility shall be available for the Administrator to
configure authorizations. The login window shall consist of a User Name and
Password field. The software shall offer a full multi-user authorization process as
follows:
a. User groups shall be created once globally and shall appear
in all recorders and workstations connected to the network.
b. Users shall be created once globally and shall be given
rights to particular groups.
c. Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each
unit, permitting “function-specific” profiles.
d. Users created and authorized for each machine shall be
able to login to any recorder and workstation and automatically have their
group rights for that machine follow them.
e. There shall be no virtual limit on the amount of Groups and
Users that can be authorized in the software.
f. The recorder shall allow for each group to be authorized or
denied access, per component, to: Login, Logout, Setup: Network & Site

REV 00
Name, User and Group Management, Site Authorization, Auto Login,
Macro Create-Edit, Alarm Setup, Authentication Settings, Device Setup,
Pre & Post Alarm Times, Storage Database Utilities, Auto Record, Exit to
OS, RS-232 Setup, Priority Setup, Registration Setup, Manual Record
Setup, Scheduler for Macros(multiple actions), Reports, Scheduler/Macro,
Shutdown/Close, Record, Stop, Change Quality, Picture Export and
Print, Control PTZ, Live View, Playback Recorded Images, Edit Camera
titles, Define Alarm conditions, System reports, Relay Operation, and
Alarms Functions.
8.Workstation Graphical User Interface Software

a. The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide a
multi-channel display area containing access to a listing of all connected
cameras, Site and terminal maps and device tree, a navigator window, a
control dialog display area, a toolbar, a display mode control area, a
function control area, a video display controls area and other image
controls area. Each area shall contain the necessary controls to operate and
setup the system.
b. The Main Window shall provide the following:
1) Site and Device Tree depicting each recorder with all
connected cameras, visually differentiating between PTZ and fixed
cameras by either icons or camera tags.
2) A multi-screen display area that allows for screen
displays of a Single camera, Quad, 3x3, 4x4, and Full screen of
any of the above selected multi-screen displays. The main window
shall be capable of spanning multiple monitors through the use of
multiple display cards per workstation.
9.Shall have the ability to view, record, playback and archive video from
cameras located at remote locations over the IP network. (Multi-location
recordings).
10. Shall provide the capability to record audio with the associated
camera, when audio recording is necessary and the camera has audio feature
supported by the software.
11. Shall allow time synchronized multiple cameras view/playback.
12. Shall provide a tamper-proof log file on user’s activity in the system
using encryption and integrity check.
13. Shall be scalable to support an unlimited number of cameras with
multiple servers.
14. Shall provide 24 hours scheduler to activate and deactivate the
following features on a per camera basis:
a. Bring cameras on/off line.
b. Sound audible alarm on motion detection in camera’s field of
view.

REV 00
c. Send e-mail/text, pager notification on motion detection
events with/without video image attachment.
d. Start/stop and change patrolling sequence for PTZ cameras.
15. The software shall have an advanced motion detection capabilities
with the functions as described below. The administrator shall have the ability to use
one, several or any non-conflicting combinations of the following functions, on a
per camera basis:
a. Pre-recording images up to 999 seconds (User defined)
before a motion is detected in the cameras field of view and continue
recording for up to 999 seconds (user defined) after the motion stopped
in the cameras field of view.
b. Adjustments of motion level sensitivity from 0 –10,000 units
in 1 unit increments.
c. Up to 1024 inclusion / exclusion motion detection zones per
camera.
d. Change recorded frame rate when motion is detected.
e. Annunciate motion as an event or alarm on the Operator’s
workstation on a time schedule basis.
16. The software shall monitor camera video and provide alerts for the
following malicious acts:
a. Camera masking – attempts to ‘cover up’ the camera view
either by painting the lens or covering the camera fixture with a bag or
blanket
b. Blinding – use of a bright light source or laser aimed directly
into the camera lens
c. Signal cut – interruption of the camera signal cable

d. Power cut – interruption of AC or DC power to the camera
17. The software shall:
a. Simultaneously record, playback and display live video
(Triplex), and shall provide the capability to include audio.
b. Have the ability to record and store images at rates between 1
frame per hour to 25 frames per second on a per camera basis,
dynamically configurable based upon user parameters.
c. Have the ability to store the recorded images on Network-
attached storage (NAS) or Storage Area Network (SAN) and shall not be
limited by partition or drive size.
d. Be able to perform multiple archiving per day.
e. Have the option to start recording on an event setup by the
Operator/administrator.
f. Have the option to increase the recording FPS on motion
detection, on event detection or Operator command.

REV 00
g. Have the ability to adjust image resolution to 2MP or up to
4.9 MP on a per camera basis. All cameras shall be able to be recorded at
25 fps, but the frame rate and recording duration shall be individually
adjustable for each camera.
h. Have the ability to adjust the compression level of the video
image data size, to save on storage size, when needed.
i. Allow Operator to select the controlled display monitor by
mouse click or touch screen.
j. Allow the Operator to switch a camera between live view
and playback in less than half of a second.
k. Allow Operator to pause live video.
l. Allow Operator to rewind or forward video on a frame-by-
frame basis.
m. Allow Operator to play video back and forth by using a slider
button for ease of video investigation.
n. Allow Operator to continuously play forward and backward
a recorded video and increase or decrease the playback speed.
o. Allow the Operator to select time and date for playback and
be able to retrieve this video within less than 5 seconds.
p. Allow Operator to digitally zoom in and out of pre-recorded
video in paused, playback or live video mode and adjust the zoomed
area up, down, left or right.
q. Allow Operator to control PTZ cameras using mouse control.
r. Allow Administrator/Operator to write (copy) archived video
to CD/DVD, as email attachment, external hard drive (thumb drive), etc.
if allowed by user rights..
18. The software licensing shall be provided for the entire network with
no limitation on the number of workstations or standard end-users.
C. REMOTE WEB ACCESS

1.Remote web access shall provide web server service to allow authorized
users to view live video, playback of recorded video and search the archive to
view video using their Internet Explorer web browser from any PC on the
Intranet or Internet. Web browser functionality shall include the following features
based on user profiles:
a. Provide username and password for access control into the
System.
b. Define remote user profile and user rights in relation to
viewing certain cameras and the use of PTZ and Output relays. This
feature is limited to Administrator level users.
c. Navigate to cameras and sites using an integrated Project
System map.

REV 00
d. Control all PTZ Presets per camera for fast and accurate
remote positioning control.
e. Access any recorded video of the current day and the
archive for past days, search by time/date or activity/alarm and
playback the video as a stream, frame by frame or jump to motion
detected sequences.
f. Provide thumbnail images for each new event for easy
search.
D. VIRTUAL MATRIX APPLICATION SOFTWARE

1.Virtual matrix application shall be part of the IBMS and shall provide
the functionality of a traditional full cross point matrix CCTV switch without the use
of analog cross point switching circuits. Any camera shall be capable of being
viewed on any monitor or one camera on all monitors without limitations. IP
streams from the IP cameras may be decoded to analog where required for use by
typical analog display monitors/devices, but it is the design intent to display/record
video information in its native digital format from the cameras and on Operator
workstations.
2.The virtual matrix software shall support sequential switching on all
monitors. Sequencing shall be a user configurable pattern with dwelling times
user selectable per camera. The software shall also support salvo switching where a
selected group of cameras will be simultaneously switched on to a selected group of
monitors.
3.A web browser interface shall be provided allowing viewing and PTZ
control from any location with proper authentication.
4.The software shall provide the Operator with a GUI interface for control and
selection of the cameras on the system. The GUI shall offer the Operator the ability
to select a camera for control and viewing via Map based multiple level floor plans
that can be drilled down from an overall site view through each terminal and
terminal level. The Operator shall have the option of using an expandable device
tree for dragging and dropping selected cameras to view and control on selected
monitors. The Operator shall be able to select a monitor by monitor number or
by selecting the specific camera icon on the display and select a camera by camera
number or by selecting the specific monitor icon on the display. Upon camera
selection by number, the software shall allow the ability to bring the map/floor plan
of that camera to the Operator’s desktop. The quantity of maps shall not be
limited by the software. The bid shall include all software and programming time
required to implement this feature.
5.Virtual matrix software shall provide user configurable camera and monitor
titles of up to 20 characters per instance. All camera titles and text shall be
controlled via the system software. System shall also provide up to an additional 20
characters of user configurable alarm text displayed in red during an alarm
event as defined by the SACS.

REV 00
6.Software shall provide for Operator notification on loss of image from an IP
camera as an alarm event. Loss of image shall be interpreted to mean a loss of
image due to power failure of a camera, masking or blinding the camera field of
view or loss of communication with the camera.
7.Software shall provide an unlimited number of individually identifiable
Operators. Each Operator shall be by unique user name and password and
configured by the system administrators to allow or restrict access to system
features on a per user basis and per feature basis.
8.The software shall provide user configurable partitioning of cameras and
monitors to permit only selected cameras to be viewed on selected monitors by
selected Operators. Coordination with the Employer is required to properly
configure the system.
9.Shall provide the Operator with up to 64 presets position per PTZ camera.
10. Shall have the ability to move a PTZ camera to any of the preset
positions upon receiving software command from the SACS system (or other
devices interfaced via RS232). The quantity of cameras per alarm shall not be
limited, and the quantity of alarms that may call a specific camera or preset shall
not be limited. The intent is that different SACS alarms be allowed to call the same
or different presets on a specific camera.
11. Shall have the ability to provide PTZ camera tour feature between
preset positions.
12. Shall be able to program unlimited number of continuous tours for
each camera with each tour utilizing up to 16 presets in the camera.
13. Shall be able to control the tour sequences using a 24/7 scheduler.
14. Shall be able to resume tour when Operator manual control times out.
15. Shall have the ability to return to a designated preset after a pre-
determined period of no Operator activity or manual commands. Shall have the
option not to record while moving between presets and shall stay in a preset
position if motion was detected in the camera field of view at that preset position,
and shall continue touring once motion stopped.
16. Latency between system control (whether manual or software

driven) and viewing of camera movement on system monitors shall not exceed
0.25 seconds.
a. Shall display overlay information on each camera window
with video time and date, video status: live, rewind, forward and pause,
and display camera name. These features are to be configurable by the
administrator.
b. Shall be able to display incoming live video upon alert
using the Matrix Event-driven Push Live Video with Alert-Live message
on the screen.
17. Software shall have a real-time system clock to display time and date
information on selected monitors. The clock shall be synchronized with an external
REV 00
time server, with the time updates not to exceed 60 minutes between updates. The
time shall be synchronized with the network time. Coordinate with the Employer for
the Network Time Protocol source.
E. VIRTUAL MATRIX
1.The Virtual Matrix shall be an IP Network based Virtual Video Matrix
capable of display of live, recorded and playback of digital video images from any
camera or the Storage platform on any IP based monitor or workstation on the
network.
2.The Virtual Matrix shall have multiple modes for pushing live video to the
Operator workstations:
a. Manual – Operator initiated calling of live video
b. Automatic – Triggered by internal motion detection from the
specific camera or another associated camera.
c. 3rd Party – Triggered by a URL command from another
system or serial data exchange via TCP/IP socket or RS232.
3.The Virtual Matrix shall enable system to issue disconnect of video stream to
Operator workstations.
4.The Virtual Matrix shall be able to communicate and receive image streams
from unlimited number of local and remote Video Servers.
5.The Virtual Matrix shall support cameras using H.264 (preferred if

available), MPEG-4 (preferred if H.264 is not available), or MJPEG (not preferred)
compression.
F.ALARMS AND EVENTS

1.Overview: For the purpose of these Specifications, an “alarm” is any event
that can be received or detected by an external equipment (access control for
example) or internal (failure for example) and responded to in real time. Many types
of events are not “alarms” in the traditional sense of an immediate problem
such as a fire or intruder. An event can be any type of activity that may be the
subject of future investigation and video review. The two basic requirements for an
event are time and location:
a. Time: A signal or data that can be detected or received in
real time.
b. Location: A physical location associated with the signal or
data that can be related to cameras and camera presets.
2.All the pictures shall be recorded and stored, continuously or on event.
a. The “operation cameras” output shall be recorded all the time
at the resolution of the of the respective CCTV cameras
b. The “security cameras” output shall be recorded on event
with pre and post alarm.

REV 00
3.Alarm Recording: The system shall be equipped with Alarm Recording

function that:
a. Enables the system administrator to define alarm responses
including instructions to trigger recording of specified cameras at
specified frame rates and quality settings.
b. Enables system administrator to determine the pre-alarm
duration.
c. Record cost-effective low frame rate video during non-
alarm periods, and then start recording at high frame rate (real-time) in
response to alarm events.
d. Enables system administrator to determine whether video
will be retained on long-term storage media for each continuous or
scheduled recording instruction and automatically retain video on long-
term storage media when video is recorded as part of a defined response
to an alarm event.
4.Tasks Related to Alarms: The system shall be able to perform the following
tasks:
a. Execute video image analysis algorithms (video sensor),
including activity detection and video loss detection and generate alarm
messages.
b. Receive signals from alarm inputs and generate alarm
messages.
c. Send alarm messages to the server or program that manages
alarm responses.
d. Process alarm response instructions, change recording modes
and control alarm relay outputs.
e. Forward alarms from a remote node to a central alarm
monitoring site.
f. Motion detection feature shall be provided for fixed cameras
looking at sensitive areas, in order to initiate alarm when unauthorized
movement is detected. The Contractor shall coordinate and check precise
location.
5.Event recording mode shall be used in relation with the Security System
for access controlled doors.
6.The system shall perform the following tasks in response to requests
from one or more workstations:
a. Supply one or more live video streams.
b. Enable one or more users to playback previously recorded
video, including “instant replay” of video recorded within the last few
seconds.
G. INTEGRATION/ INTERFACING REQUIREMENTS

REV 00
1.The VSS shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
a. The integration with the Storage devices shall allow the
storage of CCTV video for all the cameras for the required storage
duration continuously.
b. The system shall be monitored by the Integrated Building
Management System.
2.Access Control System
a. The system shall be fully integrated with the security &
access control System utilizing unified security platform, all building
security systems shall be controlled & monitored from single graphical
user interface.
3.Fire Alarm System
a. The interface with the Fire Alarm System shall allow the
control and the local surveillance of each fire alarm zone. The system
shall be able to display images as pop up window from the zone in
alarm on the screen of the Fire Alarm System Operator. The interface
shall be compliant with applicable NFPA life safety and fire alarm
requirements. The PTZ cameras shall automatically switch to the location
of a fire alarm initiation. The alarm initiation shall be either the
activation of any manual pull station, monitor module detection for flow
switch activation, sensor, etc.
b. This interface shall be implemented given the following:

1) The Access Control interface with the Fire Alarm
System.
2) Integration of Security Systems (including Access
Control) with the CCTV system.
4.Structured Cabling Network and Data Communications Network
a. The system shall be interfaced with the Structured Cabling
Network and the Data Communications Network to allow the
communication between the Security and Access Control System,
workstations, recording and storage servers, Network Management
System, and all other interfaced systems through the network backbone.
5.Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All CCTV equipment shall be powered by UPS. Coordinate
with the Electrical Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for CCTV
equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the CCTV
workstations.

REV 00
H. INTELLIGENT VIDEO ANALYSIS SYSTEM (IVAS)
1.The IVAS shall be integrated in the same hardware as the recording system
to provide a seamless integration of video and events. The Contractor shall
coordinate with IBMS contractor to ensure providing a fully functional and
operational System.
2.Each channel of the IVAS shall be configured individually to support a
specific type of content analysis application.
3.Each channel of the IVAS shall support simultaneous recording of full
resolution real time (25 frames per second).
4.The IVAS shall be an enterprise application allowing for simultaneous
viewing of multiple channels from multiple locations.
5.All IVAS devices, workstations, and video outputs shall connect

together over a standard TCP/IP network infrastructure. This will allow for a
centralized or distributed, command, control, and alerting design.
6.The IVAS shall be capable of processing video from thousands of cameras.
7.Additional IVAS devices shall have the ability to be added without disruption
of the active system.
8.The IVAS shall monitor its own operation and provide notification should
the video feed or network connectivity be lost. Should network connectivity be lost,
the IVAS shall continue to record and analyze without loss of alarm data.
9.The IVAS shall support a single Operator interface that provides live content
analysis information, live video from both analyzed and standard input, and video
playback.
10. Video playback from analyzed sources shall also simultaneously
display the analysis data from those sources synchronized to the time of the
playback.
11. The IVAS shall highlight in the video display window objects that
are being tracked and alarmed.
a. Objects that are alarming shall be a different color from
objects that are not under alarm.
b. The oldest alarming object shall be displayed in a different
color from all subsequent alarms in the same view.
c. Alarm objects that have been acknowledged shall be
displayed differently from those that have not been acknowledged.
d. The Operator shall have the option of turning off the
highlights for either unalarmed objects or all objects.
12. The IVAS shall provide the ability for the Operator to select an alarm
from the active video and through a single click start playback at the time in the
video at which the alerting object was first detected. In addition to playback, the
system shall also allow the Operator to acknowledge an alarm or add the alarm
to the scene background through the same action as above.

REV 00
13. The IVAS shall provide a reporting application that allows alarms
to be searched based upon desired time/date range and one or more channels.
14. The IVAS shall provide automatic and immediate notification of
user-defined threats via:
15. Audible alert on Operator screen(s)
a. Text popup at Operator station(s)
b. Email
c. Automatic playback of live and pre-event video
d. Automatic popup of multiple camera views in a pre-defined
layout, including a configurable combination of live and playback
streams.
16. The IVAS shall provide capability for viewing video and alarms
wirelessly via a PDA.
17. The IVAS display shall be capable of displaying up to 16
simultaneous video feeds with their associated content analysis data overlaid on
each video window.
18. The IVAS shall provide software and hardware capability to accept
alarm data from and output alarm data to external systems such as access control
systems.
19. The IVAS shall automatically learn the scene background. Should
the camera view change dramatically, the system shall pause detection and display
on the camera view that the analysis is no longer effective. If the analysis remains
ineffective for a
specified period of time the system shall automatically re-learn the scene
background and resume detection.
20. The IVAS shall provide capability to configure in each camera view
areas that are of interest and areas that are to be ignored.
21. The IVAS shall provide capability to alert upon an intruder entering a
restricted area or moving from one defined area to a second defined area.
22. The IVAS shall be able to alert upon an object being left in
or removed from a designated area after a predetermined period of time.
23. The IVAS shall be able to detect if a vehicle remains in a specific
area for more than a predetermined period of time.
24. The IVAS shall be able to detect if a person or object moves in
an unauthorized direction through a given area, even when a large number of people
or objects are also moving in the same area in an authorized direction.
25. The IVAS shall be able to alert upon a queue of people extending
beyond a designated length.
26. The IVAS shall be able to count people entering or exiting a specific
area with output of the count as an on-screen display and over configurable time
periods in a reporting application.

REV 00
27. The IVAS views shall apply seamlessly to either indoor or outdoor
scenes.
a. In outdoor scenes, the system shall dynamically and
automatically adapt to changing environments without Operator
intervention. This includes reacting to lighting changes caused by day,
night, cloud cover, and video stationary motion created by events such as
blowing leaves or waves.
b. In outdoor scenes, the system shall provide filters to
compensate for fog and clouds.
c. The system shall provide software stabilization to
compensate for shaking cameras.
28. The IVAS shall be able to limit which objects are considered
threatening based upon a range of object sizes.
a. In determining object size, the system shall take in to account
the perspective of the camera view, allowing larger objects closer to the
camera and smaller objects further from the camera.
29. The IVAS shall be able to track and alarm on up to 16 objects
simultaneously in each video channel.
30. Baggage Detection:
a. Alerts the Operator for unattended baggage after a
specified time threshold has been exceeded. Operator shall be able to
view the baggage being left and thus determine the nature and the
circumstances of the event.
31. Vehicle Detection:
a. Alerts the Operator for vehicles parking in unauthorized
locations after a specified time threshold has been exceeded. Operator
shall be able to view the arrival of the vehicle onto the scene and thus
determine the nature and the circumstances of the event.
32. Line Control:
a. Provides the ability to monitor people waiting in line and
alert the Operator after a specific number of people have been exceeded.
33. Intrusion Detection:

a. Provides object tracking technology that results in a higher
precision of motion detection while minimizing false alarms and
misdetections.
b. Alerts the Operator when an object enters a protected zone
or an object moves from one defined area to another area utilizing
directional video motion detection.
c. The enhanced video motion detection shall support the
following outdoor conditions:

REV 00
▪ Continuous change in lighting conditions (e.g., sunrise,
sunset)
▪ Shadowing
▪ Heavy Rain
▪ Mild fog
▪ Fast moving clouds
▪ Stationary motion cancellation
▪ Camera movement elimination
d. Accurately detects and locates intrusions over outdoor areas
and perimeters.
34. Tail Gating:

a. Alerts the Operator upon people piggybacking through an
access controlled entrance.
b. The Operator shall be able to view the people piggybacking
and thus determine the nature and circumstances of the event.
35. Counter-Flow:
a. Instantly identifies a person or object moving in the
unauthorized direction.
36. Careful consideration and analysis shall be made by the Contractor to
ensure that the additional video streaming from IVAS will not impact network
performance.
37. Video Perimeter Security:
a. Device Performance: Detect changes in video signal
within a user-defined protected zone.Provide an alarm output for each
video input.
b. Detect movement within protected zone of standard intruders
wearing clothing with a reflectivity that differs from that of background
scene by a factor of 2. Reject all other changes in video signal.
c. Modular design that allows for expansion or modification of
number of inputs.
d. Adjustable Controls:
▪ Number of detection zones.

▪ Size of detection zones.
▪ Sensitivity of detection of each protected zone.
38. The IVAS shall support the following features:
a. A minimum of 32 individual Alarm Zones or Restricted
Areas. Each zone can have an unlimited number of rules,

REV 00
b. Motion Tracking,
c. Control alarm detection according to time of day,
d. From/To Zones,
e. Target Size Filtering: Eliminate objects smaller or larger than
a specific height or specific width,
f. Target Size Filtering: Eliminate objects smaller or larger than
a specific aspect ratio,
g. Wrong-Way Direction,
h. Loitering,
i. Track certain sized objects, but do not alarm on them,
j. Object left behind,
k. Speed alarm detection (either above or below a user specified
threshold),
l. Automated PTZ control,
m. Selectable tracking priority (newer, faster, closer, etc.).
I. FACIAL RECOGNITION
1.System Description and Operation
a. The system shall be based on i) capturing and processing
Ethernet transmission of video signals from cameras, ii)facial recognition
software platform and iii) a pictures databank loaded with existing photos
and data of persons of interest.
b. The system could be provided as part of IVAS subject to the
approved vendors and provided solution.
c. The system shall analyze live video streams taken from
multiple special high resolution CCTV cameras placed at entrances and in
other strategic locations in the facility.
d. Detected facial information shall be routed in real time to
the FRS software platform (application software) for facial recognition
computing processes.
e. Once a match is verified, the FRS instantly will deliver

the photo of the match and associated database information about the
person in question to the appropriate recipients via e-mail, SMS, MMS
or log-only so they can take appropriate action quickly.
2.Application Software
a. Intelligent video analytics shall detect and track faces in live
high-definition video.

REV 00
b. The identification process shall incorporate specific
techniques to mitigate changes in a person's appearance.
c. Processing images of minimum 2 megapixels at 25 frames
per second shall allow detection and overcome variation in focus,
lighting, and facial orientation.
d. The face tracking algorithm shall be capable of
maintaining locks on every face across each frame of video and across
multiple camera outputs. The best sample of each tracked face shall be
transmitted to the recognition platform. This shall help optimize
bandwidth utilization and computational capacity.
3.Cameras
a. Shall be Megapixel Resolution Type, installed close to
average face height.
b. Shall be capable of capturing multiple faces in video scenes
simultaneously.
c. Captures clear minimum 2 megapixel facial images at 20
images per second.
d. Selectable exposure window.
e. Gamma correction.
f. Integrated support for IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, ARP, FTP,
SMTP, DHCP, HTTP, RARP, BOOTP, SNMP, Telnet, and TFTP
protocols
4.A graphical user interface shall be provided to supervise and monitor the FSR
system at the system workstations.
J. STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS
5.The system shall support a wide range of automated video storage options
ranging from as little as a few hours of online storage capacity to keep long-
term storage using hard drives, digital tape or other cost-effective long-term storage
media. The system shall be capable of supporting unlimited video storage
capacity by enabling system Operators to periodically remove and replace hard
drives, tape cartridge, or other removable storage media.
6.The system shall allow flexible storage architecture (centralized, local, and
remote storage) for enabling best storage utilization.
7.Update storage requirements based on the Employer/Authorities standards.
8.The system shall provide sufficient storage for all camera recordings for a
period of 30 days with 25 FPS and full resolution for each camera in MPEG-4 or
H.264 format or better quality compression techniques.
9.The storage calculations shall consider all CCTV cameras on each
towerarea.
10. Provided Storage calculations per each tower shall consider tower
cameras as well as outdoor cameras (within plot limit) connected to the tower.

REV 00
11. Recording period shall be coordinated with the Employer/Authority.
12. The storage system shall be equipped with a database mirroring and
distributed video storage features, which shall allow the system to sequentially
distribute recorded video among the installed hard disks. And therefore, in case of a
hard disk failure, the user shall be able to receive a relatively reduced frame rate,
but shall not lose the complete video sequences.
13. Recorded and stored images shall be accessible from any workstation
PCs connected directly to the LAN or via remote connections.
14. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to justify the
selection of the hard disk or other storage media and the capacity and type of the
storage library.
15. The Storage shall be designed for high speed, high capacity digital
video storage and high performance playback applications.
16. The Contractor shall accommodate any changes in Specifications
from the Authorities Having Jurisdiction before final approval.
17. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide sufficient
storage.
18. The Contractor shall provide all supporting calculations including
network bandwidth calculations and all other parameters used in the assessment of
Storage requirements - for review and approval by the Employer.
19. The Contractor shall provide updated SAN or NAS calculations
proposed upon the final selected cameras and video management solution.
20. The Contractor shall confirm that the calculated storage
requirements are correct during the testing phase of the Project. This shall be in
the form of a submittal that shall also include documentation stating successful
completion of the System Availability testing.
21. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to confirm the bandwidth
necessary to support the IP based Video Surveillance components traffic on the
Project LAN.
22. The storage must support redundancy or recording scheme with

RAID 6 features.
a. Edit sub-paragraphs below to suit Project.
b.Recommendations: Entrance cameras: 15 fps. Cameras located on
counters, cash points and surrounding places (close vicinity) of the ATM
machines: 25 fps. For continuous and event recording, the frame rate per
camera shall be a minimum of 15 fps.
c. The alarm ratio per Camera, which is the average percentage of time
that the Camera will be triggered by an Event/Alarm and is dependent on
the camera location. The alarm ratio shall be coordinated with the
Operator(s) and shall be greater than 20%.
d.The Camera Mode, which shall be coordinated with the
Operator(s) with respect to each camera location and ambient light
conditions and is generally classified per day.
REV 00
e. Record and storage capacity shall ensure at least the recording
for all the cameras during a minimum of one month continuously.
23. Scheduled Recording Administration:
a. The system shall be able to establish a recording schedule based on
hours of the day and days of the week.
b.The system shall be able to specify the times during which each
camera will be recorded along with the recording settings to be used
during each period including the frame rate, resolution, and quality settings.
24. The storage system shall be designed to work with the Network
Management System in order to send recorded pictures to all monitors or remote
workstations on request.
K. IBMS WORKSTATION – ASSIGNED FOR VSS FACILITY OPERATOR

1.The PCs or system workstations shall be used for surveillance and alarm
viewing as well as for data storage. The PCs shall be installed in a console in the
Tower Control Room and Fire Command Center.
2.The Tower Control Room shall be fully equipped with all the necessary
equipment for viewing, operating, controlling and monitoring of CCTV cameras.
3.The PC or system workstation and associated peripherals shall be confirmed
by relevant manufacturer/supplier and shall comply with Division 27, Section
“Computers & Related Peripherals”, including but not limited to
a. Computer Workstations.
b. Display Screens, suitable for extended use for control room
applications.
c. The final monitor configuration and display of cameras will
be determined in liaison with the Employer/Authority and may be subject
to change.
4.Include a USB or Ethernet Keyboard controller.
5.The exact location of the workstations, and number of monitors at each
location, shall be coordinated with the Employer and shall be reflected on the
Drawings.
6.PC’s shall be the latest model at the time of purchase and shall be
sourced from a recognized manufacturer. Purchase of the PC’s shall be delayed
until the latest time possible without causing a delay in the construction schedule to
ensure that they will be state-of-the-art, based on the latest proven technology.
7.The system shall support three (3) or four (4) display screens per Operator
workstation for live view of cameras, and alarm video monitoring, playback, search,
video clips productions, evidence printout and more (viewer screens). Playback
and searching shall not interfere with or eliminate the continuous and simultaneous
view of the live streaming videos.
2.34 IBMS- ACCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE/HARDWARE MODULE

REV 00
A. The ACS Software shall be compatible with provided ACS hardware, same
manufacturer is recommended, please refer to Specification section 281300.
B. System Software: Based on 64-bit, Microsoft Windows central-station and

workstation operating system and application software.
1.Multiuser multitasking shall allow independent activities and monitoring
to occur simultaneously at different workstations.
2.Graphical user interface shall show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format.
3.Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.
4.Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and
interfacing with other systems that are compatible with operating system.
5.Password-protected operator login and access.
C. Peer Computer Control Software: Detect a failure of a central computer and

cause the other central computer to assume control of all system functions without
interruption of operation. Both central computers shall have drivers to support this mode
of operation.
D. DTS links may be included with perimeter protection systems.
E. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and entry-

control controllers to monitor sensors, operate displays, report alarms, generate reports,
and help train system operators.
1.Reside at the central station, workstations, and controllers as required to
perform specified functions.
2.Operate and manage peripheral devices.
3.Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying files; and
automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size and location of
each sequential and random-ordered record.
4.Import custom icons into graphics to represent alarms and I/O devices.
5.Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the same
Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at
the controller.
6.Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to any I/O
with the same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This
operation shall be at the controller.
7.Messages from PC to controllers and controllers to controllers shall be on
a polled network that utilizes check summing and acknowledgment of each
message. Communication shall be automatically verified, buffered, and
retransmitted if message is not acknowledged.

REV 00
8.Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall handle
bandwidth and latency issues for TCP/IP, RF, and other PC-to-controller
communications methods by changing the polling frequency and the amount of time
the system waits for a response.
9.Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history backups shall be
automatically stored at the central-control PC and encrypted with a nine-
character alphanumeric password that must be used to restore or read data contained
in backup.
10. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made
to database and system software.
11. Support network protocol and topology, TCP/IP, Novel Netware,
Digital Pathworks, Banyan Vines, LAN/WAN, and RAS.
F.Workstation Software:
1.Password levels shall be individually customized at each workstation to
allow or disallow operator access to program functions for each Location.
2.Workstation event filtering shall allow user to define events and alarms
that will be displayed at each workstation. If an alarm is unacknowledged (not
handled by another workstation) for a preset amount of time, the alarm will
automatically appear on the filtered workstation.
G. PC-to-Controller Communications:
1.Central-station or workstation communications shall use the following:
a. Direct connection using serial ports of the PC.
b. TCP/IP LAN interface cards.
2.Each serial port used for communications shall be individually configurable
for "direct communications," or as an ASCII output port. Serial ports shall have
adjustable data transmission rates and shall be selectable under program control.
3.Use multiport communications board if more than two serial ports are
needed.
a. Use a 4-, 8-, or 16-serial port configuration that is
expandable to 64-serial ports.
b. Connect the first board to an internal PCI bus adapter card.
4.Direct serial and TCP/IP cable shall be alike in the monitoring or
control of the system except for the connection that must first be made to a dial-up
or voice-over IP Location.
5.Poll frequency and message response time-out settings allow tuning for
bandwidth and latency issues associated with network communications.
6.TCP/IP network interface card (NIC) shall have an option to set the poll-
frequency and message-response time-out settings.

REV 00
7.PC-to-controller and controller-to-controller communications (direct or
TCP/IP) shall use a polled-communication protocol that checks sum and
acknowledges each message. All communications in this subparagraph shall be
verified and buffered, and retransmitted if not acknowledged.
H. Direct Serial or TCP/IP PC-to-Controller Communications:

1.Communication software on the PC shall supervise the PC-to-controller
communications link.
2.Loss of communications to any controller shall result in an alarm at all PCs
running the communication software.
3.When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically
upload to the PC, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the
controller.
I. Operator Interface:
1.Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state
and one for the abnormal state.
2.When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically

change to the proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons
shall also display the input's state, whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is
in the armed or bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command.
3.Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure
(locked) state and one for the open (unlocked) state.
4.Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to
show their current real-time condition without prompting by the operator.
5.The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate
toolbar button, or right click, to command the system to perform the desired
function.
6.Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups
shall include the following:
a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and
allow for input, output, and override group icons to be placed on maps.
b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for
control of points assigned to them.
c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be
placed on different maps.
d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which
maps will be displayed.
7.Override Groups Containing I/Os:

REV 00
a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the
operator with the status and control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with
a single icon.
b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary
status of points in that group.
c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually
control or set to time-zone points in the group.
d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the
group to show icons representing the live status for each point in the
group, individual control over each point, and the ability to compress
the individual icons back into one summary icon.
8.Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups:
a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall
within the holiday parameters, the operator shall have the ability to
override schedules individually for each input, output, or override group.
b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two
dates with separate times for each date.
c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state
that the point shall advance to when the time and date become current.
d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the
point shall return to when the time and date become current.
9.Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then
edited for specific requirements, to reduce redundant data entry.
J. Operator Access Control:

1.Control operator access to system controls through multi password-protected
operator levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password
clearances shall be able to change operator levels for operators.
2.Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their
defined level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm.
3.A minimum of 15 passwords shall be available with the system software.

System shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field.
System shall print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the
system printer at login and logoff.
4.The password shall not be displayed or printed.
5.Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:
a. Selected commands to be usable.
b. Access to system software.
c. Access to application software.
d. Individual zones that are to be accessed.

REV 00
e. Access to database.
K. Operator Commands:
1.Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators
to use the system without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds.
System prompts shall be a word, a phrase, or an acronym.
2.Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not
less than onesecond(s).
3.Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following:
a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the
operator has observed the alarm message.
b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion-
alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. System shall be structured
so that console operator cannot disable tamper circuits.
c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely
activate intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone.
d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide
operational test.
e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational
test for a specific zone.
f. Print reports.
g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators.
h. Security Lighting Controls: Allows the operator to remotely
turn on or turn off security lights.
i. Display Graphics: Used to show any graphic displays
implemented in the system. Graphic displays shall be completed within
20 seconds from time of operator command.
j. Run system tests.
k. Generate and format reports.
l. Request help with the system operation.
1) Include in main menus.
2) Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help
for selections and functions with the press of one function key.
3) Provide navigation to specific topic from within the
first help window.
4) Help shall be accessible outside the application
program.
m. Entry-Control Commands:
1) Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled
entry and exit up to four times a day through time-zone
programming.

REV 00
2) Arm or disarm each monitored input up to
fourtimes a day through time-zone programming.
3) Enable or disable readers or keypads up to two

times a day through time-zone programming.
4) Enable or disable cards or codes up to four > times
a day per entry point through access-level programming.
4.Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command
cannot be executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use
plain-language words and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed.
Error responses that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other
document are not acceptable. Conditions causing operator assistance messages
include the following:
a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete.
b. Operator is restricted from using that command.
c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service.
d. Command addresses a point that does not exist.
e. Command is outside the system's capacity.
L. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or
of a particular portion of the system.
1. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display
or printout. The report shall document the operational status of system
components.
M. Report-Generator Software: Include commands to generate reports for

displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored by type,
date, and time. Report printing shall be the lowest-priority activity. Report-generation
mode shall be operator selectable but set up initially as periodic, automatic, or on
request. Include time and date printed and the name of operator generating the report.
Report formats may be configured by operators.
1.Automatic Printing: Setup shall specify, modify, or inhibit the report to be
generated; the time the initial report is to be generated; the time interval between
reports; the end of the period; and the default printer.
2.Printing on Request: An operator may request a printout of any report.
3.Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up. Include
alarms recorded by system over the selected time and information about the type
of alarm such as door alarm, intrusion alarm, tamper alarm, etc., the type of sensor,
the location, the time, and the action taken.
4.Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the time
placed in access, and the time placed in secure mode.

REV 00
5.Custom Reports: Reports tailored to exact requirements of who, what,
when, and where. As an option, custom report formats may be stored for future
printing.
6.Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for automatic
generation.
7.Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as well as the
ability to be sorted by name, card number, imprinted number, or by any of the
user-defined fields.
8.Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a specific reader
or group of readers by selecting the readers from a list.
9.Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has been
assigned to the specified access level.
10. Who Is "In" Report:
a. Emergency Report: One-click operation on toolbar launches
report.
b. Cardholder Report. Contain a count of persons who are

"In" at a selected Location and a detailed listing of name, date, and time
of last use, sorted by the last reader used or by the group assignment.
11. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field
documentation including the actual location of equipment, programming
parameters, and wiring identification. Maintain system installation data within
system database so that data are available on-site at all times.
12. Activity and Alarm On-Line Printing: Activity printers for use at
workstations; prints all events, or alarms only.
13. History Reports: Custom reports that allow the operator to select
any date, time, event type, device, output, input, operator, Location, name, or
cardholder to be included or excluded from the report.
a. Initially store history on the hard disk of the host PC.
b. Permit viewing of the history on workstations or print history
to any system printer.
c. The report shall be definable by a range of dates and times
with the ability to have a daily start and stop time over a given date range.
d. Each report shall depict the date, time, event type, event
description, and device; or I/O name, cardholder group assignment, and
cardholder name or code number.
e. Each line of a printed report shall be numbered to ensure that
the integrity of the report has not been compromised.
f. Total number of lines of the report shall be given at the end
of the report. If the report is run for a single event such as "Alarms,"
the total shall reflect how many alarms occurred during that period.
14. Reports shall have the following four options:
a. View on screen.
REV 00
b. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and
"Print To" options if more than one printer is connected to the system.
c. "Save to File" with full path statement.
d. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating
status of system inputs and outputs or of inputs and outputs that are
abnormal, out of time zone, manually overridden, not reporting, or in
alarm.
15. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to
be sorted and printed according to the following criteria:
a. Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate.
b. Code number, name, or imprinted card number.
c. Group, Location access levels.
d. Start and stop code range.
e. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of
days.
f. In, out, or either status.
g. Codes with trace designation.
16. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every
data field may be printed.
17. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the actual
position of the printed data shall closely match the position of the data on the data-
entry windows.
N. Anti-Passback:
1.System shall have global and local anti-passback features, selectable by
Location. System shall support hard and soft anti-passback.
2.Hard Anti-Passback: Once a credential holder is granted access through a

reader with one type of designation (IN or OUT), the credential holder may not pass
through that type of reader designation until the credential holder passes through a
reader of opposite designation.
3.Soft Anti-Passback: Should a violation of the proper IN or OUT sequence
occur, access shall be granted, but a unique alarm shall be transmitted to the control
station, reporting the credential holder and the door involved in the violation. A
separate report may be run on this event.
4.Timed Anti-Passback: A controller capability that prevents an access code
from being used twice at the same device (door) within a user-defined amount of
time.
5.Provide four separate zones per Location that can operate without requiring
interaction with the host PC (done at controller). Each reader shall be assignable to
one or all four anti-passback zones. In addition, each anti-passback reader can be
REV 00
further designated as "Hard," "Soft," or "Timed" in each of the four anti-passback
zones. The four anti-passback zones shall operate independently.
6.The anti-passback schemes shall be definable for each individual door.
7.The Master Access Level shall override anti-passback.
8.System shall have the ability to forgive (or reset) an individual credential
holder or the entire credential-holder population anti-passback status to a neutral
status.
O. Visitor Assignment:
1.Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with
visitors. The visitor badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors.
Allow only those access levels that have been designated as approved for visitors.
2.Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and doors accessed, and
name of person contacted.
3.Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder.
4.Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be
assigned to credentials issued to visitors.
5.Allow operator to recall visitors' credential-holder file once a visitor is
enrolled in the system.
6.The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential
after use at that reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential.
7.System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and
reports. Reports shall be able to print all or any visitor activity.
P.Time and Attendance:

1.Time and attendance reporting shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads
and display cumulative time in for each day and cumulative time in for length
designated in the report.
2.Shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads and display cumulative
time in for each day and cumulative time in for length designated in the report.
3.System software setup shall allow designation of selected access-control
readers as time and attendance hardware to gather the clock-in and clock-out times
of the users at these readers.
a. Reports shall show in and out times for each day, total time
in for each day, and a total time in for period specified by the user.
b. Allow the operator to view and print the reports, or save the
reports to a file.
c. Alphabetically sort reports on the person's last name, by
Location or location group. Include all credential holders or optionally
select individual credential holders for the report.

REV 00
Q. Training Software: Enables operators to practice system operation, including

alarm acknowledgment, alarm assessment, response force deployment, and response force
communications. System shall continue normal operation during training exercises and
shall terminate exercises when an alarm signal is received at the console.
R. Entry-Control Enrollment Software: Database management functions that

allow operators to add, delete, and modify access data as needed.
1.The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment
functions.
2.Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management
and modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than
personnel enrollment functions.
3.The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is
unattended, to prevent unauthorized use.
4.The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying
information into the entry-control database files through enrollment stations. Allow
entry of personnel identifying information into the system database using menu
selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized during setup
to suit user and site needs. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for
use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be
compatible with the entry- control database files.
5.Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the
ability to run searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-
defined field shall be configurable, using any combination of the following features:
a. MASK: Determines a specific format with which data must
comply.
b. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field
before saving.
c. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique.
d. DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be
evaluated as an additional deactivate date for all cards assigned to this
cardholder.
e. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for
the cardholder.
6.Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search
by last name, first name, group, or any predetermined user-defined data field; by
codes not used in definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods.
7.Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as
additional stop dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder.
8.Batch card printing.
9.Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where
most card data are similar.

REV 00
10. Enhanced ASCII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of
cardholder data and images.
11. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to
deactivate cards when a card is used at selected devices.
S.SYSTEM DATABASE
1.Database and database management software shall define and modify each
point in database using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and
constraints associated with each system device.
2.Database Operations:
a. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-
tree format, with navigation through expandable menu branches and
manipulated with use of menus and icons in a main menu and system
toolbar.
b. Navigational Aids:
1) Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture
image, activate, deactivate, and assemble report.
2) Point and click feature to facilitate data
manipulation.
3) Next and previous command buttons visible when
editing database fields to facilitate navigation from one record to
the next.
4) Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to
copy data from one record to create a new similar record.
c. Data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and
illegal data and shall be verified for valid format.
d. System shall generate a memo or note field for each item
that is stored in database, allowing the storing of information about any
defining characteristics of the item. Memo field is used for noting the
purpose for which the item was entered, reasons for changes that were
made, and the like.
3.File Management:
a. File management shall include database backup and
restoration system, allowing selection of storage media, including
designated network resources.
b. Operations shall be both manual and automatic modes. The
number of automatic sequential backups before the oldest backup will be
overwritten; FIFO mode shall be operator selectable.
c. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any
PC on the LAN and shall operate while system remains operational.
4.Operator Passwords:

REV 00
a. Support individual system operators, each with a unique
password.
b. eight alphanumeric characters
c. Allow passwords to be case sensitive.
d. Passwords shall not be displayed when entered.
e. Passwords shall have unique and customizable password
profile, and allow several operators to share a password profile. Include
the following features in the password profile:
1) Predetermine the highest-level password profile for
access to all functions and areas of program.
2) Allow or disallow operator access to any program
operation, including the functions of View, Add, Edit, and Delete.
3) Restrict doors to which an operator can assign
access.
f. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to
system. This user name and password shall be used to access database
areas and programs as determined by the associated profile.
g. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully
exiting program. User may be logged off but program will remain running
while displaying the login window for the next operator.
5.Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access authorization shall
be by card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a combination of both (card
plus PIN).
a. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the

card or card-and- PIN validation second, and the access level (time of day,
day of week, date), anti-passback status, and number of uses last.
b. Use data-entry windows to view, edit, and issue access
levels. Access- authorization entry-management system shall maintain
and coordinate all access levels to prevent duplication or the incorrect
creation of levels.
c. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder.
d. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each
Location to a cardholder. Each access level may contain any combination
of doors.
e. Each door may be assigned four time zones.
f. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length.
g. Feature in first subparagraph below helps speed data entry.
h. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder
data can be shared by all locations in the group.
i. Visitor Access: Issue a visitor badge for data tracking or
photo ID purposes without assigning that person a card or code.

REV 00
j. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for
tracing. Make a special audible and visible annunciation at control
station when a selected card or code is used at a designated code reader.
Annunciation shall include an automatic display of the cardholder image.
k. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited
number of uses or a number from one to 9999 that regulates the number
of times the card can be used before it is automatically deactivated.
l. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and
deactivated manually or automatically by date. Provide for multiple
deactivate dates to be preprogrammed.
6.Security Access Integration:
a. Photo ID badging and photo verification shall use the same
database as the security access and may query data from cardholder,
group, and other personal information to build a custom ID badge.
b. Automatic or manual image recall and manual access based
on photo verification shall also be a means of access verification and
entry.
c. System shall allow sorting of cardholders together by group
or other characteristic for a fast and efficient method of reporting on, and
enabling or disabling, cards or codes.
7.Key control and tracking shall be an integrated function of cardholder data.

a. Provide the ability to store information about which
conventional metal keys are issued and to whom, along with key
construction information.
b. Reports shall be designed to list everyone who possesses a
specified key.
8. Facility Codes: System shall accommodate facility codes per
Location, with the option of allowing facility codes to work at all doors or only at
particular doors.
a. Operator Comments:
b. With the press of one appropriate button on the toolbar,
the user shall be permitted to enter operator comments into the history at
any time.
c. Automatic prompting of operator comment shall occur
before the resolution of each alarm.
d. Operator comments shall be recorded by time, date, and
operator number.
e. Comments shall be sorted and viewed through reports and
history.
f. The operator may enter comments in two ways; either or
both may be used:
g. Manually entered through keyboard data entry (typed).

REV 00
h. Predefined and stored in database for retrieval on request.
i. System shall have a minimum of 999 predefined operator

comments with up to 30 characters per comment.
9.Group:
a. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into
groups that allow the operator to determine the tenant, vendor,
contractor, department, division, or any other designation of a group to
which the person belongs.
b. System software shall have the capacity to assign one of
group names to an access authorization.
c. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all
access authorizations assigned to a particular group.
d. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by
group name.
10. Time Zones:
a. Each zone consists of a start and stop time for seven days
of the week and three holiday schedules. A time zone is assigned to
inputs, outputs, or access levels to determine when an input shall
automatically arm or disarm, when an output automatically opens or
secures, or when access authorization assigned to an access level will be
denied or granted.
b. Up to four time zones may be assigned to inputs and
outputs to allow up to four arm or disarm periods per day or four lock or
unlock periods per day; up to three holiday override schedules may be
assigned to a time zone.
c. Data-entry window shall display a dynamically linked bar
graph showing active and inactive times for each day and holiday, as start
and stop times are entered or edited.
11. Holidays:
a. Three different holiday schedules may be assigned to a time
zone. Holiday schedule consists of date in format DD/MM/YYYY and a
description. When the holiday date matches the current date of the time
zone, the holiday schedule replaces the time-zone schedule for that 24-
hour period.
b. Three separate holiday schedules may be applied to a time
zone.
c. Holidays have an option to be designated as occurring on the
designated date each year. These holidays remain in the system and will
not be purged.
d. Holidays not designated to occur each year shall be
automatically purged from the database after the date expires.

REV 00
12. Access Levels:
a. System shall allow for the creation of multiple access levels.
b. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level.
The Master Access Level shall work at all doors at all times and override
any anti- passback.
c. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area
by reader and by time. Access levels shall determine when and where an
Identifier is authorized.
d. System shall be able to create multiple door and time-zone
combinations under the same access level so that an Identifier may be
valid during different time periods at different readers even if the readers
are on the same controller.
13. User-Defined Fields:
a. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields,
each with up to 50 characters, for specific information about each
credential holder.
b. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length
shall be 20 characters.
c. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined

field that, when selected, forces the operator to enter data in the user-
defined field before the credential can be saved.
d. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined
field that, when selected, will not allow duplicate data from different
credential holders to be entered.
e. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined
field that will require the data to be entered with certain character types in
specific spots in the field entry window.
f. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a
deactivate date. The selection shall automatically cause the data to be
formatted with the windows DD/MM/YYYY date format. The credential
of the holder will be deactivated on that date.
g. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or
combination of user-defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate
cardholder. The search function shall include a search for a character
string.
h. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on
and organized by the user-defined fields.
14. Code Tracing:
a. System shall perform code tracing selectable by cardholder
and by reader.
b. Any code may be designated as a "traced code" with no
limit to how many codes can be traced.
REV 00
c. Any reader may be designated as a "trace reader" with no
limit to which or how many readers can be used for code tracing.
d. When a traced code is used at a trace reader, the access-
granted message that usually appears on the monitor window of the
central station shall be highlighted with a different color than regular
messages. A short singular beep shall occur at the same time the
highlighted message is displayed on the window.
e. The traced cardholder image (if image exists) shall appear on
workstations when used at a trace reader.
T. ALARMS AND EVENTS

1.Alarms
a. System Setup:
1) Assign manual and automatic responses to
incoming-point status change or alarms.
2) Automatically respond to input with a link to other
inputs, outputs, or operator-response plans; unique sound with use
of WAV files; and maps or images that graphically represent the
point location.
3) Sixty-character message field for each alarm.
4) Operator-response-action messages shall allow
message length of at least 65,000 characters, with database storage
capacity of up to 32,000 messages. Setup shall assign messages to
access point,zone,sensor, or as configured.
5) Secondary messages shall be assignable by the
operator for printing to provide further information and shall be
editable by the operator.
6) Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of four
lines of 60 characters each.
7) Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the
operator using the report generator.
b. Software Tamper:
1) Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized

changes to system database files are attempted. Three consecutive
unsuccessful attempts to log onto system shall generate a software
tamper alarm.
2) Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an
operator or other individual makes three consecutive unsuccessful
attempts to invoke functions beyond the authorization level.
3) Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands
entered at each central station to serve as an audit trail. System shall

REV 00
not allow write access to system transcript files by any person,
regardless of their authorization level.
4) Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper
alarms.
c. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for
operators with the highest password authorization level available in
system.
d. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with
flashing icons on graphic maps; display and constantly update the current
status of alarm inputs and outputs in real time through animated icons.
e. Multimedia Alarm Annunciation: WAV files to be
associated with alarm events for audio annunciation or instructions.
f. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an
alarm cannot be cleared unless it has returned to normal, with options of
requiring the operator to enter a comment about disposition of alarm.
Allow operator to silence alarm sound when alarm is acknowledged.
g. Alarm Automation Interface: High-level interface to central-
station alarm automation software systems. Allows input alarms to be
passed to and handled by automation systems in the same manner as
burglar alarms, using a TIA-232-F ASCII interface.
h. CCTV Alarm Interface: Allow commands to be sent to
CCTV systems during alarms (or input change of state) through serial
ports.
i. Camera Control: Provides operator ability to select and
control cameras from graphic maps.
2.Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors and controllers and notify operators of an

alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities,
display the oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one
alarm shall not be considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit
reporting of subsequent alarms.
a. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of
alarm, and secondary alarm messages.
b. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of
alarm, date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence, and operator
responses.
c. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for
each input assigned to that map if that option is selected for that input
location.
d. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the
following two handling steps by operators:

REV 00
1) First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action
shall silence sounds associated with the alarm. The alarm remains
in the system "Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved."
2) Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution
or operator comment, giving the disposition of the alarm event. The
alarm shall then clear.
e. Each workstation shall display the total pending alarms and
total unresolved alarms.
f. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the
resolution of alarms until the alarm point has returned to its normal state.
g. Alarms shall transmit to the central station in real time

except for allowing connection time for dial-up locations.
h. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum
of four different windows.
1) Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a
large red blinking icon. Selecting the icon will acknowledge the
alarm.
2) History Log Transaction Window: Display name,
time, and date in red text. Selecting red text will acknowledge the
alarm.
3) Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name,
time, and date in red. Selecting red text will acknowledge the
alarm.
4) Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon
representing each alarm input location. Change icon to flashing
red when the alarm occurs. Change icon from flashing red to
steady red when the alarm is acknowledged.
i. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be
prompted to enter comments about the nature of the alarm and actions
taken. Operator's comments may be manually entered or selected from a
programmed predefined list, or a combination of both.
j. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences,
provide programmed comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the
alarm.
k. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and
resolved the alarm shall be recorded in the database.
l. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be
acknowledged at the same time the operator acknowledges the first
alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm is resolved.
m. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading,
retrieving, and updating database from workstations and controllers.

REV 00
n. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the
corresponding alarm point shall be automatically bypassed.
3.Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status
integrated into the display. Colors are used for the various components and current
data. Colors shall be uniform throughout the system.
a. Color Code:
1) FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has
gone into an alarm or that primary power has failed.
2) STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in
alarm and alarm has been acknowledged.
3) YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access.
4) GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that
power is on.
b. Graphics:
1) Support 32,000 graphic display maps and allow
import of maps from a minimum of 16 standard formats from
another drawing or graphics program.
2) Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-
and-drop method.
3) Operators shall be able to view the inputs,
outputs, and the point's name by moving the mouse cursor over the
point on the graphic map.
4) Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic
maps. The operator shall be able to toggle to view graphic maps
associated with I/Os.
5) Each graphic map shall have a display-order
sequence number associated with it to provide a predetermined
order when toggled to different views.
6) Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed

on graphic maps that, when selected by an operator, will open a
video window, display the camera associated with that icon, and
provide pan-tilt-zoom control.
7) Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow
the ability to arm or bypass an input, open or secure an output, or
control the pan- tilt-zoom function of the selected camera.
U. INTEGRATION/ INTERFACING REQUIREMENTS
The Access Control shall be integrated and interfaced to the following systems:
1.Structured Cabling Network (SCN) and Data Communications Network

REV 00
a. The Access Control shall be interfaced with the Structured
Cabling Network and the Data Communications Network to allow for
communication between the System workstations, servers, and controllers
and all other interfaced systems through the network backbone.
b. Clients shall communicate with the system applications
utilizing the TCP/IP network protocol over the Project LAN via
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet (auto-negotiating).
2.Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. All Access Control equipment shall be powered by UPS.
Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to ensure UPS power supply for
Access Control equipment.
b. A UPS failure shall be communicated to the Access
Control workstations (where provided).
3.Elevators
a. The Access Control Contractor shall extend cables from the
equipment racks up to the elevators control panel. From there
onwards, the Elevator Contractor shall extend the cables up to the
Access Card Reader located inside/outside the elevator car. The Access
Card Readers themselves shall be supplied by the Access Control
Contractor.
4.Fire Alarm System
a. The Fire Alarm System shall control directly the Access
Control controlled doors in accordance with the approved Cause and
Effect Matrix via hardwired interlocks.
5.Parking Control Equipment
a. The Access Control devices and associated cards that are
integrated in the Parking Control Equipment shall be furnished by the
Access Control Contractor. The Access Control Contractor shall extend
the necessary cables from Access Control equipment racks up to the
respective Parking Control Equipment.
b. When an authorized access card is presented and
validated by the Access Control, the barrier gates will open.
6.Video Surveillance System
a. The system shall be fully integrated with Video Surveillance
System utilizing unified security platform, all building security systems
shall be controlled & monitored from single graphical user interface
(Integrated Building Management System).
b. The system, as a part of the building security systems, shall
be monitored by the Integrated Building Management System. The system
shall be interfaced

REV 00
with the Integrated Building Management System to provide all security
functions through unified software platform.
V. IBMS WORKSTATION- ASSIGNED FOR ACS FACILITY OPERATOR

1.Central-Station Computer Workstations
a. Operator Workstation: In order to provide the best up-to
date equipment at the lowest price and to manage the maintenance at the
best level, the Contractor shall specify system requirements to the
Employer.
b. Real Time Functions:
1) The color monitor and keyboard for each
workstation shall display real-time data, allow operator's
commands, and report system activity. Monitors shall be at least
21" LCD screen. It shall be deigned to work 24 hours a day.
2) The host workstation shall function as the system
programmer's and system operator's workstation, for entering and
editing the system database, entering operating software, and
monitoring the operation of all system functions.
c. Alarm Output:
1) The output of alarm displays shall depend upon the
relative priority of each alarm.
2) The system shall automatically prioritize alarm
displays.
d. Format: The format shall include a dedicated and protected
area of the viewing screen for the current date and time.
e. Video Recall Facility: All workstations shall have video
recall facility, and the graphics shall allow viewing live video and
controlling the alarmed cameras.
f. Advisory Messages: Each workstation monitor shall display
system advisory messages upon hardware malfunction or restoration in a
dedicated and protected area of the viewing screen.
g. Access Rights: The usage of workstation for any function
shall be based on access rights of the user defined by his password.
h. Flexibility: Workstations shall be fully flexible. Their
function can be adapted at any time depending on the authorization
password.
i. Communication: Communication between servers and
workstations shall use the latest secured encryption mechanism and allow
for use of HTTP protocol.
j. Dot Matrix Alarm Printer:
1) Connected to the central station.

REV 00
2) Minimum of 96 characters, standard ASCII
character set based on ANSI INCITS 154, and with graphics
capability and programmable top-of-form control.
3) Prints in both red and black without ribbon change.
4) Adjustable sprockets for paper width up to 11 inches.
5) 80 columns per line, minimum speed of 200
characters per second.
6) Character Spacing: Selectable at 10, 12, or 17
characters per inch.
7) Paper: Sprocket-fed fan fold paper.
k. Report Printer:
1) Connected to the central station and designated
workstations.
2) Laser printer with minimum resolution of 600dpi.
3) Printing Speed: Minimum 15 pages per minute.
4) Paper Handling: Automatic sheet feeder with
250-sheet paper cassette and with automatic feed.
l. Interface: Bidirectional parallel, and universal serial bus.
m. LAN Adapter Card: 10/100 Mbps internal network interface
card.
n. Use redundant computers and associated hardware and

software if required by authorities having jurisdiction or if a single-point
failure is unacceptable.
2.Redundant Central Computer: One identical redundant central computer,
connected in a hot standby, peer configuration. This computer shall automatically
maintain its own copies of system software, application software, and data files.
System transactions and other activities that alter system data files shall be updated
to system files of redundant computer in near real time. If central computer fails,
redundant computer shall assume control immediately and automatically.
3.Computers and printers shall comply with Division 27 Section “Computers &
Related Peripherals”.
4.Fixed Map Display
5.A fixed map display may be used as another status indicator, supplementing
the monitor display of the central station.
6.A fixed map display shall show layout of the protected facilities. Zones
corresponding to those monitored by the system shall be highlighted on the
display. Status of each zone shall be displayed using digital displays as required
within each designated zone. A digital display test switch shall be provided on the
map display.
7.The data transmission rate between the workstations and the servers shall be
bidirectional using TCP/IP VLAN Network.

REV 00
8.The system Software is based on 64-bit Microsoft Windows central-station,
workstation operating system, server operating system, and application software.
9.Control station or designated workstation displays live video from a CCTV

source.
a. Control Buttons: On the display window, with separate
control buttons to represent Left, Right, Up, Down, Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Scan, and a minimum of two custom-command auxiliary controls.
b. Provide at least seven icons to represent different types of
cameras, with ability to import custom icons. Provide option for display
of icons on graphic maps to represent their physical location.
c. Provide the alarm-handling window with a command button
that will display the camera associated with the alarm point.
10. Display mouse-selectable icons representing each camera source, to
select source to be displayed. For CCTV sources that are connected to a video
switcher, control station shall automatically send control commands through a COM
port to display the requested camera when the camera icon is selected.
11. Allow cameras with preset positioning to be defined by displaying a
different icon for each of the presets. Provide control with Next and Previous
buttons to allow operator to cycle quickly through the preset positions.
2.35 IBMS – FIRE ALARM SOFTWARE/HARDWARE MODULE
A. The IBMS will provide monitoring and alarm management functionality

for the FAS. Full data of the Fire Alarm System including all alarms, troubles, faults, etc.
… shall be transferred to the IBMS.
B. Alarm and event data will be forwarded directly to the IBMS application
servers. Equipment status data will be retrieved as and when is requested by the operator.
Performance data will be periodically (within 24hrs) uploaded to the IBMS data servers.
C. These FAS Panels will make all monitoring and alarm points available for
their respective building or zone ensuring that all status and alarms are also capture and
displayed on the IBMS.
D. FAS equipment failures will be recorded by the IBMS database servers,

communicated to the operator via the IBMS alarm management system as a high priority
alarm for further action.

REV 00
E. The FAS contractor will supply a list of actions associated with each fire
alarm that the FAS and other ELV / low current systems should complete (i.e. HVAC,
Lift controllers.) In the event of an action not completing within 10 seconds, a critical
alarm will be raised by the IBMS.
F. The FAS in the project shall communicate the following information to the
IBMS when there is a change in the status of the fire alarm system or in the status of a fire
alarm zone:
1.Zone of Incidence.
2.Time and Date.
3.Indication of whether change of status is a fire alarm, return to normal or
FAS fault.
4.Address of device in alarm. The address shall be provided by the FAS
Contractor for each device.
5.Type of device in alarm, e.g. heat detector, smoke detector, fire pump,
fire alarm panel, etc.
G. An alarm originating in a FAS shall be annunciated with the highest

priority at the IBMS workstations. The IBMS shall:
1.Assume that the equipment shutdown or started by a source other than the
HVAC controllers within 10 seconds of the fire alarm annunciation was the result
of FAS actions and alarms associated with that equipment shall be inhibited.
2.A look-up table, based on information provided by the FAS Contractor shall
identify which actions are initiated in the event of a fire. The IBMS shall monitor the
actions of the FAS via the interfaces to other ELV Building Services Systems
controllers, such as the lift controllers, HVAC controllers, etc., and shall generate
a critical alarm if there are any anomalies such as the failure of equipment to start,
failure of dampers to open, etc.
H. In the event of an alarm, the IBMS shall initiate one or more of the
following actions:
1.CCTV camera(s) shall start recording the event
2.Recording of the event by the system
I. In the event of a FAS equipment malfunction the information shall be

automatically sent to the IBMS and the IBMS shall initiate the appropriate action.
Comprehensive and complete interoperability documentation.
J. The FAS Contractor shall provide separate interoperability documentation of

the project, which shall detail the method of integration with IBMS System. These

REV 00
documents shall also include the ID for all data sent and received by the IBMS together
with all pertinent details such as the address of the sending and receiving FAS, the
protocol and all other relevant data necessary for:
1.Configure protocols handled by the IBMS in addition to those provided
under this contract.
2.The FAS Contractor shall handover all programs, database, configuration

and network data to IBMS contractor
K. Interface with other systems: Provide standard software protocol and

required hardware to communicate and interface all information to the IBMS, Video
Surveillance, Access Control, PAS, etc. as detailed in this Specification & Section
283111.
L. The IBMS workstation- assigned for FAS Facility Operator shall be located
with the Tower Control Room. The Fire Alarm System workstation located at the Fire
Command Center, and the associated software, shall not be part of the IBMS scope of
works and shall be provided by the Fire Alarm System supplier.
2.36 THIRD PARTY INTERFACES GENERAL
A. The NAC, Gateways used for Third Party systems interface shall be software
programmable gateways that shall provide a native BACnet/IP to Third Party building
system gateway if the Third Party building system does not provide data in a BACnet/IP
Object format meeting all of the requirements of ASHRAE standard SSPC 135. In case
the Third Party system’s default communication protocol is BACnet/IP, the IBMS shall
directly integrate it into his Management Platform.
B. Third party systems that shall be integrated with the IBMS using a server-to-
server interface, such as the Lighting Control System, shall utilize a Network Interface
Unit (NIU) instead of the NAC, following the requirements stipulated under sub-section
“IBMS Network Interface Unit”. The NIU may be supplied by either the Third Party’s
system supplier, the IBMS sub-contractor or both.
C. Third party systems interfaced with the BAS Automation Level, shall be
further integrated as part of the BAS, into the IBMS. Refer to the BAS design drawings
for the exact Third Party systems that shall be interfaced with the BAS Automation Level
and the Third Party systems that shall be directly interfaced with the IBMS.

REV 00
D. At minimum the Third Party protocols shall include Modbus, J-Bus, M-
BUS, KNX, OPC, and LonWorks.
E. The IBMS Supplier Scope shall include the following:

1.Provide the Network Automation Controller (NAC)/ Network Interface Unit
(NIU) that shall map the Third Party data into BACnet/IP Objects.
2.Provide the physical link (cable & necessary accessories) between the
Network Automation Controller (NAC)/ Network Interface Unit (NIU) and the
Third Party System Gateway.
3.Map the BACnet Object IDs as received from the Third Party System
Supplier to the IBMS
F.The Third Party Supplier scope shall include the following:

1.Provide Third Party controller with a communication data port and an open
standard communication protocol such as BACnet, Modbus, LonWorks, etc....,
necessary for the data exchange with the IBMS.
2.Provide comprehensive and complete documentations of the Third Party
system Object/ registers IDs, description, component addresses, properties and any
other pertinent information required for seamless integration between the Third
Party system and the IBMS.
G. Third party integration tests

1.The interface between the IBMS and each Third Party building system shall
be demonstrated. The tests shall be fully coordinated by the mechanical contractor
who shall liaise with each party concerned. It shall be conclusively demonstrated
that a IBMS workstation on the Management Level Network can communicate with
the Third Party system and vice versa.
2.The testing of the interface between the Management Level Network and
the Third Party system shall verify, at minimum, that:
d.All data communicated from the Third Party system to the
Management Level Network is in the form of BACnet Objects that
comply completely with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2016.
e. All data points mapped from the Management Level Network to
the Third Party system are displayed correctly on the Third Party system
monitor.
f. All mapped points are identical with regard to value, the engineering
units and significant digits on the Third Party system and the IBMS
workstation.
g.All points mapped from the Third Party system to the
Management Level Network meet all of the specifications detailed in the
IBMS specifications for points directly monitored/controlled by the IBMS.

REV 00
h.Communications speed between the two systems is satisfactory.
i. Both systems restart and communications between the two systems
resume following a power failure without operator intervention.
2.37 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE BOILER PLANT MANAGER
A. Each boiler shall have a microprocessor based unit controller. A boiler system controller
(Boiler Plant Manager) shall communicate with the individual boiler unit controllers. The
boiler system controller shall supervise all of the boiler unit controllers and shall have a
data port for the exchange of information with the IBMS.
B. The boiler system controller shall, at minimum, enable the following data to
be transferred from the boiler system controller to the IBMS:
1. Burner Cycles (monitoring point)
2. Flame Sensor (monitoring point).
3. Low Water Cut-off (monitoring point).
4. Blocked Vent Switch (monitoring point).
5. Operating Pressure (monitoring point).
6. Operating Temperature (monitoring point).
7. Operating Hours (monitoring point)
8. High Gas Pressure (monitoring point).
9. Low Gas Pressure (monitoring point).
10. Burner Temperature (monitoring point).
11. Vent Damper Proving Switch Verification (monitoring point).
12. Proper Air Flow Checking (monitoring point).
13. Entering Water Temperature (monitoring point)
14. Leaving Water Temperature (monitoring point)
15. Boiler Status (monitoring point)
16. Hot Water Supply Temperature Set point (monitoring point).
17. Hot Water Flow Status (monitoring point)
C. The boiler system controller shall, at minimum, enable the following data to be transferred
from the IBMS to the boiler system controller:
1. Hot water supply temperature set point reset.
2. Boiler demand limit reset.

REV 00
2.38 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND CAR PARK
VENTILATION CONTROL SYSTEM (CPVCS)
A. The Car Park Ventilation Control System shall be interfaced with the IBMS
through an open standard communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).
B. The NIU shall convert the CPVCS Industrial Ethernet communication

protocol into OPC objects for full integration of the CPVCS into the IBMS.
C. As minimum requirements the integration shall enable the following

monitoring and control functions:
1. Monitoring of all fans status and alarms
2. Monitoring of all motorized dampers
3. Monitoring of all CO detectors readings and alarms
4. Setting overall operation time schedule of the Car Park Ventilation system
5. Monitoring of the UPS status and alarms
6. Override control for all fans and motorized dampers (IBMS override control
shall not affect the automatic fire mode operation of the Car Park Ventilation Control
System)
7. Monitoring of the Fire Alarm signals received by the CPVCS
8. Monitoring of the Car Park Firefighters’ Smoke Control Station (FSCS)
status and alarms
9. Monitoring of the override commands initiated at the FSCS.
D. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete graphics layouts displaying

dynamic system feedback of each and every PLC panel, fan, motorized damper and CO
detector.
2.39 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND LIGHTING CONTROL

SYSTEM
A. The Lighting Control System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through
an open standard communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).
B. The interface shall enable full data transfer to and from the Lighting Control
System.
C. The interface shall provide the following functionality for the IBMS operator:

REV 00
1.Set an operation time schedule for each and every field device separately.
2.Set an operation time schedule for a group of field devices collectively.
3.Manually override the operation of each field device.
4.Monitor the status of each and every device.
5.Setup of automatic sequences, at the IBMS, based on feedback from other
IBMS sub- system such as access control data, BAS, FAS, etc...
D. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete GUI layouts for the
Lighting Control System
E. The IBMS sub-contractor shall coordinate with the Lighting Control System
specialist for proper interface implementation, and to provide the IBMS with the highest
operation priority.
2.40 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND THE ELEVATORS/

ESCELATORS
A. The Elevators/ Escalators shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an open
standard communication protocol such as OPC, BACnet/IP or Modbus TCP/IP using
NAC(s)/ NIU(s).
B. The interface shall enable full data transfer to and from the Elevators/
Escalators.
C. Monitoring Display: the system shall be capable of displaying the

information in graphic and tabular displays as follows:
1. Graphic Status Display of an elevation representation for all cars in a
group shall be shown in the same time for each group including the following as
a minimum:
a. Floor status.
b. Group operational mode.
c. Car status.
d. Hall calls.
e. Date and time, building and group identification.
2. Tabular Status Display shall include as a minimum the same
information as above except for registered hall and car calls.

REV 00
D. Lift Alarm and Event Data Display: lift remote monitoring and command
system shall monitor various discrete signals from the lift system and retain a log of
alarms, faults and events. An audible alarm with adjustable volume and silencer shall
automatically sound at each lift failure and or alarm condition.
E. Security Display and Command Operation: system shall display one group at
a time and shall allow through the IBMS GUI commands modification of the security
status of the car in the group, including floors the car is allowed to serve, floors that
the car is secured from serving and floors that are cut out from having hall calls
registered from them.
F. Interactive Lift Operations Display and Control: the ability to use the
IBMS GUI to initiate and display interactive lift, moving walk and escalator operations,
including but not limited to, the following shall be provided:
1.Display faults and events.
2.Alarm messages.
3.Any other special operations allowed by the manufacturer.
G. Traffic Analysis Display: system shall be capable for viewing various reports
generated from the data including the following as a minimum:
1.Total number of hall calls (up/down).
2.Average hall call times (up/down).
3.Maximum hall call time.
4.Number of car calls per car.
5.Number of hall and car calls per landing (up/down).

6.Average hall call time per landing.
7.Histogram of registration times.
8.Record of all events alarms.
9.Statistics showing percentages of time in different operation modes.
10. Playback of the graphic status display.
H. Historical Data: The IBMS shall be capable of providing full historical data,
and tendering for modes of operations, failures, alarms, maintenance requirements as a
minimum.
I. Command Control Feature: Proved password protected command control

software to enable building manager to control operation of elevators using the following
functions:

REV 00
1.Floor lockout (hall and car simultaneously).
2.Car call lockout (all cars within a group).
3.Parking operation- remove car from group and place at predetermined zoning
floor.
4.Independent operation- remove car from group to respond to car calls only.
5.VIP operation: send any car to any floor and remain there for period of three
minutes reassigning all other calls to different cars automatically.
J. Documentation: provide complete documentation, illustrating functions of

software systems, including the following:
1.General system overview.
2.High-level functional description.
3.I-O tables and charts, showing output bus and input signals.
4.Applicable technical manuals for adjusting, including drive control
adjustment, terminal characteristics for diagnostic work, and user procedures.
2.41 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND CAR PARK MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM
E. The Car Park Management System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through
an open standard communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).
F.The interface shall enable monitoring of the capacity level, and the Status, faults and
troubles of each barrier and bollard.
G. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete graphics layouts displaying

dynamic system feedback of each and every field device.
2.42 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND AUTOMATED PARKING

SYSTEM
A. The Automated Parking System shall be interfaced with the IBMS through an
open standard communication protocol such as OPC using NIU(s).
B. The interface shall enable monitoring of the capacity level, Status, faults and
troubles of each parking puzzle module.

REV 00
C. The IBMS sub-contractor shall develop complete graphics layouts displaying

dynamic system feedback of each parking puzzle module.
2.43 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND CLOSED AIR

CONDITIONING UNIT
A. The CACU controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data
port that enables the exchange of data between the CACU controller and the IBMS.
B. The interface between the CACU controller and the IBMS shall be as
indicated on the BAS drawings and CACU specification.
2.44 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

(VSD)
A. The variable speed drive (VSD) controller shall be microprocessor

based and shall have a data port that enables the exchange of data between the VSD
controller and the BMS Automation Level.
B. The interface between the variable speed drive controller and the Automation
level Network shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred to the
BMS Automation Level:
1.Start and Stop control.
2.Speed Control.
3.Speed Reference Feedback.
4.Motor Operating Status.
5.VSD alarm.
6.Motor power in kW.
7.Motor kWh.
8.Motor current.
9.Motor voltage.
10. Hours run.
11. DC link voltage.
12. Thermal load on motor.
13. Thermal load on VSD.
REV 00
14. Heat sink temperature.
15. Any other information available from the VSD controller as selected
by the Employer.
C. The interface between the VSD controller and the Management level
Network shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
Management Level Network to the VSD controller:
1.Speed Control Signal.
2.Start/Stop Control Signal.
3.Speed Feedback
4.VSD Fault
5.General Alarm
2.45 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND PACKAGED A/C UNITS
A. The Packaged A/C unit controller shall be microprocessor based and shall
have a data port to enable the exchange of data between the IBMS and the Packaged A/C
unit controller.
B. The interface between the Packaged A/C unit controller and the IBMS shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred between the
Packaged A/C unit controllers and the IBMS:
1.Unit Enable/disable Command
2.Unit Status
3.Unit Alarm
4.Fan Status
5.General Alarm
6.Unit Supply Air Temperature
7.Unit Static Pressure Sensor
8.Refrigerant System Alarm
9.Compressor Status
10. Dirty Filter Alarm
11. Unit Capacity
12. Reset temperature set point.

REV 00
13. Any other information available from the packaged A/C controller as
selected by the Employer.
2.46 INTERFACE BETWEEN THE IBMS AND THE UPS
A. The UPS controller shall be microprocessor based and shall have a data
port to enable the transfer of data between the UPS controller and the Management Level
Network.
B. The interface between the UPS controller and the Management level Network
shall enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the
Management Level Network to the IBMS:
1.Bypass Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
2.Bypass Voltage X-N, Y-N, Z-N
3.Critical Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
4.Critical Voltage X-N, Y-N, Z-N
5.Critical Current X, Y, Z
6.Critical Bus Frequency
7.Critical Bus KVA
8.Critical Bus KW
9.Critical Bus Capacity
10. UPM DC Voltage

11. UPM Battery Amperage
12. UPM Input Voltage X-Y, Y-Z, Z-X
13. UPM Battery Discharging
14. UPM Low Battery Warning
15. UPM Output Overload
16. UPM Fuse Failure
17. UPM Ambient over Temperature
18. UPM DC Ground
19. UPM Blower Failure
20. UPM Control Power Failure
21. UPM Overload Shutdown
22. SCC Output Overload

REV 00
23. SCC Emergency off
24. SCC Load on Bypass
25. SCC Static Switch Disabled
26. SCC Output Over/under Voltage
27. SCC UPM Summary Alarm
28. Any other information available from the UPS controller as selected
by the Employer.
2.47 INTERFACE BETWEEN IBMS AND SWITCHBOARD ELECTRONIC

METERS
A. The switchboard electronic meters shall be microprocessor based and shall

have a data port to enable the exchange of data between the Management Level Network
and the meter. Meters shall monitor all incomers of all MDBs. Additionally there
shall be hardwired interfaces between the IBMS and the low voltage distribution boards
as detailed below.
B. The interface between the meter and the Management Level Network shall
enable, at minimum, the following information to be transferred from the meter to the
Management Level network:
1.RMS Current per phase.
2.RMS Voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral.
3.Current demand.
4.Peak current.
5.Watt-hours, three phase total.
6.Watts per phase and three-phase total.
7.KVA per phase and three-phase total.
8.Watt demand.
9.KVA demand.
10. KVAR per phase and three-phase total.
11. KVAR demand.

12. Power factor per phase and three-phase total.
13. Power factor average.
14. Peak readings for watts, KVA and KVAR.
15. KVARH Lag.

REV 00
16. KVARH Lead.
17. Frequency.
18. Any other information available from the metering system as selected
by the Employer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING
A. Submit an outline of the training courses to be given for 2 trainees as

assigned by the employer. This outline shall include a schedule of the training sessions in
at least one-half day increments, indication of the topics to be covered in each session
and any prerequisite requirements that should be met prior to attendance. The training
outline shall be submitted with the initial shop drawing and submittals packages. Training
shall not commence unless the Engineer has approved a training outline. Training shall be
coordinated with the Employer’s designated training coordinator.
B. Training sessions shall include classroom type instruction and "hands on"
instruction and shall be given by the Specialist at the IBMS Specialists facilities and
on-site as detailed below. The trainers shall be factory trained and certified from the
manufacturer, shall be experienced with the hardware and software and shall be
experienced trainers. The resumes of the trainers shall be submitted to the Employer and
Engineer for approval. The resumes shall indicate clearly the experience and expertise of
the proposed training staff with regard to both their technical and training capabilities.
The IBMS Specialist shall certify the proposed training staff as specialist trainers. The
IBMS Specialist shall advise the Employer of the recommended qualifications for the
potential trainees.
C. Training shall consist of, 16 No. 4-hour sessions at the IBMS Specialist’s
facilities. These training sessions shall be tailored to the construction schedule and they
shall be presented in accordance with a flexible schedule that shall be acceptable to the
Employer. Follow up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site using the
installed components that shall be given during the period immediately prior to the
acceptance testing. Further follow up training shall consist of 8 No. 4-hour sessions on-site
during the warranty period. These training sessions during the warranty period shall be
scheduled with the Employer.
D. Provide all training materials (hand-outs, textbooks, workbooks etc.) and

any audiovisual equipment required to execute the training.

REV 00
E. Training sessions shall be formatted to maximize the usage of time of

the attendees and prevent redundant coverage of materials for advanced students.
Training sessions shall be designed on the basis of experience and knowledge of the
attendees scheduled to participate and shall differentiate between the requirements of
supervisory, operations and maintenance personnel. The training shall be specific to this
project and shall cover, at minimum, the following:
1.Data base features.
2.Cross-systems operating sequence programming.
3.Operator interface features.
4.Graphics set up and modification.
5.An overview of the IBMS topology.
6.Information access.
7.Executing operator commands.
8.Operator definable values.
9.Report customization.
10. Event message generation and modification.
11. Use of the Portable Operator Terminals (POT).

12. Interfaces between the low voltage Building Systems.
13. Other subjects necessary to ensure that the operators, maintenance
and supervisory staffs will be able to operate the IBMS without any on-going
assistance from any outside party.
F. Provide sufficient training to the Employer’s staff such that they shall be able
to map BACnet object Ids to the IBMS servers and shall be able to add points to the
data storage, analysis and retrieval functions.
3.2 BORING AND PATCHING
A. Boring and patching for work undertaken by the MEP Specialist to install
IBMS components shall be undertaken by the MEP Specialist but the IBMS Specialist
shall provide boring and patching of work in those instances where the IBMS Specialist
has caused damage requiring boring and patching. The IBMS Specialist shall provide
boring and patching for all installation work undertaken by the IBMS Specialist. Boring
and patching shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
1.Before boring any structural components, obtain the Engineer's approval.

REV 00
2.Make boring with clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be
inconspicuous in covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally
accessible to the tenants.
3.Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
3.3 FIRE STOPPING
A. The MEP Specialist shall provide fire stopping for components installed by
the MEP Specialist on behalf of the IBMS Specialist but if the IBMS Specialist damages
fire stopping installed by another trade or the work undertaken by the IBMS Specialist
requires that fire stopping be replaced or added, the IBMS Specialist shall seal all conduit,
cable, or cable tray penetrations of fire rated assemblies. Seal or fire-stop shall meet, at
1.Comply with all applicable codes, regulations and statutory requirements.
2.Approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
3.Fire protection system or device used shall not derate the ampacity of
electrical cables passing through it.
A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with

the manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment
within which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and supporting of
components with all trades.
B. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat

and workmanlike manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS
A. General Requirements:
1.All components shall be tested by the IBMS Specialist to ensure compliance
with the specifications before they leave the IBMS Specialist's premises and shall
be tested again on-site by the IBMS Specialist before the commencement of
acceptance testing. The IBMS Specialist shall not ship components to the project
site until they have been found to be fully compliant with the specifications and the
IBMS Specialist shall not request the commencement of acceptance testing until
such time as the IBMS Specialist has made a complete and thorough checkout of all
equipment on site.
REV 00
2.Any component furnished under this sub-contract shall be made available for
inspections or tests, as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Use of any component by
the Employer and Engineer shall not imply acceptance of the system or
acceptability of any component. Availability and demonstration of the systems shall
not be withheld and the use of components shall not imply the start of the Defects
Liability Period.
3.Costs associated with the required inspections and testing shall be
included in this scope of work. Additional charges will not be accepted.
4.The IBMS Specialist shall make available all equipment, necessary to
satisfactorily demonstrate the acceptability of the components and systems.
5.Engineering, software and system personnel shall be available on-site during
the commissioning tests. These personnel shall be familiar with the system
design and shall undertake all tests as requested by the Engineer in order to verify
that the IBMS meet the specifications.
6.The IBMS Specialist shall confirm that the person(s) who will be conducting
the commissioning tests on behalf of the IBMS Specialist has been actively involved
(on site) throughout the development of the software. Software shall be developed,
tested and demonstrated over a time span short enough to guarantee continuity of
personnel.
B. Factory Acceptance Tests/Software Tests:

1.The contractor shall comprehensively demonstrate the ability of the interface
between the IBMS and each IBMS sub-system and Third Party systems.
2.Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be
witnessed by the Employer / Engineer. Witness test shall cover complete checking
and testing of selected units according to requirements of the specified regulations
and standards as well as special requirements, finishes, software and controls. Test
procedures and programs shall be submitted for approval prior to factory visit by at
least 14 days. The contractor shall include in his price the cost of Four (4) man-visits
from the employer/engineer side for the factory witness test at manufacturer’s
premises to cover all test cost and expenses including business class air tickets,
five stars hotel full accommodation and local transportation.
3.The software functionality will be checked during the demonstrations on a
clause-by- clause basis with the specification, with reference to all applicable
correspondence, and with variation orders issued by the Employer.
4.Deficiencies shall be remedied and testing shall be repeated at no
additional cost to the Employer prior to the shipping of the components to the
project site.
5.The Engineer shall be advised at least 2 weeks in advance of any scheduled

Off-Site testing and the Engineer shall determine at that time whether the
Engineer shall witness the tests. If the Employer decides that the tests shall be
witnessed the Employer shall select a representative and the IBMS Specialist shall
pay the costs of the representative to attend the tests.

REV 00
C. Inspection During Installation:
1.Prior to commissioning tests, the IBMS shall be available for use by the
Employer and Engineer. Use by the Employer and Engineer shall not imply
acceptance of any component of the IBMS or the commencement of the Defects
Liability Period.
2.Provide staff to assist the Engineer in the inspections made during the
installation period to review the progress and quality of the ongoing work. The
Engineer will generate Field Observation Reports on the findings of the inspection.
The Engineer shall advise the IBMS Specialist during the inspection of any
concerns noted with respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in
writing as soon as possible after the inspection is completed. The IBMS Specialist
shall take corrective action to meet the requirement of the specifications.
3.Failure of the Engineer to identify any error or omission during inspections
shall not relieve the IBMS Specialist of any of the specification requirements
and shall not imply that a deviation from the specification has been accepted.
D. IBMS integration testing:
1.Each IBMS sub-system Specialist shall develop and fully test all software
required for the interface between his sub-system and the IBMS prior to the
delivery of the associated hardware and software components to the project site.
There shall be no software development on site except that associated with the entry
of database items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and schedules.
2.The integration test shall include monitoring and controlling of all IP
Cameras, and monitoring and controlling all Access Controllers as specified in this
specification section.
3.Mapping of the BAS BACnet Objects into the IBMS server shall be tested in
the presence of both the BAS sub-contractor and the IBMS specialist and shall
undertake the following tests:
a. Mapping of the BACnet Objects into the IBMS server.
b.Time synchronization between the IBMS and the BAS controllers.
c. Event/ alarm notification at the IBMS following the requirements of
the IBMS specification section 230900.
E. Component Testing/Point To Point Testing:

1.Prior to the scheduling of the commissioning tests with the Engineer, perform
a complete and detailed operational check of each IBMS component. Tests shall
be documented as detailed below and shall cover all of the testing requirements
detailed in this Section for the commissioning tests. The Engineer shall undertake
such random testing as the Engineer considers necessary to verify the acceptability
of the components.
2.Point to point checks shall be proven from the field device/interface
operation to the controller/outstation and from the controller to the presentation of
the point on the graphics. The results from the point-to-point tests shall be submitted
for approval on pre-defined schedules.

REV 00
F.Systems Testing:
1.Systems testing shall not commence until all component testing has been
successfully undertaken and approved by the Engineer.
2.System testing shall be undertaken by the IBMS Specialist and the IBMS
Specialist shall complete the Specialist’s portion of the system performance
verification sheets. The completed system performance verification test sheets
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
3.The IBMS Specialist shall schedule a repeat of the system performance
verification tests at a time convenient to the Engineer. These tests for the
verification by the Engineer shall not be scheduled until the IBMS Specialist has
verified that all systems are operating in accordance with the specifications.
4.The Engineer’s verification tests shall be performed by the IBMS Specialist
and shall be witnessed by the Engineer who shall complete the Engineer’s portion
of the system performance verification test sheets as each test is successfully
undertaken. The IBMS Specialist shall remedy any deficiencies that are observed
during the system performance verification tests and retesting shall be scheduled at a
time suitable to the Engineer. If there are deficiencies remaining after the follow-up
systems performance verification testing that require further testing by the Engineer,
then the expenses of the Engineer incurred in providing the additional follow-up
tests to verify compliance with the specifications, including travel, subsistence,
accommodation and normal consulting fees, shall be paid by the IBMS Specialist
at no additional cost to the Employer.
5.The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum:
a. Each and every point on the system.
b.All dynamic graphics comply with the mechanical and control
specifications.
c. All system alarms comply with the specification.
d.System stability.
G. Test Coordination:
1.Testing of the IBMS during the systems and integrated testing shall be
coordinated with all other trades associated with the system being tested. The system
shall be tested as a complete entity during these tests. The IBMS portion of the
systems shall not be tested in isolation.
H. Testing of Third Party Interfaces:

1.The IBMS Specialist shall develop and fully test all software required for the
interface between the IBMS and equipment furnished by others prior to the
delivery of the associated hardware and software components to the project site.
There shall be no software development on site except that associated with the
entry of database items such as setpoints, alarm limits, control constants and
schedules.

REV 00
2.The Third Party interfaces shall be fully demonstrated to the Engineer at
the IBMS Specialist’s facilities prior to the installation of any IBMS microprocessor
based components at the project site. The demonstration shall include all
hardware and software components associated with the interfaces.
3.The Third Party interfaces shall be re-tested on site following the testing and
acceptance by the Engineer of the individual low voltage systems.
4.The IBMS Specialist shall fully demonstrate that the BACnet objects are
provided at the IBMS Management level network in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications.
I. Test Documentation:
1.Test results shall be documented using test sheets. The test sheets shall be
prepared in an appropriate format for the various categories of component and
system to be tested. Component test sheet forms included within this section
indicate a minimum acceptable standard. The final format of the proposed test forms
shall be submitted by the IBMS Specialist for approval. It is the responsibility of
the IBMS Specialist to provide test verification sheets for each component and
system that accurately reflect the appropriate data for the components and
systems as furnished under this sub- contract.
2.Completed component test sheets indicating the test results for each IBMS
component within the system shall be submitted to the Engineer, together with a
proposed schedule for system commissioning tests, at least X weeks prior to the
proposed system commissioning tests. The Engineer shall determine on the basis of
the IBMS Specialist's component testing, whether or not it is appropriate to
commence system-commissioning tests. It shall be the Engineer’s decision as to
whether the system commissioning tests can proceed as proposed by the IBMS
Specialist or whether deficiencies have to be remedied and additional testing
undertaken before the system commissioning tests can proceed.
3.System test sheets shall be prepared for the testing of, at minimum,
each of the systems detailed in the point definition sheets. The test sheets shall be
based on the sub-contract requirements and not on the system as installed.
4.All test documentation shall be maintained in electronic format and in hard
copy.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE AND TURNOVER DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system

acceptance, the following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with
requirements of Division 1:
1.System user manual.
2.Systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of
equipment, trouble-shooting charts.

REV 00
3.Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system
supplied. This to include:
a. System block diagram (hardware).
b.Memory map of all units.
c. Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a
distributed processing architecture is provided. These are to be clearly
indicated in functional form.
d.Source and object lists of software program.
e. Tests data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
f. Password at all levels.
g.Interoperability documentation.
h.Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
B. The IBMS sub-contractor shall handover all programs, database,

configuration and network data to the Employer.
C. All other documentation as detailed in these specifications.
D. The IBMS sub-contractor shall provide documentation detailing the methods

and techniques required to connect additional workstations, NACs, gateways, routers and
any other IBMS hardware and to add BACnet objects to the software as well as to extract
the data in any of the previously mentioned standards from another system. The system
documentation shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the IBMS’s incorporation into
another BACnet system in the future.
E. The IBMS sub-contractor shall provide interoperability documentation for

the BACnet components. All the data related to the components shall be presented along
with their respective BACnet object ID created in the system, along with their PICS,
BIBBS, addresses and method statements to read and write data via integration of the
components with another system in future.

REV 00
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-
water heating, chilled-water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these
systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative equivalent

standards to those specified in this section:
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings.

2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are made
on threads (metric dimensions).
3. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading.
Technical delivery conditions.
4. BS EN 1044 Filler metals for brazing.
5. BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general
use and without specific inspection requirements.
6. BS EN 10253-2 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non-alloy and ferritic alloy steels
with specific inspection requirements.
7. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes,
valves, fittings and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges.
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - Page 1 of 28

REV 00
8. API American Petroleum Institute.
9. Or other equivalent relevant EN standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Welding inspector: Mechanical Engineer, Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or

(CSWIP3.1) and shall have minimum 10 years’ experience.
B. Painting inspector: BSC chemical, certified painting inspector (BGAS CSWIP) or

(NACE) level II and shall have minimum 10 years’ experience.
C. NDT inspector: NDT personal certified as level II minimum in the NDE methods
utilized.
D. Third Party : International inspection company ( GL,LG,BV,TUV,…etc)]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Manual and Quality plan for Contractor and its related Sub
Contractorsincluding:
1. Inspection Test Plan (ITP) for Manufacturing , Fabrication and installation

2. NDT procedures and shall be prepared by certified ASNT NDE Level III and
approved & stamped by 3rd Party Level III.
3. Organization Chart, CV’s and certificates for each personal including NDT
Company and Third Party Company; Third party Engineers shall have minimum 10 years’
experience.
4. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow
and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated
balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of piping Isometric & spools, pipe anchors,
hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their
attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, welding map
and expansion joints and loops.
C. Proposal Welding Procedure Specification (PWPS).
D. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) supported by Procedure Qualification

Record (PQR).
REV 00
E. Welder Qualification Certificates.
F. Original Mill Certificates for piping, fitting, filler metal,…etc.
G. Release for shipment for ERW, Seam weld & spiral weld pipe and Equipment.
H. Calibration Certificate for Equipment and Gauges.
I. Surface preparation, Insulation and protection Coating procedures
J. Handling and storage procedures
K. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include
the following:
1. Test procedures used.( NDT Procedures, Hydrostatic& leak test procedures,

…etc)
2. Test results that comply with standards and specifications requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
L. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to

include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Retain option below if section 1.4 is retained or if required for special projects
Surface preparation for all steel pipes: Shot blasting to SA 2.5 and then immediate application of
150
µm polyamide epoxy paint to be confirmed for proper bonding with pre-insulated pipes manufacturer ,
and the contractor shall employ a certified painting inspector to be responsible.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" and ASME B31.1 or
ASME B31.9 as applicable. Welders shall be certified for the type of pipe material specified,
welding process and position of welds required during fabrication of the piping. Welder’s
Qualification Test to be performed on site and attended by Contractor Welding Inspectors, Third
Party and Engineer prior to commencing piping fabrication.

REV 00
[C.] Nondestructive examination shall be performed to all pipe welds diameter greater than or
equal to DN40 in accordance to ASME B31.1 or ASTM B31.9 as applicable. A Nondestructive
test shall perform the tests and submit the related reports after getting the approval and stamping of
third party inspection company, prior prequalification approval should be obtained from Engineer
on NDT & Third Party Inspection both companies.
C.[D.] All welds shall be identified by the welder’s mark and a sequence number. The
Contractor shall employ a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or CSWIP 3.1, NDT personal
certified as Level 2 minimum in the NDE methods utilized (independent of the contractor
fabricating or installing the piping) to visually examine all welds in accordance with inspection and
examination requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as applicable. Any welds failing the
visual or NDE inspection shall be ground out or cutout, re-welded and radio graphed at the
expense of the Contractor. The CWI shall submit a written report signed and stamped from the
approved third party for each weld to the Engineer.
D.[E.] Additionally, 5% of all fitting, flange and Butt joint welds shop or field or as per
ASME requirements, minimum of 5% of Butt Joints welds, randomly selected by the Engineer,
shall be radio graphed at the expense of the contractor. The certified welding inspector shall
examine the films and provide a written report to the Engineer. All welds not meeting the
requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 latest edition as applicable will be ground out, re-
welded and re-radio graphed at the expense of the Contractor. If any 10% of the randomly selected
radio graphed welds fail, all welds in the piping will be radio graphed and repaired at the expense
of the contractor.
E.[F.] High rejection rate welders (with rejection rate of 25%or more) will be revoked from
the project
F.[G.] 10 % of Fillet Joints shall be tested by Dye Pentrent Test Or Magnetic Test
G.[H.] PED/ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 as applicable
for materials or equivalent European standard, products, and installation. Safety valves and
pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label or equivalent European standard. Fabricate
and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the PED or ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
H.[I.] All pre-insulated piping systems shall be completely sealed and waterproof, and they
shall be capable of allowing sufficient movement for thermal expansion and contraction. Each
assembly shall be factory-designed for the specific service medium, temperature, and pressure.
Expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and guides shall be furnished and installed to provide
a trouble-free system and avoid stress on any equipment.100% Welding joints of Pre-insulated
piping spools shall be tested by RT , RT films shall interpretation by approved 3rd party
I.[J.] The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall comply with the inspection requirements of
BS EN 253 or approved equal.

REV 00
J.[K.] On Site Supervision of Underground Pre-insulated Chilled Water Piping Installation:
1. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall have a determined quality

assurance program to ensure compliance with specifications.
2. All inner insulation to be visually inspected to ensure absence of any void
prior to the application of jacket.
3. The following tests shall be performed on daily basis to ensure quality
ofinstallation:
a. Density (greater or equal to 60 Kg/m3)

b. Thermal conductivity (smaller or equal to 0.023 W/m°C)
c. Compressive strength (greater or equal to 300 KPa)
d. Closed cell content (greater or equal to 88%)
4. Full Time Factory trained field technical assistance & supervision shall be
provided by pre-insulated manufacturer during installation.
5. Representative's daily written reports to the Resident Engineer: Present the
original of each report on the day it is prepared. The report shall be signed by the
manufacturer's representative. The report shall state whether or not the condition and quality
of the materials used and the installation of the system is in accordance with the plans,
specifications, and published standards of the manufacturer, and is satisfactory in all
respects. If anything connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the report shall state
that corrective action has been taken or shall contain the manufacturer's recommendations
for corrective action. The report shall cover any condition that could result in an
unsatisfactory installation. The representative shall take prompt action to return to the
factory all damaged and defective material, and shall order prompt replacement of such
material.
6. On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall deliver to the Resident
Engineer a certificate from the manufacturer that the installation is in compliance with all
installation recommendations and warranty requirements of the manufacturer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system

components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-
system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations.
REV 00
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and
floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Section "Penetration
Firestopping" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles

bearing the name of the manufacture.
B. Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area
that is protected from the elements.
C. End caps weather supplied by the piping manufacturer or fabricated by the contractor
are to be placed at the ends of the piping sections to keep debris and reptiles from entering inside
the pipe while it is placed in storage.
D. Prefabricated sections of the pre-insulated pipe are to be handled per the

manufacturer’s recommendations or instructions.
E. All pre-insulated pipes shall be protected from direct sunlight while transported or
stored.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup
and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly
and severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranteditem.
REV 00
C. Warranty shall include:

2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and
that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their
warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and
fitting materials.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Minimum steel pipe size recommended for hydronic piping is NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
B. Chilled Water (above ground), Heating Water (above ground), Condenser Water
(above ground), and Vent Piping:
1. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade A, ERW, Schedule

40 with threaded ends.
2. Steel pipes DN 50 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade A or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade A, ERW, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding downstream
the heat exchanger and could be accepted as roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
3. Steel pipes DN 300 to DN 600: ASTM A53/A53M Grade A, or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade A, ERW, and beveled ends for butt welding downstream the heat
exchanger and could be accepted as roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
4. Pipes above DN 600: API 5L Grade B, SAW at both sides with helical seam
and beveled ends for butt welding downstream the heat exchanger and could be accepted as
roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
REV 00
5. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the calculation based on
ASME B31.1 to verify that wall thickness is adequate enough as per actual system pressure:
C. Extension of Domestic Water Make-up Piping: as specified for Domestic water

piping. Refer to section 221116 “Domestic Water Piping”.
D. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:
1. Exposed condensate drain pipes shall be galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40.
Otherwise,
2. From air handling units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-welded joints.
3. From fan coil or other terminal units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-
welded joints.
2.3 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION:
A. Insulation for valves, fittings, field casing closures, as required, and other piping
system accessories shall be cellular glass conforming to ASTM C552, calcium silicate conforming
to ASTM C533 or polyurethane matching the pipe insulation. Insulation shall be premolded,
precut or job fabricated to fit and shall be removable and reusable. Thickness shall match adjacent
piping.
B. Metal jackets shall be provided for all pipe insulation in manholes. Insulation bands
shall be 19 mm wide 0.13 mm stainless steel.
C. Buried fittings and accessories shall be factory fabricated and may have field foamed
polyurethane insulation to match adjacent piping and shall be protected with a covering matching
the pipe casing. Shrink sleeves shall be provided over casing connection joints.
2.4 END SEALS:
A. General: Each pre-insulated section of piping shall have a complete sealing of the
insulation to provide permanent water and vapor seal at each end of the pre-insulated section of
piping. Pre-insulated sections of piping modified in the field shall be provided with an end seal
which is equivalent to the end seals furnished with the pre-insulated section of piping. Provide
complete sealing of the insulation at each end of each pre-insulated conduit section by one of the
following methods:
1. Carrying the outer casing over tapered pipe insulation ends and extending it
to the carrier pipe. Provide sufficient surface bonding area between the casing and the
carrier pipe to ensure a permanent water and vapor resistant seal.

REV 00
2. Using specially designed prefabricated caps made of the same material and
not less than the same thickness as the casing. Provide sufficient surface bonding area
between the cap, and both the casing and carrier pipe, to ensure permanent water and vapor
resistant seal.
B. Factory casing and end seal testing and certification:
1. Testing and certification procedures by an independent testing laboratory

shall demonstrate that casings and end seals are capable of resisting penetration of water
into the casing and insulation at 60 kPa of head pressure, measured above the highest point
of the test sample, subjected over the entire surface of an 2.5 m test sample of prefabricated
pipe for not less than 48 hours. Test shall use 24 degrees C water for chilled water service,
while the sample is either buried or encased in dry bedding sand with a minimum of 305
mm of sand all around sample. The carrier pipe size in the test section shall be 75 mm in
diameter and shall be restrained during the test period. The insulation thickness shall not
exceed the maximum thickness provided for the piping in the project.
2.5 JOINTS:
A. Welded joints: Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings
shall be provided where specified or indicated. Branch connections shall be made with either
welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings attached to the main and reinforced against external
strains.
B. Flanged joints: Flanged joints shall be provided with gaskets and made perfectly
square and tight. Full-faced gaskets shall be used with cast-iron flanges and all gaskets shall be as
thin as the finish of the flange face permits. Gaskets shall be 5 mm (3/16-inch) thick for 25 through
300 mm (1 through 12 inch) flanges and 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick for flanges 350 mm (14 inches) and
larger.
C. Threaded joints: Joints shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied
to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys
for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Mechanical joints: Sleeve and grooved pipe couplings shall be installed and protected
against corrosion as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Joints between nonmetallic and
metallic carrier pipe shall be designed and furnished by the piping system manufacturer. The
transition pieces shall be factory fabricated and shall be designed so that no field chemical welding

REV 00
of the carrier pipe will be required. Transitional joint connections to manhole steel piping shall be
made inside the manhole except for prefabricated, pre-piped manholes where joints shall be
outside the manhole wall.
G. Insulating joints and dielectric fittings: Shall be installed where shown.
H. Nonmetallic pipe joints: Nonmetallic pipe joints shall be installed in accordance with
the written instructions of the manufacturer.
2.6 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. General
1. The pipes fittings shall be to ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM

A105/A105M or ASTM A53/A53M Grade A, suitable for butt welding, seamless or ERW
and thickness as per matching pipe.
2. All Butt welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, socket
welded fittings shall be to ASME B16.11.
3. Mechanical coupled joints are allowed as alternative in mechanical rooms
and chiller house but not in pre-insulated pipes running in culverts or tunnels.
4. Manufacture trade name to be marked on pipes and fitting
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed. Mechanical couplings are optional for water piping
only.
1. Fitting shall have same wall thickness as pipes.

2. Pipes 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded ends.
3. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
4. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron,
ASME B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe
size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
5. Unions: ASME B16.39.
6. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm garden hose
thread, with hose cap nut.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and fittings are
optional for water piping only.

REV 00
1. Pipe fitting material shall be to ASTM A 234/A 234M WPB, ASTM
A105/A105M or ASTM A53/A53M Grade A ERW.
2. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting
piping. Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
3. Socket welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11.
4. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch) thick
full face neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220 degrees F).
1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel
flanges, with Teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307,
Grade B.
D. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and
threadolets may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged
steel half-couplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.
E. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: If used and accepted by The Engineer shall
be used with roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F).
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or ductile

iron, ASTM A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more
track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the
intended service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; ductile iron,
ASTM A536; or steel, ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, designed to accept
grooved mechanical couplings. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.
2.7 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING
A. Solder Joint:
1. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the

materials applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.
2. Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form
mechanically extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing
out tube surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of
REV 00
tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete uniformity
of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to provide free flow
where the branch tube penetrates the fitting.
B. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
2.8 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING
A. PVC Plastic Pipe fittings socket-type, schedule 40, ASTM D2466.

1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564-04el.
B. Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F439.
2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME
B16.42.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C.
2.10 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended
service.
C. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile

iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S,
Grade A fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade A steel fittings with grooves or
shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

REV 00
D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and
synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,
locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical
analysis of pipe being welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and
design temperatures and pressures.
2.11 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, butterfly valves and motorized valves are specified in
Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
C. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate
and globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.
D. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline
is located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.
E. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
F. The indicated pressure is the minimum working pressure and shall be verified across
each building operating pressure and to be approved by the engineer.
G. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, used for balancing, shut off and measuring
of pressure drop. Balancing valves shall be provided with two measuring nipples to have the
possibility to measure the differential pressure (water flow indirectly) through the balancing valve
and a tight shut off function with a hidden memory of the setting. Each valve shall be provided
with a label including at least the valve reference number, valve’s diameter, design flow, setting
after balancing and pressure drop in setting and design position. All valves shall be supplied with
Prefab insulation material sourced from the valve manufacturer, made of Polyurethane, volume
weight 50-60 Kg/cubic m.
H. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: bronze body,
fitted with a red nylon hand-wheel and a protection cap, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working pressure,
107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded end connections.

REV 00
I. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Y-pattern
globe valve style, Cast-iron or steel body, fitted with seat seal cone, bonnet bolts chromed steel
and digital hand wheel, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum
operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections.
J. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet

pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve
seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be
factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
K. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber,
wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV: Heating Boilers, Bear ASME stamp
L. Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with
testing lever. Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8; bear ASME stamp.
M. Automatic Dynamic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to maintain

constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with a
readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall
have an identification tag attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification,
valve number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 1206 kPa (175 psig) at 93 deg C (200
deg F) with stainless-steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 2068 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C
(250 deg F) with corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly
easily removable for inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control
valve, with stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves,
and designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250 deg F).
N. Triple Duty Valve: Contractors option for use at pump discharge in lieu of check
valve and balancing/shut-off valve. Triple duty valve is a non-slam check valve with spring-loaded
weighted disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow
and shut-off. Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure. Unit shall be
installed on discharge side of pump in a horizontal or vertical position with the stem up. Unit shall
be cast iron body construction suitable for maximum working pressure of 1205 kPa (175 PSI) and
maximum operating temperature of 149 C (300 F), bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem
and spring.

REV 00
O. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve types which are in accordance with
MSS SP-
80. Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above with a threaded end connection. Valve
shall be provided with a water hose nipple adapter.
P. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa
(400-psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass
ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ANSI/ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread
and cap.
2.12 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Air Vents
1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze or brass body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-
kPa (150-psig) working pressure; 107 deg C (225 deg F) operating temperature; manually
operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with DN 6 (NPS 1/8) discharge connection and
DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle;
bronze or brass body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure;
116 deg C (240 deg F) operating temperature; with DN 8 (NPS 1/4) discharge connection
and DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
3. Air vents on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm threaded end
connections.
4. Air vents on water mains shall have not less than 20 mm threaded end
connections.
5. Air vents on all other applications shall have not less than 15 mm threaded
end connections
B. Closed Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 1206-kPa (175-psig)
working pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F) maximum operating temperature for hot water system
and 70 deg C (158 deg F) maximum operating temperature for chilled water system. Separate air
charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible bladder securely
sealed into tank. Provide sight glass and include drain fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-
charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel
saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to
the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1 or in
accordance to PED European Standard.

REV 00
C. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME or equivalent European
Standard constructed and labeled for 1206-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure and 191 deg
C (375 deg F) maximum operating temperature for hot water system and 100 deg C (212 deg F)
maximum operating temperature for chilled water system; complete with internal stainless steel
strainer; perforated stainless-steel or copper mesh joined in a harmonious structure air collector
tube designed to direct released air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections;
threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller; flanged connections for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2)
and larger; threaded blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity.
Applicable to central plants.
D. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 860-kPa (125-psig) working

pressure; 19-L (5-gal.) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to

prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
E. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; ductile or cast-iron body
(ASTM A126-04, Class B), flanged ends for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, Brass or bronze body
threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection.
F. Basket Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; high-tensile ductile or cast-

iron body (ASTM A126-04, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-
steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-

reinforcing protective jacket; 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure and 121 deg C
(250 deg F) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end
connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch)
misalignment.
H. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel

flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 121
deg C (250 deg F) and pressures up to 1035 kPa (150 psig).
I. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure,

steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit
rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
2.13 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110
percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate.

REV 00
B. Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure
sensing taps upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout
valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be
fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring
process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff
valves and quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing
ports may be pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measurement/Balance Valves: A system comprised of two valves of bronze and

stainless steel metallurgy designed for 1205 kPa pressure at 121 degrees C, with thermal insulation
sleeve.
F. Measurement and shut-off valve: An on/off ball valve with integral high regain
venturi and dual quick connect valves with integral check valves and color coded safety caps for
pressure/temperature readout.
G. A butterfly balancing valve as specified herein, with memory stop and quick connect
valve for pressure/temperature readout.
H. Flow Measuring Device Identification:
1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.

2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow
rate factor and design flow rate in l/m (gpm).
I. Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick
disconnect connections.
J. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity
curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential.
K. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the
installed flow devices.

REV 00
L. Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm diameter, or
450 mm long scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct reading in lps with three valve
manifold and two shut-off valves.
2.14 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical pipe
movement which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This includes factory-built or
field-fabricated guides located along the pipe lines to restrain lateral pipe motion and direct the
axial pipe movement into the expansion joints.
B. Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers

Association Standards.
C. Bellows - Internally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel.

2. Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows.
3. External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig).
4. Welded ends.
5. Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor
failure if one or both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of pipeline.
7. Integral external cover.
D. Bellows - Externally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Internal and external guide integral with joint.
3. Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.
4. Welded ends.
5. Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or drip
point.
7. Integral external cover and internal sleeve.
E. Expansion Compensators:

REV 00
1. Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze.
2. Internal guides and anti-torque devices.
3. Threaded ends.
4. External shroud.
5. Conform to standards of EJMA.
F. Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate on
each expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow direction, design
pressure and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying the expansion joint by the
identification number on the contract drawings.
G. Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement
only and to restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a
minimum of 15 percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and
anchors. Field-built guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.
2.15 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND
A. ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or
water), initial mid-scale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115
mm (4-1/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black
graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board mounting. Provide
red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure.
B. Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for
gages in water service.
C. Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating
range.
1. For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to
plus 700 kPa (100 psig).
2.16 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap,
with retained safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where
shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.
B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Resident Engineer:

REV 00
1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure

gage adapter probe for extra-long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, –—100
kPa (30 inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree
accuracy, 25 mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case.
2.17 THERMOMETERS
A. Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with
150 mm (6 inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading.
B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.
C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree
graduations.
D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.
E. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard.
Required ranges in degrees C (F):
1. Chilled Water 0 to 38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F) PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. External chilled water/ heating water pipes and chilled water/ heating water pipes
inside utility culverts or directly buried: Pre-insulated piping. Chilled water/ heating water pipes
inside building: Black steel pipes.
B. Condensate drain pipes: Galvanized Steel condensate drain piping for Exposed
application (Mechanical rooms and at roof) and uPVC condensate drain piping for concealed
application.
C. Chilled water/ heating water pipes above ground and exposed to outdoors: Black steel
pipes.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

REV 00
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following

valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe and ball valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply
connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the
branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return
connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling
element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to
control flow direction.
E. Install safety valves as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1, for installation requirements.
F. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to

regulate system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN
20 (NPS 3/4) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and risers, and
elsewhere as required for system drainage.
C. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
D. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

REV 00
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in
main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the
takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
F. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve,

solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball
valve in blowdown connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer
blowoff connection for strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
G. Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize expansion or to

prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for
clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed
in the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles where required.
Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the structure or adjacent
construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and
conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be anchored
immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide essentially zero movement within
penetration seal. Detailed drawings of pipe anchors shall be submitted for approval before
installation.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section "Hangers and Supports
for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of
supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m
long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping
6 m or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install rubber pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent
hanger from scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:

REV 00
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 1.5 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

E. PVC Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest
practical rigid anchor points.
F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

REV 00
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise

indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,

and solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and
PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC
pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut
or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for
pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

REV 00
J. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended
tool and procedure, and brazed joints.
K. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave

insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
L. Mechanical and Heat Fusion Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting

manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at top of risers and high points in piping, at heat-transfer
coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of
system piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to
compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with gate
valve; extend to nearest drain.
D. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure
tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel
control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.

REV 00
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination

during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions
due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its
closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure
during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of

damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that
system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5
times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at
bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield
strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening,
repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in hydronic piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and

approval by welding engineer.

REV 00
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be

submitted for review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may
be required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for
welding activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system

balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and
operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers
to design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.10 PAINTING
A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in

equipment rooms and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned, primed and painted.
B. Refer to Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting" for painting requirement.
3.11 CLEANING

REV 00
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace
strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing,
remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
B. Coordinate with HVAC water treatment Sub-Contractor for flushing requirement to

ensure adequacy of flushing prior to Chemical Treatment.
C. Submit cleaning and flushing method statements for Engineer approval.

REV 00
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic
systems:
1. Vertical in-line pumps.
2. End-suction pumps.
3. Split Case pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pumps shall be designed using hydraulic criteria based upon actual model
developmental test data. Manufacturer shall certify that pumps have been hydraulically tested at
the factory.
B. Head-capacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shut-off. Curves shall be

relatively flat for closed systems. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so that the design
capacity falls to the left of the best efficiency point, to allow a cushion for the usual drift to the
right in operation, without approaching the pump curve end point and possible cavitation and
unstable operation. Select pumps for open systems so that required net positive suction head
(NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive head available (NPSHA). Deviations within 3 percent
of maximum efficiency are permissible, provided the lesser efficiency is not less than the
scheduled efficiency.
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - Page 1 of 12
REV 00
C. The head for pumps submitted for pumping through condensers and through chilled
water coils and evaporators shall be increased, if necessary, to match the equipment approved for
the project.
D. Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size to be non-overloading at any point on the
head- capacity curve including one pump operation in a parallel pumping installation.
E. Pumps having impeller diameters larger than 90 percent of the published maximum
diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent than the published minimum diameter of the casing
will be rejected.
F. Acceptable maximum impeller diameter calculations shall not be based on percentage
of impeller diameter range for a given casing. Shop Drawings will be approved only if complete
performance curves for all impeller sizes for a given casing are included in the submittal.
G. Where parallel-pump operation is indicated, pumps selected shall have characteristics

specifically suitable for the service without unstable operation.
H. When net positive suction head (NPSH) calculations are made, inlet-storage head
shall be considered at empty point and the centerline pump location shall include not less than a
150 mm concrete base.
I. Pumps of the same duty condition, classification, and accessories, or with specified
accessory deviation, shall be identical and the product of one manufacturing source.
J. Pumps from more than one manufacturing source shall be provided only when a
single manufacturing source is unable to meet all Specification requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings for pumps shall be submitted in accordance

with Part 3, "Execution," of this Section.
B. Product Data: The following shall be submitted for pumps in accordance with
paragraph entitled "General Requirements," of this Section.
1. Equipment and performance data including certified performance curves and

rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; final
impeller dimensions; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's
operating point on curves.

REV 00
2. Equipment foundation data.
C. Test Reports: The following tests shall be submitted from the manufacturer prior to
shipping the pump from the factory:
1. Hydraulic Tests.
2. Efficiency Tests.
3. Vibration Tests.
4. Output Efficiency.
5. Surface Hardness Tests.
6. Deflection Tests.
D. Certificates: Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing

conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section.
1. Base-mounted centrifugal pumps.

2. Line-mounted pumps.
3. Accessories.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Design analysis and calculations shall show NPSH calculations for centrifugal
pumps.
B. Equipment and performance data consisting of pump curves gallons (liters) per
minute versus total head in feet (meters) per rpm shall be provided for each type of centrifugal
pump.
C. Equipment foundation data shall be submitted for centrifugal pumps.

REV 00
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional
requirements of pumps and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100 or equivalent European standard (IEC), by a testing agency acceptable to
Engineer.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign
matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mechanical Seals: One set of mechanical seals for each pump.

1.11 WARRANTY

REV 00
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing
to repair or replace components of the hydronic pumps that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.


weatheringand use.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may
be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with Employer,
manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty isnot cancelled
due to the repair work.
D. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use
for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a
5 year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service
organization. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS

REV 00
A. Certificates for pumps and accessories shall show conformance with the referenced
standards contained in this section. Pumps provided shall conform to ISO 5199 and ISO 2858
standards or equivalent European standards for centrifugal pumps and to requirements specified
herein.
B. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.

C. Pump shall be bronze-fitted cast iron casings, seasoned cast iron with a design
working pressure of minimum 1.5 times system’s operating pressure, or the minimum specified
rating whichever is greater. Casings shall be single or double volute with flanged piping
connections conforming to ASME B16.1, MSS SP-51, MSS SP-86 and ISO 7005-2 Class 125 psi
or equivalent European standard.
D. Motors: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for
general requirements for factory-installed motors. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B, except Design C where required for high starting torque or equivalent
characteristics in accordance with IEC 60034 parts 1 to 30. Include built-in, thermal-overload
protection, grease-lubricated ball bearings and terminal blocks. Select each motor to be non-
overloading over full range of pump performance curve.
E. Motors Indicated to be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according

to IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard
industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
F. Pump impeller assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-
1.
G. Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling or
closed coupling. Flexible member shall be a tire shape in shear, or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk
shape made of chloroprene materials and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible coupling shall act as a
dielectric connector and shall not transmit sound, vibration, or end thrust.
H. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel bedplate, multiribbed for
maximum rigidity, with adequate number of grout holes and grout air vents, and with drip rim and
drain tapping.
I. Mechanical seals shall be balanced or unbalanced, as necessary to conform to

specified service requirements. Mechanical seals shall be constructed in a manner and of materials
particularly suitable for the temperature service range and chemical analysis of water being
pumped. Materials of construction shall include AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, solid
tungsten-carbide rotating-seal face, and Buna-N vinylidene-fluoride- hexafluoropropylene, EPT, or
tetrafluoroethylene seals. Seal construction shall not require external source cooling for pumped-
fluid service temperatures up to 100 degrees C (212 deg. F). Seal pressure rating shall be suitable
for maximum system hydraulic conditions.

REV 00
J. Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball or roller type with full provisions for the
mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed by any normal service condition.
Bearings shall be manufactured from vacuum-degassed or processed-alloy steel. Thrust bearings
shall be secured to the shaft by threaded collar and locknut. Double-row ball or roller bearings
shall be self-aligning. Bearings shall have an L-10 rated life of not less than 40,000 hours with
additional bearings set for each pump without extra cost. Shop Drawings shall bear manufacturer's
certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be provided with grease
supply and relief fittings located at bottom of bearings.
K. Factory finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint shall be applied to factory-assembled

and tested units before shipping. Special coating shall be applied for pumps exposed to outdoor
and other corrosive environment.
2.3 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Description: Vertical, in-line, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, single-stage, radially split

case design. Include vertical-mounting, bronze-fitted design and mechanical seals rated for 860-
kPa (125-psig) minimum working pressure subject to suit system operating pressure, and a
continuous water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F).
1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections
smaller than DN80 (NPS 3), drain plug at low point of volute, and threaded gage tappings at
inlet and outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced,
closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Ground and polished stainless-steel shaft with bronze
sleeve; for close-coupled pumps.
5. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with lifting and supporting lugs
in top of motor enclosure.
2.4 CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Centrifugal, close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted,

back-pull- out, radially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working
pressure subject to suit system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg
C (225 deg F).

REV 00
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of
volute, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
closed, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft extension with bronze sleeve and neoprene
slinger; for flanged connection pumps.
5. Shaft: Stainless-steel shaft close coupled to motor shaft; for threaded
connection pumps.
7. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with supporting legs as integral
part of motor enclosure.
2.5 FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, SPLIT CASE PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, single-stage, bronze-fitted,

axially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure subject to suit
system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F),
with mechanical seals and impeller mounted between bearings and the following:
1. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B16.1, Class 250 or equivalent European
standard flanged pipe connections. Include threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet
connections, vent valve at high point of volute, and threaded drain plug at low point of
volute.
a. Casing shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without
disconnecting piping.

closed, double suction, and keyed to shaft.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron
housing.
7. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and
shaft misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
8. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.

REV 00
9. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated
from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing,
coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-installed motors.
10. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations

for compliance with requirements for installation.
1. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps
are to be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation

hangers. Install seismic bracing as required. Refer to Section 230548 for vibration and seismic
control.
E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete

foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting.
Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.

REV 00
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal
wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 19 to 38 mm
between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level.
Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level
and plumb.
F. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and pipe
discharge to nearest open drain.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on
foundations, after grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping
connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods
specified in HI 1.1-1.2 "Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions", and
HI 1.3 "Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Design and Application".
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly.
Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or
wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to
pumps.
D. Install non-slam check valve and throttling or globe valve on discharge side of
pumps, or install triple-duty valves, contractor’s option, on discharge side of pumps.

REV 00
E. Install shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line and end-suction pumps.
F. Install suction diffuser on suction side of vertical in-line and end-suction pumps
wherever available space doesn’t allow installation of strainers as per manufacturer
recommendations.
G. Install basket type strainer and shut off valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
H. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of pumps between pump
casing and valves.
I. Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping
around each pump.
J. Install check valve and ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
K. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
L. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26
Sections.
M. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written

instructions and the Contract Documents.
C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
1. Lubricate bearings.

REV 00
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and
clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches
direction marked on pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot
liquids are free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound
or drag, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into
pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is
as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare
pumps for operation.
2. Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where
applicable.
3. Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not
normally kept at operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead
shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
10. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to
prevent overheating.
E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff
valves open, steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors.
F. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed
requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 1.

REV 00

REV 00
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications,

including pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including
pipe and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial
relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and
installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube
sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected equipment.
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - Page 1 of 13

REV 00
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and any other
information required by Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according
to ASME Section IX AMENDED by ASME Section IX Addenda A, ASME Section IX Addenda
B, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
ANSI/ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and
labeled.
Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
to Employer.
Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.

REV 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B, drawn temper.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B, annealed temper.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type A, annealed temper.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
Copper Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
Brazing Filler Metals: ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Classification BAg-1 (Silver) or BCup-5.
2.4 VALVES
Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 121 deg C (250
deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or bronze body and
bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel
spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 121 deg C (250
deg F) working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper
gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating
pressure, 121 deg C (250 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston,
PTFE seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe design. Valve shall be straight-
through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating
pressure, 121 deg C (250 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or
forged- brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve
shall be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with copper
stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder-end connections.
REV 00
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature
rating, 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way straight-
through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1 solenoid
enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770; pilot operated, forged

brass or cast bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-
V dc standard coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770; direct acting, brass with

pilot operator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory
sealed and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 750; thermostatic-adjustable,

modulating type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end
connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and
external equalizer line.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of
compressor unloading; solder-end connections.
2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure; forged-

brass or steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen, and screwed
cleanout plug, with solder-end connections.
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure; steel

shell with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C (200
deg F) operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing
window with color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel shell,

flange ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought-copper fittings
for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

REV 00
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel
support, ANSI/AHRI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated
alumina, ANSI/AHRI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and
desiccant with integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107 deg

C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-
end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F)
maximum operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper
tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-inch) nominal copper-tube size and
ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch) nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel bolts,
with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on flanges and
bolts.
G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or

stainless-steel core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end connections, and synthetic
covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.
H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction with

fusible plug, sized for refrigeration capacity.
2.6 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: AHRI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-
kPa (400-psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: AHRI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII; 2760 kPa (400 psig) with
tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.7 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.

REV 00
C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-

Tetrafluoroethane.
D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-copper
tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-copper
tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
B. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints,
elbows, and fittings.
C. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and
inspection.

REV 00
D. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers,
or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to
permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
E. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
F. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks
have been eliminated.
G. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will
be exposed to mechanical injury.
I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4

percent downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward
to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain
oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
J. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
not permitted, unless expressly indicated.
L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
M. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-inch
NPS).

REV 00
N. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves,
expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
O. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to
axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
P. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
Q. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
R. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems,
seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near bulb of expansion valve.
S. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
T. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve

outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.
U. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE,

“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.
V. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following
ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” procedures.
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Provide according to ANSI/ASME B31.5 and
ANSI/MSS SP-69.

REV 00
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length.
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.
E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B88M.
1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

8. 79 mm: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
9. 105 mm: Maximum span, 3.6 m; minimum rod size, 12 mm.
G. Support vertical runs at each floor.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter

"Pipe and Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings
with copper pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or
steel.

REV 00
D. Fill pipe and fittings with nitrogen during brazing to prevent formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor
inlet and outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of
strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on

multiple condenser systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver

shutoff valve and expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections.

Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve

outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will
reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.

REV 00
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE,
“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems”.
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving
receiver, and on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion

valves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.
C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral
strainers are used.
D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and

before each solenoid valve.
G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic

compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or
pump- down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when
system shuts down.
I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long
piping runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for

electrical connections.
REV 00
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at 186-
kPa (27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or electronic leak
detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in refrigerant piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and

approval by welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be

submitted for review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may
be required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for
welding activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
E. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings
with trichloroethylene.
REV 00
3.11 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa).
If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa (2
psig).
5. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line.
Provide full-operating charge.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat

requirements.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the

system design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system,

according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors
and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after
design flow rates and pressures are established.

REV 00

REV 00
SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Heating, hot-water piping (closed-loop system).

2. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system).
3. Steam and condensate piping for humidifiers and cooking appliances (open
systems).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TSS: Total suspended solids are solid materials, including organic and inorganic, that
are suspended in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.
B. TDS: Total dissolved solids are the combined content of all inorganic and organic
substances contained in a liquid in molecular, ionized or micro-granular (colloidal sol) suspended
form.
1.4 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed-Loop System: One manual bypass feeder and one automatic dosing system on
each system with isolating and drain valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment manually through bypass feeder when required

or indicated by test and automatically through electronic solid-state controller and feeding
pumps.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - Page 1 of 12

REV 00
B. Open-Loop Systems for Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers, and

Cooling Towers: PVC tubing with hole to feed chemical.
1. Conductivity controller samples sump water when activated by pump and

operates solenoid bleed-off valve in line to drain.
A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of
scale and biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a
hazardto operating personnel or the environment.
B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at

Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance
characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and specified requirements.
1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and

fouling to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. pH: 8.5 to 10.5.

b. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year
penetration:
a. Ferrous: 0 to 0.5.
b. Copper alloy: 0 to 0.2.
c. Total Iron as Fe++ to be less than 1.0 ppm

d. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk
water temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 degrees F) and 52
deg. C (125 deg. F.).
e. Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed
by fouling factor 0.0005.
f. Microbiological Limits:
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/mL.
b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100
organisms/mL.
REV 00
c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
2. Small, Open Systems for Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers,

and Cooling Towers: Maintain system essentially free of scale, total suspended solids, and
fouling to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Iron: Less than (Feedwater iron x Concentration factor).

b. pH: 7.5 to 8.5.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; and furnished products listed below:
1. Pumps.
2. Chemical solution tanks.
3. Agitators.
4. Control equipment and devices.
5. Test equipment.
6. Chemicals.
7. Filters.
8. Chemical feeders.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and

differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality
available at Project site.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.

REV 00
E. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative

of the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical
treatment equipment required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Chemical: Furnish sufficient quantity for four (4) month continuous

operation.
2. Chemical: Furnish sufficient chemicals based on entire volume of chilled
water system including external chilled water distribution network served by this system.
3. Chemical: For system volume refer to Expansion Tanks Schedule shown on
mechanical drawings.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum
conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the
cooling, chilled-water piping, steam and condensate system for humidifier and cooking appliance
applications and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year
from date of Substantial Completion, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.

REV 00
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance
with government regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel
shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating shutoff
valves on sides.
1. Capacity: 19 L (5 gal.).
2. Working Pressure: 1210 kPa (175 psig).
B. Drip Feeders: Plastic reservoir with capillary tubing probe, weight, charging syringe,
and clip.
C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended

chemical with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate.

2. Thermoplastic construction.
3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 220-V, 50 Hz, single-phase motor.
4. Built-in relief valve.
D. Positive-Displacement Piston Pump: Metal and thermoplastic construction.

2. Built-in relief valve.
E. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density

opaque polyethylene with graduated markings.
1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-
level switch.
2. Capacity: Minimum volume shall cater for 7 to 10 days continuous operation.

REV 00
F. Agitator: Direct drive, 1450 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.

2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and
propeller.
G. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap,

receptacles for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
H. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear

dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light, output
to control circuit, and recorder.
I. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic

drive; impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
1. Rotating-disc or Turbine type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 860 kPa
(125 psig).
2. Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver.
3. At least six-digit totalizers. 4. 220-V ac.
J. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid

enclosure with 220-V, continuous-duty coil.
K. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite

adjustment over full range, and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
L. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene

tubing with heat fusion.
M. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral

union ends, and polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals.
N. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer

element.
O. Condenser Water-Treatment Control Panel: Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits

and digital LED displays, in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door.

REV 00
1. Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following:
a. Digital readout display.

b. Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream
manifold.
c. High, low, and normal conductance indicator lights.
d. High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence
switch.
e. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve.
f. Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation.
g. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
2. Control inhibitor feeding, based on makeup volume, and include the

following:
a. Solid-state reset counter (accumulator), with selections from 1 to 15.

b. Solid-state timer, adjustable from 15 to 300 seconds.
c. Test switch.
d. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump.
e. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated.
f. Solid-state lockout timer, adjustable from 15 to 180 minutes, with indicator
light. Lockout timer to deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
g. Electromechanical-type, panel-mounted makeup totalizer to measure amount
of makeup water.
3. Control biocide with an adjustable time programmer and include the

following:
a. 24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day.
b. Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer (zero to nine hours) and clock-
controlled biocide pump timer (zero to two and one-half hours). Prebleed and bleed
lockout.
c. Solid-state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations.
d. 24-hour digital display of time of day.
e. 14-day LED display of day of week.
f. Fast and slow internal clock set controls.
g. Battery backup so clock is not disturbed by power outages.
h. Quartz timekeeping accuracy.

REV 00
i. Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps.
j. Biocide A and Biocide B illuminated legends to indicate pump is running.
2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case,

for testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity and
for calcium hardness field tests.
B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with

piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild
steel coupon in the test coupon assembly.
1. Two- station rack for closed-loop systems.

2. Four4-station rack for open condenser water systems.
2.3 CHEMICALS
A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.
B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.
C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and

adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
E. Open-Loop Piping Chemicals Serving Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative

Condensers, Small Cooling Towers, and Liquid Coolers: Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling,
corrosion inhibitor, and biocide nonoxidizing.
2.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS
A. The water treatment system shall be capable of automatically feeding chemicals and
bleeding the system to prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations. Automatic chemical
feed systems shall automatically feed chemicals into the chilled water based on varying system

REV 00
conditions. Chilled water quality at selected locations as directed by The Engineer shall be
automatically monitored by the system.
B. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled materials of construction including

ferrous, and red and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and
fouling. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year penetration;
ferrous, 0 to 2; copper and brass, 0 to 1. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface
temperatures and bulk water temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 deg. F)
and 52 deg. C (126 deg. F). Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that
allowed by fouling factor 0.0005.
C. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved

proprietary compound suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which will cause or
enhance bacteria/corrosion problems or mechanical seal failure due to excessive total dissolved
solids. Shot feed manually. Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water treatment
laboratory, taking into consideration residual and temperature effect on pump mechanical seals.
D. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH range

of 8.0 to 10.0.
E. Pot Feeder: Bypass type for chemical treatment schedule 3.5 mm (10 gauge) heads,
20 mm system connections and large neck opening for chemical addition. Feeders shall be 7.6 L (2
gallon) minimum size for hot water heating systems and 18.9 L (5 gallon) for chilled water
systems.
1. The pot feeder shall be designed & implemented according to ASME code
for pressure vessels with necessary verification certificates & name plates.
F. Contractor to provide selection & sizing criteria of the chemical equipment (e.g.
chemical dosing pumps & tanks) for the corrosion and biocide inhibitor systems.
G. Contractor to submit warrantee certificate that guarantee, for three years from the
date of testing & commissioning, the following:
1. The performance and operation of the chemical treatment system.
2. The components of the chemical treatment system against any manufacturing
or work ship defects.
H. Contractor is requested to submit a method statement of how to bring the quantity of

water into the system during flushing process and where it will be disposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

REV 00
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical
treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
B. The chilled and condenser water shall be analyzed a minimum of once a month from
the date of substantial completion until the final handover by the installer water treatment
company.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all chemicals in manufacturer's sealed shipping

containers. Store in designated space and protect from deleterious exposure and hazardous spills.
D. Install equipment furnished by the chemical treatment supplier and charge systems
according to the manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the Engineer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting

electrical equipment.
D. Ground equipment.

those specified in UL 486A - 486B.

REV 00
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have
been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls
during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
B. Test chemical feed piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and
satisfactory test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate
test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five
weeks, and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where
applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.
3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.

REV 00
4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two

separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are maintaining water
quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analyses at least 60
days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer
to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least eight hours of training.

2. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts
inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

REV 00
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa
(minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C

168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or
W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.
Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and - distribution
equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct
system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer. Accompany requests for layout
modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design
results without increasing system total pressure.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements
and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects
of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7
and ECP201. SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - Page 1 of 17

REV 00
1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.

2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.
3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and adhesives, sealants and gaskets and seismic-restraint
devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating configuration, liner material, pressure classifications
and sizes on plans.
4. Fittings.
5. Reinforcement and spacing.
6. Seam and joint construction.
7. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
8. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access
doors and panels.
9. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
10. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration
isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide
access to dampers and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

REV 00
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and
personnel comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this
Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement,

support, and installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform

welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--
Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code-- Aluminum," for
aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct
joint and seam welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure
classifications higher than 500 Pa (2-inch wg). Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:
1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
a. Five transverse joints.

b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.

REV 00
3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup

construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum
acceptable results.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or

bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration
period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's

written recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90)
coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality,

galvanized, sheet steel with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating designation; factory-
applied, 0.10-mm (4-mil) PVC coating on exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts
and fittings for underground applications and interior of ducts and fittings for fume-handling
applications) and with factory-applied, 0.05-mm (2-mil) PVC coating on reverse side of ducts and
fittings.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial

quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish.

REV 00
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for
surfaces of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
E. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet
form with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for
concealed ducts.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-
mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
B. Flexible Elastomeric-Closed Cell type Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed –

cell,sheet materials complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type TT, Grade 1; with NFPA 255; and
with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Thickness: 25 mm.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 °C – 0.25 (BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F) at
75 deg
°F mean temperature.
3. Density: 3-6 lb/ft3- 48-96 kg/m3
4. Water vapor permeability: 0.06 perm – in
5. Noise Reduction (NRC) : 0.5 at 1”
6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and
maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723;
7. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer or self-
adhesive type and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.
8. Duct Liner Installation shall be factory applied in controlled environment and
comply with
a. SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
b. ASTM C1710 Standard Guide for Installation of Flexible Closed Cell
Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form,
c. Manufacturer’s recommendations and guidelines

REV 00
d. Seal longitudinal seams and joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in lining that will allow passage of air to the
duct/plenum surface.
9. Duct Liner shall pass the test for:
a. Mold Growth as per UL181
b. Fungi Resistance as per ASTM G21/C1338
c. Bacterial Resistance as per ASTM G22
10. Liner hot surface performance shall shows no evidence of cracking, flaming,
glowing, smoldering, delamination, melting or insulation collapse when tested according to
ASTM C 411 at 220°F (105°C)
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.
B. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for

sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.

2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to
form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint
sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.

REV 00
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all-threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread

rod.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod
diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials
are electrolytically separated from ductwork.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types
and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement

and rigidity class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with not less than 1.52-mm thick, carbon-steel
sheet for concealed ducts and not less than 1.21-mm thick stainless steel for exposed ducts.
Continuous weld seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick stainless steel.
Continuous weld seams and joints.

REV 00
D. Fabricate locker room shower exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick aluminum.
Continuous weld seams and joints.
E. Indoor swimming pools, Spa, sauna, steam rooms and Acid-Resistant Ducts: PVC-
coated galvanized steel.
F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

following:
1. Supply Ducts, Constant Volume and Upstream of Terminal Units: 1500 Pa

(6-inch wg).
2. Supply Ducts, Downstream of Terminal Units: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).
3. Return Ducts: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative pressure.
4. Exhaust Ducts: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative pressure.
G. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480 mm and
larger and 0.9 mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are
lined.
H. Smoke Extract Ducts: shall be constructed of galvanized steel or black steel sheet
with 1.6 mm thickness, welded longitudinal joints, flanged sectional joints, reinforced with
girders, and sealed with fire rated sealants.
I. Smoke Extract Ducts and other ducts crossing fire rated walls without fire dampers
shall be fire proofed ducts. Contractor shall submit clear method statement for the constructing of
fire/ smoke rated ducts for approval, such as applying fire resistant coating, which reacts in contact
with fire by forming an insulating barrier to separates two contiguous areas, or by other proven
and approved methods. Smoke extract ducts should be two hours fire rated at 400 deg. C.
2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness
are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

REV 00
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of
ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7 m/s
(2500 fpm).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints and at intervals
not exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that
have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings
at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as
specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance
from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 2.4-mm diameter, with an overall open area
of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
2.7 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the
size of round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

REV 00
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of spiral seam, galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-- Metal
and Flexible."
D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with spiral

seam outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside
dimensions.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell
dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation, and
in metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.

Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or
uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to inner liner
diameter.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet
metal of thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet
metal having 2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:
a. Ducts 75 to 200 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm

with standard spiral seam construction.
b. Ducts 225 to 1070 mm in Diameter: 0.5
mm with single-rib spiral seam construction.
c. Ducts 1120 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 0.55 mm with single-rib spiral seam
construction.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm with standard spiral seam
construction.
6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain

insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION

REV 00
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no

excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate

bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction

complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible,"
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal
thickness for pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500 Pa (minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg):
a. Ducts 75 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 685 to 915 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 940 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal

thickness for pressure classes from 500 to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg):

d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness

as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or
exhaust systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do
not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

REV 00
6. Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45-
and 90- degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows, 225 through 355 mm: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 355 mm, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm
thick with two-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified
above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct
specified above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355 mm and Pressures through 2490 Pa
(10-Inch wg): 0.55 mm.
D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an

outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside
dimensions.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell
dimensions. Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation. Use
the same metal thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or
uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to nominal
single-wall size.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet
metal of thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet
metal having 2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses:


REV 00
6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain
insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
E. PVC-Coated Elbows and Fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows:
1. Round Elbows 100 to 200 mm in Diameter:

Two piece, die stamped, with longitudinal seams
spot welded, bonded, and painted with a PVC aerosol spray.
2. Round Elbows 230 to 660 mm in Diameter: Standing seam construction.
3. Round Elbows 710 to 1525 mm in Diameter: Standard gore construction,
riveted and bonded.
4. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints.
5. Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum 50-mm insertion length.
2.9 FIRE STOPPING
A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a
through penetration fire stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls
and floors, having fire resistance ratings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification
indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless interrupted by
fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.

REV 00
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces.

Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer

vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Where ducts are exposed to view in machine rooms and in spaces without suspended
ceiling, cover with aluminum jacketing to protect against accidental damage.
N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions

and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on
four sides by at least 38 mm.
O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant, unless these
are fire rated ducts such as for smoke exhaust application. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in
Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in
Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 PVC-COATED DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Install PVC-coated duct and fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

REV 00
B. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealer to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
C. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at an interval of 300 mm,
with a minimum of three screws in each coupling.
D. Repair damage to PVC coating with manufacturer's recommended materials.
3.3 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Verify undamaged conditions of duct before enclosure with fill or encasement.
B. Install underslab ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards-- Metal and Flexible" and as indicated.
C. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing concrete on or around ducts.
D. Protect duct openings.
3.4 GREASE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 1100 deg C (2000
deg F) temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have
continuous or automatic residue removal.
C. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from grease hood.
D. Install access openings at each change in direction and at 15-m intervals; locate on
sides of duct a minimum of 38 mm from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same material
as duct.
E. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.
F. In accessible shafts and in vertical direction, install access panels at every other floor
and at top of riser.

REV 00
3.5 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
Install dishwasher exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."
Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from dishwasher.
3.6 LOCKER ROOM SHOWER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
Install locker room shower exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from shower.
3.7 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Pressure Classification Less Than 500 Pa (2-Inch wg): Transverse joints.
Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of each branch
intersection.
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof-test) load.
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Do not
use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less
than 100 mm thick.
3. CONNECTIONS
Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section "Air Duct Accessories."

REV 00
For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate

leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire
system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design
operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification

3 for round and flat-oval ducts, and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 500
to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg).
D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
F. Perform leakage test on supply ducts constructed to pressure higher than 500 Pa (2-
inch wg).
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed
procedures.
3.12 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

REV 00

REV 00
SECTION 233130 - AIR DUCT CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.2 SUMMARY
Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system
components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
ASCS: Air system cleaning specialist.
NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.
SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Qualification Data: For ASCS.
Strategies and procedures plan.
Field quality-control test reports.
ASCS Qualifications: A member of a nationally recognized nonprofit industry organization

dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.
Certification: Employ a staff of ASCSs certified by a nationally recognized

certification program.
2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by a nationally
recognized program and organization.
3. Experience: Submit records of experience in the field of HVAC systems
cleaning.
AIR DUCT CLEANING 233130 - Page 1 of 6

REV 00
4. Equipment, Materials, and Labor: Have equipment, materials, and labor
required to perform specified services.
B. Comply with current publisshed standards of NADCA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine systems to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required

for performance of work.
B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to NADCA ACR.
C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.
D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. At a

minimum, include the following:
1. Supervisor contact information.

2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on occupied areas.
3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component type.
4. Required support from other trades.
5. Equipment and material storage requirements.
6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.
B. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of
the HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
C. Comply with NADCA ACR, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in

HVAC Systems" Section.

REV 00
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.
B. Engage a qualified ASCS to clean the following systems:
1. Air devices for supply and return air.

2. Air-terminal units.
3. Ductwork:
a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes and reheat coils, to the air-handling
unit.
b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.
c. Exhaust-air ducts.
4. Air-Handling Units:
a. Interior surfaces of the unit casing.

b. Coil surfaces compartment.
c. Condensate drain pans.

d. Fans, fan blades, and fan housings.
5. Filters and filter housings.
C. Perform cleaning before air balancing or mark position of dampers and air-directional
mechanical devices before cleaning.
D. Use duct-mounted access doors, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and
for inspection.
1. Install additional duct-mounting access doors to comply with duct cleaning

standards. Comply with requirements in Section "Air Duct Accessories" for additional
duct-mounting access doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and
inspection. Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible ducts. Comply with requirements in
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible ducts.

REV 00
3. Disconnect and reconnect flexible connectors as needed for cleaning and
inspection. Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors. Comply with
requirements in Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.
4. Reseal rigid-fiberglass-duct systems according to NAIMA recommended
practices.
5. Replace damaged fusible links on fire and smoke dampers. Replacement
fusible links shall be same rating as those being replaced. Comply with requirements in
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fusible links.
6. Remove and reinstall ceiling components to gain access for duct cleaning.
Clean ceiling components after they have been removed and replaced.
E. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and
restore to their marked position on completion.
F. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside
the HVAC system during the cleaning process.
G. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. Where venting vacuuming system inside building, use HEPA filtration with
99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron (0.0076-mm) size (or greater) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system outside building, use filtration to contain
debris removed from the HVAC system and locate exhaust down wind and away from air
intakes and other points of entry into building.
H. Clean the following metal-duct system components by removing visible surface

contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except
ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling-unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box,
coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators, except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical room.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

REV 00
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components.
I. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal-duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract

contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during
cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of ducts so areas being cleaned are
under negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces
without damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct liner.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment, and do not
permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated,
or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials;
comb and straighten fins.
6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures.
7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present; use
according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and
debris.
J. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of

treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings.
2. Visually inspect metal-duct systems for contaminants.
3. Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect duct systems.
3.4 RESTORATION
A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and

components according to NADCA ACR, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems"
Section.
B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply with requirements in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Include location of service openings in Project closeout report.

REV 00
C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing.
Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116 "Nonmetal
Ducts."
D. Replace damaged insulation according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.
F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall
have removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.
G. Reseal fibrous-glass ducts. Comply with requirements in Section 233116 "Nonmetal

Ducts."
A. Gravimetric Analysis: Sections of metal-duct system, chosen randomly by Engineer,

may be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA ACR vacuum test gravimetric analysis.
1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable
levels, system shall have passed cleanliness verification.
2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system
cleanliness verification will have failed and metal-duct system shall be recleaned and
reverified.
B. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning shall restore coil pressure drop to within 10
percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not
known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based
on thorough visual inspection.
C. Report results of tests in writing.

REV 00
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual-volume dampers.
4. Motorized volume dampers.
5. High temperature volume dampers
6. Fire dampers.
7. Ceiling radiation dampers.
8. Smoke dampers.
9. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
10. Duct silencers.
11. Turning vanes.
12. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
13. Flexible ducts.
14. Flexible connectors.
15. Duct accessory hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Product Data For each type of product.
For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,

loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each
field connection. Detail the following:
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - Page 1 of 19

REV 00
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted
access doors and panels.
3. Duct security bars.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise
power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
C. Comply with AMCA 500-D "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating"
for dampers rating.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

REV 00
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90)
coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial

quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet
form; with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed
ducts.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-
mm minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Description: Gravity balanced, suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.

Dampers shall not produce noise while in operation.
B. Frame: 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting
flange.
C. Frame: 1.6-mm thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.
D. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, 1.2-mm thick aluminum sheet, maximum 150-
mm width, with sealed edges.
E. Blade Action: Parallel.

REV 00
F. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
G. Blade Axles: Nonferrous for aluminum types.
H. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel for galvanized types.
I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Bearings: Galvanized steel ball.
L. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum to suite duct material as per
section 3.1.
7. Screen Type: Bird.
8. 90-degree stops.
2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
B. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.063-inch-

(1.6- mm-) thick extruded aluminum to suite duct material as per section 3.1, with welded corners
or mechanically attached and mounting flange.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple, 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.

REV 00
2. Maximum Width: 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Off-center pivoted.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Nonferrous metal to suite duct material as per
section 3.1.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets:
1. Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum to suite duct material as per section

3.1.
2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
H. Bearings: Bronze.
I. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
2.4 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper
blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with
pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa (2-Inch wg) or Higher: End bearings or

other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.

REV 00
B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade
design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal
or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 1.6

mm thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for
attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 1.6-mm thick, extruded-aluminum channels;
frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
3. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized,
sheet steel to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 2.5-mm thick aluminum sheet to suite duct
material as per section 3.1.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 1.2-mm thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
7. Blade Axles: Nonferrous to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel to suite duct material as per section
3.1.
9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
C. Jackshaft: 25-mm diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing

assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each

damper of a multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4-mm
thick zinc-plated steel, and a 19-mm hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.5 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; gauge 16 (1.6 mm),

galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 1.6 -
mm galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge seals.
1. Dampers to be dynamic type upstream of VAV boxes and medium pressure

ductworks, and static type downstream of VAV boxes and low pressure ductwork.

REV 00
2. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-
plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each
end of every blade.
3. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 93 deg. C (minus 40 to
plus 200 deg F).
4. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
5. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with
inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 51 L/s
per sq. m (10 cfm per sq. ft.) of damper area, at differential pressure of 995 Pa (4 inches wg)
when damper is being held by torque of 5.6 N x m; when tested according to AMCA 500D
6. Frame: Curtain type with blades in air stream only for non-ducted fire
dampers.
7. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside air stream for all ducted fire
dampers.
8. Mounting Sleeves: Factory installed sleeves shall only be allowed. Field
installed sleeves shall not be permitted.
2.6 HIGH TEMPERATURE VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: high temperature low-leakage volume control damper used for balancing in
smoke management systems. Opposed blade design with blades’ drive positioned out of the
airstream. Temperature rating shall not be less than 400 ⁰C continuous operation.
B. Material: frame & blade from 1.2mm thick galvanized steel, 40mm flanged
rectangular casing.
C. 75mm interlocking 430 grade stainless steel aerodynamic blades, steel blade end
bearings and 300 grade stainless steel peripheral gasketting
D. Corrosion Tested to BS EN 60068-2-52, severity 2 conditions.
E. Vibration Tested to BS EN 60068- 2-6 (5Hz to 350Hz @ 2g).
F. Damper shall be rated for a pressure of 1500 Pa and duct velocities of 15m/s.
2.7 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555.

REV 00
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,

galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners; gauge in accordance with UL listing.
D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.85- mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 3.5 mm thick as indicated, and length to suit

application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct
attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of
damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-
formed, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.
H. Vertical and Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator
closure spring.
I. Closure springs: 301 stainless steel constant force or spring clip type
J. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 or 100 deg C (165 or 212 deg F) rated.
2.8 Fire Rating: 1 or 2 or 3 as per NFPA – 90A.CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and
roof- ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
B. Frame: 1.0-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit
ceiling construction.

REV 00
C. Blades: 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel with nonasbestos refractory insulation.
D. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 deg C (165 deg F) rated.
E. Fire Rating: 2 hours.
2.9 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Smoke dampers shall be labeled for one-and-one-half-

hour or three hours rating to UL 555 as per design requirements.
B. Frame: galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange; gauge in
accordance with UL listing.
C. Blades: Roll formed, horizontal, galvanized sheet steel, maximum width and gauge in
accordance with UL listing.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to

suit wall or floor application.
E. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
F. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in
service factor range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and

sealed gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 17
N x m.
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in
Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. .
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for
running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.

REV 00
6. Two-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
7. Two-Position Motor: 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
8. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
9. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
G. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practical.
2.10 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
C. Frame: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange;
gauge in accordance with UL listing.
D. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.
E. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking 1.6-mm-thick, galvanized sheet steel.
F. Leakage: Class I.
G. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to

I. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
J. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.

REV 00
K. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
sealed gear trains.
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring
gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size
motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of
300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
L. Accessories:

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practicle.
M. Front access combination fire smoke dampers with integral accessories cabinet shall
be used for supply or return ducts with grille outlet and providing through-the-grille access to the
damper and heat-actuated components.
2.11 MOTORIZED FIRE DAMPERS
A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
C. Frame: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange;
gauge in accordance with UL listing.

REV 00
D. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.
E. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking 1.6-mm-thick, galvanized sheet steel.
F. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
G. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to

H. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
I. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.
J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
sealed gear trains.
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring
gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size
motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of
300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
K. Accessories:

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practicle.

REV 00
L. Front access motorized fire dampers with integral accessories cabinet shall be used
for supply or return ducts with grille outlet and providing through-the-grille access to the damper
and heat-actuated components.
2.12 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with

performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials

shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested
according to ASTM E 84. For silencers used in Smoke extract ductwork systems carrying smoke
& hot gases should be up to 400C for durations up to 2h.
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1
D. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85-mm thick, solid

galvanized sheet steel for outer casing and 0.55-mm thick, perforated galvanized sheet steel for
inner casing.
E. Round Units: Casings with galvanized sheet steel thicknesses for diameters listed
below: 1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.

2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that
indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm
and designed for minimum aerodynamic losses.
F. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.
G. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under
not less than 5 percent compression.
H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or
otherwise react to system pressure variations.

REV 00
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to
frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both

directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise
power levels, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air
and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face
velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static
pressure or 1500-Pa (6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.13 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal

and Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38-mm wide, curved blades set 19 mm

o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with

perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.14 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome-plated
enamel painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices. Provide doors as large as
practical. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25-by-25 mm butt or piano hinge and cam
latches. Access doors up to 300 X 300 mm shall have two cam locks, larger sizes shall have four
cam locks.

REV 00
B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an alternative,
removable access doors may be used.
C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an inner
and outer door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door shall consist of two panels
spot-welded together which totally encapsulate insulation identical to corresponded ductwork
insulation. The inner and outer doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded handles in such a
configuration that the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to the duct in a sandwich
fashion.
D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical springs
shall be used between the door panels to facilitate installation and removal of the door. Fireproof
neoprene gasket shall be used around the outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not both, to
seal the door.
E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval ductwork.
F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.15 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm

wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 146

mm wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm

wide attached to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated
with polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

REV 00
2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.
F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated
with a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.
1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 93 N/mm in the warp, and 77 N/mm in the filling.
G. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone

rubber and having a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50 N/mm in the warp,
and 32 N/mm in the filling.
2.16 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl

sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.
D. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer

jacket enclosing 38-mm thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab,
integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
E. Pressure Rating: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg) positive, 125 Pa (1/2-inch wg) negative.
F. Maximum Air Velocity: 20 m/s (4000 fpm).
2.17 ACCESSORY HARDWARE

REV 00
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including
screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 6-mm, zinc-plated

operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square- head set
screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten
band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel
ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
E. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written

instructions.
REV 00
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.
I. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access
panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning,
inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3. Install access panels adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers,
to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having
fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access
doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed
downstream from dampers.
J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
K. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with
maximum 1500-mm (60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
O. Label access doors according to Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
REV 00
P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can
be performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full
range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of
operator and damper.

REV 00
SECTION 233413 - AXIAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Tubeaxial fans.
2. Vaneaxial fans.
3. Car park jet fans.
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for
continuous operation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
AXIAL HVAC FANS 233413 - Page 1 of 14

REV 00
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical
accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight
on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.
G. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and
that are listed and labeled by UL where available or equivalent European standard.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
REV 00
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are
licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.
E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Section
"Cast- in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
REV 00
1.10 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the axial HVAC fans that fail in materials or workmanship

weathering and use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBEAXIAL FANS
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt or direct drive,
an inlet cone section, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel with flanged inlet and outlet connections.
C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum, machined and fitted to shaft.

REV 00
D. Belt Drives:
1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.

2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more
than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the

middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
8. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
9. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 50,000 hours

b. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with
greasefittings.
E. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,
of same material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet and
outlet allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material
as housing.
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out
from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same
material as housing.
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material
as housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan
housing, of same material as housing.

REV 00
8. Inlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same
9. Outlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same
10. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or
outlet cone, of same material as housing.
11. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg
F (149 deg C).
12. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material
as housing.
13. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from
outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
14. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material
as housing.
15. Inlet Cone: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
16. Outlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
17. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same
18. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory
wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Extend lubrication lines to
outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
F. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized.
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
2.2 VANEAXIAL FANS
A. Description: Vaneaxial fans consisting of fan wheel and housing, straightening vane
section, factory-mounted motor, an inlet cone section, and accessories. Variable features indicated
in equipment schedule include belt driven or direct drive as indicated, and variable or adjustable
pitch.

REV 00
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic actuator, externally
mounted positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for variable-volume
operation.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel with inlet bell and diffuser sections.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges;
inlet cone shall be welded to the fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from the fan wheel
designed to straighten the airflow.
3. Sound-Trap Housing: Housing incorporating perforated steel inner liner, 2
inch (50 mm) fiberglass duct liner sandwiched between the inner and outer shell, and steel
bands sealing the insulated cavity.
C. Wheels Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded
bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum blades; factory
mounted and balanced.
D. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more
than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
drives.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.

b. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease
fittings.
E. Accessories:

REV 00
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,
of same material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet and
outlet allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material
as housing.
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out

from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material
as housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan
housing, of same material as housing.
8. Inlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same
9. Outlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same
10. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to
the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section, of same material as
housing.
(For parking ventilation axial fans: In case Motorized smoke damper/Motorized damper provided
as per design drawings, Backdraft damper to be cancelled)
11. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall
and signaling control devices.
12. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of
fan to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control devices
and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow Instruments" and
Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."
13. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg
F (148 deg C).
14. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material
as housing.
15. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from
outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation, of same material as housing.
16. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material
as housing.
17. Inlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.

REV 00
18. Outlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
19. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same
20. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory
wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Extend lubrication lines to
outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
F. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized.
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
2.3 CAR PARK JET FANS
A. Description: Fans shall be axial flow, jet impulse type, especially designed for
ventilation of car parks, unidirectional, two speed, and silent operation.
B. Housing: Consist of inner and outer tube, motor flange and guide blade assembly.
Fan housing is to be manufactured from mild steel to ISO 3574, grade HR 14 or equivalent. The
housing assembly is to be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ISO 1461.
C. Performance – Independently tested and certified in accordance with EN 12101-3,

ISO 13350, ISO 5801, fans and silencers should be rated at 300 degree °C for two hours.
D. Impeller: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced on a balancing machine in

accordance with the requirements of ISO 1940.The entire jet fan assembly, when operating at full
speed shall vibrate at less than 4.5 mm/s. Balance class: G 2.5 measured according to ISO 1940
standard.
E. Blades and Hub: Cast from aluminum.
F. Silencers: Tubular directly mounted on inlet and outlet of fan, of steel inner casing
with galvanized steel outer casing welded to hot dip galvanized ends and bell mouths, fitted with
stainless steel perforated line and galvanized steel aerodynamic pod, and solid and galvanized steel
wire mesh at inlet / deflector vanes at outlet.

REV 00
Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels NC 55 inside parking measured on the A- scale of a
standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet. The unit shall be designed inlet and
outlet attenuators which, along with the fan unit, are encased in a Galvanized steel acoustic
enclosure
G. Motor: Squirrel type reversible single speed, 50 Hz rating, pad mounted, with self-
lubricating ball bearings of L10 life, continuously air stream rated and complying fully with IEC
60034-1, Class F insulation. The motor shall be suitable for handling smoke laden air at 300 deg.
C for 2 hours.
H. Suspension: Anti-vibration compression spring type fixed to tunnel roof by means of

stainless steel studding/nut system. Studding is to be screwed into stainless steel sockets and
locked by means of heavy duty "LOCTITE" or approved equal. Bolts are to be painted after
installation with two coats epoxy anti-corrosion paint.
I. Finish: The complete fan is to be painted after degreasing, with one coat of mordant
wash followed by one coat of epoxy prime and one coat of epoxy thick layer and finish paint
Polyurethane to give a total mean dry film thickness of 70-180 microns. Color to be agreed by the
Engineer.
J. The contractor shall perform CFD modelling for the design based on the actual
approved equipment, layouts, and installation to confirm that the system performance meet design
intent and authority have jurisdiction.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general
requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located

during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or

building occupants.

REV 00
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA
300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high
temperature application as per design requirements or equivalent European standard.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation.
The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

REV 00
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices
are specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs and
seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections.

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connector.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A - 486B.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and electrical
connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.

REV 00
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean
fan wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before
startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal- overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan
wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for
air- handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix
in final position after balancing is achieved.

REV 00
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan
units. Refer to Division 1.

REV 00
SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.
B. Kitchen ecology units
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM)
and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and
at ll0 percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may
allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - Page 1 of 17

REV 00
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge
exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for all
ceiling mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.
F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.
G. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for
1.4 SUBMITTALS

accessories.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight
on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

REV 00
F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.
E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location
following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

REV 00
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" Section.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1.10 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the centrifugal HVAC fans that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

weathering and use.

REV 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall conform
to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets
and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall
be constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation shall
be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated

with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray;
ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided

for the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity balancing
operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary
for proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed
necessary for proper air balance.

REV 00
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan
speed has been determined.
2.2 FAN UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated
capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.
2.3 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to internal
parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate fans downstream from humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for

mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and
reinforced- steel panels with welded seams and the following:
a. Outlet guide vanes.

b. Spun inlet cone with flange.
c. Outlet flange.
d. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
2.4 WHEELS
A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back
plate, backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
B. Forward Curved: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange,

back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically

REV 00
secured to flange and back plate; cast-steel hub swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft with set
screws.
C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back plate;
hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and back plate; cast-
iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
2.5 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective
coating of lubricating oil.
C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of
the fan's speed range.
2.6 BEARINGS
A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball

bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours with additional
pack.
B. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered roller

bearings with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 50,000 hours.
C. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; ball or roller

bearings with adapter mount and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2.7 BELT DRIVES

REV 00
A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.
B. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch
diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-
sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-
sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced
at factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm

thick, 20- mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include
provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in
place.

REV 00
F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and
gaskets.
B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.
C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2 permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for
double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently lubricated
bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with control
shaft for double-width fans.
1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2 plates

formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of
air stream to single control lever.
1. Configuration: Parallel blade.

2. Configuration: Opposed blade.
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of
fan scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat
from shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.

REV 00
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
2.9 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

during operation.
building occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave
standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted motor bases wherever
equipment configuration permits proper installation.
2.10 SMOKE EXHAUST FAN
A. General Description: Belt-driven mixed flow, dual speed, fully weatherproofed and
constructed of corrosion resistant materials. Structural steel support components to be zinc plated
and suitable for smoke exhaust. Fans to be UL listed for smoke removal with operation
temperature of 260C for a minimum of four hours continuous operation, or shall be classified
F300 (300C for 2 hours) as per EN 12101-3.
B. Fan Housing: Heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication, designed to
provide easy access from roof level to all moving parts including motor, without dismantlingunit.
C. Fan wheels: Heavy gauge steel, multi-blade, mixed flow, non-overloading, non-stall
type, fully balanced at factory.

REV 00
D. Motor: Type Class H insulation, continuously rated, provided with permanently
lubricated sealed ball bearings not requiring lubrication for 25000 hours of operation and in-built
thermal overload protection.
[E.] Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels less than 50 55 db measured on the A-
scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
E.[F.] Accessories: Fan to be complete with the following: fusible link damper lifter to
provide heat and smoke relief in the event of an electrical power fail are factory wired safety
disconnect switch mounted inside housing, flexible conduit to receive field wiring, all around
expanded aluminum bird and protection screen, neoprene foam sealing strip for air seal between
base and curb and fixings to roof curb.
F.[G.] Fusible Link Lifter: Fusible link damper lifter automatically opens the butterfly
dampers when air temperature below the damper blades exceeds 74 deg. C to provide smoke and
heat relief with no electrical power required.
2.11 KITCHEN FUME ROOF EXTRACT FAN
A. Fan: Dual speed belt-driven motor, Upblast discharge, centrifugal, vertical discharge,
fully weatherproofed, all durable rust-free aluminum construction and corrosion-resistant
protection. Fan shall be spark-resistant. Fans shall be spark resistant, UL and cUL listed for grease
removal and high static pressures operation and listed for commercial cocking equipment exhaust
applications.
B. Sound Power Level: Select to give sound levels less than 60 dB measured on the A-
scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
C. Fan Housing: heavy gauge durable rust-free steel with lock formed seams permitting
no air leakage . Fan housing to be designed for easy access from roof level to internal parts
including motor, V-belt drives and magnetic shutter.
D. Fan Impeller: Steel with backward inclined blades with non-overloading

characteristics, spark proof and non corroding, keyed and locked to drive and shaft, with the whole
rotating element precision balanced at the factory.
E. Shaft to be stainless steel mounted on two heavy duty self-aligning, permanently

lubricated and sealed pillow block ball bearing.
F. Motor: Squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated ball bearings and
in-built thermal overload protection. The motor is to be protected and isolated from the air-stream
REV 00
and to be forced cooled by uncontaminated air which is drawn into the motor housing through
breath tubes. Motor is to be mounted on vibration dampeners on a slotted base for belt tension
adjustment. Sheave is to be adjustable to allow field changes in fan speed. Motor is to be class F
insulation.
G. Motor to incorporate an under voltage relay complete with timer.
H. Accessories: Fan is to be complete with magnetic shutters, factory wired safety

disconnect switch mounted inside housing, automatic shutters to prevent air recirculation through
stand-by fan, flexible tubing to receive field wiring, hinged access door, 25 mm drain connection
and weatherhood.
I. Automatic Change Over Panel: sheet steel painted grey, houses two contactors, over
load relay, selector switch, two indicator lights and reset buttons.
2.12 KITCHEN HOODS EXHAUST FANS (ECOLOGY UNIT)
A. Fan Unit: A package consisting of a backward inclined exhaust fan with heavy duty
bearings, fan isolators, sound attenuation, two grease sheaves, filter and odor reducing sections.
B. Ecology unit shall be UL or ETL listed for kitchen grease exhaust and comply with
NFPA – 96.
C. Ecology unit shall conform to ANSI/UL STD867 & UL STD 710 where applicable or
approved equal.
D. Pre-filter Section: The pre filter section shall include 2 inch deep steel washable
permanent filters according to ASHRAE 52-76 filters. Filter frames shall be constructed of steel..
All filters shall be removable without the use of tools through side access doors with lift and turn
latches. Filters are to be cleanable with a water hose and soapy water.
E. Second stage filtration: 525 mm bag filter 90% ASHRAE 52-76 filters arranged in a
v-bank configuration to increase filter area and reduce static pressure.
F. Third stage filtration: Absolute HEPA filter 305 mm DOP filter 99.97% ASHRAE
52-76 filters.
G. Fan: Single width, single inlet, airfoil centrifugal fan statically and dynamically
balanced.

REV 00
H. Fan Shaft: The fan shall be mounted on a heavy duty turned ground and polished
steel shaft internally isolated. Pre-lubricated heavy duty bearings.
I. Motor: Squirrel cage, induction type with in-built thermal overload protection. Motor
is to be class F insulation for motors outside air stream and class H insulation for motors inside
airstream.
J. Odor Control Module: Odor control section shall be one of the following;
1. Pellets: The section consists of metal cells filled with activated alumna
pellets impregnated with potassium permanganate. The odor is controlled through a
combination of sorption and a chemical modification of the gaseous contaminates. The
odour media is non-toxic and non-flammable. The pellets are contained in perforated cells
located in a separate odour reduction section normally located between the filter box and the
tan box. All of the exhaust air is drawn over the pellets whenever the fan is operating. The
cells are removed through a side access door on the odor section.
2. UV module: Self-cleaning inner surface. High output lamps designed to run
for 13,000 hrs at optimum capacity. Ozone regulation technology shall control ozone
production in line with cooking activity. Allows increases in air speed without significant
effect on performance.
3. Rigid, bonded, activated carbon panels shall be furnished to remove both
base and acid odor molecules. Carbon mass shall be applied at a minimum of 100 lbs. per
1,000 cfm (45.2 kg. per 472 l/s) of exhaust air volume. Panels shall be held in place by
gasketed, extruded aluminum tracks arranged in a v-bank configuration.
K. Fan and Filter box Casing: 16 gauge steel, primed and painted suitably reinforced to
ensure rigidity. An access door is provided to the exhaust fan motor and drive section. The casing
is wrapped with 25mm sound attenuation insulation. The exhaust fan section shall be internally
/externally spring isolated.
L. Control panel in stainless steel comprising on-off, PLC control, system status display,
alarm buzzer, silencing button, control relays, and terminal strip for field wiring.
M. The control panel shall be interfaced with the building IBMS through an open
standard communication protocol such as BACnet or Modbus, allowing for full data transfer to the
IBMS.

REV 00
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat
aluminum parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before
assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA
Seal.
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene

pads or housed spring isolators as indicated . Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
concrete housekeeping base.

REV 00
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.

Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the
supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M,
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or
key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal- weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

connections with flexible connectors.


REV 00

connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt adjustments, and
lubrication, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
3.8 COMMISSIONING

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

REV 00
C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" Section for procedures for
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal

fan units. Refer to Division 1.

REV 00
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Utility set fans.

2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Axial roof ventilators.
4. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
6. In-line ventilators.
7. In-line centrifugal fans.
8. Propeller fans.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-
mounted exhaust fans.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in

equipment schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. Performance Criteria:
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - Page 1 of 17
REV 00
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static
pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and
at ll0 percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may
allow use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge
exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
F. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for
1.4 SUBMITTALS

accessories.

C. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling
plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:

REV 00
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
F. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with
applicable NEMA standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705 or equivalent

European standard.

REV 00
F. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Section
"Cast- in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1.9 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the HVAC power ventilators that fail in materials or

REV 00

weathering and use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA
301 and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall conform
to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets
and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall
be constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation shall
be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated

with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system

REV 00
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray;
ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified,

with provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by the
service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys
and shall have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours
or with average life time L50 of 100,000 hours with additional pack. Bearings shall have
dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron
unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type.
Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be provided.
Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite
the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal maintenance locations.
Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel
spiral wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not
acceptable.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified

materials and ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven
by motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch
diameter of sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or variable-
sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-
sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.

REV 00
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts
shall be aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with

cross section to suit sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the
factory. Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each
belt set shall be bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.
2.2 UTILITY SET FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.
C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-
steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.

2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball

bearings with AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.

REV 00
F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple
beltdrives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking

aluminum blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with
adjustable linkage.
4. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
6. Drain Connections: DN20 (3/4-inch) threaded coupling drain connection
installed at lowest point of housing.
7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and
drive compartment.
2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of

housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Housing:Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece,

hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

REV 00
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the
housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-
aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100

percent to less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload
protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in

curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick,
rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

b. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200 mm.
e. Overall Height: 300 mm.
f. Overall Height: 450 mm.
2.4 AXIAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive axial fans, as indicated, consisting of housing,

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle;

square, one- piece, hinged, aluminum base.

REV 00
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and blades.
D. Fan Wheel: Steel hub and blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the

housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning
ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1. Bird Screens: Removable, 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
2. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in
curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
3. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick,
rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

b. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200 mm.
e. Overall Height: 300 mm.
f. Overall Height: 450 mm.
2.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated,

consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and
disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet

and outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

REV 00
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to
disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,

enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to
outside of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume-Control Damper:Manually operated with quadrant

lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for
units not connected to ductwork.
2.6 PROPELLER FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan

blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with
baked- enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to
cast-iron hub.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast or extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-

aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located
on outside of fan housing.
F. Fan Drive:
1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Statically and dynamically balanced.

REV 00
3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4.
6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
7. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning
ball bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours .
8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory.
9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch
for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
drives.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked

blades with nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to
OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100
percent to less than 50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload
protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2.7 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general

REV 00

during operation.
building occupants.
Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA
Seal.
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high smoke
temperature of 260 deg. C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of three hours continuous operation or
equivalent European standard.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation.
The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen
operation. Fans shall be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature

REV 00
exhaust of 190 deg. C (375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant NFPA
standard. Fan coating shall be as directed by the Engineer. Units shall include the following:
1. Bolted access door.

2. Drain connection.
3. Aluminum grease trap.
4. Weatherhood.
5. Upblast discharge.
6. Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
7. Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports

using housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
2. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
3. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
4. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal
straps, and neoprene washers.

REV 00
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.

Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the
supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M,
size and location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or
key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal- weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

connections with flexible connectors.


REV 00
connections, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
3.8 COMMISSIONING

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

REV 00
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power

ventilator units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training part of Closeout
Procedures."

REV 00
SECTION 233433 - AIR CURTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air curtains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each unit.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating

obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting

vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and
control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations of exterior walls.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
AIR CURTAINS 233433 - Page 1 of 8

REV 00
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and any other
information specified or required by Engineer.
G. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this
H. Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals

I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of air curtains that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

air curtains and are based on the specific product selected. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Comply with AMCA 220, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtain Units for
Aerodynamic Performance Rating," for airflow, outlet velocity, and power consumption.
E. Comply with AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils,"

for components, construction, and rating.
1. Certify coils according to AHRI 410.

REV 00
F. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways For Food and Food Service
Establishments."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components
with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and
partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers. These items are specified in
Division 8, Section "Fixed Louvers" and section "Wall Vents."
1.6 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of air curtains that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

weathering and use.

REV 00
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Furnish one set of filters and fan belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel

finish over powdered mirror.
B. Housing Materials: One-piece, molded, high-impact, white polymer material.
C. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, electroplated-zinc steel with welded

construction and polyester coated finish.
D. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, aluminum construction.
1. Anodized Finish: Match finish and color of adjacent architectural metals.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by
the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
a. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish:

nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating:
architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA
611.
b. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish:
nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating:

REV 00
architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating
0.010 mm or thicker).
3. Mounting Brackets: Steel, for [wall] [ceiling] mounting.
E. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and
capable of reducing air-outlet velocity by 60 percent with louver in totally closed position.
F. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, wedge shaped, containing adjustable
air- directional vanes with 40-degree sweep front to back.
2.3 FANS
A. Fans: Aluminum, Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet; statically
and dynamically balanced.
B. Fan Drives: Direct or Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves and
pulleys for adjusting air-outlet velocity.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Motor Type: Two speed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed, air
over] [totally enclosed, fan cooled] [open, dripproof] [explosion proof], with integral thermal-
overload protection.
B. Comply with requirements of specification Section 230513 "Common Motor

C. Motor Sizes: Large enough so driven loads will not require motor to operate in
D. Motor shall be resiliently mounted and of continuous duty, with integral thermal-
E. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life-time, prelubricated, ball bearings.
F. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.

REV 00
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Automatic Door Switch: Remotely installed in door area to activate air curtain when
door opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
B. Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
C. Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to operate
from 1 to 300 seconds after door closes.
D. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 220-V ac transformer with

primary and secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type [1] [12] enclosure.
E. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.
F. Discharge Extension Neck: For ceiling-recessed installation.
A. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig (2070 kPa) and to 200 psig (1380 kPa)
underwater.
B. Testing: Test and inspect steam coils according to ASHRAE 33.
C. Steam coils will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

REV 00
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing, and report results
inwriting:
1. After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check
of individual components.
2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor
rotation and unit operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest units until satisfactory results are
achieved. Operate electric element through each stage and verify proper operation of electrical
connection.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust belt tension.

REV 00
B. Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow.
C. Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.
D. Adjust air-directional vanes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration
and Training part of Closeout Procedures."

REV 00
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Single-duct air terminals.

2. Dual-duct air terminals.
3. Fan-powered air terminals.
4. Mechanical air terminals.
5. System-powered air terminals.
6. Diffuser air terminals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Include a schedule showing
drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories
furnished.

loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control

systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating air
outlets with other items installed in ceilings.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - Page 1 of 10

REV 00
D. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of air terminal and troubleshooting
maintenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate requirements of air terminals and
are based on specific systems selected. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.
C. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminals according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
D. Comply with listed and labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a
testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
E. The maximum noise level for any ceiling mounted item shall not exceed NC 35.
Units shall meet the airborne and radiated sound-power level (PWL) requirements scheduled, to
attain the specified NC levels. An 18-dB space attenuation shall be assumed in all octave bands or
as recommended by the manufacturer with consideration given to downstream duct construction
and configuration in determining airborne NC levels. Sound levels shall be tested in accordance
with ANSI/ASA S12.23
1.5 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the air terminal units that fail in materials or workmanship

REV 00

weathering and use.
D. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINALS
A. Configuration: Factory built and calibrated with controls mounted on unit, pressure
independent, factory set and field adjustable volume-damper assembly, suitable for single duct
applications.
1. Each unit shall have factory set air volumes and numbered corresponding to
contract drawings.
2. Control components shall be factory mounted by air terminal manufacturer

inside a protective metal enclosure. All power control wiring shall be wired to factory
mounted terminal box.
B. Rating and Performance Certification: AHRI Industry Standards 880 I-P or 881 SI.
1. Maximum pressure drop: As shown on the drawings.

2. The inlet pressure should not be less than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage),
unless shown otherwise on drawings. Provide terminal sound attenuators where necessary to
comply with the noise criteria.
C. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.6-mm steel.

REV 00
2. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.45-mm steel.
3. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.8-mm aluminum.
4. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.63-mm aluminum.
D. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass

insulation; 24-kg/cu. m density, complying with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion
requirements. Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling.
1. Coat liner surfaces and edges with erosion-resistant coating or cover with
perforated metal.
E. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive

connections for duct attachment.
F. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
G. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring
service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
H. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-
lubricating bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 500-Pa (2-inch

wg) inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.
3. Damper Position: Normally closed.
I. Single Duct Terminals: Provide manufacturer's standard cataloged.
1. Low Velocity Boxes: Inlet valve shall be self-seating, and leakage in full
closed position shall not exceed 2 percent of unit rated capacity against inlet pressure of 2
inch wg (500 pascal) with all outlets sealed shut and inlets fully open.
2. Variable Air Volume Units (VAV): DDC controlled, variable air volume,
with field adjustable maximum and minimum set points complete with the following:
a. Pressure independent electronic controls, reset to modulate airflow between

zero and maximum cataloged CFM.

REV 00
b. Multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor, with a minimum of four
measuring ports. Minimum differential pressure signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch water
gage) at inlet velocity of 2.6 m/s (500 fpm). Control signal accuracy of
plus or minus 5 percent with the same inlet size at any inlet condition. Velocity controller
shall have a constant 2 degrees temperature reset span regardless of the minimum and
maximum airflow limit.
c. Reversible Actuator, 24-volts, directly connected, shaft mount type without

linkage, and equipped with magnetic clutch.
d. Class II, 24-volt transformer, and disconnect switch.
e. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
3. Constant volume single duct. Units shall contain within the casing a
mechanical constant-air volume control designed to operate by inlet air pressure without
outside power. Regulators shall be constructed of nonferrous parts and shall be guaranteed
to maintain delivered air volume at plus or minus 5 percent of unit specified airflow
subjected to inlet pressure up to 1500 pa (6 inches water gage).
J. Attenuator Section: 1000 mm long, lined with 50 mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-

coated, fibrous-glass insulation.
K. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 150-mm diameter collars; each with locking
butterfly balancing damper.
L. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking
M. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.
N. Electric Heating Coil: Slip-in type, open-coil design with integral control box factory
wired and installed. Include the following features:
1. Primary and secondary over temperature protection.

2. Minimum airflow switch.
3. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
4. Magnetic contactor for each step of control.

REV 00
O. Controls: Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with

temperature controls specified in other Sections.
P. Controls: DDC type, microprocessor-based controls with integral airflow transducer

and room temperature sensor. DDC controller shall be furnished by VAC instrumentation and
controls manufacturer specified under other Sections, mounted and calibrated by the VAV
manufacturer to meet the design parameters and to provide control with the following features:
1. Proportional plus integral control of room temperature.

2. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.
3. Occupied/unoccupied operating mode.
4. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
5. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
6. Communication with temperature-control system specified in other Sections.
2.2 MECHANICAL AIR TERMINALS
A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and control components inside unit casing.
B. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

C. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass

perforated metal.
D. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct
attachment.
E. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.

REV 00
F. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring
service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
G. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 500-Pa (2-inch

wg) inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.
3. Damper Position: Normally closed.
H. Regulator Assembly: Extruded-aluminum or 0.9-mm galvanized-steel components;

key damper blades into shaft with nylon-fitted pivot points located inside unit casing.
1. Automatic Flow-Control Assembly: Combine spring rates matched for each

volume- regulator size with machined dashpot for stable operation.
2. Factory calibrate assembly with shaft extension for connection to externally
mounted control actuator.
I. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 150-mm diameter collars; each with locking
J. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking
K. Electric Heating Coil: Slip-in type, open-coil design with integral control box factory
wired and installed. Include the following features:
1. Primary and secondary overtemperature protection.

2. Minimum airflow switch.
3. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
4. Magnetic contactor for each step of control.
L. Controls: Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with

temperature controls specified in other Sections.
M. Electric Controls: 24-V damper actuator with wall-mounted electric thermostat and
appropriate mounting hardware.
REV 00
2.3 SYSTEM-POWERED AIR TERMINALS
A. Configuration: Volume-damper and automatic flow-control assemblies inside unit

casing.
B. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

C. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass

perforated metal.
D. Plenum Air Inlets: Round or oval stub connections for duct attachment.
E. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
F. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-
G. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating

polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Design bellows to operate
at temperatures of minus 18 to 60 deg C (0 to 140 deg F); to be impervious to moisture and
fungus; and to be suitable for 2500-Pa (10-inch wg) static pressure. Factory test for leaks.
H. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With 150-mm diameter collars; each with locking
I. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking

REV 00
J. Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow
and mounted on side of unit.
1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 60- and 750-Pa (0.25- and
3.0- inch wg) inlet static pressure.
2. Factory-mounted and -piped, 5-micron filter; velocity-resetting, adjustable,
high-limit control; and amplifying relay.
3. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.
A. Testing Requirements: Test and rate air terminals according to AHRI 880 I-P or
AHRI 881 SI, "Performance Rating of Air Terminals."
B. Identification: Label each air terminal with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum
and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
rough-in drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and maintain sufficient clearance for
normal service and maintenance.
B. Connect ductwork to air terminals according to ductwork Sections.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to air terminals to allow service and maintenance.
B. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.

REV 00
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,
use those specified in UL 486A - 486B.
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract Documents.
B. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer
to achieve proper performance.
C. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
D. Verify that control connections are complete.
E. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
F. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training part of Closeout Procedures."

REV 00

REV 00
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling-, floor- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and
grilles as applicable to design requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in

the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and
planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can
be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished;
indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation,
room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - Page 1 of 8

REV 00
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials
and methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to
show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in
ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's

standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
E. Source quality-control reports.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,

registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or

vibration. Devices shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for mounting in
indicated surface construction.
B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid.
Dampers shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.

REV 00
D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal
velocity is not to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities through diffuser are
not to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below
room temperature without causing objectionable conditions.
E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the face of
the device. Volume adjustments shall be made by [removable key] [tamper-deterring device].
F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished

surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.
H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage), provide
sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.
I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air
quantity, as measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless specified otherwise.
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing the

Performance of Air Outlets and Air Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

REV 00
performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow
service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean
exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
have damaged finishes.
3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE
A. Round Ceiling Diffuser, SRCD, RRCD:
1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID.
4. Face Style: Four cone.
5. Mounting: Duct connection.
REV 00
6. Pattern: Fully adjustable.
7. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.

8. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.
B. Square Ceiling Diffusers, SCD, RCD, ECD:

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID.
4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).
5. Face Style: Four cone.
6. Mounting: Surface and Mounting panel.
7. Pattern: Adjustable.
8. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.
9. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.
3.6 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS SCHEDULE
A. Linear Slot Diffuser, SSLD, RSLD:

REV 00
2. Material - Shell: Aluminum, insulated.
3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
4. Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, black.
5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.
6. Finish - Tees: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
7. Slot Width: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
8. Number of Slots: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
9. Length: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
10. Accessories: [Plaster frame] [T-bar slot] [Center notch] [T-bar on inlet side]
[T-bar on both sides] [T-bar clip on one side] [T-bar clips on both sides].
B. Ceiling-Integral Continuous Diffuser:
1. Slot Width: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.

2. Section Length: as per design requirement or shown on drawings .
3. Straight and curved sections as required to accommodate layout.
4. Mitered tees and corners.
5. Pattern Controllers: 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
6. Material: Aluminum, extruded, heavy wall.
7. Finishes:
a. Exterior: color as selected by Engineer.

b. Interior: color as selected by Engineer.
8. Throw: Standard.
9. Mounting: as per drawings and schedule.
10. Plenum: Insulated.
11. Other Features:
a. Painted interior.
b. Blank-offs.
3.7 REGISTERS AND GRILLES SCHEDULE
A. Adjustable Bar Register, SR, RR, ER:

REV 00
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal or Vertical as specified in the drawings.
4. Core Construction: Integral or Removable.
5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) or 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
6. Mounting: Countersunk screw or Lay in or Concealed as specified in ID
drawings .
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
B. Adjustable Bar Grille:
1. Material: Aluminum].
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal or Vertical as specified in the drawings.
drawings.
C. Fixed Face Register:
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch (13-by-13-by-13-mm) grid core.
drawings.
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
D. Fixed Face Grille:
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch (13-by-13-by-13-mm) grid core.

REV 00
drawings.

REV 00
SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. SECTION 114000 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Type I and Type II commercial kitchen hoods.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Listed Hood: A hood, factory fabricated and tested for compliance with UL 710 and
UL 710C by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.
C. Type II Hood: A hood designed for heat and steam removal and for other
non-grease applications.
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Standard hoods.
2. Filters/baffles.
3. Fire-suppression systems.
4. Lighting fixtures.
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - Page 1 of 13

REV 00
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50)

2. Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service
requirements, duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work.
3. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-
required overhang.
4. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow, and pressure loss at
actual Project-site elevation.
5. Show water-supply and drain piping connections.
6. Show control cabinets.
7. Show fire-protection cylinders, piping, actuation devices, and manual control
devices.
8. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
9. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

10. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in
requirements for drain connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to
illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations.
a. Piping Diagram Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50).
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Coordination Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50)

2. Suspended ceiling assembly components.
3. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
4. Roof framing and support members for duct penetrations.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
REV 00
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Moldings on hoods and accessory equipment.
B. Welding certificates.
1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity

2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal
Welding Code," for joint and seam welding.

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with adjacent Work, including lighting
fixtures, HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression system components.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

REV 00
1. Furnish one complete set(s) of grease filters/baffles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOOD MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)

2. Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
a. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have
uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches.
Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece.
3. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish

(bright, cold-rolled, unpolished finish).
4. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 4 finish (directional satin).
5. OR Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 6 finish (dull satin).
6. When polishing is
completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
B. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant
shall be NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed,
shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact
with food.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.

REV 00
C. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening
compound for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness that does not
chip, flake, or blister.
D. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber,

neoprene, or PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to
foods and cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.
2.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods
that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints
flat, continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder, or spot welding.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to
match adjoining surfaces.
3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of
weld smooth and flush.
4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to
prevent corrosion.
5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply
SSPC- Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems & Food
Service Equipment Guidelines."
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding

material or fastening devices.
D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance;
where breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing,
and finishing.
E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.
F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.

REV 00
G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel
lock washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.
H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service
and utility lines and mechanical connections.
I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines,
operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets,
J. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen

Ventilation Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines."
K. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:
1. Fabricate panels on [one] [two] [three] [four] [all exposed] side(s) with same
material as hood, and extend from ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.
2. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Wall Shelves and Over shelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen
Ventilation Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625- inch-
(1.58-mm-) thick, stainless-steel shelf tops.
2.3 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or
grease extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.
1. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."

2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710 and UL 710C, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links.
4. Include ultraviolet section complying with UL 710C.
5. Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel at least 3 inches
(75 mm) long, continuously welded to top of hood and at corners.[ Fabricate a collar with a
0.5-inch- (13-mm-) wide duct flange.]
6. Duct-Collar Fire Dampers: Collar and damper shall comply with UL 710
testing and listing required for the entire hood.

REV 00
a. Collar: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick stainless steel, at least 3
inches (75 mm) long, continuously welded to top of hood and at
corners.[ Fabricate a collar with a minimum 0.5-inch- (13-mm-) wide duct flange.]
b. Blades: Minimum 0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick stainless steel,
counterbalanced to remain closed after actuation.
c. Blade Pivot and Spring: Stainless steel.
d. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 212 deg F (100 deg C) rated.
7. Makeup Air Fire Dampers: Labeled, according to UL 555, by a testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

b. Frame: SMACNA Type A or Type B, with blades in airstream; fabricated
with roll-formed, galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
c. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking or folded, minimum 0.034-inch- (0.86-
mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
d. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
e. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.
B. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only or/exhaust makeup air as per food service
equipment specifications
1. Makeup air shall be introduced by combination of induction and diffusion

inside canopy. If makeup air is not heated, insulate interior of makeup air plenum with high-
density insulation having maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and
50, respectively.
2. Makeup air shall be introduced through bottom of canopy through supply-air
registers with adjustable guide vanes.
C. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy or Single-island canopy or Double-island canopy

as per design drawings
D. Filters/Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel or aluminum, with spring-loaded fastening.

Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and removable collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed
surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Filters/baffles shall be tested according to UL
1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Removable Water-Wash Grease Extractor: Stainless steel, tested with hood according
to UL 710.

REV 00
F. Stationary Water-Wash Grease Extractor: Integral, automatically self-cleaning,

spraying hot water and detergent over the entire length of exhaust plenum. Fabricate to supply
140 deg F (60 deg C) water at 1.25 gpm/ft. (0.26 L/s per m) of hood length, at 40- to 60-psig (276-
to 414-kPa) inlet pressure.
1. Water Piping: ASTM A 270, Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Fabricate to drain water and detergent to a collection trough having stainless-
steel drain fittings.
3. Single, hood mounting control panel with a solid-state, programmable
controller shall control all hoods on Project. Wash cycle shall be factory set to operate for
10 minutes after fans stop.
4. Detergent shall be supplied by an adjustable-flow, 120-V ac injection pump
from a reservoir with a minimum capacity of 2.5 gal. (9.5 L).
G. Water-mist option shall supply a maximum of 0.1 gpm/ft. (0.02 L/s per m) of hood
length through stainless-steel piping and nozzles.
1. Water Piping: ASTM A 270, Type 304 stainless steel.
H. Lighting Fixtures: fixture type as per food service drawings and specifications with
lenses sealed vapor tight. Wiring shall be installed in conduit on hood exterior. Number and
location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc (753 lx) at 30 inches (762 mm) above
finished floor.
1. Light switches shall be mounted as per supplier recommendation

2. Lighting Fixtures: Fluorescent or Incandescent complying with UL 1598.
I. Comply with requirements in Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and
"Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for hood controls.
1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock
exhaust fan with makeup air supply fan to operate simultaneously. Interlock exhaust fan
with fire-suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and to
remain in operation until manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan operation.
Motor starters shall comply with Section "Enclosed Controllers."
2. Exhaust Fan Interlock: Factory wire the exhaust fan starters in a single
control cabinet for adjacent hoods to operate together.
3. Photocell and Temperature Control: Vary speed of makeup air and exhaust-
air fans with variable-frequency controllers, based on temperature at hood discharge and
opacity of smoke in hood. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to operate at
REV 00
high speed during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in high- speed operation
until manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to photocell and reflector to avoid
grease accumulation that will negatively affect performance of system. Controller shall limit
exhaust-duct velocity. Controller shall limit supply quantity to be modulated by contractor
for proper operation of makeup air unit.
4. High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall
shut down before hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-
suppression system.
5. Water-Wash Timer: 24-hour clock, 365-day, programmable timer shall
control sequential wash of multiple hood sections.
6. Water Mist: Solenoid valve interlocked with exhaust fan to open with
hood operation.
J. Capacities and Characteristics: As per Drawings
2.4 TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
B. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards:

Metal and Flexible."
C. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only
D. Hood Type: Heat and vapor/ Condensate removal.
E. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy or Single-island canopy or Double-island canopy

as per design drawings
F. Condensate Hood Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel baffles to drain into a hood

drain trough, and stainless-steel drain piping.
G. Lighting Fixtures: as per supplier recommendation fixtures and lamps with lenses
sealed vapor tight. Wiring shall be installed in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior. Number
and location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc (753 lx) at 30 inches (762 mm) above
finished floor.

REV 00
1. Light switches shall be mounted [on front panel of hood canopy] [on wall
adjacent to hood] [in hood control panel].
2. Lighting Fixtures: [Fluorescent] [Incandescent] complying with UL 1598.
H. Capacities and Characteristics: As per Drawings
2.5 WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or approved equal:
1. Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.

2. Badger Fire Protection.
3. Kidde Fire Systems.
4. Pyro Chem.
B. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and

release or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system
shall be listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing
Systems," by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade
A, Schedule 40, plain ends.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
3. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression
agent, and controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control
cabinet mounted on [hood] [or] [wall]. Furnish manual pull station for wall
mounting. Exposed piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing. Exposed fittings
shall be chrome plated.
4. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.
5. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve Furnish electric-operated gas
shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed indicator for field installation.
6. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans,
lights, and fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately
adjacent.
7. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar.
Spare terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to
indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet with

REV 00
relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with fire
alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Complete field assembly of hoods where required.
1. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match
adjacent finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication
Requirements" Article.
B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining,
cleaning, and servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems
according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final
connections, and seal openings according to UL 1978.
D. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with
stainless- steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install hoods to operate free from vibration.

REV 00
F. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with
stainless-steel fasteners at 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. maximum.
G. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous
joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary
joints.
H. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral

lighting.
I. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.
J. Set field-adjustable switches.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping with clearance to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install reduced-pressure backflow preventer on washer-water supply. Backflow

preventer is specified in Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
D. Install washer-water drain piping full size of hood connection to an adjacent floor
drain or floor sink.
E. Makeup Water Connection: Comply with applicable requirements in Section

"Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for valves and accessories on piping connections to water-
cooled units.
F. Connect ducts according to requirements in Section "Air Duct Accessories." Install

flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct connections with continuous
liquidtight joint.
G. Install fire-suppression piping for remote-mounted suppression systems according

to NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."

REV 00
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections. Report results in writing.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections, and to assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment
that is defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with
excessive noise or vibration.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3. Test water, drain, gas, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or
replace leaking components.
4. Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Perform fire-suppression system performance tests required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial kitchen hoods. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training."

REV 00
SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plate heat exchangers for HVAC applications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.

loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to

structure and to supported equipment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Tube-removal space.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - Page 1 of 7
REV 00
2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
B. Source quality-control reports as per Quality Assurance clause requirements.
C. Commissioning Report: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers

to include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional

requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
B. PED / ASME Compliance: Fabricate, test and label heat exchangers to comply with
PED or ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
C. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-third times pressure
rating before shipment.
D. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.
A. All components of PHE including frame support, fixed and movable end plates, tie
rods & gaskets shall be manufactured in the country of origin , boxed up & shipped as a one piece
ready for hook up
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or
REV 00

weathering and use.
8. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports.
9. Faulty operation of controls.
D. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:
1) Plate-and-Frame Type: One year(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. The vendor shall provide the following information and details:

1. Effective heat transfer area.
2. Total number of plates.
3. Heat transfer area per plate.
4. Technical calculations for overall heat transfer coefficient.
REV 00
B. Thermal performance: manufacturer shall provide written confirmation that the plate
heat exchangers comply with AHRI 400-2001 “Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers” standard and
subsequent addendums. Data sheets according to AHRI 400 shall be included in the submittals for
verification.
C. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom

carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and
one-piece gaskets.
D. Frame:
1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.
E. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or
stainless steel.
1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with

reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when
heat- exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.
F. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel with zinc coatedtie-rods and nuts.
G. Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless-steel shell, 0.5mm minimum
thickness for the units of less than PN20 otherwise it shall be 0.6mm minimum thickness.
H. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber.
I. Gasket Material: EPDM.
J. Gasket Material: Butyl.
K. Gasket Material: Viton.
L. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger

shell. Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling.

REV 00
1. DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy
flanges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for
structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat
exchangers.
B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.
3.2 HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on saddle supports with provisions to drain

shell.
C. Heat exchangers shall be insulated. Comply with requirements of section 230716

“HVAC Equipment Insulation”. Coordinate with manufacturer’s recommendations as necessary.
D. Provide factory fabricated aluminum removable and reusable insulation shroud for
each heat exchanger. The insulation shroud shall be designed for easy removal and replacement to
facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
E. Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat
exchanger. The drip tray consists of 0.75 mm hot galvanized steel plates, 50 mm polyurethane
foam, supports, and a draining valve.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

REV 00
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

Install piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C. Install piping with threaded or flanged connections at heat exchangers.
D. Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
E. Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.
F. Install vacuum breaker at heat exchanger steam inlet connection.
G. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping, and install

thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers
specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
H. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with

requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC
Piping."
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and

report results in writing.
B. Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.

REV 00
D. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. Refer to Division 1 Section
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

REV 00
SECTION 236313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, air-cooled condensing units that contain condenser
coils and fans housed in a weatherproof casing for outdoor installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; operating characteristics, shipping, installed,

and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each
field connection.

C. Source Quality Control Reports: as specified in clause "Source Quality Control".
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each air-cooled condenser to include in the
operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - Page 1 of 7

REV 00
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15 and 34 Package,

"Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA

90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical power and control wiring.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate locations for refrigerant piping and electrical rough-ins.
1.7 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the air-cooled refrigerant condensers that fail in materials or

REV 00


weatheringand use.
manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty isnot cancelled
due to the repair work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils,

condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
C. Condensing Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; factory tested at 2930

kPa (425 psig). Circuit to match compressors.
D. Condenser Fans and Drives: Propeller fans for vertical or horizontal air discharge;
directly driven with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors with integral current- and thermal-
1. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed control,

or fan- cycling control.

REV 00
E. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload
cutouts; 220-V control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and
an unfused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power
connection.
F. Unit Casings: Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated
and finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with
weather protection for components and controls, and with removable panels for access to controls,
condenser fans, motors, and drives.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to AHRI 210/240 for

units smaller than 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W).
B. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to AHRI 340/360 for

units 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W) and larger.
C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI 270

for units smaller than 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W).
D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI 370

for units 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W) and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air- cooled
refrigerant condensers.

REV 00
B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of

piping connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where air-cooled condensers
will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air-cooled condensers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Shop
Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
C. Install ground-mounted units on minimum 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete base,

100 mm larger than condenser unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit

to supports with removable fasteners.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
B. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements of Section "Refrigerant

Piping." Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter dryer, and moisture
indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line.
C. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26.

REV 00
use those specified in UL 486A - 486B.
A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for
leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
D. Report test results in writing.
3.5 CLEANING
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Clean to remove burrs and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report results in
writing.
Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the
following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

REV 00
Lubricate bearings on fans.
Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
Measure and record airflow over coils.
Check operation of low ambient control device.
Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain air-cooled condenser units. Refer to Division 1 Section
Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

REV 00
SECTION 236416 - CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven centrifugal chillers.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for refrigerant monitors,

alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment interlocks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of
energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.
C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h
to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.
D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit

calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating conditions.
E. kW/kW: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating
capacity in kW at any given set of rating conditions.
F. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of

merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other
than the ARI standard rating conditions.
G. CPM: CHILLER PLANT MANAGER
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 236416 - Page 1 of 44

REV 00
This software is designed to control a site that consists of multiple chiller packages that are being
controlled by individual MCS
A. Seismic Performance: Centrifugal chillers shall withstand

the effects of earthquake motions determined according to UBC 1997.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
B. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:
1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an

entering condenser-fluid temperature of 16 deg C and providing stable operation until the
system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-fluid temperature.
2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of
continuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid
temperature to match design requirements.
3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with
performance indicated.
C. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude at which installed without
affecting performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for
site altitude.
D. Performance Tolerance: Comply with the following in lieu of ARI 550/590:
1. Allowable Capacity Tolerance: Zero percent.

2. Allowable IPLV/NPLV Performance Tolerance: Zero percent.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.
3. Minimum evaporator flow rate.
4. Refrigerant capacity of chiller.
5. Oil capacity of chiller.
6. Fluid capacity of evaporator, condenser.
7. Characteristics of safety relief valves.
8. Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.
9. Performance at varying capacities with constant design condenser-fluid temperature.
Repeat performance at varying capacities for different condenser-fluid temperatures from
design to minimum in 3 deg C increments.

REV 00
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load distribution,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and
electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
D. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand

certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Startup service reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program.
B. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

REV 00
2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, as applicable to chiller design. . Refrigerant 134a can
be charged at site with the supervision of the manufacturer, but with ASME U-stamp and nameplate
certifying compliance.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada, and include label by a qualified

testing agency showing compliance.
H. If the Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project
documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the design team
before the bids opening, otherwise the Contactor shall furnish and handover the works at no additional
cost to the Contract.
A. Chillers can be charged with Nitrogen at factory and then Refrigerant 134a charged
at site with the supervision of the manufacturer, but with ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying
compliance.
B. Ship each chiller with a full charge of refrigerant. Charge each chiller with nitrogen
if refrigerant is shipped in containers separate from chiller.
C. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil.
1. Ship oil factory installed in chiller.
D. Package chiller for export shipping in totally enclosed crate with bagging.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support

structures.
1.9 WARRANTY
1. Warranty should indicate the specific Part number and Serial Number (where applicable)

REV 00
of the materials and elements which will be installed in the Project and covered by the said
warrantee in the final version.
2. Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted item.
Warranty shall include:
a. Defective materials and installation.
b. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
c. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
d. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.
f. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
g. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that
may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work
3. Warranty period shall be five years, start from the date of the substantial completion of
the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the Manufacturing of such Products, Which are of a
similar? Material, design and Workman ship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory y use for 5-years prior to bid opening. The 5-year use shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar
size. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components
shall be environmentally suit able for the indicated locations.
B. Description: Factory-assembled water cooled-centrifugal water

chiller. Chiller consists of one or more compressor, an evaporator, a water cool d
condenser, interconnecting unit piping and wiring includes accessories, mounting frame
and safety controls, and to be factory tested
C. L
iquid Chillers, consist of open or hermetic drive Compressor, couplings, m o t o r ,
Lubrication system, cooler, condenser, interstate flash economizer/refrigerant storage
REV 00
vessel, Interconnecting refrigerant piping, Refrigeran Flowcontrol system,
Vibration isolation assembly, electrical microprocessor control system, and docementation

required
Prior to Startup. Initial oil and refrigerant charges Shall be supplied by the chiller
Manufacturer for field installation. ( in case supplying open type compressors , then the pro-
vided cooling capacity should be net .i.e. manufacturer to add the heat dissipation to the
chillers without affecting the net capacity required)
D. Vapor barrier and jacketing for the Evaporator to be provided. For the
Condenser insulate any part where condensation is expected.
F. Pressure relief at discharge side of each Chillerto be provided.
G. provide cooling for the motor if it is applicable for Hermetic or semi-hermatic

motor shall be refrigerant cooled, having a continuous duty service factor of 1.1 based on
the guaranteed input kilowatts at the zero tolerance performance specified, but shall be
capable to testing at 125% of name plate rated power.
H. Refrigerant leak detection system to be provided and interfaced with the PLC sys
tem.
I. Provide vibration isolator for the Chiller and as per recommendation

from manufacturer and vibration study.
J. Provide water cooling for the refrigerant recovery unit if it is applicable.
K. Fully interface of chiller panel parameters with the PLC system. Chiller
flow and KW/TR To be shown in chiller panel.
L. Contractor to provide two numbers of Overhead travelling cranes on two

sides, (upstream side and downstream side) for the maintenance purpose.
M. The Chiller supplier is responsible for providing the CPM (Control Plant
Manager) Hot Standby redundant PLCs with the chillers package according to the
SCADA design documents and technical specifications, Refer to SCADA System
specifications section 406010.
2.2 REFRIGERANT
A. Material: R-1233 ZD / R-134a; provide full operating charge of refrigerant and

oil, ASHRAE STD 15 & 34 class A1.
1. Refrigerant Circuit: Provide refrigerant chargingport.
2. Latest Refrigerant available in the market to beused.
B. Vent Pipe: Provide black steel vent pipe from rupture disk to exterior
of building for refrigerant venting purpose.

REV 00
2.3 COMPRESSOR
A. The compressor shall be one or two multi-stage or single stage centrifugal

type inspected and tested in accordance with the ANSI B9.1 Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration.
B. Casing - Rigid, close grain, high grade cast iron or ductile modular iron
Material - Horizontally split to provide access to rotor assembly. Flanged suction and
discharge Connections, flanged interstate gas connection for intercooler shall be
designed to allow Major wearing parts (journal and thrust bearings, shaft seal, and
inMspaeinctoedil pump) to be or replaced without removing compressor casing.
(Asapplicable)
C. Rotor - Fabricated (Furnace brazed) aluminum alloy or welded Alloy steel

Impellers, Shrouded type with backward curved blades, dynamically balanced, and over
speed tested; Designed and constructed to resist corrosion, erosion and pitting, And
maintain initial Balance and performance characteristics.
Main shaft to be hot rolled heat treated alloySteel or chrome-molybdenum steel forging heat
treated for maximum life and shall be designed to result in operation well below first
critical speed, without vibration. Rotor assembly shall be dynamically balanced. The
rotor shaft shall be of stiff shaft design with
F. Shaft Seal - The shaft seal shall be pressure lubricated in operation and
oil flooded at all times to ensure no refrigerant loss at both running and long idle
compressor conditions. (Where applicable).
G. Capacity Control - Bronze airfoil pre rotation variable-inlet guide vanes to

regulate the volume of refrigerant suction gas handled by the compressor and provides
highly efficient part load operation; and in conjunction with automatic hot gas bypass
provides capacity first critical speed at not less than 115% of the compressor operating
speed.The
Compressor vibration measured at the coupling shall not exceed (12000)1/2/RPM mils at
design operating speed during the run-in tests.
D. Bearings - Precision machined Aluminum alloy single piece tapered bore

type journal Bearings; aluminum alloy tilting pad type thrust bearing; aluminum alloy
reverse thrust bearing. Bearings shall be accessible without removing the top half of casing
and having L-10 life (200,000 Hrs). (Where applicable).
E. Lubrication System - Completely factory packaged, assembled and piped
with oil sump reservoir. The sump shall be vented to compressor suction pressure.
1. A variable speed drive oil pump on rotor shaft to assures forced feed
lubrication to all bearings and seals at all times, even under power failure coast-
down conditions.
2. A Gravity-fed oil reservoir built into the top of each compressor
to provide Lubrication during shutdown in the event of power failure.
3. Dual Oil Filters with 15-micron replaceable pleated paper elements and
change-over valve to permit filter element replacement during unit operation
4. Oil cooler, external water cooled, cleanable shell and copper tube type - for

REV 00
entering Water temperatures up to (f3a5c°toCr). .at 0.0005 R°F hr/Btu
(0.000088m2°C/W) fouling (Where applicable)
5. Thermostatic oil temperature control valve to by-pass the oil cooler to

Maintain Desired oil cooler leaving oil temperature. (Where applicable)
6. Oil heater(s), 120 volt - 1 phase,50 Hertz thermostatically controlled

immersion type heater to maintain 150°F (65.5°C) (Where applicable)
7. Sump oil temperature during shutdown to minimize refrigerant accumulation in oil.
8. Weld pad type oil level sight glass.
9. Hard wired safety switches for High Thrust Bearing Oil Discharge
Temperature and Low Oil (differential) Pressure. (Where applicable)
10. Temperature transmitters for: Refrigerant Discharge Gas; Thrust
Oil Discharge and Shaft End Bearing Oil Outlet. (Where applicable)
11. Thermometers (Dual scale ° F/°C) industrial bimetallic element
(160 mm) dial adjustable angle type with stainless steel case, and 3/4" (19 mm) NPT
S.Stl. thermo wells for: Supply Bearing Oil; Thrust Bearing Discharge Oil; O i l
Reservoir (sump);Shaft End Bearing Outlet; and Oil After Oil Cooler.(Where
applicable)
12. Pressure gauges- Industrial (160 mm) dial solid front phenolic
case with brass socket and phosphor bronze bourdon tube, with dual English(psi)
and metric (kPa) scale (5) for: Supply Bearing Oil After Filter; Oil Before Filter;
Thrust Bearing Discharge Oil; Balance Piston; Oil Sump. (Where applicable)
13. Pressure taps for connection to Pressure Transmitters adjacent to
above gauges. (Where applicable).
14. Automatic Sump Vent Valve to slowly equalize sump pressure to suction
onstart-up.
15. Oil charging valve and oil drain valves.
All electrical components for NEMA-1 application.
2.4 MOTOR
A. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled Type, Squirrel Cage, Induction Type: Driver
to be sized to efficiently and continuously fulfill chiller unit compressor brake
horsepower and speed requirements, and capable of sustained operation at 115% of that
total BHP (kW). Motor selected to be premium or super premium efficiency based on
theavailable sizes. Motors shall be medium voltage 11,000 volt-3ph-50Hz as specified
in chillers schedule.
closed type compressor could be offered.
B. Electrical Design Requirements
1. Minimum starting voltage for all motors shall be 65% of design operating voltage.
2. Starting torque ratings at guaranteed.
100% and 65% of design operating voltageshall be

REV 00
3. The motor service factor shall be 1.15.
4. Stator insulation shall be NEMA classF.
5. Stator temperature rise shall be NEMA class B at the rated horsepower,
and NEMA Class F at the specified servicefactor.
6. The design ambient temperatureshall be 50 °C (122 °F).
Percent of design load to be achieved regardless of variables as ccondenser water flow, Variation
in condenser water temperature with reduction in cooling load. Vanes shall be remain
closed during start-up until the compressor operating speed reached. Means shall be
provided to prevent reverse rotation at compressor shutdown.
C. Sound Insulation:
1. Furnish a removable and reusable sound insulation kit for each chiller if
sound level Exceeds (84 dBA) at 1 M, design the kit to cover the compressor,
compressor Discharge and suction piping, condenser shell, condenser liquid line (and
economizer piping if multistage unit).
Provide manufacturers factory. subject to the final approval shall be agreed by
Acoustic specialist.
Sound treatment package installed at motor
2. The sound insulation kit shall include:

a. Inner and outer jacket construction shall be of 17 oz. sq. yd PTFE
Teflon Impregnated fiberglass cloth.
b. Insulation material shall be 11 lb/cu ft fiberglass needled material
with Barium Sulfate loaded vinyl acoustic barrier.
c. Blanket construction shall be double sewn and lock stitched using
Teflon coated, fiberglass thread. All raw jacket edges shall have Teflon cloth
binding. No raw cut edges shall be exposed.
d. Sound insulation design shall accommodate temperature gages, tubing, piping,
brackets and pressure probes,
e. Provide a rust resistant nameplate shall be riveted to each
blanket piece. Each tag shall Indicate piece location, description, size,
pressure rating, and tag Number sequence.
f. Stainless steel quilting pins shall be placed at random locations
no greater than 18 inches apart to prevent shifting of the insulation filler.
g. Thermal insulation shall be furnished and installed. Sound
insulation shall be installed and tested after thermal insulationis complete.
3. Motor data sheet to include:
a. Current at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
b. Efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
c. Power factor at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
d. Full load RPM
e. Horsepower vs Amperes curve
f. Time vs. Current curve
g. Speed vs. Current curve
h. Speed vs. Torque curve
i. Recommended alarm and trip temps for the RTDs

REV 00
D. Documentation to be shipped with each motor
1. Parts list
2. Provide copies of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions
3. Motor test reports
4. Rotation shall be clockwise as viewed from drive end of machine.
C. Enclosures
The motor shall be equipped standards.
With enclosure style conforming To applicable NEMA
D. Terminal Boxes (Where applicable)

1. The main motor terminal box shall permit top or bottom lead entry.
2. Provide a separate auxiliary enclosure to terminate 220 volt wiring from space heater.
3. Provide a separate auxiliary enclosure to terminate low voltage
devices, such as RTD’s, motor temperature Klixons and leak detector
contacts.
E. Standard Accessories - to be included on allmotors

1. 220-volt space heaters, sufficiently sized to prevent condensation inside
the motor, Shall be factory installed and wired to a terminal strip in the 220-volt
Auxiliary junction box.
2. Six (6) 100-ohms, three wires, platinum RTD’s (two per phase) shall be
imbedded in the stator windings. RTD’s are to be labeled and terminated at a
labeled terminal strip in the low voltage auxiliarybox.
F. Documentation
1. All documentation is to be supplied on a one-timebasis.
2. Certified drawings. Certified dimension drawing to include shaft dimension,
keyway dimension, and the shaft location with respect to the motor hold-down bolts
and the following:
a. Location & details of dowels & jackingscrews
b. Front and side views
c. Required service area
d. Nominal axial rotor float
e. Assembly drawing with bills-of-material for all wearing parts
f. Main terminal box drawing
g. Auxiliary box drawings withterminations
h. Space heater wattage
4. Recommended alarm and trip temps for RTDs permanently attached to

the auxiliary box cover using waterproof paper and glue
5. Nameplate information to include:
a. Speed at full load
b. Current at full load
c. Motor efficiency at full load
d. Lock rotor current

REV 00
e. Motor weight
f. Motor service factor
g. Motor NEMA insulation class
h. Space heater volts/watts
H. Shipment
1. The motor shaft is to be protected from resting and blocked In such a
way as to prevent damage to the bearings and other associated components,
due to normal shipping hazards.
2. Any sensor or other device protruding from the motor must be protected
from normal shipping hazards.
3. Terminal box shall be packaged and shipped strapped to top
ofenclosure.
4. Air ducts shall be covered to prevent the entrance of rain, snow and
falling dust.
5. Ship to chiller manufacturer’sfacility for mounting
2.5 EVAPORATOR, CONDENSER AND ACCESSORIES
A. General - Shell to be rolled From carbon Steel plate, fusion welded seams.
Shells to Accommodate tube lengths in 2 ft. (610 mm) increments. Steel tube sheets of
25 mm minimum thickness welded to ends of shells shall be provided. Provide
Intermediate tube supports spaced on 48" (1219mm) maximum centers. Provide Integral
mounting stands to Support condenser on cooler and cooler support feet providing level-
adjusting, spring-type vibration isolators.
Mounting brackets for
B. General - Tube Fouling Factors shall be based on a maximum scale

factor of 0.00025 ft2.hr.°F/BTU for the evaporator and 0.00050 ft2.hr.°F/BTUfor the
condenser.
C. Tubes - Individually replaceable 1” (25mm) OD, copper heat exchanger

tubes externally enhanced and internally ribbed. Tubes wall thickness at root fin shall
be 0.025 inch and
0.035 inch for evaporator and condenser tubes respectively. Condenser tubes material to be
suitable for RO polished TSE water.
D. Water Boxes - Marine type, for both evaporator and condenser integrally welded to the
tube sheet, with hinged removable covers to provide access to tubes without breaking
Water Connections and with nitrogen holding charge. Box outlets to be suitable
for Flanged pipe connections designed for 150 PSIG (1034 kpa) or higher subject to
operating pressures. Water boxes shall be internally ceramic coated. Each box shall be
provided with a minimum 2” drain and 1” vent valves connections.
2.6 CHILLER FEATURES

REV 00
A. Furnish chillers with the followingfeatures:
1. Control transformer.
2. Pressure gages.
3. Sound blanketing.
4. Sound enclosure.
5. Enclosure cladding.
6. One stand-alone central chillers group controller to operate all chillers and
other plant components (primary pumps, cooling towers and condenser pumps).
2.7 CONTROLS, GENERAL
A. Manufacturer's standard, microprocessor-based PLC chiller controls. Chillers to be

fully
E. Evaporator - Horizontal flooded shell

and tube type, tubes Roller expanded i n t
o Intermediate tube supports, liquid inlet with slotted duct distributionn plate. Evaporator
to be designed to keep all the tubes wetted, even under varying load conditions. Upper
portion of shell to be free of Tubes to provide refrigerant liquid-gas separation space.
Provide steel suction gas baffle or mesh eliminators to for even distribution of gas flow,
and liquid droplet elimination, hot gas bypass inlet baffle assures uniform gas distribution
and prevents direct gas impingement on cooler tubes. Furnish evaporator with two 2" (51
mm) sight ports, high capacity relief valve(s) in accordance With ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 15 Safety Code in series with a metal type forward acting scored bursting
disc(s) (rupture discs) for leak tightness (for field piping). Refrigerant connections to
include: liquid inlet, liquid transfer, suction, hot gas inlet, unit relief, gas charging, oil
return unit supply and gas return, LP control and liquidtemperatures.
F. Condenser - Horizontal shell and tube type with discharge gas inlet baffles
for uniform gas distribution and to prevent high velocity impingement on tubes. Tubes
to have bundle Configuration and baffling to provide effective condensed refrigerant
liquid drain off and Maintains efficient condenser performance. Provide integral axial
flow refrigerant liquid sub-cooler, with refrigerant liquid level Controller and h i g h -
pressure liquid valve. Refrigerant connections to include: discharge gas inlet, liquid
outlet, hot gas outlet, pump out gas, purge, and oil return unit gas supply.
G. Refrigerant Piping: Provide necessary

interconnecting refrigerant piping, valves and fittings for welded fabrication, in
accordance with ANSI-B31.5 Piping Code - Schedule 40 steel, or greater, use flanged
or butt weld above 2" (51 mm), and flanged, socket weld Or threaded 2 ” (51 mm) and
s ma l l er , as necessary For fabrication and /or
service accessibility.
H. Oil Return System - Oil return unit,

fusion welded steel shell (ASME Code); with internal Electric Heaters, solenoid valve,
outlet oil float drainer, temperature control and
Thermometer, and with single relief valve in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
15 Safety Code -. System to offer continuous automatic functionn during compressor
Operation to maintain minimum oil concentration in refrigerant and eliminate need for

REV 00
periodic oil additions to make up normal losses from compressor to refrigerant circuit.
D. Temperature Controls
Compressor Capacity C o n t r ol : Modulating slide valve to maintain chilled water
Temperature set point without Hunting within throttling range. Include the
Following features:
1. Throttling Range: Full load to 10 percent of full load.
2. Chilled water temperaturecontrol.
3. Chilled water temperaturesetback.
4. Load limit controller.
E. Safety Controls
Manually reset controls to perform the following functions:
1. Low evaporator pressure cutout.
2. Low evaporator temperature cutout.
3. Low oil sump temperature cutout.
4. interfaced with plant PLC system.
B. Control centers - A processor-based control centers, stand-alone floor

mounted or unit mounted, with color graphic display of conditions and values, to be
provided to show all Necessary controls and control logic and to provide fully
automatic operation, neumatic Capacity control and safety protection of the chiller unit.
Manufacturer to highlight his control center capability and updated optionsavailable.
C. Safeties:
1. Unit shall automatically shut down when any of
the following conditions occur. (Each of these protective Limits shall
require Manual reset and cause an alarm message to be displayed on the operator
interface screen informing the operator of the shutdown cause).
a. Motor over current
b. Over voltage
c. Under voltage
d. Single cycle dropout
e. Low evaporator refrigerant temperature
f. High condenser pressure
g. High motor winding temperature
h. High compressor discharge temperature
i. Low oil pressure for compressor and gear
j. Loss of cooler water flow
k. Loss of condenser water flow
l. Starter fault
m. High oil temperature for compressor andgear
n. Low leaving chilled water temperature
o. Compressor: excess shaft movement switch
p. Compressor: seal limit switch
2. The control system shall Detect conditions which approach protective
limits and Provide an alarm for the following:

REV 00
a. High condenser pressure
b. Low evaporator refrigerant temperature
c. Low oil pressure
d. High oil temperature
e. Low leaving chilled water temperature.
4. Low oil pressure cutout.

5. High oil temperature cutout.
6. High condenser pressure cutout.
7. Water-Flow Interlock: Vapor proof water-flow
switch to prevent starting of compressor without chilled and condenser
waterflow.
F. Automatically reset controls to perform the following functions:
1. Low evaporator pressure cutout.
2. Low evaporator temperature cutout.
3. Low oil sump temperature cutout.
4. Low oil pressure cutout.
5. High oil temperature cutout.
6. High condenser pressure cutout.
7. Water-Flow Interlock: Vapor proof water-flow
switch to prevent starting of compressor without chilled and condenser
waterflow.
G. Power Controls
Control Panel: Manufacturer's standard, unit mounted, factory wired with a single-point
connection, with the following power-control options:
1. External-overload protection.
2. Control circuit fuse.
3. Power terminal block.
4. Lockout restart timer.
H. Vibration Control
Direct isolation and the following vibration isolators:
1. Molded-rubber mounts with a minimum deflection of 6 mm.
2. Seismically restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection of 50 mm.
I. Instruments
The instrumentation consistsof:
1. Instruments for
Indication
- Temperatures(Transmitters / Gauges)
- Pressures (Transmitters / Gauges)
- cooling water inlet/outlet
REV 00
- compressor suction
- oil tank
- oil supply to compressor
- compressor bearing
- oil outlet shaft seal
- motor bearing
- motor winding
- evaporator
- condenser
- oil differential
- Level indications, Sight glasses
- Capacity indicator
2. Safety Devices Temperatures

- Pressure
- Surge protection Motor current
3. Control Devices Temperature Control

- Instrument Pipes
4. Gauges Stand
- Condenser refrigerant level
- Evaporator level
- Oil tank level
- vent line from piston accumulator
- Oil bleed lie
- leak oil pot
- Position of compressor inlet guide vanes
- Compressor main bearing temp. Toohigh
- Oil temperature too high
- Motor bearing temperature too high
- Motor winding temperature too high
- Oil tank temperature too low
- Chilled water outlet temperature too low
- Evaporation pressure to low
- Condensing pressure too high
- Oil differential pressure too low
- With motor current and suction temperature
- Overload of compressor motor
- Overload of pump oil motor
- Oil heater on/off
- All instrument pipes are in copper
- Provide a steel construction stand for temperature and pressure gaugesincluding:
- Evaporator Inlet/Outlet pressure.
- Condenser Inlet/Outlet pressure.
- Evaporator Inlet/Outlet temperature.
- Condenser Inlet/Outlet temperature.
- Oil pressure.
- - Mount in ront of chiller in a proper location as directed by the Engineer.
-

REV 00
2.8 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER WITH SOFT STARTER

CONTROLLERS & POWRER FACTOR CORRECTION
A. MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers should have experience in manufacturing similar equipment
B. MOTOR SOLID-STATE SOFT STARTER (SOFT STARTER) 11,000 volt-3ph-
50Hz
1. Design Requirements:
a. The motor starters will be constructed as part of floor standing
motor control centers and installed in a separate air-conditioned electrical
equipment room and shall be rated for the ambient temperature 50ᵒC.
b. The starters shall be by the samemanufacturer.
c. Starters shall be solid state type.
d. All motor starters shall be designed, manufactured and tested to
meet or exceed the requirements of the latest published standard of NEMA/ IEC
in addition to local authority requirements. Supplier to list the standard used.
e. Motor Control Center shall be rated for the ambient temperature50ᵒc.
f. The motor control
centers shall be designed and built specifically to accommodate the equipment
contained within them, including all controllers and equipment for the soft
starting of the motors. Include power
factor Correction capacitors to provide a minimum of 0.95 lagging PF,
intelligent Electronic relays with data output, and PLC controllers and the like
to ensure the flexible operation of the equipment. Series inductive lo op shall
be provided in the capacitor circuit (PFCC) to minimize the switching inrush
current of the capacitor.
g. Capacitors shall be furnished with current-limiting fuses and
isolation contactor for each phase. The contactor shall close only after motor
full speed is reached.
h. The panel manufacturer must be able to demonstrate that they
have experience with the use of such equipment on previous successful
operating projects.
i. The starters shall be manufactured in sections, assembled and
fully tested in the factory and witnessed by the Engineer. Then they shall be
dissembled, shipped to site, reassembled and tested again. The testing in the
factory shall require the panel manufacturer's equipment.
Provision of Motor test loads to demonstrate all the
j. The starter manufacturer’s scope shall include the preparation
of all detailed shop drawings for the starters, including wiring diagrams, test
certificates, Operating and maintenance manuals and a list of required test
equipment such That the contractor has all necessary information.
(Coordinate with chiller motor manufacturer and as per chiller’s
manufacturer recommendations)
k. The starter manufacturer shall deliver the panels to site, assist in
testing and Commissioning and offer full cooperation and liaison with the
contractor in his Commissioning of the connected equipment. The panel
manufacturer shall provide an experienced engineer at site during the
commissioning of the plant.
l. The panel Manufacturer shall provide minimum 4 days on
site operational Instruction to the Client's representative.
m. The panel manufacturer shall provide a 24 hour- 365 day per
year emergency call-out service to guarantee to Be at the client site within 4
REV 00
hours of an Emergency call.
2. Enclosure construction:
General.
- The medium voltage Motor Control Center (MCC) shall consist of
a metal- enclosed, free-standing, dead front, and verticalsteel structure.
- Each structure shall be suitable for future expansion at each end.
Each Structure shall also have (2) non-removable base sill channels and
removable lifting angles or brackets for ease of handling and installation.
- Enclosure rating shall be as shown on the Drawings manufacturer
recommendations..
- Control power shall be obtained from an internal control power transformer.
- Provide a dedicated MCC incoming line enclosure section to
accommodate the number and size of incoming cables as per the technical
datasheet.
- The MCC
incomer shall be of as per the switchgear specification (Section 26 13 19).
For circuit-breaker incomer specification, refer to the Standard Switchgear
specification (Section 26 1319)
- The starter shall be of modular design to provide for ease and
speed of Maintenance. The modules shall be manufactured by one Supplier
and designed to allow ease of maintenance, including removal of medium
voltage components and power electronic components by one maintenance
personnel.
- The starter structure shall be divided into isolated compartments as follows:
 Main power bus and ground bus compartment
 Power cell compartment
 Low voltage compartment
 Control module compartment
 Disconnect switch
- Metal barriers shall be provided between each vertical low voltage Section, between
the compartment and the power cell and/or main power bus compartment and between the
power Cell and main power bus compartment. Personnel shall Have access to the Low
voltage compartment, with the starter Energized, Without being exposed to any medium
voltage.
- The starter shall accept nominal plant power as shown on the
Drawings & as per chiller’s manufacturer recommendations.
- Each starter structure shall contain the following items
 Tin plated copper horizontal powerbus
 A continuous bare copper groundbus
 Power electronics
 A main non-load break isolation switch and operating handle
 A vacuum isolation contactor
 A vacuum bypass contactor
 Current limiting power fuses for NEMA Class E2 operation, as required
 Current transformers, asrequired
 A control power transformer
 A low voltage control panel complete with microprocessor
based control module
 Space for necessary auxiliary control and metering devices
 Top/Bottom plates to accommodate entry cable connectors as
shown in the Drawings and as per chiller’s
manufacturerrecommendations.

REV 00
The starter isolating switch shall be an externally opera ted manual three-pole type, such that
in the open position it completely grounds and isolates the starter from the line
connectors with a mechanically driven isolating shutter leaving no exposed high-
voltage components. Integral Mechanical interlocks shall prevent entry into the high-
voltage areas while the starter is energized and shall block accidental opening or
closing of the isolating switch when the door is pen or the contactor is closed. The
isolating switch handle shall have Provisions for three (3) padlocks in the off position.
- The starter Bypass contactor shall be provided to short out the SCR's
once the motor is up to full speed. When "Stop" function is selected, bypass
contactor shall op n bringing SC R's back into power circuit.
- Current limiting power fuses shall be of the self-protecting type
with visible Fuse condition indicators. The Fuses shall Incorporate Special
time/current Characteristics for motor service allowing proper coordination
With t h e Contactor and overload relay for maximum motor protection. This
coordination shall be such that under a low-fault condition the interrupting
rating and dropout time of the contactor shall be properly coordinated with
all possible fuse sizes to eliminate Contactor racing. The power fuses shall be
vertically mounted, permitting easy inspection and replacement without
starter disassembly. A fuse puller shall be provided with each starter.
- Built-in test circuit shall be included to permit checking of the
starter control and pilot circuit, with the high-voltage de-energized and
isolated, and the contactor in its normal position or in the draw-out position.
The control circuit shall be capable of being energized through a polarized
plug connector from an external supply while in the testmode.
- If required because of the external AC voltage test supply differs
from the starter control voltage, suitably sized step-down transformer shall
be included in the starter to provide test powersupply.
- The low-voltage control compartment shall be isolated and barriered
from the high-voltage area and mounted on a panel with a separate low-
voltage access door. The low-voltage control components shall be accessible
from the front of t h e low-voltage control compartment.
- Anti-condensate heater with thermostat control shall starter panel.
be provided for each
- Running and Stop Indicating Lights shall be provided in the starter panel.
- Auxiliary Contacts (Voltage Free) used to control motor space
heater power supply.
- Bus:
 The horizontal main bus shall be located in its own Separate 250mm
high enclosure and isolated from the starters. To allow for ease of maintenance
or extension of line-ups without disassembling starters, t he main bus shall be
front, top and side accessible.
 Starters shall be connected by an insulated vertical bus.
 All bus bars shall be tin-plated copper.
 Provide a 6mm x 50mm ground bus extending entire length of controller.
C. Motor
Soft-Starter Controller:
1. Type and
Characteristics:
- The Soft-Starter controlled shall be microprocessor controlled
digital module with remote communications capabilities.
- The controller unit shall include the following features:
 An externally-operated isolated mechanism
to perform the operations in sequence:

REV 00
o Open primary of control transformer

o Withdraw contactor stabs
o Close shutter over power connectors
 Set of mechanical interlocks toprevent:
o Withdrawal of stabs while contactor is energized
o Opening the door to energized high voltage compartment
ing high voltage compartment when door is open.
 Set of contactors as shown on the single line diagram such as Following

 In-Line main feeder.
o By-Pass contractor which by-pass the soft-starter when the motor is
at full speed.
o PFCC contactor which connects the capacitor bank

after the motor is at full speed.
2. Rating
- The contactor shall be 3-pole, vacuum or as insulated, having a
minimum rating of 400 amperes and rated for the ambient temperature 50ᵒc.
- The fuses shall be of the current limiting type designed to provide
short circuit protection only. They shall be rated such that they will not blow
on motor inrush or locked rotor currents.
3. The soft-starter control module logic shall provide the followingg sets of functions:
- Soft Start with Selectable Kick-Start
- Current Limit
- Full-Voltage Start
4. The following protection shall be provided during ' starting' and 'Running' modes:
- Start Fault
- Line Fault
- Temperature Fault
- Stalled Motor
When these conditions are Detected, starting of the controller Shall be
inhibited or the controller shall be shut down if it isoperating.
5. The soft-starter controller logic shall provide the following standard features:
- Adjustable Ramp Time (0-120 Seconds)
- Adjusta le Initial Current (50% - 400%)
- Adjustable Max. Current (200% - 600%)
- Selectable Current Limit During Motor Start
- Line Phase Loss Detection
- Line Current Imbalance Detection (10% -40%)
- Over/Under Line Voltage Protection (10% - 30%) with adjustable
duration (1- 10sec.)
- Selectable Password Protection of Starter Parameters
- Adjustable Stalled Motor Detection
- Up to Speed Indication
- Line Phase Sequence Sensitivity, or Insensitivity
- Selectable Solid State Overload Class 10, 20, 30
- Selectable Motor Service Factor (1.0, 1.1 or 1.15)
- Adjusta le Motor Full Load Amperes
- Adjustable Current Transformer Ratio
- Battery Backup of Starter Parameters
- Line Voltage Independent Operation
- Instantaneous Over-current Detection

REV 00
- Shorted SCR Detection
- Software Selectable Relay Outputs u) LCD Status Display
- Event Recorder (min. 99 events) with time stamping and
provision for remote communication of events
- Kick start option
- Under current protection with ti e base settings
- Machine Ground Fault protection with time base settings z)
Under I over frequency protection (trips)
- Time Between Starts Limiter
- Starts Per Hour Limiter
- Power Factor Monitor
- Auto Ranging Wattmeter
- Auto Ranging Varmeter
- Auto Ranging Ammeter
- Energy Saver
- Extended Motor Thermal Overload
- Overload Bypass During Start
- True Motor Stall Input
- Real Time Clock
- Power Off Lock-out Retention mm) Emergency RestartProvision
- Scrolling Current and Voltage Meters
- Undercurrent Trip
- Elapsed time meter
- Kilowat Meter
- Kilowatt hour meter
- Power fctor meter
- VAR meter
- Memory of overload parameters.
6. Control Circuit:
- Control Power
 AC Control voltage shall be obtained from internally-mounted two-
winding, single phase control power transformer suitably rated for the
contactor and its auxiliaries plus an additional 0.75 kVA spare capacity. The
primary winding shall be fused on both legs; the secondary winding shalll be
fused on one leg and grounded on the other.
 The control circuit shall be provided with a changeover switch and
plug for testing the contactor when it is in the "Test" position utilizing an
external A.G. supply.
- Control and Indication
 Minimum r e q u i r e m e n t s for control and indication devices on
the controller shall be as follows:
a. One (1) "stops" pushbutton.
b. One (1) transformer type pilot light with red contactor "closed"
position.
cap wired to indicate
c. A total of four (4) individual auxiliary reversible contacts
from the main contractor, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C., wired to a terminal
block.
d. A motor space heater circuit wired to a separate terminal
block Arranged to accept an external A.G. supply.
7. Instrument Transformer

REV 00
- All voltage and current transformers shall be cast resin ttype.
- Voltage Transformers:
 Voltage transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 60186.
 Rating and type
o Rated primary Voltage depends on system data And as
per chiller’s Manufacturer recommendations
o The preferred secondary voltage Of measuring and
Protection transformers shall be as per chiller’s manufacturer
recommendations.
o Rated output capacity of the transformers shall be matched
to cover the burden required by the equipment connected, and preferably
be selected from the range of standard values.
 Class of accuracy
o Generally, measuring voltage transformers are Class 3.0,
except those for Measuring the supply of third parties which shall be
Class 1. Protective voltage transformers shall be of Class 3 P. The
Winding connection is
Depending on the metering and protection system connection.
 Protectin
o At HV side: Depending on manufacturer's practice and,

Whenever Necessary, high rupturing Capacity, short-circuit Current-
limiting fuses shall be in accordance with IEC 60282-1; Fuses, if
installed, shall be readily accessible and suitable precautions shall be
taken to enable safe removal and replacement of fuses. At LV site:
Industrial ZED-type cartridge fuses are preferred. The connection
between transformer and fuse base shall be as short as possible. All
protective fuses shall be capable of handling the inrush currents for all
service conditions, without abnormal ageing or deterioration. Voltage
transformers for automatic
voltage regulators shall have no fuses at all, but shall be connected within the
protective zone of the differential protection of the generator.
 Location
o Depending on the requirements, the following general
rules may serve as a guide to establishing the correct location of
voltage transformers on the assembly.
a. For voltage detection, etc. a measuring transformer shall
be connected to the bus bar of each section. In addition, however,
measuring voltage Transformers for incoming units, e.g. generator
and main intake feeders, shall be connected on the supplyside.
b. For the control supply of the switching devices of a
section, preference is given to a voltage transformer connected to the
bus bar side of the section concerned. Alternative supply sources are
acceptable for intake and power plant stations and large load
consumers, e.g. Electric- motor-driven compressors for
pneumaticcontrol.
c. Special arrangements shall be subject to the approval or
specification.
8. Current Transformers
 Current transformers shall be in accordance with IEC 60044-1.
 Rating and type

REV 00
a. Rated output capacity of the transformers shall be
matched to cover the burden required by the equipment connected,
and preferably be Selected from the range of standard values.
b. Rated primary current shall preferably be selectted from
the range of standard values.
c. Where required, the current ratio will be as per chiller’s
manufacturer recommendations.
d. Rated secondary current shall be either 5 or 1A; for remote
metering 1 A only is acceptable. Other means of remote indication
may be Considered and quoted for, e.g. transducer systems, but shall
be subject to the approval. Short-time thermal current ratin g of the
transformers shall be1 sec. When the electrical system value requires
time duration of 3s, the current transformers shall be rated
accordingly.
 Class of accuracy
a. Generally, measuring current transformers shall be Class
3, except Those for measuring the supply of third parties, which
shall be Class 1.
b. The over current factor "n" shall be < 5 in order to
prevent damage of instruments at maximum fault current.
c. Protective current transformers are to be Class 5 P; however, Class 10
Pis acceptable for the protection of e.g. electric motors, capacitor Banks,
etc. The over current factor shall be > 10 in order to ensure the
Proper working of the protective devices and follows: Class 5 P 1 O or 1 O P 10.

 Terminals and connections shall be indicated as
a. Secondary Terminals of current transformers shall be wired up to a
terminal block using 0-ring t ype lug with short-circuiting links,
located at an accessible place. One side of the secondary winding of
each current transformer shall be connected at this terminal block to
the earth bar.
9. Motor Management Relay.

 Medium-voltage starter Motor Management Relay (MMR) shall be
microprocessor controlled digital module with remote communications
capabilities. The size of the main control transformer shall be 500 VA
minimum. Suitable interlock shall be provided to avoid paralleling of control
power supplies for test and run positions
 The MMR can be part of the soft starter controller. Any functions
not found in the soft starter controller shall be supplied in a separate MMR.
 The MMR shall provide the following sets of functions:
o Motor Protection.
o Fault Diagnostic.
o Power Monitoring.
o Communication.
 The MMR shall be of the draw-out or flexi test type semi-
flush mounted on the front of the controller unit at an accessible and readable
level, and equipped with test facilities. The relays shall also be provided with
targets to indicate operation, where features:
applicable with the following
o Compact design and modular construction.
o Comprehensive self, monitoring andself-diagnostic.

REV 00
o Thermal overload protection.
o Thermal pre-alarm.
o Start authorization by detection of thermalstate.
o Under current protection.
o Voltage protection.
o Negative phase sequence protection.
o Earth fault protection.
o Locked rotor protection.
o Starting time supervision.
o Protection against successive starts.
o Serial communication interface for on-line and o ff-line
transmission of relay operation data, parameter setting, sequential e
vents, fault recording, remote setting, etc.
o Facility to hook up a remote PC for data analysis.
o Each relay shall be equipped with auxiliary relay,
having indicators and hand reset button.
o RTD motor winding and motor bearing
temperature monitoring and Protection.24V DC for RTD supply
shall be Included.
 Lockout relays shall be high-speed, electrically-operated, and
manually-reset with rotary switch and mechanical position indicator.
 The MMR shall include a timer to prevent unit from restarting
during equipment coast down and controls to automatically and immediately
reinitiate
starting sequence after machine has stopped. Timer settings shall be
coordinated with equipment and motor manufacturers equipment from frequent starts.
to prevent damage to
 The MMR shall communicate status and alarm information to the
Master Controller (located outside the MCC) using a Modbus RS485 link.
The MMR shall receive motor starting commands over this same link.
Coordinate communications protocol with systemintegrator.
 The starter shall include interpose relay that shall be energized by
equipment control panel "ready to-start" signal. The contact of this relay shall
be used as a free voltage contact to start the relatedstarter.
 The equipment supplier shall provide the inter-panel Communication, RTD
module, and energy meters.
wirings for the Starter
10. Metering
 An additional relay shall be mounted on the front door to measure
the corrected power factor and should measure current through metering class
CTs. The meter should also measure current and voltage in all three
phases, power factor, power (kW), kVAR
11. Connections and Wiring

 P
ower
Connection
s
o The controller Assembly shall be provided with the
following Items for Power connections:
o Compression-type lugs and supports For the incoming

REV 00
and Outgoing Cables. Where an incoming bus duct is specified,
suitable flanges shall be provided.
o Sufficient space for stress cones.
o Removable plate (non-magnetic for single conductor) where entry is from the top
of the controller assembly.
o Instrument and Control wiring is to be type SIS, THHN
or XHHW, stranded, addressed and secured or enclosed to maintain
proper separation from medium voltage parts and shortest
practicable e routes. Wire sizes to remote relay connections are
shown on the drawing s. Minimum sizes:
o Controls & PT Secondary wires 1.5 sq mm
o C.T. Secondary wires. 2.5 sq mm
o Where field installed, current transformer leads shall be run
as pairs with four twists per foot, widely separate from bus Bars and
other high Current conductors, in separate conduit if outsidee of the
switchboard,
and sized to their length as follows: Sizes to be design calculations.
Final as per detailed
up to 50'
up to 125'
up to 200'
4mm2 5mm2 6mm2
o Instrument and control wiring connections shall be made with
crimp-on,
insulated, forked lugs to screw terminals or by direct wire connection to box
or barrel lugs.
o Field wiring is to be made up on labeled, barriered terminal
strips providing back-to-back pairs of terminls with no more than 2 wires
per terminal.
o CT wiring is to be made up on Crimp-On insulated ring lugs
toscrew
12. Nameplates
 the following nameplates shall be provided:
o A rating nameplate for each controller unit showing as a
minimum: rated Voltage, rated current, interrupting current,
frequency, manufacturer's shop reference and drawing number.
o A circuit identification nameplate on front of each controller unit.
o Device identification nameplates for instruments,
meters, relays, fuses etc.
o A main identification nameplate for the controller assembly.
o A high voltage warning plate for the controller assembly.
 Nameplates for (b), (c) and (d) shall be lamicoid.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS
A. High efficiency - 2 " (50 mm) deflection - level adjusting - vertically

REV 00
restrained - spring type isolators -coil springs in series with neoprene waffle pad isolation
on base plate - furnished for: cooler/condenser assembly, and chiller unit assembly. Issue
calculation and selection adopting country seismiczone.
B. Thermometers – (160 mm) dial type bimetal adjustable angle

thermometer with stainless steel separable well are supplied for cooler refrigerant liquid
inlet and compressor discharge gas temperatures. Test thermometer wells are supplied for
suction line and the inter stage gas line at compressor.
C. Tools – Furnish special wrenches for speed coupling, drive shaft and main
shaft - snap ring pliers for seal and bearing retainer rings - special shaft socket wrench -
guide pins for Casing assembly -manual oil charging pump. A wall mountable lockable
toolbox is Provided for storage of the tools.
D. Refrigerant and Oil Charges - Initial charge of refrigerant R-134a shipped

separately by tank truck bulk delivery - initial charge of compressor and driveline
component oil shipped separately. Locally available refrigerant charge is not acceptable
unless tested and certified by independent 3rd party laboratory and confirmed by chiller
manufacturer.
E. Furnish unit mounted starters for the chiller lubrication system,

liquid refrigerant motor cooling pumps and purge system. These starters shall have
integral fused disconnects and control power transformers. Provide control power
transformer for oil heater and unit mounted control panel or panels. If more than one
control panel is provided for duplex compressors, provide all interconnection Wiring
and Cables between panels. All units mounted starters shall be installed in a panel
suitable for operation in 50 Deg. C ambient. Separate 400 V, 50 Hz 3-ph service will be
provided at the unit mounted panel. Provide suitable junction box and terminals
forpower.
F. Refrigerant Receiver and Pump out Unit

1. Provide two units each with one receiver with factory mounted pump-out motor and
compressor to store the refrigerant of the largest vessel. The receiver will be sized to be 85%
full at 105°F. Unit to be designed manufactured and tested in accord with ASME code for
unfired pressure vessels and ASHRAE Standard 15. The compressor will be provided with a
motor rated as per manufacurer requirements. The pump out unit and receiver will be
complete with all operating and safety controls, refrigerant piping, chilled water cooled
refrigerant condenser and valves. The pump out unit will be provided with a non-fused
combination starter/disconnect switch, start-stop button, red (stop)/green (start) pilot lights,
controls, control transformer, condenser water flow regulating valve and other appurtenances
as required for a complete and operating system.
2. The pump out unit refrigerant condenser will be designed for 93°F entering
water temperature, a maximum pressure drop of 15 feet of water, and a fouling
factor of 0.0005. U n i t will have flanged connections on the condenser cooler for
connection to chilled water systems by others.
3. Unit will be Skid mounted and
shipped with holding charge with Points of All connection
capped to prevent entrance of moisture and dust. Painting - All external surfaces
cleaned and protected by one coat of Ameron Amerlock 400 dark blue
epoxy paint, Compatible With adhesives typically used in application of thermal Insulation
materials, and acoustic wrapping. Touch up and Painting of the piping (Which is
field welded) shall be carried out after erection. The control panel shall be factory
painted ANSI 61 light gray outside and white inside.
4. Units will be piped to each chiller and provided with necessary isolating
REV 00
valves. The unit will be provided with a floor scale to enable refrigerant weight.
G. Painting - Painting - All external surfaces cleaned and protected with paint, the
color according to Architect’s Requirements compatible with adhesives typically used in
application of thermal insulation materials, and acoustic wrapping. Touch up and painting
of the piping (which is field welded) shall be carried out after erection.
H. Start-Up Supervision and Instruction -Services of a factory-trained equipment
representative will be furnished for fifteen consecutive normal working day (80 Hours) to
Advice on evacuation, leak testing, charging, adjusting, initial start-up and operation of
unit; and to concurrently instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operation of the unit -
for multiple units, three additional days supervision will be furnished for each additional
unit - expense allowance for one trip per unit shall be included.
Shall be conducted in an ARI certified test facility in conformance with ARI 550/590
Procedures, except as indicated.
E. At a minimum, chiller capacity shall be validated at zero tolerance to
meet the scheduled requirements indicated on the drawings with fouling factor specified.
Stable operation at minimum load of 10 percent of total capacity shall be demonstrated
during the factory test.
F. Temperat
ure Adjustments: Temperature adjustments shall adhere to ARI 550/590 to adjust from
the design-fouling factor to the clean tube condition. Test
temperature adjustments shall be verified prior to testing by the manufacturer.
There
shall be no exceptions to conducting the test with clean tubes with the temperature
adjustments per ARI 550/590. The manufacturer shall clean the tubes, if necessary, prior
to testing to obtain a test-fouling factor of 0.0000.
G. Test Instrumentation: The factory test instrumentation shall be per ARI

550/590 and the calibration shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
H. Test Report: A certified test report of all data shall be forwarded to

the Engineer for approval prior to project acceptance. Calibration curves and information
sheets for all instrumentation shall be provided.
I. Equipment Adjustments: If the equipment fails to perform within Allowable

tolerances, the manufacturer shall be allowed to make necessary revisions to his
equipment and retest as required. The manufacturer shall assume all expenses incurred by
the Client/Engineer to witness the retest.
J. Chillers shall be sound tested pressure level specified herein at the factory prior to
shipment to confirm the sound Tests and data shall be conducted and measured in strict
accordance with ARI 575 at the full load system operating conditions. The chiller sound
pressure level, in decibels (dB), with a reference pressure of 20 micro Pascal, shall not
exceed the specified noise level (80 dBA max at one meter from chiller at any part load
condition). Ratings shall be in accordance with ARI 575. No rising of leaving chilled
water temperature shall be allowed. A minimum of 75 percent of the sound data points
shall be taken along the length of the machine, and established as the minimum
percentage of total possible points used to determine s und levels. In the event that the
chiller does not meet the dBA sound pressure level, the manufacturer shall, at his
expense, provide sufficient attenuation to the machine to meet the specified value. The
attenuator shall be applied in such a manner that it does not hinder the operation or
routing

REV 00
2.10 Control Plant Manager

A. The next sequence should be applied for the whole plant with all components
quantities. I.e. all chillers, cooling towers, pumps and thermal storage tank.
2.11 Pump Control Algorithm

Depending on the configuration, pump groups can be set up to control a number of different ways.
● Staged based on # of chillers on:
● Specified in the configuration, up to the max limit of pumps allowed.
● Water Out Temperature
● This will stage and modulate the pumps in that group to maintain a water out
temperature
● Pump Out PSI
● This will stage and modulate the pumps in that group to maintain a pump out
pressure
● Pump Differential Pressure
● This will stage and modulate the pumps to maintain a differential between the pump
inand the
● pump out pressure
●
● Before a pump group is allowed on, it will require any necessary isolation valves (if
they exist) to be opened. These are determined based off of the following:
● Pump Group
● Pump Group Type (chilled water vs condenser water)
● Chiller Pump Group (chilled water or condenser water, depends on pump group type)
● Minimum Valves per pump
While in operation, the pump groups will use the setpoints for their respective pump
group to control (if the capacity control needs to maintain a temperature or
pressure).
● Each pump group uses the standard capacity control
algorithm, as described in the standard capacity control section.
● These setpoints are as follows: see section 5 - CPM set points for more information.
□ Pump Group 1:
• Setpoint 11, Pump Group Target
• Setpoint 12: Pump Group Ratio
• Setpoint 13: Pump Group Capacity
□ Pump Group 2:
□ Pump Group 3:
□ Pump Group 4:
□ Pump Group 5:
REV 00
The pump group control will look for both individual pump and pump group faults. These
faults will either lock out or put the pump (for individual pump faults) or pump groups
(for the group faults) into a safety state.
● The following individual pump faults are supported:
□ No Individual Pump Flow - default name: ‘Ind Pmp Flow’
□ High Amps - default name: ‘Hi Pmp Amps’
□ Low Amps - default name: ‘Lo Pmp Amps’
□ Pump Fault Switch - default name: ‘Pmp Fault’
● The following pump group faults are supported
□ No Pump Group Flow - default name: ‘Pmp Grp Flow’
□ Control SI Fault - default name: ‘Pmp Ctrl Flt’
□ VFD Fault - default name: ‘Pmp VFD
1. Chiller Control Algorithm
The chiller control algorithm is used to determine how many chiller stages need to be
on in order to maintain a target control temperature.
The algorithm will open isolation valves for each chiller as needed.
The chiller control algorithm will only allow the maximum number of primary chillers
(as defined in the configuration)
on. The other chillers will not turn on unless one of the primary chillers get locked out.
The chiller control uses the standard capacity control algorithm. It uses the
following setpoints: see section 5 for descriptions.
● Setpoint #1: Cooling Deadband (note: only the low zone is used
from this setpoint to determinethe cooling shutoff temperature)
● Setpoint #3: CPM Cooling Ratio
● Setpoint #4: CPM Cooling Target
● Setpoint #5: CPM Cooling Adjust
● Setpoint #6: CPM Max Dropping ROC
2. CPM Unit Lockouts

Freeze protection
● The CPM will lock out the unit due to a freeze protection safety,
defined in setpoint #111, value and time delay.
Control Fault
● If the Control Fault alarm ‘SI = ON’, the CPM will lock out. The
parameters for this lockout are defined
in setpoint #34.
3. Standard Capacity Control Logic

The standard capacity control logic has the following states (note that it includes
states for logic that controls above, and below the zone)
● Above Zone and Unloading

● Above Zone Loading
● Below Zone Unloading

REV 00
● Below Zone Loading
● In Zone Hold
● ROC Unloading
● ROC Loading
● ROC Holding
The states above describe what the capacity control function is doing based on the target,
and the control value. For example, in the cooling capacity control function, if the
control temperature is 50 degrees, and the target is 40 degrees with a zone of 5
degrees on the positive side, the unit will be above zone and loading.
2.12 Stage Up Hold
1. Stage Up Hold
This informs the user that the capacity control is holding while waiting for
confirmation that a newly requested
stage has turned on.
2. Staging Delay
This informs the user that the capacity control logic is holding for a predetermined amount of
time (set up in the
config, or hard coded) because it has just turned on or off a stage.
3. Fully Loaded
This informs the user that the capacity control is fully loaded.
4. Fully Unloaded
This informs the user that the capacity control is fully unloaded.
This control strategy is based upon developing a control zone and then to step the
compressor(s) through their stages to maintain the control sensor reading within
this zone. To accomplish this the system will constantly monitor the control
value, its rate of change and position in relationship to the control zone.
The actual strategy of a fixed step system, reciprocating or scroll compressor, and a variable
(slide) step system, screw compressor, digital scroll or a reciprocating or scroll
compressor with an inverter, is slightly different. The variable step system allows for
infinite variations of capacity while the fixed step system does not.
This option is active in all software and is specified in the MCS-Config program.
4.1 Target
The control target is specified in the appropriate setpoint. This will be the base of
developing the control zone.
4.2 Control Zone
The control zone is developed by adding the set points for the control target and the
zone+ set point to obtain the upper limit. The lower limit is obtained by
subtracting the zone- set point from the control target. Some control algorithms
(pump control, chiller control without setpoint 6 active) use the same value for
both the positive and the negative zone.
Once the control zone has been established, the system will attempt to keep the control
sensor reading with in this range.

REV 00
4.3 Controlling Sensor

4.4 This is the sensor that has been specified in the MCS-Config program as
providing the control value reading. It will normally be either the entering, leaving
temperature or the suction pressure. The set points must be adjusted to agree with the
controlling value.
4.5 The Rate of Change of the Control Input
4.6 The rate of change is how fast the control value is changing over a period of
time. If the control value is increasing the rate will be positive, if decreasing the rate will be
a negative value. How fast the input is changing, its direction and where the current input
reading is in relationship to the control zone will determine what action the system will take.
The maximum rate of change is configurable in MCS-Config. For cooling control, if setpoint
6 is active, there will be separate negative maximum ROC and positive maximum ROC
setpoints.
4.7 Step Delay
4.8 The system will not attempt to take action until the Step Delay reaches zero.
The initial value is defined in the appropriate set point. The speed that it is decremented by is
based upon the integration of the absolute value of the area of the Target – The Current
Value of the Controlling Sensor, and the step delay ratio setpoints that have been specified.
5. Ratio Adjustments
There are two different ratio adjustments. These adjustments control either the speed of the
step delay, or by how much the capacity control algorithm adjusts its capacity. The
purpose of these ratio adjustments are to both limit, and enhance the speed the system
reacts to changes indicated by the control sensor. The higher the multiplier, the faster
the system will react. Conversely the higher the divider, the slower the system will
react. These are usually set to 1.
The step delay ratio setpoints consist of a multiplier and divider. These setpoints multiply and
divide against (respectively) the calculated step delay to determine the final step delay.
The final step delay has aminimum limit of 1, and a maximum limit of 20.
The adjust delay ratio setpoints also consist of a multiplier and divider. They work like the step
delay ratio setpoints, but rather than controlling the final step delay, they control the final
% adjustment to the capacity. The minimum and maximum limits are specified in MCS-
Config.
Ex a m pl e
Set Points:
Target = 45º F, Control Zone + = 2 º F, Control Zone - = 2 º F, Step Delay = 300, Multiplier
= 1, Divider =2 Current Values:
Leaving Liquid = 55 º F
Using the above values the following would occur:
1. Step delay would reach zero in 60 seconds
a. This is because the difference between the target and leaving liquid is
10 degrees, which is then multiplied by 1, and divided by 2. This results in a
reduction to the step delay of 5. In orderto
decrement 300 down to 0, this would need to repeat 60 times.
2. Assuming the lead chiller is ready, it will be turned on.
a. Step Delay is reset to its initial value 300. It is not decremented for the
amount of time specified in the configuration. Its state would indicate a staging
delay, to allow the result of the last change to be evaluated.
3. If the slope calculation is less than specified the step delay will again

REV 00
be decremented and the nextavailable stage will be brought on when it reaches
2.13 CPM - States
We should consider the MCS controller as a state computer, that is decisions are made based upon
setpoints, timers and external data and the controller moves form one state to another. The
controller will change states to ensure the proper functioning of the unit.
The control state is displayed on the 2x16 LCD by depressing SERVICE DIAGNOSTIC key and
then selecting Control State option or it can be accessed via the MCS-CONNECT
program.
1. CPM Unit States
• Power Up – “CPM POWER UP DLY”

• Chiller Chiller Plant Manager goes into a forced 60 second power up
state to acquire ROC data for its control algorithms
• Lockout - “CPM LOCKED OUT”

• The CPM will go into lockout if the chilled water control temperature
SI (leaving water) falls below the freeze protection setpoint, or has a sensor
fault. At this point the CPM will cease operation and shut off its chillers,
followed by the pumps and isolation valves
• Scheduled Off - “CPM OFF:SCHEDULE”

• If the CPM is unoccupied, and the operating schedule setting is set to shut down
when unoccupied,
the CPM will enter this state. During this mode, the unit will act as if the run/stop switch was turned
off.
• Run Stop Off - “CPM OFF:SWITCHED”

• If the run/stop switch is turned off, the CPM will shut down all chillers,
followed by the pumps, then the isolation valves. During this state, there is no
control of the module chillers
• Pump Only - “CPM ON:PUMP ONLY”

• During this state, the CPM is on, but there is no demand for cooling.
The CPM will only operate its pumps at this point. The CPM will run the
pump control logic according to how they are configured for that particular
unit.
• Cooling - “CPM ON: COOLING”

During this state, the CPM has determined that there is a demand for cooling, based on the
CPM Target (setpoint 4) and the deadband (setpoint 1). At this point, the pumps logic

REV 00
will continue running as in pump only, but the chillers will also begin to be controlled
to maintain the leaving water temperature.
2. Individual Chiller States

• Alarm Off - “CHL IN ALARM OFF”
Module chiller has been locked out for some reason. CPM will close the isolation valve
when it is possible. CPM will not request this chiller to be staged on and will
instead use the next available chiller.
• Off and Ready – “CHL OFF/READY”
Module Chiller is off, but can be controlled by the CPM. CPM will close the isolation valves for
this chiller if not requested by chilled water or condenser water pumps.
• On – “CHL IS ON”
Module Chiller is on, its isolation valves open, and is being controlled by the CPM.
• Opening Isolation Valves - “CHL OPENING VLVE”

The CPM is opening the isolation valves for the chiller so that it can control the
module chiller. If the chiller does not confirm its isolation valves are open,
it will go into alarm off mode.
• Establishing Flow - “CHL WAITING:FLOW”

The CPM acknowledges a demand for the chiller, but is waiting for flow to
be established through the chiller before turning on the chiller.
• No Pumps Available - “OFF:NO PMP AVAIL”

The chiller is off and is stuck off due to a lack of pumps available to support it being on.
3. Individual Pump States

• Off - “PUMP OFF” The
pump is off.
• On – “PUMP ON”
The pump is on.
• Anticycle - “PUMP OFF A-CYC”

The pump is off and in anticycle. Once the anticycle timer is met, the pump state will switch to ‘Off’.
• Locked Out - “PUMP OFF FAULT”

The pump has been locked out due to a pump fault.
• Low Amp Fault - “PUMP OFF LOamp”

The pump has been locked out due to a low amp fault.

REV 00
• High Amp Fault - “PUMP OFF HIamp”

The pump has been locked out due to a high amp fault.
• Flow Fault - “PUMP OFF FLOW”

The pump has been locked out due to a lack of flow.
4. Pump Group Capacity Control States

• Group On - “GROUP ACTIVE”
The pump group capacity control is controlling the pumps as set up in the config.
• Above Zone Unload - “UNLD OVER ZONE”
• Above Zone Load - “LOAD OVER ZONE”
• Below Zone Unload - “UNLD UNDR ZONE”
• Below Zone Load - “LOAD UNDR ZONE”
• In Zone Hold - “HOLDNG IN ZONE”
2.14 CPM CONFG SCREENS.
Below is the ‘GENERAL SCREEN’, here you will point to number of chillers, number of primary chillers,
whether the chillers are hardwired, control options and sensors that will points to allowing the CPM to
control the state of these chillers.
1. Chillers
TheChiller Plant Manager will control and monitor up to 10 chillers.
Note: Each Chiller’s MAGNUM config must be setup to recognize the CPM.
The chiller control algorithm will only allow the maximum number of primary chillers
(as defined in the configuration) on. The other chillers, standbys, will not turn on unless one of the primary
chillers get locked out.

REV 00
Chillers in the CPM system can be hardwired directly to the CPM’s MAGNUM, or connected over the
MCS RS485 communication port. See diagram on proceeding pages.
New install, hardwired each chiller to the CPM.
Existing install, use the network communication MCS I/O to RS485 ports, daisy changed at 38400 baud.
NOTE: If using an MCS-MODBUS to communicate with a slave unit (Variable Frequency Drive, etc.) on
any of the Chillers connected to the CPM you must use the Ethernet port for communication to the
CPM MAGNUM.
2. Relays
Relays can be setup to communicate from each chiller to the CPM MAGNUM relaying the status of the
units.
• Alarm RO - CPM can have an alarm or one of the chillers can have analarm.
Example:
LOST Magnum #x
This alarm indicates that Magnum at address x is not communicating.
ALARMonMagnum #x
This alarm indicates that Magnum at address x has encountered an alarm.
• Warning RO - shows that a chiller, pump, etc. is in alarm.
• CPM Running Light RO - shows CPM is running.
Control Options
• Chiller Staging Method -
• Variable - Screw Compressors with slide piston, Compressor with a Variable Frequency
Drive (VFD), Modulating compressors, etc.
• Fixed - Reciprocating or scroll compressor.
• Control On: - This will be the controlling sensor used to determine the temperature of Chilled
water for each chiller. This example the controlling sensor will be ‘CW in’.
3. Bypass Valves
Bypass valve are used on a system, normally at the end of a loop. They will open and modulate a certain
differential pressure to insure continuous flow of the water.
If Chiller one goes down the Isolation Valve will be closed and the Bypass Valve will open allowing the
water to continue its flow through the system.
4. Lost BMS Communication
On a loss of communication to the BMS for more than 10 minutes, the controller will default to RUN, STOP
or NO CHANGE (if running continue to run or off leave off).
5. Isolation Valves Located On:
The Isolation Valves can be setup to be controlled by each chiller or by the Chiller Chiller Plant Manager.
6. Schedule Controls
Run /Stop - If the run/stop switch is turned off, the CPM will shut down all chillers, followed by the pumps,
then the isolation valves. During this state, there is no control of the module chillers
Night Setback - If the CPM is unoccupied, and the operating schedule setting is set to shut down when
unoccupied, the CPM
will enter this state. During this mode, the unit will act as if the run/stop switch was turned off.

REV 00
7. Staging Method
Normal
More Capacity- The first chiller will be loaded to its full capacity before the next one is enabled to run. It
will then be loaded.
Less Capacity- Lead chiller will be completely unloaded and run enable will be stopped. The next chiller
will then be unloaded.
Balanced
More Capacity- All chillers will be enabled to run and will be loaded equally. Less Capacity- All chillers
will be unloaded equally.
8. When to Rotate
Not Used - All Chiller Shuts Down default.
9. Sensors
These are sensor inputs (SI’s) that you can point to for various switches, Phase Loss, Ambient Humidity,
etc.
Plant Manager Run Switch

Mounted on CPM control box allowing the CPM to be manually be stopped or when set to run allowed the
CPM to run its algorithm. If the run/stop switch is turned off, the CPM will shut down all chillers,
followed by the pumps, then the isolation valves. During this state, there is no control of the module
chillers
Network Run Switch
Same as above, but allows the CPM to stop communicating with the units on the network that it is
controlling.
Demand Limit FLA %
A sensor input can be used to limit how far the compressor can load based on FLA%. Commonly used with
infinite capacity screw compressors and Centrifugal compressors.
Demand Limit Steps
A sensor input can be used to limit the amount of steps of capacity the unit can load to. Typically used with
On/Off scrolls or reciprocating compressors with unloaders.
Light Test Buttons

Points to a sensor mounted in the CPM control box to test that all lights mounted in the control box are
functioning.
• ROC Load - “LOAD HIGH ROC”

• ROC Hold - “HOLD HIGH ROC”
• Stage Up Hold - “STAGE UP HOLD”
• Staging Delay - “STAGING DELAY”
• Fully Loaded - “FULLY LOADED”
• Fully Unloaded - “FULLY UNLOADED”
These states are used by the capacity control algorithm when controlling the pumps on a temperature,
pressure, or pressure differential. They describe what state the control algorithm is in based on its
control input and the target.

REV 00
• Off and Ready

There is no demand for cooling, because the chilled water temperature is too high, the unit is set to off, or
because pump delay setpoints have not been satisfied.
CPM Opening screen – This is where you setup the various screens for controlling the units that will be
connected to the Chiller Chiller Plant Manager System.
The CPM config software consists of the following screens
• System
• Setup
• RO’s - Relay Outputs
• SI’s - Sensor Inputs
• AO’s - Analog Outputs
• MAG CPM Information Screens - used for choosing the points for monitoring the units the
CPMwill monitor.
• Setpoints
• BMS Points
• Lookup Table(s)
10. CPM ( Chiller Plant Manager)

Information Panel Selector
• General Info
• Chiller Info
• Pump Info
• Condenser Info
• Exhaust Fan Info - (Not used at this time) Cooling AHU Info (Not Used at this time)
2.15 Chiller Info screen.

This screen allows you to setup the controls for the chiller units that are communicating with the CPM.
Setup the Chillers names, network address of the chillers, number of steps for each chillers, etc. If
hardwired to the CPM, enter the information for each chiller.
2.16 CPM-PUMP-INFO.
1. Pumps and # of Pump Groups Info screen.
Control for multiple chiller water pumps, with primary/secondary, rotation, variablespeed. Up to 15 pumps
and 5 pump groups can be controller by the CPM.
2. Pump Group
Depending on the configuration, pump groups can be setup to control a number of different ways.
• Staged based on # of Chillers on: Specified in the configuration, up to the max limit of pumps
allowed.
• Stage on Water Out Temp: This will stage and modulate the pumps in that group to maintain a
water out temperature.

REV 00
• Stage on Pump Out PSI: This will stage and modulate the pumps in that group to maintain a
pump out pressure
• Stage on Differential PSI: This will stage and modulate the pumps to maintain a
differentialbetween the pump in and the pump out pressure.
2.17 Condensers
Control for up to 10 condensers.
Setup for Starting condenser, total # of Stages, Flow Switch, Faults and Condenser Group number.
1. Condenser Control Switches, Lights
Setup for pointers to Control switches, Alarm Lights and stages allowed.
2. Condenser Groups
Setup for what is the Condenser Group, is the group active, what Chiller pumps, what AO is controlling,
etc.
2.18 CPM EXHAUST INFO.
1. Not programmed into firmware yet.
2.19 CPM COOLING INFO.

1. Not programmed into firmware yet.
2.20 13. CPM SET POINT.

# (Number)–From 1 to 255 (maximum number of Setpoints supported). Only active Setpoints will be displayed in MCS-
Connect and on the keypad display.
Name–The Setpoint’s name consists of up to 12 characters. The name is displayed following the number on the LCD
display. The Setpoint name can be changed to make it more meaningful to the current application, however the
function of the Setpoint will remain thesame.
Value–The value or target of the Setpoint. With proper authorization this value can be changed, within limits
that have been established in MCS-Config.
Min–The minimum value that can be set. This field is not displayed and cannot be changed in MCS-Connect or in the
keypad display.
Max–The maximum value that can be set. This field is not displayed and cannot be changed in MCS-Connect or
in the keypad display.
Adjust Value–The interval that the value field can be changed by. This field is not displayed and cannot be changed
in MCS-Connect or in the keypad display.
‘Time (sec)’– this field has two purposes:

1) In either a LOCKOUT or ALARM type; this is the length of time the Setpoint must be true before it
will trip. This time is always in seconds and it is displayed on the keypad display and MCS-Connect if the
Setpoint is either a LOCKOUT or ALARM type. This field can be changed in MCS-Connectand through the
keypad.
2) In a non-safetytype Setpoint this field can be used as an extra timer. This will be specified in the
Setpoint definition if it is used.
Lockout Delay Hrs. – If a second safety occurs within this time, the unit or compressor will be locked out. This field is
not displayed and cannot be changed through MCS-Connect or in the keypad display.
Safety Down Time (min.) – After the first safety occurs the Magnum will wait this number of minutes before the unit
or associated compressor is allowed to run again.
Active or Non-Active – Only active Setpoints will be displayed in MCS-Connect or on the keypad display, but only if the
needed authorization level has been achieved.
Select Value: # decimals and print char – This indicates the number of decimal places and the unit character that
accompanies the value displayed. The number of decimal places is crucial when the Value, Minimum, and
Maximum data is entered in MCS-Config.

REV 00
Level of Auth. To Display – This column indicates what authorization level a user must have in order to view the
Setpoint from MCS-Connect or the keypad display.
Comments – This column allows the user to add comments about the function of the Setpoint.
BMS Writeable (Click Here to Disable All) – The Magnum software will enable communications with an outside
source, building management system (BMS), to modify the value of a set point. Object is to provide
maximum flexibility and capability with an BMS.
2.21 Setpoint Types
There are EIGHT different types of Setpoints. The Magnum CPM software determines if a Setpoint contains a
target value or is a safety. If it is a safety then its type determines what action the Magnum will take when
the safety occurs (either locking out the unit or generating an alarm only).
14.1.1 SETPOINT
This type of Setpoint contains a target or provides information for some action. The time element in this type can
be used for an additional counter if specified. This time is not displayed and cannot be changed through
MCS-Connect or from the keypad display.
14.1.2 LOCKOUT
This type of Setpoint contains a safety value and the time that the safety must be violated before the safety will
trip. Once a safety has tripped the Magnum will take the appropriate action, shutting down the entire
package or an individual compressor depending on the purpose of the safety. The Magnum will then wait
the Safety Down Time contained in that Setpoint before trying to return the normal. If successful, the
system will continue to operate. If a second trip occurs on the same Setpoint with in the Lock Out Delay
Time that is contained in that Setpoint the system will move to a LOCKOUT state. If the lockout delay
time is set to zero the lockout will occur on the first trip. This requires manual intervention to reset the
system. With each safety trip, the Magnum will generate an alarm; refer to section 8 Magnum Alarms
and Safeties.
Sec. to ignore safety - If this value is not zero, at compressor startup this safety will be ignored for the time in this
field.
Window to extend Safety ‘Time (sec)’ – If this value is not zero, at compressor startup the normal Safety Time
will be increased by the value in Safety Time Extension field for the time specified in this field.
Safety Time Extension (Sec) – This is the value that will be added to the Safety Time during the Window to
extend Safety Time period.
14.1.3 ALARM
This type of Setpoint has two uses:
1) When it is used as a safety, it will be similar to the LOCKOUT Setpoint except it will
never cause a lock out. The system will continue to try returning to normal operation after waiting the
safety down time. An ALARM Setpoint type will never require manual intervention to reset the
system.
2) When the Setpoint is being used as a second timer it will be available to change in a live
unit. If the type is not changed to ALARM then the time field cannot be viewed or changed from a live
unit.
Sec. to ignore safety - If this value is not zero, at compressor startup this safety will be ignored for the time in this
field.
Window to extend Safety ‘Time (sec)’ – If this value is not zero, at compressor startup the normal Safety Time
will be increased by the value in Safety Time Extension field for the time specified in this field.
Safety Time Extension (Sec) – This is the value that will be added to the Safety Time during the Window to
extend Safety Time period.
14.1.4 TIME
This type of Setpoint allows the ‘Time (SEC)’ value to be displayed and modified in a live unit.
14.1.5 TARGET

REV 00
This type of set point is used to develop a target with a high and low zone values. The decimal characteristics of
these values are the same as the Value field
High Zone – The value of this cell is added to the Value cell to create the high zone value.
Low Zone – The value of this cell is subtracted from the Value cell to create the low zone value.
Night Setback – If system has an unoccupied mode, this value is used to modify the value of the ‘Value’ cell.
14.1.6 CPM TARGET Determines the target temperature for chillers to maintain. Determines
the step delay for chiller capacity control.
Determines the zone value (both positive and negative) for chiller capacity control. Determines the maximum
positive ROC for chiller capacity control.
Determines the period of time over which current ROC is calculated (to determine value to put in, divide desired
ROC Interval by 10 for current version)
14.1.7 CPM RATIO
Multiplier A: Determines the numerator value for chiller capacity % adjustment scaling (variable chillers only)
Divider A: Determines the denominator value for chiller capacity % adjustment scaling (variable chillers
only) Multiplier B: Determines the numerator value for scaling the step delay decrement.
Divider B: Determines the denominator value for scaling the step delay decrement.
14.1.8 DELAY
This type of set point is used to develop a target with a high and low zone values. The decimal characteristics of
these values are the same as the Value field
High Zone – The value of this cell is added to the Value cell to create the high zone value.
Low Zone – The value of this cell is subtracted from the Value cell to create the low zone value.
Night Setback – If system has an unoccupied mode, this value is used to modify the value of the ‘Value’ cell.
1. CPM SET POINTS.
Setpoint #
Setpoint Name Description Type Function Description
Adds to the CPM Target to determine cut in temperature for

1 CoolDeadband High Zone Target
Cooling
Subtracts from the CPM Target to determine cut off temperature
1 CoolDeadband Low Zone Target
for Cooling
2 Not used
Multiplier A: Determines the numerator value for chiller capacity %

3 CPM Ratio Value CPM Ratio
adjustment scaling (variable chillers only)
Divider A: Determines the denominator value for chiller capacity %

3 CPM Ratio Divider A CPM Ratio
adjustment scaling (variable chillers only)
Multiplier B: Determines the numerator value for scaling the
3 CPM Ratio Multiplier B CPM Ratio
step delay decrement
Divider B: Determines the denominator value for scaling the

3 CPM Ratio Divider B CPM Ratio
step delay decrement
4 CPM Target Value CPM Target Determines the target temperature for chillers to maintain
Time
4 CPM Target CPM Target Determines the step delay for chiller capacity control

REV 00
Determines the zone value (both positive and negative) for chiller
4 CPM Target Zone CPM Target capacity control. When setpoint #6 is active, setpoint #4
zone is no longer used.
4 CPM Target Max ROC CPM Target Determines the maximum positive ROC for chiller capacity
control
Determines the period of time over which current ROC is cal-
4 CPM Target ROC Interval CPM Target culated (to determine value to put in, divide desired ROC In-
terval by 10 for current version)
Determines minimum % adjustment for chiller

5 CPM Adjust Value Delay
capacity (variable chillers only)
Min VFD Indicates the minimum amp draw, slide %, digital scroll load%, or
5 CPM Adjust Delay
speed allowed (usually 40%).
Open- ing
Max VFD Indicates the maximum amp draw, slide %, digital scroll load
5 CPM Adjust Delay
%, or speed allowed.
Opening
Max VFD Determines maximum % adjustment for chiller
5 CPM Adjust Delay
Adjust- capacity (variable chillers only)
ment
Compares the control value rate of change. Maximum negative
6 CPM Max ROC- Value Target Rate of Change allowed before preventing the unit from
loading. If the ROC is less than this value the capacity
control state is set to HOLDING.
6 CPM Max ROC- High Zone Target Added to the CPM TARGET to create the upper limit of the control
zone.
Subtracted from the CPM TARGET to create the lower limit of the
6 CPM Max ROC- Low Zone Target
control zone.
7,8,9,1 Not Used

0
11 PumGrp 1 Trgt
12 Pump Group 1 Ratio Multiplier B CPM Ratio Adjust Delay Multiplier for pump group 1
12 Pump Group 1 Ratio Divider B CPM Ratio Adjust Delay Divider for pump group 1
Pump Group 1
13 Value Delay Min Adjustment % for pump group 1
Capacity
Setpoint #
Pump Group 1 Min VFD Open-

13 Delay Max Capacity % for pump group 1
Capacity ing
Pump Group 1 Max VFD Open-

13 Delay Min Capacity % for pump group 1
Capacity ing
Pump Group 1 Max VFD
13 Delay Max Adjustment % for pump group 1

REV 00
Capacity Adjust- ment
Pump Groups
14-25 Same as 11-13 except for groups 2-5
2-5 Control
Setpoints
26 PmpA-C On-On Value Setpoint Determines the minimum amount of time between pumps turning on
Determines the minimum amount of time after a pump turns

27 COff-On Value Setpoint
off before it is allowed to turn on again
28 Pump Hi Amps Alarm/Locko ut Pump Hi Amps Safety
29 Pump Low Amps Alarm/Locko ut Pump Low Amps Safety
Pump Group Con- trol

30 Alarm/Locko ut Safety for pump group control sensor fault
Fault
31 Not Used
32 Pump Group VFD Fault Alarm/Locko ut Safety for Pump Group VFD Fault input
Standard lockout logic for pump group flow based off of flow switch
33 PMP GRP FLOW Alarm/Locko ut
on pump groups
34 CPM Control Fault Lockout Only Standard Lockout logic for chilled water control temperature sensor
35 LEAD CHILLER Similar to lead circuit logic
36 LD CHL DAYS Similar to lead circuit days logic
37 Group 1 Lead Pump Like Lead Chiller, except for Pump Group #1
Group 1 Lead Pump

38
Days
Like Lead Chiller Days, except for Pump Group #1
Groups 2-5 Lead Pump

39-46 Same as 37-38, except for pump groups 2-5
+ Days
Pump Group #1 Pre- Determines minimum amount of time pump must have flow before
47 Setpoint
Delay chillers are allowed on
Value
Pump Group #1 Determines how long after run stop switch is flipped that at least
48 Setpoint
Post- De- one pump stage will continue to run
lay Value
49 Not Used
Pump Group #2-5

50-56 Same as 47-48 except for pump groups 2-5
Pre/ Post
Delay
Individual Pump Flow

57 Standard Safety logic for individual pump flow switches
Fault
Alarm/Locko ut
58 Max Target Reset Setpoint Standard Max Target Reset Setpoint for chilled water reset

REV 00
This setpoint determines how long cooling will hold in a staging
59 Cooling Staging De- layValue Setpoint
delay once a stage is added or subtracted from the capacity
When a chiller shuts down due to lockout or normal shutdown, this

setpoint defines how long the CPM will wait before closing
60 Isolation Valve Close Value Setpoint
the isolation valve for that chiller. If this setpoint is inactive,
Delay it will default to 30 seconds.
Setpoint #
If active, this setpoint will lock out a chiller if an isolation valve is

Isolation Valve Proof
requested open for a certain period of time (defined by the
61 Lockout Lockout Only setpoint) and proof is not given to the CPM.
62-104 Not Used
105 IndPmpVfdFlt
The amount of time to wait after the CPM sets the associated chillers
run/stop to stop before cycling off the pump and closing the
106 Stage Off Delay Setpoint isolation valve. (For hard wired)
Once the CPM asks for a chiller to start it will open the isolation
valve wait for proof of valve being open, and once the pump
107 Stage On Delay Setpoint
starts this is the amount of time to wait prior to the CPM
sending the RUN command to the chiller. (For hard wired)
The value field will be the time the CPM chill water pump will run
while below the required amount of isolation valves before
108 Below Mini- Seconds Setpoint
shutting down the CPM and stopping the chill water pump.
mum Valve Time (SETPOINT, SECONDS)
If the chiller reports steps available and we go into the “CHL IS ON”
state and the actual capacity ON does not increase by one
prior to the timer expiring in this setpoint then that chiller
will be disabled for three minutes(hard coded) and an alarm
Set- point Value will be posted in the alarm grid. After three minutes this
109 NO COMP AVL Seconds chiller will become available again for the CPM to try again.
The value of this setpoint can’t be set below 65 seconds as its
hardcoded.
110 Not Used
Standard lockout logic for unit freeze protection based on chill water
111 FREEZE
control temperature (in or out depending on config)
Once the chiller has valve proof the CPM will look at the value in
this setpoint and start the timer and enter waiting for flow
112 CHL NO FLOW SECONDS Lockout state. If the timer expires the CPM will lock out the chiller and
move onto the next.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine chillers before installation. Reject chillers that are damaged.
B. Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and
electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting chiller performance,

REV 00
maintenance, and operations before equipment installation.
1. Final chiller locations
indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact
locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
3.2 CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install chillers on support structure indicated.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install chiller on concrete bases using restrained spring isolators.
Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section. Comply with requirements
for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
1. Minimum Deflection: 25 mm.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed.
E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping"
and Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings,
and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.
C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer,
flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve
and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange
or mechanical coupling.
D. Condenser-Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer,
flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve
and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange
or mechanical coupling.
E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend vent
piping to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect to chiller pressure
relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve.
F. For chillers equipped with a purge system, extend purge vent piping to the outdoors. Comply
with ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.
G. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe,
full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.
3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
5. Operate chiller for run-in period.
REV 00
6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
7. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outside.
8. Verify proper motor rotation.
9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup
and shutdown.
10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for
evaporator and condenser.
11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.
12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical
connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.
C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers.
3.6 FACTORY TESTS

A. The chiller
manufacturer shall be responsible for conducting all Chillers performance
factory test for each chillers module to validate the specified full load capacity, full load EER,
and IPLV and NPLV at zero tolerance and in accordance with ARI 550/590 except as indicated.
KW/T shall not exceed 0.65 at full load condition.
B. The chiller shall be also tested at part loads and constant condenser water
parameters to demonstrate possible operation at low load without chiller surge.
C. The chiller factory test shall be performed in the presence of the Client’s and
Engineer’s Representatives’ team. The team will comprise maximum four Representatives.
All expenses including transportation, business class airfare, hotel acommodation, etc
…. to be borne by the contractor
D. The chiller manufacturer shall provide to the Engineer a certified chiller factory test report
in accordance with ARI 550/590 to confirm that the chiller performs as specified Tests.

REV 00
SECTION 236500 - COOLING TOWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1.Open-circuit, induced-draft, cross-flow cooling towers.
2.Sand filters.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BMS: Building management system.
B. FRP: Fiber-reinforced polyester.
1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Free water drift loss shall not be greater than [0.001 %)] of the water circulated to
tower. The efficiency of drift eliminators should be verified by a testing agency approved by CTI
or Eurovent.
B. Cooling tower selection and sizing shall be based on listed ASHRAE Design
Ambient Tem- peratures.
C. Sound levels at 15 meters (fifty feet) in any direction from the tower shall not exceed
80 dB(A) when measured according to CTI ATC 128. If the tower exceeds indicated sound level, it
must be provided with a low (or ultra-low) sound fan, or provided with sound attenuation.
COOLING TOWERS 236500 - Page 1 of 20

REV 00
1. The manufacturer shall submit calculation and sound contour simulation for
simultaneous towers operation to verify the desired sound level
D. Performance Criteria:
1. Field erected cooling towers shall be tested, certified in the field, and rated in
accordance to CTI Test Code ATC-105.
2. Cooling towers manufacturers participating in CTI STD-202 program for
listingthermal performance test results shall have preference over non-participating
manufacturers.
E. Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which
may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insu-
lated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be
installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting safety
requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.
F. Design, construction, commissioning, operation, maintenance, repair, replacement,

and expansion shall comply with ASHRAE 188-201, Leginellosis; Risk Management Building
Water Systems. Submit water management program documents in compliance with listed standard.
A. Delegated Design: Design cooling tower support structure and seismic restraints and
wind restraints, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Engineer cooling tower structure and foundation as required

by the Control Documents. Prepare calculations, shop drawings and other structural data necessary
for the verification of the design of cooling tower structure and foundations, signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer responsible for theirpreparation.
C. Seismic Performance: Cooling towers shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to [SEI/ASCE 7].
1.The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be
fully operational after the seismic event."

REV 00
D. Cooling Towers and their component shall be suitable to work with treated effluent
sewage water (TSE). Manufacturer shall provide written confirmation that the tower material,
rating and performance are suitable for the available water quality
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Front End Documents Specification Sections.
B. The tower manufacturer shall submit detailed structural design calculations, factors of
safety and the method used to obtain them, as well as test data to confirm the material structural
strength characteristics.
C. Equipment History: The tower manufacturer shall submit a history of fiberglass

structured cooling tower installations, with a minimum of seven (7) installations for similarsized
equipment. Each tower listed shall include the application, capacity, model number, contact information,
and length of service for each of the installations.
D. Product data for each cooling tower including the following:

1. Rated capacities.
2. Pressure drop.
3. Fan performance data.
4. Rating curves with selected points indicated.
5. Weights (shipping, installed, andoperating).
6. Furnished specialties and accessories.
7. Installation and start-up instructions.
8. Sound attenuator details, insertion loss and pressure drop.
9. Aerodynamic modelling results.
E. The Cooling tower manufacturer shall submit list of major components, indicating
manufacturer, model number and country of origin, including but not limited to structure, fill, drift
eliminators, fan, gear, fan stack, casing, motor and shaft.
F. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's certified prints of cooling tower

assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include thefollowing:
1. Assembled unit dimensions.
REV 00
2. Operating weight and load distribution.
3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.
4. Method of field assembly and components.
5. Size and location of piping and wiring connections.
6. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
G. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with

thefollowing:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spacesreserved for electrical
equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical con-
trols and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
H. H. Certificates:
For certification refer to "Quality Assurance" Article. I. Source quality-
control test reports.
I. Startup service reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
L. Compliance statement clause by clause full and detailed compliance statement of the
specification shall be submitted where a clear compliance is indicated as follows:
a. “Yes” interprets full unconditionalcompliance.
b. “No” interprets a deviation (to be clearly indicated as remark or note in the dedi-
cated column). c. “Not Applicable” where the caseis.
It should be noted that other comments like “noted” or “partial compliance” are unacceptable and
will be interpreted as a non compliance.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI Standard 201 and/or in accordance

with

REV 00
C.T.I. performance test code C.T.I. ATC-105.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and

Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Double or at least exceeds the applicable

requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to

CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal
Performance."
E. If the Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project
documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the design team
before the bids opening, otherwise the Contactor shall furnish and handover the works at no
additional cost to the Contract.
F. ASTM D-570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
G. ASTM E-84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristic of

Burning Materials (Flame Spread Rating)
H. ASTM D-638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
I. ASTM D-695 Test Method for compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
J. ASTM D-790 Test Method for Flexural Properties of Un-

reinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
K. ASTM D-883 Definition of Terms Relating to Plastics.
L. ASTM D-2343 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Glass Fiber

Strands, Yarn Sand Rovings used in Reinforced Plastics.
M. ASTM D-2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of

Rigid Plastics by Meansof Barcol Impressor.

REV 00
N. ASTM D-3846 Test Method for In-lane Shear Strength of Reinforced
Plastics.
O. ASTM D-3917 Specification for Dimensional Tolerance of

Thermosetting GlassRein- forced Plastic Pultruded Shapes.
P. ASTM D-4065 Practice of Determining and Reporting Dynamic

Mechanic Properties of Plastics.
Q. ASTM D-4385 Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in

Thermosetting Reinforced
Plastic Pultruded Products.
R. CTI Bulletin STD- 137

Fiberglass Pultruded Structural Products for use in Cooling Towers
S. CTI STD-111 Gear Speed Reducers standard.
T. CTI STD-131 Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Panels.
U. CTI STD-136 Polyvinyl Chloride Materials Used for Film Fill,

Splash Fill, Louvers
and Drift Eliminators.
V. SPI Washington, DC
Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. – Recommendation Specifica- tions for Materials used in Pultruded
Structural Shapes.
W. Factory Mutual Corporation.

Approval Guide for Materials of Construction
X. Eurocomp Design of Code And Handbook (Clarke 1996)

The Structural Design of Polymer composites
1.8 COORDINATION

REV 00
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipmentprovided.
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel

supportstructures.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICES
A. Furnish and maintenance of cooling towers provided by manufacturer’s

representative for Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 WARRANTY
1.Warranty should indicate the specific Part number and Serial Number (where
applicable) of the materials and elements which will be installed in the Project and covered
by the said warrantee in the final version.
2.Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly
and severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted
item.
a. Defective materials and installation.
b. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
c. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
d. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.
f. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.

REV 00
g. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and
warranty is not cancelled due to the repairwork.
3.Warranty period shall start from the date of the substantial completion of the project.
A. Deliver cooling tower [parts] with protective crating and covering.
B. Rig units for unloading and moving as recommended by equipmentmanufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial
use for 7 years prior to bid opening. The 7 year use shall include applications of equipment
and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 7 years experience shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the
commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer’s catalogs, or brochures. Products
having less than a 7 year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be
supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
B. MATERIALS
C. Description: Induced-draft, counter flow cooling tower that is field erected. Towers
that will be accepted subject to field test by a CTI certified testing agency. All Towers to be
tested one by one while the remaining towers are inoperation.
D. Factory, field erected towers shall be assembled and adjusted at the job site by a
factory representative. Towers to be field tested by personnel certified by CTI.

REV 00
E. Tower Structure: The tower structure shall be field erected from pultruded fiberglass
structural members that are designed specifically for cooling tower application. The FRP
members shall be constructed of a fire-retardant, self-extinguishing resin system with a flame
spread rating of 25 or less. The FRP members shall be protected from UV degradation by the use
of surfacing veils and UV stabilizers incorporated in the resin system. See Reference Standards
included in this specification.
F. Bolts and Nuts: All external and internal bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel.
G. Pultruded Structural Members: The pultruded FRP members to be used in the

construction of this tower shall be classified, defined and specified as a minimum per CTI STD
137 (94) – “Fiberglass Pultruded Structural Products for Use in Cooling Towers”.
1.FRP Classification
Type II, III, IV pultruded shapes are acceptable with a synthetic polyester fiber-surfacing
veil with a minimum effective thickness of 10.0 mils minimum to provide long term UV
protection.
2.Resin Grade – Fire Retardant / Self Extinguishing

Grade 1 or Grade 3 are acceptable for the structure with a flame spread rating of 25 or less per
ASTM E84 flame spread test. The resin must be high quality and chemical resistant. The
resin shall be an isothalic polyester, vinyl ester or urethane type resin system.
3.Glass Fiber Reinforcing

The glass reinforcing may be continuous rovings, continuous strand mats; woven or non-
woven fabric, unidirectional fabric or a combination of these. The reinforcing shall be made from
Type C or Type E glass fibers.
4.Additives
Additives to the resin mix may be used to improve performance characteristics of the final
composite. Typical additives are UV inhibitors, antimony trioxide as an improved flame
retardant and a minor percentage of fillers. Any mold release that is used must not reduce the
long-term strength of any epoxy joint that may be used in the tower structure.
5.Workmanship
Fiberglass pultruded structural members shall be supplied in accordance
with ASTMD-
4385, “Visual Defects in Thermosetting Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products”, at acceptance
level 3. All components are to be factory cut and drilled. All machined surfaces

REV 00
are to be resealed with a compatible resin to maintain corrosion resistance and minimize
moisture migration.
6.Structural Analysis
Upon request, the cooling tower manufacturer shall provide detailed structural calculations
for the tower specified, verified and sealed by a registered professional engineer. Manufacturer
must be able to prove with test data that the FRP members shall meet the strength
characteristics to provide minimum specified service factors as required.
H. Structure Hardware: The column anchor plates shall be fabricated from 300 series
stainless steel and all structure connectors and fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel.
I. UV and Corrosion Protection: The FRP pultruded structural shapes shall include not
only continuous glass rovings and woven roving materials to provide tensile and compressive
strength but also external layers to provide long term UV added corrosion protection. The outer
surface of all components shall be fabricated with 10-15 mil thick synthetic or polyester fiber
surfacing veil (such as Nexus) that shall provide UV protection and weatherability. The
second layer under the polymeric veil shall be a corrosion and moisture barrier with a
minimum depth thickness of 30.0 mils. To prevent moisture migration, all cut edges or drilled
holes as received from the factory, shall be sealed with a resin compatible with the part
baseresin.
J. Exterior Casing: The exterior wall casing shall be cased with 12 oz./sq. ft. corrugated
FRP panels manufactured from fire retardant resin systems with a flame spread of 25 or less per
ASTM E-84, attached to tower columns with stainless steel screw shank, self- tapping fasteners
and self-sealing washers. Panels shall be lapped to shed water inward to the tower. Vertical
joints shall be lapped and sealed watertight. Casing ends at tower corners shall be covered
with 12 oz./sq.ft. FRP 90° corner rolls.
K. Longitudinal Wind Walls: A center wind wall partition shall extend the full
longitudinal length of the tower to stop wind blow through and the accompanying water carry
out of the basin in high wind conditions and when the fans are in the off or low speed positions.
The wind wall shall extend from the bottom of the fill support beams to 150- mm (6 inches)
minimum below the normal tower operating water level. The wind wall shall be constructed
with 12 oz./sq. ft. corrugated FRP panels manufactured from fire retardant resin systems with a
flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E-84.
L. Transverse Cell Partition Walls: Each cell of the tower shall be isolated from
the adjoining cells by full height transverse partition walls. The walls shall extend from the
bottom of the fan deck through the fill area and air inlets to the top of the basin curb level. The
partition wall shall be constructed with 12 oz./sq. ft. corrugated FRP panels manufactured from
fire retardant resin systems with a flame spread of 25 or less per ASTM E-84.

REV 00
M. Fan:
1. Fan Blades made of FRP, propeller with maximum tip speed of 50 meter per
second
(9,750 fpm). Fan blade assembly shall be both statically and dynamically balanced after
assembly of the cooling tower. Alternative fan material may be accepted subject to
demonstration of their adequacy and long life guarantee and better performance.
2. Fan hub shall be constructed of cast iron with epoxy coating or HDG Steel
with Triple Ep- oxy Coating against corrosion or steel with hot fusion bonded epoxy 400-
500 micron. Mate- rial shall be subject to Engineer Approval.
3. Complete fan assembly (fan and mounting) shall be designed to give
maximum fan efficiency and long life when handling saturated air at high velocities.
4. Each cooling tower fan shall be provided with a ball and pedestal type
vibration limit switch, which shall stop the corresponding fan motor in the event of
sensing excessive fan vibration.
5. Tower fan for induced draft towers of 60 kW (fan motor) and less shall be
belt driven.
6. For induced drafts towers larger than 60 kW (fan motor), fan shall be driven
through agear reducer.
7. Fan shall be capable of operating stable at 15% above design speed.
8. Fan noise shall not exceed 72 dB(A) at 1.0 mtand angle of 45° from fan
cowl..
9. Offer as option sound attenuator on fan discharge to reduce the specified fan
noise to be 60 dB(A) at attenuator discharge. (optional requirement)
10. Fan to be designed to handle static pressure of tower sound attenuator above
tower and louver above or on the side of towers. Calculate and include external static
pressure of Architec- ture louvers resistance and air flow passage resistance. Provide fan
sufficient to handle both static and dynamic pressures with 5% allowance.
N. Speed Reducers Gears and Drive Shaft:

1. Speed reducer gears shall be rated in accordance with CTI Std-1 11.
2. Gear reducers shall be of the spiral or helical, double reduction type.
Reducer shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Each
reducer shall be provided with an oil level cut off switch interlocked to the fan motor.
Each reducer shall be provided with an oil level sight glass, fill, drain, and vent lines
located in a readily accessible position.
3. Drive shafts shall be the full floating type with flexible couplings at both
ends and have a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Drive shafts shall be of stainless steel or
Carbon Fiber Com- posite , fitted each end with flexible couplings (stainless steel plate
type). Each drive shaft shall be provided with a galvanized steel guard, to prevent damage
to surrounding equipment in case of shaft failure. Provision shall be made for lubrication
of all bearings. Bearings shall be accessible to the extent that each bearing can be
lubricated without dismantlingfan.

REV 00
4. Gear reducer drive: Specially designed for cooling tower operation, with
dynamically balanced drive shaft assembly or shock absorbent flexible coupling re-
quiring no lubrication, cast iron case with readily accessible oil drum and fill, and self-
contained oil reservoir sealed against waterentrance.
O. Fan Deck and Cylinder:

1. Each fan shall be mounted in a fan cylinder (or stack) to elevate the fan
discharge air. Total extension height shall not exceed the fan diameter. Fan stack height
shall not be less 7 ft. 316 stainless steel fan screen shall be provided.
2. The fan stack shall be constructed of FRP (fiber reinforced polymer)
material
with a flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84 flame spread test, it shall include a
bolted-in-place removable access panel for inspection of the mechanical drive equipment
from the deck level. The stack shall also provide an observation port above the fan blade
path. Fan hardware shall be 300 series stainless steel. The stacks shall be bolted to the
FRP deck on 460 mm (18 inch) centers maximum, and also to tower roof deck structural
member in at least one place per fan stack section.Fan decks shall be designed to
withstand a live load of not less than 2.9 kPa (60 psf) in addition to the concentrated or
distributed loads of equipment mounted on the fan decks.
3. Fan deck shall be constructed of FRP (fiber reinforced polymer) material
with a flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84 flame spread test, in multiple
sections, forming a complete, vibration-free base for mounting fan, speed reducer, drive
shaft, motor, and fan stacks. Fan cylinders (or stacks) shall be also constructed of FRP
(fiber reinforced polymer) material in multiple sections. Fan deck should have access
door to interior of cooling tower via ladder and platform inside the tower.
P. Hot Water Distribution System: Water distribution shall be forced type system that
dis- tributes wa- ters through nozzles evenly over the entire fill surface. The distribution system
for each cell shall include adjustable flow control valves. The entire distribution system shall be
self—draining and nonclogging.
1. Pipe Material: FRP Water Distribution Header Pipe and Poly Propylene lateral pipe.
2. Pipe Material: Stainless steel (alternative option).
3. Nozzles: Poly propylene.
4. Maximum Pressure Drop: 80 kPa.
Q. Collecting Basin:
1. Furnish all necessary data and basin accessories to civil contractor. Supervise
work and submit necessary reports andinstructions.
2. Basin shall be completely watertight and constructed of high density, air-entrained
concrete.
3. Basin shall be constructed and installed to ensure that air will not be
entrained in outlets when operating and no water will overflow on shutdown.
REV 00
4. Each individual basin shall be provided with an individual outlet. Each outlet
shall be provided with a stainless steel anti-vortex plate and double stainless steel
strainers securely mounted to prevent trash from entering theoutlet.
5. Each basin shall be provided with overflow and valved drain connections.
Each basin shall be provided with a level transmitter and level switches. The makeup
water shall discharge not less than 50 mm (2 inches) or two pipe diameters, whichever is
greater, above the top of the basin.
R. Fill:
1. Tower fill shall be the PVC film type, manufactured from 0.38 mm(15 mils) thick
PVC.
Minimum accepted thickness after forming shall be 10 mils. Fill material shall be free to ex-
pand or contract without warping or cracking. No plasticized wood cellulose shall be pro-
vided for fill material.
2. Fill shall be removable or otherwise made accessible for cleaning.
Space supports shall be corrosion resistant and shall prevent warping, sagging, misalign-
ment, or vibration of the fill material. Fill material and supports shall be designed to
provide for an even mixing of air andwater.
3. Fill material shall be constructed of PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and
biological attack; with maximum flame-spread rating of twenty five according to ASTM
E 84; and fabricated, formed, and installed by the manufacturer to ensure that water
breaks up into droplets.
S. Drift-Eliminator Material: Eliminators shall be provided in the tower outlet to limit drift
loss to not over (0.002) percent of the circulating water rate. Eliminators shall be constructed of
not less than PVC corrugated sheet 17 mils (0.43 mm) and stiffener sheet 17 mils (0.43 mm)
thickness and bottom supported at 915 mm maximum; resistant to rot, decay, and biological
attack; with maximum flame-spread rating of twenty five according to ASTM E 84. Drift
eliminators shall be support with dedicated supports, maintaining sufficient distance between
spray branches and drift eliminators. Supporting drift eliminators on the spray system is not
allowed.
T. Louver Material: The air inlet louvers shall be fabricated from a minimum of
12 oz. FRP casing and supported with pultruded FRP and stainless steel structural members.
U. Louver material: stainless steel (alternative option).
V. Water-Level Control: Capacitance Level Transmitter and level switches and

motorized On / Off, makeup watervalve.

REV 00
W. Ladder, Safety Cage and Handrails: Factory fabricated and supplied, for field
assembly and installation. Ladders installed inside the cooling tower basin shall be of stainless
steel construct ion.
X. Fixing hardware used inside the cooling towers shall be in stainlesssteel.
Y. Sound matt: provide sound matt to contain splash water noise. Use PVC material
similar to fill material.
Z. Contractor to provide CTI test points required to perform CTItesting.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 16 "Common Electrical Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for

general requirements for factory installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA rated, Design B, TEFC type, premium or super premium
efficiency based on available sizes, corrosive or severe duty, variable speed, variable torque with
normal starting torque general purpose, insulation class F suitable for Am- bient Temperature of
50˚C. to be located outside the discharge airstrearn. Motors shall be mounted according to
manufacturers recommendations.
C. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled, energy efficient.
D. Protect fan, bearings, and appurtenances from damage by weather, corrosion,

waterspray.
and grit.
E. Lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible outside the wet air stream. Provide ac-
cess doors for inspection and cleaning.
F. Fans over 1 500 mm (60 inches) in diameter: Include a vibration cutout switch
installed in a pro-tected position and located to effectively monitor fan vibration. It shall stop fan
motor under excessive fan vibration.
G. Motor Speed: Variable speed complete with variable speed drive.
H. Motor and gear Removal: Provide a motor and gear removal crane system per cooling
tower cell as per manufacture standard. The crane to be of stainless steel construction.

REV 00
I. Motor Canopy: provide canopy for cooling tower fan motor.
2.3 VIBRATION CONTROL
A. Direct isolation (no base) with restrained springisolators.
2.4 HANDRAILS AND LADDERS A. Handrails: Fabricate

FRP rails.
B. Ladders and Safety Cages: Fabricate or FRP ladders and safety cages. Material shall be
subject to
Engineer Approval.
C. Stair case FRP, shall be provided to reach fan deck level.
D. Refer to DWGs that demonstrate extent of ladders and required deck levels and dimensions.
A. The cooling tower factory test shall be performed in the presence of the Client’s and
Engineer’s representatives’ team. The team will comprise maximum four representatives. All
expenses in-cluding transportation, business class airfare, hotel accommodation, etc …. to be
borne by the contractor.
B. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to

CTI's STD, ATC-105.
C. Filed Performance Test: filed acceptance test shall be conducted after the installation
in accordance with CTI acceptance test code ATC-105, by the Cooling Technology Insti- tute or
other qualified independent third party testing agency approved by the CTI.
Manufacturer's performance guarantees
or performance bonds without CTI certification and independent field thermal performance test shall
not be accepted.

REV 00
D. Noise: Tower to be selected and tested to proof that noise shall not exceed 72 dB(A)
at
1 mt. away from fan stack outlet (top of fan). Obtain also the result of noise with all cooling towers in
operation.
E. All Cooling towers shall be tested one by one while all other towers in plant
are in real operation to demonstrate actual CTI testing and proper thermal performance of tower
under test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt
sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation.
1.Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower on concrete bases using restrained spring
isolators. Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section. Comply with requirements for
vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1.Minimum Deflection: 25 mm
2.Provide galvanized-steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric pad.
3.Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
4.For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

REV 00
5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to

supportedequipment.
D. Install sand filters as required to maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances

for service and maintenance.
E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that

arenot factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service andmaintenance.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on

vibration isolators.
D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points
in piping.
E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage
system.
F. Connect sand filters as required to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance,
and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.
G. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22 Section

"Domestic Water Piping." Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union, flange, or
mechanical coupling at each connection.
H. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23

Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve,
REV 00
balancing valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection
with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to
cooling tower with a flange, or mechanicalcoupling.
I. Equalizer Piping: Piping requirements to match supply and return piping. Connect an
equalizer pipe, full size of cooling tower connection, between tower cells. Connect to cooling tower
with shutoff valve.
J. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return basin heater with shutoff valve, strainer, control
valve, and union or flange on supply connection and union or flange and balancing valve on return
connection. Provide supply and return piping with pressure gage andthermometer.
K. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23

Section "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping." Connect steam supply to basin heater with
shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange and condensate piping with union or
flange, shutoff valve, strainer, and an appropriate steam trap.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests andinspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform field tests and inspections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to
assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections: Comply with ASME PTC 23, "ASME Performance Test
Codes - Code on Atmospheric Water Cooling Equipment and CTI ATC 105, "Acceptance Test
Code for Water Cooling Towers."
E. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andinspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

REV 00
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.
1.Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions and perform the following:
a. Clean entire unit including basins.

b. Verify that accessories are properlyinstalled.
c. Verify that sand filters are properlyinstalled.
d. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.
e. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.
f. Lubricate bearings.
g. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and
correct problems.
h. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.
i. Verify proper oil level in gear-drive housing. Fill with oil to properlevel.
j. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for
harmonic vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in
abnormal vibration.
k. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.
l. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup
water-level control and valve.
m. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not re-circulating air into tower or
HVAC air intakes. Recommend corrective action.
n. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.
D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written
starting procedures
E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests andinspections.
3.6 ADJUSTING

REV 00
A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.
B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenancepersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.
3.8 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS.
Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the Employer /
Engineer. Witness test shall cover complete checking and testing of selected units according to
requirements of the specified regulations and standards as well as special requirements, finishes, software
and controls. Test procedures and programs shall be submitted for approval prior to factory visit by at
least 14 days. The contractor shall include in his price the cost of four man-visits from the
employer/engineer side for the factory witness test at manufacturer’s premises to cover all test cost and
expenses including business class air tickets, five stars hotel full accommodation and local transportation.

REV 00
SECTION 237200 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Heat wheels.
2. Fixed-plate heat exchangers.
Related Sections:
Section 237313 “Modular Central-Station Air-Handling Units”.
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall withstand the

effects of earthquake motions determined according to ECP201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, operating characteristics,

weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and
startup instructions.
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200 - Page 1 of 8

REV 00
C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails,
and frames for equipment mounting.
3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators
and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the
items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be
attached.
F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment,

accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
G. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of

this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

REV 00
H. Operation and Maintenance data for each energy recovery unit, control, and accessory
to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

air-to- air energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division
1 Section "Product Requirements".
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by architect,

except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
C. ARI Compliance:
1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply

with ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery
Ventilation Equipment."
2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation
Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."
D. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers." Or to be Eurovent certified
as per EN 308.

REV 00
E. NRCA Compliance: Provide roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.
F. UL Compliance:
1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "Ducted Heat
Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Non ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators." Or equivalent
European standard.
2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
B. Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified.
C. Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAT WHEELS
A. Casing: Steel with manufacturer's standard paint coating. Include the following:
1. Integral purge section.

2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section.

REV 00
3. Support rotor on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings.
Mount horizontal wheels on tapered roller bearing.
B. Rotor: Corrugated aluminum strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic,

noncorrosive silica-gel desiccant coating. Construct media for passing maximum 800 micron
solids and maximum 0.04 percent cross contamination by volume of exhaust air. Drive rotor with
belt around outside of rotor.
C. Drive: Constant-speed, fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer.
D. Controls: Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for
field wiring.
E. Controls: Panel, factory mounted and wired to motor with airstream thermostat and
manual motor starter for field wiring; with pilot-light indication of rotor rotation and provisions
for setting maximum and minimum speed.
F. Changeover Control: Electronic automatic summer changeover system for field

mounting of room and outdoor air temperature sensors, to provide maximum rotor speed when
room air temperature is less than outdoor air temperature.
G. Rotation Detection: Electronic control module, electromagnetic sensor, and iron

shuttle factory wired and mounted, with alarm bell for field wiring and mounting, and remote
alarm capability.
2.2 FIXED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Casing: Aluminum with ends flanged for duct connections.
B. Casing: Galvanized steel with ends flanged for duct connections.
C. Casing: Enameled steel with ends flanged for duct connections.
1. Insulation: 13-mm thick, foil-faced glass fiber.
D. Plates: Construct with plates evenly spaced and sealed, arranged for counter flow
airflow as indicated.

REV 00
1. Plate Material: Embossed aluminum.
2. Plate Material: Stainless steel.
3. Plate Material: Polypropylene copolymer (high-density plastic).
4. Plate Coating: Air-dried phenolic.
E. Bypass: Construct bypass plenum within casing with gasketed face and bypass
dampers, with rods extended outside casing for damper operator and linkage.
F. Water wash: Automatic system with spray manifold to individual spray tubes or
traversing type with stainless-steel screw and electric motor drive, activated by time clock, with
detergent injection.
G. Accessories:
1. Filter: 25 mm (1 inch) thick, disposable

2. Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1 insulated.
3. Humidistat: Wall mounted, adjustable.
4. Weather hoods (wall caps) with 6-mm (1/4-inch) bird screen and insulated
flexible duct termination.
5. Sound muffler.
6. Electric duct heater as per design drawings and schedule of equipment PART 3 -
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive energy recovery units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of energy recovery units. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install energy recovery units as indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions and rotation is
from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
REV 00
1. Provide access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Provide removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts
on building side for bypass during startup.
C. Install fixed-plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions.
1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to heat exchanger.
D. Install floor-mounted units on 100-mm high concrete housekeeping base.
E. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing,

adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturers' written instructions.

Wind and seismically restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails are specified in Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
G. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40
PVC pipe and solvent-welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.
1. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:
a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ducts and fan installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment.

REV 00
use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect and
clean exposed finishes. Remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to commission

units as specified below, and report results in writing.
1. Energize and verify correct rotation of heat wheels and fans.

2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass
tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air recovery units. Refer to Division 1.

REV 00
SECTION 237313 - MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes constant or variable -volume, central-station air-handling units

with coils for indoor or outdoor installations as applicable.
B. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at
design cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated
above.
C. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation, a
smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation. Such a deviation shall
not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or reward.
D. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the
peak of static efficiency.
E. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a
deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.
MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - Page 1 of 21

REV 00
C. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ECP201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each central-station air-handling unit specified, including the
following:
1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, humidifiers,
sound attenuators, mixing box with outside/return air dampers, filter housings, and all other
related accessories.
2. The Contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air-handling
unit assembly including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates, flexible connections,
door swings, control penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights, duplex outlets, switches,
wiring, utility connection points, unit support system, vibration isolators, drain pan, and
rigging points. Submittal drawings of section or component only, will not be acceptable.
The Contractor shall also submit performance data including performance test results,
charts, curves or certified computer selection data; data sheets; fabrication and insulation
details; and the number of pieces that each unit will have to be broken into to meet shipping
and job site rigging requirements.
3. Submit certified fan-sound power ratings showing sound power levels in each
octave band for fan and at entrance and discharge of AHUs at both present and future
scheduled conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal component
attenuation. Internal lining of supply air ductwork with sound absorbing material is not
permitted.
4. Provide certified fan curves showing cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per
minute), static pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and future design point
of operation and at maximum of present and future design cubic meters per minute (cubic
feet per minute) and 110 percent of design static pressure.
5. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU including
total, inlet and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses and unspecified
internal losses. Refer to air-handling unit schedule on drawings.
6. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions
indicated.
7. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
8. Material gages and finishes.
9. Filters with performance characteristics.

REV 00
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraints indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails,
and frames for equipment mounting.
and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

E. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit
with Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-handling units, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
G. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of

this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
H. Operation and Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in

the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.

REV 00
2. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be

designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B. AHRI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be

factory tested according to the applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430, "Performance Rating of
Central-Station Air-Handling Units," or equivalent European standard and shall be listed and
bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI).
C. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by UL
and comply with applicable NEMA standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance with
applicable parts of IEC 60034.
D. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any

section of air handler when unit is operating at design conditions, the Contractor shall replace
or repair unit to correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component accessibility
and future reparability and inherent access for maintenance. All repairs shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

1.6 COORDINATION
into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of central-station air-handling units

with piping and ductwork and with other installations.

REV 00
A. Deliver air-handling unit as a factory-assembled module with protective crating and

covering.
B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
into base.
B. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
B. Filters: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit.
C. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit fan.
D. Gaskets: Furnish 1 for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.
1.10 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the modular central-station air-handling units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
and severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted item.

REV 00
weatheringand use.

manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty isnot
cancelled due to the repair work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing

shall be hot dipped conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of 0.275 kg of
zinc per square meter (0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units may
be provided subject to the Engineer’s approval and documentation that structural rigidity is
equal or greater than the galvanized steel specified.
B. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive

assembly, coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, mixing dampers, and discharge collars
with flexible duct connectors.
C. The Contractor and the AHU manufacturer shall be responsible for insuring that the
unit will not exceed the allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances
for service and future overhaul or removal of unit components. All structural, piping, wiring,
and ductwork alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those specified, shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with
the arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the largest sections
possible subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit of all components and
casing sections shall be verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory tested
units shall be fully assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and job site
REV 00
rigging. On units not shipped fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each section and
include airflow direction to facilitate assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or shipping skids
shall be provided for each section to allow for field rigging and final placement of unit.
E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all
screws, nuts, and bolts required for assembly.
F. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative at the job site to supervise the
assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet manufacturer's recommendations and
requirements noted on the drawings. Provide documentation that this representative has
provided this service on similar jobs to the Engineer. If a local representative cannot be
provided, the manufacturer shall provide a factory representative.
G. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and
retain their structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly
of bolted panels and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a
more permanent gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.
H. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements

For HVAC Equipment."
I. Air-handling units intended for outdoor installation shall be of the weather proof
type. They shall have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish.
J. Air handling units with DX coils shall be completed with condensing units, specified
separately in other sections.
2.2 BASE
A. Provide a heavy-duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases
shall be constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm (6 inch)
high
3.5 mm (10 gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall be provided as required for
lateral stability. The Contractor shall provide supplemental steel supports as required to obtain
proper operation heights for cooling coil condense drain trap as shown on drawings.
B. AHUs shall be completely self-supporting for installation on concrete housekeeping

pad, steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.

REV 00
C. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed with
a rust inhibiting primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting exterior enamel.
D. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to air-

handling unit sections, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC" when air-handling unit frame is anchored to building structure.
2.3 CABINET
A. General: AHU shall be designed and constructed such that removal of any panel shall
not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Plug panels may be used to enhance structural
stability provided access space is not reduced.
B. Materials: Formed and reinforced, double wall construction, galvanized steel panels,
fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between
sections sealed. The outer walls of the double skin panel shall be precoated with oven backed
polyester paint finish. Units for outdoor installation shall have protective pitched roof and
corrosion resistant paint finish. Units with 100% outdoor air shall have internal sides protected
with corrosion resistant paint finish.
1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1.2 mm.
2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1 mm.
3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 2.0 mm, with additional 1.0 mm galvanized
checkered plate at fan and filter plenum sections.
C. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing panels

shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).
D. Condensation Requirements: AHUs shall be designed to ensure that there is no

condensation on the exterior of the unit based on outside design conditions. Through metal
connections between inner and outer panels shall be kept to an absolute minimum. If tubular
structural members are used inside of tube shall be insulated equal to casing.
E. Unit sections shall be tightly joined in the field through the use of all-thread rod or
casing brackets and shall be gasketed to make airtight.
F. Exterior and interior panels shall be secured to the support channels with stainless
steel screws and gaskets installed around the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall not be
greater than 229 mm (nine inches). Panels shall be completely removable to allow removal of
fan, coils, and other internal components for future maintenance, repair, or modifications.
Welded exterior panels are not acceptable.

REV 00
G. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations

through casing for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing. Coordinate
number and location with electrical and temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate lights,
switches, and duplex outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All penetrations and
equipment mounting shall be provided in the factory. All field penetrations shall be performed
neatly by drilling or saw cutting. No cutting by torches will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings
airtight.
H. Insulation: CFC free polyurethane insulation, complying with NFPA 90A flame
spread and smoke generation requirements, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems," for insulation or equivalent European standard.
1. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall be
held securely in position between the inner and outer skin of casing.
2. Thickness: 50 mm.
3. Insulation shall have 44 kg/cubic meter minimum density rigid glass fiber.
Insulation shall meet ASTM C1071 requirements.
4. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical
fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from and including the
cooling coil section.
I. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with
hinges, latches, handles, and gaskets. Provide in each access section. Doors shall be a minimum
of 600 mm (24 inches) wide and shall be the full casing height up to a maximum of 1850 mm
(6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and latched to provide an airtight seal. Each door
shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm (6 inch x 6 inch) double thickness reinforced glass
or Plexiglas window or 200mm diameter of polycarbonate inspection window in a gasketed
frame.
1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard, designed for door size, weight and pressure
classifications. Hinges shall hold door completely rigid with minimum 45 kg (100 pound)
weight hung on latch side of door.
2. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive
cam action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open against unit
operating pressure shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-style latches which allow the
door to open approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require approximately 0.785 radian
(45 degrees) further movement of the handle for complete opening. Latch shall be capable
of restraining explosive opening of door with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12
inches water) of differential static pressure or 1-1/2 times operating differential pressure
whichever is greater.
3. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct
compression with no sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with high quality
mastic to eliminate possibility of gasket slipping or coming loose.
REV 00
4. Fan section and filter sections shall have inspection and access panels and
doors sized and located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections.
J. Floor:
1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a
minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed load without
permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation.
2. Provide adequate structural base members beneath floor in service access
sections to support typical service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or internal
insulation.
3. Unit floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall
be watertight with drain pan.
4. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing
floors shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).
K. Drain Pans: Formed sections of insulated stainless steel (316), sheet based. Fabricate
pans in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping
connections and return bends) when units are operating at maximum cataloged face velocity
across cooling coil. Depth of drain pan shall be at least 43 mm (1.7 inches) and shall handle all
condensate without overflowing. Drain pan shall be sloped to drain. Drain pan shall be
continuous metal or welded watertight. No mastic sealing of joints exposed to water will be
permitted. Drain pan shall be placed on top of casing floor or integrated into casing floor
assembly. Maximum overall thermal conductance of floor/drain pan assembly shall not exceed
0.68 W/square meter K (0.12 Btu/ (h. sq. ft. degree F)).
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam or mineral

wool insulation and seal moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: One side end or Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-underside Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough
to collect condensate from top coil.
5. Cooling coil ends shall be enclosed by cabinet and shall be factory insulated
against sweating or shall drain to a drain pan.
6. All pans shall have a single or double slope to the drain point.
L. Electrical and Lighting: Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to

Division 26 Sections.

REV 00
1. Provide factory installed vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style
with glass globe and cast aluminum guard shall be installed in each access section, fan, coil,
filter and mixing box sections.
2. A switch shall control the lights in each compartment with pilot light
mounted outside the respective compartment access door. Wiring between switches and
lights shall be factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly installed electrical conduits
and terminate in a junction box for field connection to the building system. Provide single
point 230 volt - one phase connection at junction box.
3. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
4. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.
5. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted
disconnect switch. Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.
M. Inspection Windows: Provide factory installed 150mm glass inspection windows on

fan and filter plenum section access panels of air-handling units.
2.4 FAN SECTION
A. Fan-Section Construction (supply and return fans sections as applicable): Belt-driven

centrifugal fans, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch,
drive assembly, and support structure, equipped with formed-steel channel base for integral
mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, and motor
on structural-steel frame, with frame mounted on base with vibration isolation.
B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow entry to
internal parts and components.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be double- width,
double-inlet type with backward-curved or airfoil blades as indicated.
1. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange,
back plate, backward-curved blades, and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
2. Airfoil Wheel: Steel; with smooth, curved inlet flange; back plate;
die-formed, hollow, airfoil blades; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
3. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to
secure to fan wheel hub.
4. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-
type ball or roller bearings with the following:

REV 00
a. Rated Bearing Life: ANSI/ABMA STD 9 or ABMA STD 11, L-50 of
200,000 hours.
5. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
6. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
7. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at
8. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt
drives.
9. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements, 2.7 mm thick, 20-
mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
10. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
11. Accessories: Provide the following:
a. Variable torque drives.

b. Discharge dampers.
12. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, PVC

coated, minimum 25 mm static deflection, with side snubbers. Allowable vibration
tolerances for fan shall not exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of
0.005 m/s (0.20 inch per second) RMS when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of
machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet
if bearings are concealed.
D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to
ANSI/AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear
AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, temperature,
rotation speed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
2.5 MOTORS

REV 00
A. General: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for
general requirements.
B. Provide internally vibration isolated fan, motor and drive, mounted on a common
integral bolted or welded structural steel base with adjustable motor slide rail with locking
device. Provide vibration isolators and flexible duct connections at fan discharge to completely
isolate fan assembly. Fan drive and belts shall be factory mounted with final alignment and belt
adjustment to be made by the Contractor after installation.
C. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
D. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range.
E. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40

deg C ambient for continuous duty at full load (Class A or Class F Insulation).
F. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
G. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1 or IEC 60034-30-1 (IE3), general purpose,

continuous duty, Design B.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
H. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce
lateral or axial thrust in motor.
I. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:

during operation.
building occupants.

REV 00
J. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
K. Noise Rating: Quiet.
L. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled

according to IEEE 112 or IEC 60034, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall
have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112 or IEC
60034, Test Method B.
M. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,

construction, and special features.
N. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 26 Sections.
2.6 COILS
A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating
and cooling coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for
maintenance and to assure full airflow through coils.
B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.
1. Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes.

2. Tubes: Seamless copper, minimum tube size 0.5 inch, minimum thickness:
0.035 inches.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel with thickness of 1.6 mm.
4. Headers for Steam and Water Coils: Steel, cast iron, or copper with
connections for drain valve and air vent, and threaded piping connections.
C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller
sizes and with return headers in larger sizes.
D. Coil face area velocity is not to exceed 2.5 meters per second at specified air quantity.
Coil to have number of rows and fins per cm to satisfy required capacity at specified condition,
with not more than 5 fins per cm.

REV 00
E. Number of circuits to be such that water velocity satisfies specified conditions
without exceeding specified maximum water pressure drop through coil. Water velocity
through tubes is not to exceed 1.8 meters per second and not less than 0.76 meters per second.
F. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils: ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standard for Refrigeration Systems”, with the following features:
1. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper.

2. Refrigerant Distributor: Design for low pressure drop, for down feed with
solder connections, and with maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor.
G. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed

surface coils for rating according to ANSI/AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and
Air- Heating Coils."
2.7 DAMPERS
A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500-D, "Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face
velocity through damper and 1000-Pa (4-inch wg) pressure differential.
1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated.
B. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades mechanically fastened

to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with
common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.
C. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades

mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Connect
operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate
simultaneously. Cabinet support members shall hold 50-mm thick, pleated, flat permanent or
throwaway filters. Provide hinged access panels or doors to allow removal of filters from both
sides of unit.
2.8 FILTER SECTION
A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A or equivalent European standard.
B. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

REV 00
C. Filter Housing: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat, angular
orientation, or bag filters, minimum thickness, 14 gage galvanized steel with baked finish
inside and out. Joints shall be continuously welded. Flange shall have a fixed air-sealing gasket
with hollow cross section, closed cell rubber or resilient neoprene, suitable for repetitive reuse.
Cabinets shall have flanged ends for connection to adjacent ducts. Hinged access doors on both
cabinet sides. Provide access doors with fixed air sealing gaskets to be airtight at the static
pressure expected in service. Weld test ports into each filter cabinet or plenum. Test port shall
not penetrate to filter frame or media.
D. Pre-filters: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers flat panel with cardboard frame and
perforated metal retainer, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face velocity of
2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.
E. Permanent Filters: Washable, cleanable, 50 mm thick, with aluminum- or stainless-

steel media and stainless-steel frames, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face
velocity of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to
80 percent.
F. Permanent Filters: Bag type, viscous coated fiber, 450mm long with holding stainless
steel frames and fasteners, and ASHRAE filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.
G. Construction Filters for pre-commissioning: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers

encased in fiberboard cell with perforated-metal media support, clean airflow resistance of 37
Pa at face velocity of 1.52 m/s and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82
percent.
H. Filter Gage:
1. 90-mm- (3-1/2-inch-) diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.

2. Vent valves.
3. Black figures on white background.
4. Front recalibration adjustment.
5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.
6. Range: 0 to 1000 Pa (0- to 4.0-inch wg).
7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 6-mm

(1/4-inch) plastic tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves.
2.9 ENERGY RECOVERY SECTION

REV 00
A. Heat Recovery Wheels, or Heat Pipes shall be factory installed within Air Handling
Units, as per design requirements where needed.
B. Refer to Section “Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment”
2.10 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Variable air volume Air Handling units shall be provided with Variable Speed
Drives, as specified in Division 26, Section 262419 “Motor-Control Centers”.
2.11 TESTING
A. General:
1. ARI certified AHUs: AHUs selected (One AHU per Type/Model) by the
Engineer for testing shall be factory assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall be
shipped prior to any untested units.
2. ARI/AHRI certified AHUs: All units shall be ARI/AHRI certified.
3. The specified units to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in
accordance with specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit
capacities, ensure correct fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.
B. Factory Test:
1. The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods
specified in Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”; however test methods including
instruments used must be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to initiating testing.
The selected AHUs (One AHU per Type/ MODEL) shall be tested for air volume, static
pressure for AHU and each shall be tested for air volume, static pressure for AHU and each
component, fan RPM and power consumption for the maximum of present or future design
conditions. Submit fan curves showing test results.
C. Approval:
1. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of
deficiency and re-testing of unit.
2. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
REV 00
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling units.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical

to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's

1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using

neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using
threaded steel rods and vibration isolation.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for
service and maintenance.
A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base
100 mm larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.
B. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
C. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C150/C150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight
aggregate.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

REV 00
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connection piping to suspended air-handling units with flexible connectors.
3. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
4. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of
Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or
balancing valve and union or flange at each connection.
5. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section

"Refrigerant Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. The
connections with factory-provided duct collars and flexible connections.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections.
1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical

connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -
486B.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Section
"Building Management System."
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING

REV 00
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum
clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to perform the following:
1. Inspect field assembly of components and installation of central-station air-

handling units including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:

connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that proper thermal
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
verify free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,
align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.

9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
11. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units include the following:
wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm.

REV 00
a. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
conditions. Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record
fan performance.
D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling
system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central-station air-handling units. Refer to Division 1.

REV 00
SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop

units) for cooling.
A. Wind-Restraint Performance:
1. Basic Wind Speed (3 sec gust): 33 m/s.

2. Building Classification Category: as specified in section 230548 “Vibration
and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.
3. Minimum 48.8 kg/sq. m (10 lb/sq. ft) multiplied by the maximum area of the
mechanical component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction,
and 45 degrees either side of normal.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated,
including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and
startup instructions.

PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - Page 1 of 18

REV 00
each field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure.

Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
3. Wind- Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and snubbers. Show
anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.

2. Roof openings
3. Roof curbs and flashing.
E. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this

Section. Indicate and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies
of checklists.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and

REV 00
A. AHRI Compliance:
1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy
efficiencies for RTUs.
2. Comply with AHRI 270 or AHRI 370 for testing and rating sound
performance for RTUs.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling coils.
D. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA

90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
G. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

H. Comply with NFPA 70.
Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation
instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
1.7 COORDINATION
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

penetrations with roof

REV 00
construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.8 WARRANTY
Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted item.

Defective materials and installation.
Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are
disturbed and that may
be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure
that their
Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP UNITS SMALLER THAN 21 kW (6 TONS)

REV 00
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans,
refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection
and access to internal parts, minimum 13-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical
and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and
temperature- resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized or stainless-steel sheet, a

minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation

and seal moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating for galvanized steel pans: Corrosion-resistant
compound.
E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
F. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven with permanently

lubricated motor bearings.
G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
H. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel
casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy
coating.
I. Compressors: Hermetic with integral vibration isolators, overcurrent and high-

temperature protection, internal pressure relief.
REV 00
J. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
8. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic
expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.
K. Air Filtration:
1. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

2. Glass Fiber: Minimum 80 percent arrestance, and MERV 5.
L. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover.
M. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup

with 7-day programming.
2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS, 26 TO 70 kW (7-1/2 TO 20 TONS)
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection
and access to internal parts, minimum 13-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical
and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.

REV 00


compound.
F. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves or
direct- drive fans; and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
H. Air Filtration:

2. Prefilter: permanent washable aluminum type, 50mm thick with minimum 75

percent arrestance, and MERV 4.
3. Bag Filter: Class 1 type with minimum 98 percent arrestance, and MERV 14,
in galvanized steel frame.
I. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel
casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy
coating.
J. Compressors: Serviceable, fully hermetic compressors with integral vibration

isolators, overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief,.

REV 00
K. Refrigeration Specialties:
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
9. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
L. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-

steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in
reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so
dampers operate simultaneously.
1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as
required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
M. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy- control
device.
N. Constant-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller and

electronic-control system.
O. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with
7-day programming.
P. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air

plenum, to de-energize unit.
Q. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and

communicates with central control processor.

REV 00
1. Control Outputs: 2-stage cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation

and economizer damper operation.
2. Control Sensors: Return-air-temperature sensor, fan airflow-proving switch,
dirty- filter switch, discharge-air-temperature sensor, room-temperature sensor, and night-
setback-override switch.
3. Control Features: Day/occupied modes for high or low enthalpy and
night/unoccupied mode.
4. Comply with requirements of Building Management System (BMS)
2.3 ROOFTOP UNITS LARGER THAN 70 kW (20 TONS)
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof, double-wall construction with

corrosion- protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for
inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 25-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts for
electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.



compound.
REV 00
F. Evaporator Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and
permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G. Return-Air Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and
permanently lubricated motor bearings.
H. Exhaust/Relief: Barometric damper.
I. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
J. Air Filtration:

2. Prefilter: permanent washable aluminum type, 50mm thick with minimum 75

percent arrestance, and MERV 4.
3. Bag Filter: Class 1 type with minimum 98 percent arrestance, and MERV 14,
in galvanized steel frame.
K. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel
casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 3110 kPa
(450 psig) and leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) with air under water. Insulate coil section. Coils
shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy coating.
L. Compressors: Semihermetic or hermetic compressors with integral vibration

isolators, overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, .
M. Refrigeration Specialties:
2. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced coil refrigerant circuiting with
circuit for each compressor.
4. Refrigerant filter/dryer and sight glasses.
REV 00
9. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
10. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
N. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-

steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in
reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so
dampers operate simultaneously.
1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as
required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
O. Economizer Dampers: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers with damper operator
and control package.
1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 54 L/s per kW

(400 cfm per ton) with 250-Pa (1-inch wg) pressure differential.
2. Damper Operator: 24 V, with gear train sealed in oil with spring return.
P. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy- control
device.
Q. Temperature Control: Factory-installed, demand-oriented, solid-state control system

with minimum of 2 cooling steps, including solid-state room thermostat with dead band, and
subbase with system and fan switches. Include the following:
1. Discharge-air-temperature reset with space-temperature override.

2. 7-day programmable clock, with power-failure carryover, for remote
mounting.
3. Warm-up cycle.
R. Remote-Control Panel: Contains controls and indicator lights as follows:
1. Heat-cool-auto system switch.

REV 00
2. On-off fan switch.
3. Minimum outside-air damper potentiometer position LCD.

4. Supply-fan operating indicator light.
5. Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.
6. Clogged filters indicator light.
S. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air

plenum, to de-energize unit.
T. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 220-V, ac fused outlet, separately fused, located in

unit cabinet or in roof curb perimeter.
U. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and

monitors unit and communicates to central control processor.
1. Control Outputs: cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and

economizer damper operation.
2. Return-air-, discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, space-, control set-point temperature
LCD.
3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4. Filter pressure drop LCD.
5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, operating mode.
6. Inlet-vane and economizer-damper position LCD.
7. Duct static-pressure LCD.
8. Alarm LCD.
9. Control Features: Day/occupied and night/unoccupied modes, temperature
reset.
10. Comply with requirements of Building Management System (BMS)
2.4 ROOF CURBS
A. Manufacturer's standard, insulated with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing,

factory- installed wood nailer, according to NRCA standards.
1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

REV 00
a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.
b. Thickness: minimum 25 mm (1 inch).
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the

internal surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when
applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated
with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or
fabric depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
3. Curb Height: Minimum 400 mm.

4. Isolation Curb: Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation
springs and vertical and horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof membrane. 50-
mm static deflection.
B. Wind Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to
match RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site. Comply with
requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for wind-load
requirements.
2.5 MOTORS
B. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design

B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to AHRI 210/240,

"Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment."
REV 00
B. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to AHRI 340/360,

"Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump
Equipment."
C. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AHRI 270, "Standard for Sound
Performance Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI

370, "Standard for Sound Performance Rating of Large Air-Cooled Outdoor Refrigeration and
Air-Conditioning Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation
and performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level. Install and secure rooftop
units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.
D. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations
and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:

REV 00
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
B. Duct installation
requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Where indicated,

terminate return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom
of unit.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
3.4 COMMISSIONING

report results in writing:
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
1. Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and
fans.
5. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
6. Check that labels are clearly visible.
7. Clean furnace flue and condenser and inspect for construction debris.
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
9. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
10. Verify that filters are installed.

REV 00
11. Adjust vibration isolators.
12. Connect and purge gas line.
13. Check acoustic insulation.
14. Check operation of barometric dampers.
D. Lubricate bearings on fan.
E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Perform starting of refrigeration in summer only.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
I. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
J. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjust
burner for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.
1. Measure gas pressure on manifold.

2. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
3. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
4. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and
oxygen concentration.
5. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum
firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
6. Check for backdraft under full operation.
K. Calibrate thermostats.
L. Adjust and check high-temperature limits.

REV 00
M. Check internal isolators.
N. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return- and relief-air
dampers.
O. Check controls for correct sequencing of mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal
and emergency shutdown.
P. Start refrigeration and measure and record the following:
1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
4. Air-cooled-condenser, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Q. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan
volumes on fan curve.
1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.
R. Simulate maximum cooling demand and check the following:
1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting air through condenser or from condenser to outside-air
intake.
S. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes.
Check the following:
1. Warm-up for morning cycle.
2. Freezestat operation.
3. Free-cooling mode, outside-air changeover.
4. Alarms.

REV 00
T. After starting and performance testing, replace filters with new, clean filters, change
vacuum cooling and condenser coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and check operation of
power vents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop units. Refer to Division 1 Section
1. Schedule at least eight (8) hours of training.

REV 00
SECTION 238123 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air-conditioning units and their accessories intended

specifically for computer-room applications, in the following arrangements:
1. Floor-mounted computer-room air conditioners.

2. Ceiling-mounted computer-room air conditioners.
3. Console computer-room air conditioners.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities operating characteristics, electrical

characteristics; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each model indicated.


each field connection.

COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238123 - Page 1 of 15

REV 00
C. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this
Section. Indicate and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies
of checklists.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 -

"Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate
Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shells to comply

with 2010 ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and suspension components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
roof construction.

REV 00
C. Coordinate installation of computer-room air-conditioning units with computer-room
raised floor installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and

countersigned by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions
for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
and severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted item.

weathering and use.
8. Warranty Period: Two years after date of Substantial Completion.
9. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
REV 00
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish a computer room process cooling self-contained units complete, including all
temperature controls, filters, fans and other system components as specified, all assembled and
tested at the factory prior to shipment in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 51 or AMCA
210. Ratings shall comply with AHRI 430. Total static pressure and coil face area classification shall
conform to AMCA 99. Or equivalent European standards.
B. The system shall include an automatic temperature control panel and electric panel
with main disconnect operable from the exterior of the room unit. Cooling capacity of unit shall
meet the sensible heat requirements and total heat requirements shown. In selecting unit size,
make true allowance for "sensible to total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible cooling capacity.
C. Design the separate assemblies to be used together and base ratings on the use of the
matched assemblies:
1. Self-contained direct expansion cooling units.

2. Water Cooling Coil.
3. Humidifier.
4. Electric reheat coil.
5. Factory fabricated floor stand.
6. All units shall have automatic controls and shall be a complete factory
assembled, piped and wired package.
D. Corrosion Prevention: All equipment fabricated from ferrous metals shall be coated
with epoxy finish or a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint. If accepted by the
Engineer, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc coating or a duplex
coating of zinc and paint shall be treated for prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint
system that will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located
outdoors shall be tested for 500 hours. The salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM
B117 using a 20 percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the
coating shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the
specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm (1/8-inch) on either side of the
scratch mark.
E. Unit Cabinet:

REV 00
1. Unit frame shall be minimum 14 gage (2.0 millimeter) welded steel tubes or
steel angles and shall be mill-galvanized or coated with an epoxy finish, or as specified
above.
2. Exterior panels shall be furniture grade steel sheet, minimum of 20 gage (1.0
mm), mill-galvanized or coated with a corrosion-inhibiting epoxy finish, or an approved
equivalent finish. Mill galvanized sheet metal shall be coated with not less than 1.25 ounces
of zinc per square foot (380 gram of zinc per square meter) of two-sided surface. Mill rolled
structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted. Cut edges, burns and
scratches in hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with galvanizing repair coating.
3. Provide removable panel for access to controls without interrupting airflow.
Panels shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage under system operating pressure and shall be
removable for service access without the use of special tools. Condensate pans shall be
minimum 22 gage (1.0 millimeter) Type 304 stainless steel and shall be piped to drain.
4. Exterior surfaces of cabinets constructed of mill-galvanized steel shall be
finished by the manufacturer's standard enamel finish in the required color as directed by
the Engineer.
5. Unit manufacturer's standard cabinet materials and finishes will be acceptable
if considered equivalent to the above requirements by the Engineer.
F. Cabinet Interiors Sound Attenuation:
1. Provide a factory-installed sound attenuation system in the interior of the unit

cabinet.
2. Unit cabinet panels interior shall be provided with 25 millimeters of 24
kilogram per cubic meter (one inch of 1 1/2 pound per cubic foot) neoprene-coated
fiberglass insulation on interior of cabinet panels. Insulation shall be applied to the cabinet
panels with 100 percent adhesive coverage and both the insulation and the adhesive shall
conform to NFPA 90A.
3. Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall
comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
4. Fans and compressors located in the unit interior cabinet shall be provided
with vibration isolators between their respective support frames and the cabinet framing.
G. Each unit shall be provided complete with the following:
1. Heating Coil Interlock: An interlock shall be provided to de-energize the

electric heating coil in the event of airflow failure.
2. Air Sensor: Air sensing devices shall be installed to indicate clogged filters
and loss of airflow.
3. Water Sensor: A water sensor shall be mounted on the main floor directly
below the unit and shall activate the alarm system if it detects the presence of moisture.

REV 00
4. Smoke Detector: Smoke detector shall be located in the return air stream and
shall shut down the air-handling unit and activate the alarm when smoke is detected. Alarm
shall be connected to building alarm system.
5. Thermostat: Thermostat shall be an electronic solid state device with its
element located in the filtered return air stream. Thermostat shall have a minimum range of
16 to 27 deg. C (60 to 80 deg. F) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 (1.0) degrees at the set
point.
6. Humidistat: Humidistat shall be an electronic solid state device with its

element located in the filtered return air stream entering the unit's coils. Humidistat shall
have an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent in reading relative humidity and shall have a
minimum adjustable dead band of plus or minus 5 percent. Humidistat shall have a
minimum operating range of 35 to 65 percent relative humidity and shall be adjustable over
the full range.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY TEST PLANS
A. For each unit, submit a factory test plan which when followed during factory testing
shall verify that the performance scheduled on the drawings is met by the produced unit models.
B. The manufacturer shall perform factory tests on the actual units produced for this
project. The test reports shall document the performance tests conducted on the factory assembled
computer-room air-conditioning units. Performance testing on the individual computer- room air-
conditioning unit components, not factory assembled, is not acceptable.
C. Submit the required test plans for review and approval to the Engineer at least 30
calendar days before scheduled factory test date.
D. Test Procedure: Indicate in each test plan the factory acceptance test procedures.
Procedures shall be structured to test all modes of operation to confirm that the controls through
all modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing in accordance with the intended
sequence of control. Controllers shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have the proper set
point to provide stable control of their respective equipment. Include in each test plan a detailed
step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls provided by the manufacturer.
2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description and Assembly: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped;

consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, humidifier, and controls.
1. Assembly: Downflow air delivery, in draw-through configuration.

REV 00
B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity, supporting compressors
and other mechanical equipment and fittings with floor stand with adjustable legs and vibration
isolation pads.
1. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets,

hinges, and concealed fastening devices.
2. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 25-mm
thick duct liner.
3. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on, textured vinyl enamel.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Evaporator Fans: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, statically and

dynamically balanced.
1. Drive: Steel shaft with self-aligning ball bearings; and V-belt drive with cast-
iron or steel sheaves, variable- and adjustable-pitch motor sheave, minimum of 2 matched
belts, with drive rated at a minimum of 2.0 times the nameplate rating of motor.
2. Motor: Dripproof, permanently lubricated ball-bearing motor with built-in

current and overload protection.
D. Compressors: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, oil sight glass,
internal motor protection, low-pressure switch, and manual-reset high-pressure switch.
1. Refrigeration Circuits: 2, each with hot-gas mufflers, thermal-expansion

valve with external equalizer, liquid-line solenoid valve, liquid-line filter-dryer, refrigerant
sight glass with moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and accumulator
sized for liquid seal under light load.
E. Evaporator Coil: Alternate-row or split-face circuits, direct-expansion cooling coil of

seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins, mounted over stainless-steel drain pan and
having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate
reservoir.
F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube

aluminum-fin coils arranged for 2 circuits, multiple direct-drive propeller fans with permanently

REV 00
lubricated ball bearings, and single-phase motors with internal overload protection. Provide
capacity control by cycling fans.
G. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with
modulating control valve.
1. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan and having a condensate
pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
H. Extended-Surface, Disposable, Panel Filters: Pleated, lofted, nonwoven, reinforced

cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded-wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame.
1. Nominal Thickness: 100 mm.

2. Dust-Spot Efficiency: 25 to 30 percent.
3. Weight Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 90 to 92 percent.
4. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 7.
5. Initial Resistance at 2.54 m/s (500-FPM) Face Velocity: 75 Pa (0.30-inch
wg).
6. Recommended Final Resistance: 250 Pa (1-inch wg).
I. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Enclosed-fin electric elements arranged for

minimum of 3 stages, with primary and secondary thermal switches, manual-reset overload
protection, and branch-circuit overcurrent protection.
J. Evaporative Pan Humidifier: Stainless-steel pan and cover, serviceable without

disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections; prepiped with stainless-steel or brass float-
valve mechanism; electric-resistance heating coil with low-water-cutoff switch; flush- cycle timer;
and solenoid drain valve.
K. Integral Electrical Panel: Unit mounted NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure or comply with
IEC 60204, with piano-hinged door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload
relays, circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control-circuit transformer.
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonautomatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle

accessible with panel closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off position.
L. Microprocessor-Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process cooling

system; continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm on
system malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. If more than one malfunction occurs,

REV 00
system displays fault in sequence with room temperature and continues to display fault when
malfunction is cleared until system is reset.
1. Malfunctions: Power Loss, Loss of Airflow, Clogged Air Filter, High Room
Temperature, Low Room Temperature, High Humidity, Low Humidity, Smoke/Fire, Water-
under-Floor, Supply Fan Overload, Compressor No. 1--Overload, Compressor No. 1--Low
Pressure, Compressor No. 1--High Pressure, Compressor No. 2-- Overload, Compressor No.
2--Low Pressure, and Compressor No. 2--High Pressure.
2. LED Display: Control Power On, System On, Humidification,
Dehumidification Taking Place, Compressor No. 1 Operating, Compressor No. 2 Operating,
Heat or Reheat Operating, Economy Cooling.
3. Push Buttons: Provide to stop process cooling system, start process cooling
system, silence audible alarm, push-to-test LED indicators, and display room relative
humidity.
4. Remote Signaling: Provide termination for remote signaling of system status
and alarms. Comply with requirements of Building Management System (BMS)
2.4 CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of

cabinet, fan, filters, controls; for horizontal ceiling mounting to fit 600-by-1200-mm T-bar ceiling
opening.
B. Cabinet: Welded steel with baked-enamel finish and insulated with 15-mm thick,
acoustic duct liner.
1. Integral factory-supplied supply and return grille to fit ceiling grid kit of 600
by 1200 mm, with filter.
C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven by 2-speed motor.
D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, and internal
motor overload protection.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure

switch, thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with moisture indicator,
service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of refrigerant.

REV 00
E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid-line filter- dryer,
service shutoff valves, and charging valves. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan
and having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and
condensate reservoir.
F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin coil

with fan driven by double-shafted evaporator fan motor.
1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and

refrigerant piping for field interconnection.
G. Filter: 25-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor,

dehumidification relay, and high-temperature-limit switch.
I. Atomizing Humidifier: Centrifugal atomizer with stainless-steel pan, demister pad,

and solenoid valve.
J. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with
1. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan and having a condensate
K. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor,
compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature- and
humidity-control modules, humidity contactor, time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-
temperature thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounted control panel with start- stop switch,
adjustable humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point.
2.5 SMALL-CAPACITY UPRIGHT UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of

cabinet, fan, filters, controls; for vertical floor mounting in upflow or downflow configuration.
B. Cabinet: Welded tubular-steel frame with removable steel panels with baked-enamel
finish and insulated with 25-mm thick, acoustic duct liner.

REV 00
C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, with adjustable V-belt drive, 1400-
rpm motor.
D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, with internal
motor overload protection.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure

switch, thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with moisture indicator,
service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of refrigerant.
E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded

into aluminum fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid-line filter- dryer,
service shutoff valves, and charging valves. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan
having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate
reservoir.
F. Remote, Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin coil

with fan driven by double-shafted evaporator fan motor.
1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and

refrigerant piping for field interconnection.
G. Filter: 100-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media with minimum 20 percent dust-
spot efficiency.
1. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): minimum 90 percent.
2. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 6 or higher.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor and

temperature-limit switches.
I. Infrared Humidifier: High-intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless-steel

evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections; prepiped
and located in bypass airstream; with flush-cycle timer and solenoid drain valve.
J. Electrode Steam Humidifier: Self-contained, replaceable cylinder, microprocessor-

controlled, electrode steam-generating unit with disposable polypropylene plastic cylinders with
field-adjustable steel electrodes and stainless-steel steam dispersion tube.

REV 00
1. Plumbing Components and Valve Bodies: Plastic, linked by flexible rubber

hosing, with water fill with air gap and solenoid valve incorporating built-in strainer,
pressure-reducing and flow-regulating orifice, and drain with integral air gap on drain.
2. Control: Fully modulating to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with
field- adjustable maximum capacity; high-water probe.
3. Drain Cycle: Field-adjustable drain duration and drain interval.
K. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with
1. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan [having a condensate
L. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor,
compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature- and
humidity-control modules, humidity contactor, time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and high-
temperature thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounted control panel with start- stop switch,
adjustable humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point.
2.6 FLOOR STANDS
A. For computer-room raised access flooring applications, provide floor mounted

computer- room air-conditioning units with factory matched, seismic floor stands. Coordinate size
and height of floor stands with computer-room raised access flooring installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that flooring system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Verify that ceiling system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on Shop Drawings.

REV 00
D. Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb.
C. Install air-cooled condenser on vibration isolation.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

2. Water and Drainage Connections: Conform to applicable requirements of
Sections. Provide adequate connections for water-cooled units, condensate, and humidifier
flushing system.
3. Condenser Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section
"Hydronic Piping." Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water-cooled
units.
4. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section
"Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
C. Ground equipment.

use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B or equivalent IEC standard.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.

REV 00
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.6 COMMISSIONING

report results in writing:
B. After installation, check the following:
1. Components are not damaged.

2. Unit is level.
3. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
4. Vibration isolation and flexible connections are installed correctly.
5. Makeup water is connected.
6. Humidifier water piping is connected.
7. Ductwork is connected.
8. Bearings are lubricated.
9. Filters are installed and clean.
C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.
D. After starting and performance test, replace filters with new, clean filters and flush
humidifier.

REV 00
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air-conditioning units. Refer to Division
1 Section "Demonstration and Training part of Closeout Procedures."
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

REV 00
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate

evaporator- fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a
coil for cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.
B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that

contains a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data
in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - Page 1 of 9

REV 00
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2. Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of

sections of units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color
finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

split- system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 and 34

Package, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4
- "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures,"
and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

in NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and
suitable of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.

REV 00
E. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan
operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low
speed and 48dBa at high speed.
F. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with
the test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided
with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard
cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no
variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative
arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.
G. Local Certification: Units should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports,
and roof penetrations specified in Section "Roof Accessories."
1.7 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or

5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normalweathering

and use.

REV 00
manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not
cancelled due to the repair work.
C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 years’ use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years’ experience shall be
5 years field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service
2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

REV 00
2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with
polystyrene.
a. Fabricated with minimum one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and
return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply

with ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
b. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
condensate from top coil.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with AHRI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to

motor.
D. Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type. Comply with requirements of section "Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
E. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Engineer.
1. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
3. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with
polystyrene.
a. Fabricated with minimum one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and
return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection.
REV 00
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply

with ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
b. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
condensate from top coil.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying
with AHRI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with
integral overload protection; resiliently mounted. Comply with requirements of section "Common
Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
2.4 WALL- OR CEILING-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Engineer, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted. Comply with requirements of section "Common
Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
2.5 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor.
Compressor Type: Scroll.

REV 00
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
Refrigerant Charge: R-407C or R-410A.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. Comply with

requirements of section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
Thermostat: Low voltage with sub-base to control compressor and evaporator fan.
Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator

fan, with the following features:
Compressor time delay.

24-hour time control of system stop and start.
Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
Fan-speed selection, including auto setting].
Interface with BMS
C. Thermostat: DDC wall type. Comply with BMS specification section 230900
D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned,
dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.

REV 00
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices
securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on minimum 100 mm

thick, reinforced concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation
with concrete base.
D. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a

minimum static deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
E. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow
units to be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific
valve and specialty arrangements.
D. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113

"Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return
ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors
are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
E. Ground equipment.

F. Comply with requirements of Electrical specifications, Division 26.


REV 00
A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field- assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service, and

report results in writing.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the

following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen
vibration transmission to structure.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain split-system air-conditioning units. Refer
to Division 1.

REV 00
SECTION 238146 - WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes the following types of water-source heat pumps:
1. Concealed horizontal and vertical units.

2. Rooftop units.
3. Exposed, floor-mounted console units.
4. Unit ventilators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities for each model; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product specified.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: From manufacturer, detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions,
weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and
size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 238146 - Page 1 of 7

REV 00
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the
full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same
material to be used for the Work.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water-source heat pumps certifying that the
products furnished comply with requirements.
G. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
H. Maintenance Data: For water-source heat pumps to include in the maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain water-source heat pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water- source
heat pumps and are based on the specific system selected. Other manufacturers' systems with
equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70 - 2007, Article 100.

REV 00
D. Test and rate water-source heat pumps according to ARI 320-98, "Water-Source Heat Pumps."
Provide ARI certification.
E. Comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.
F. Comply with the minimum COP/efficiency levels according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Buildings."
G. Comply with NFPA 70 - 2007.
H. Comply with safety requirements of UL 484 - 2007, "Room Air Conditioners," for assembly of
free-delivery water-source heat pumps.
I. Comply with safety requirements of UL 1995, "Heat Pumps," for duct-system connections.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of water-source heat pumps and suspension components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer, agreeing to

repair or replace components of water-source heat pumps that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan.

REV 00
2. One set of filters for each unit.
3. One spare heat-pump unit of each size and model furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.2 UNIT VENTILATOR HEAT PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged water-source heat pumps consisting of

cabinet; sealed refrigerant circuit including compressor, refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger,
refrigerant-to-air heat exchanger, and reversing valve; evaporator fans; refrigeration and
temperature controls; filters; dampers; and isolation valves to allow servicing of components in
refrigeration circuit.
B. Cabinet and Chassis: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel casing with the following features:
1. Access panel for access and maintenance of internal components.

2. Cabinet Insulation: Glass fiber insulation, 13 mm thick, 24-kg/cu. m density.
3. Knockouts for electrical and piping connections.
4. Condensate drain connection.
5. Flat-top cabinet with steel bar grille.
C. Evaporator Fans: Direct-driven, centrifugal fan with permanently lubricated motor.
D. Refrigerant-to-Water Heat Exchanger: Coaxial heat exchanger with inner copper water tube and
outer steel refrigerant tube or coil-in-shell with enhanced copper tubing inside a steel shell.
E. Refrigerant-to-Air Heat Exchanger: Copper-tube coil with aluminum fins.
F. Reversing Valve: Manufacturer's standard control valve designed to be fail-safe in heating

position.
G. Compressor: Hermetic compressor installed on vibration isolators and enclosed in acoustically
treated enclosure with built-in safeties as follows:

REV 00
1. High-temperature cutout.
2. Low-temperature cutout.
3. Compressor motor overload protection.
H. Refrigerant Piping Materials: Drawn-temper, Type ACR copper tube with wrought-copper fittings
and brazed joints. Insulate refrigerant piping with 10-mm thick, flexible elastomeric insulation.
1. Insulation Fire-Performance Rating: 25 flame-spread and 50 smoke-developed rating

according to ASTM E84-09c.
I. Outside-Air Economizer: Motorized outside-air dampers that modulate from 5 to 100 percent
when unit is in economizer mode.
J. Outside Air: Manufacturer's standard outside-air damper.
K. Outside Air: Barometric exhaust damper with an outside-air damper.
L. Outside Air: Propeller exhaust fan with barometric and outside air dampers.
M. Unit Controls: Manufacturer's standard electromechanical, factory-mounted and -wired controls,

including fan, reversing-valve, and heat- and cool-function controls.
N. Filters: Glass-fiber throwaway type, 13 mm thick, located in mixed-air stream.
O. Hose Kit: Two, 900 mm long by 25-mm diameter hose with automatic self-balancing valve,
strainer and shut off valves.
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.

REV 00
A. Factory test and rate heat exchangers for 2760-kPa (400-psig) refrigerant working pressure,
minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, other
specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of water-source heat pumps. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine piping and electric rough installations for water-source heat pumps to verify actual
locations of piping connections before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water-source heat pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Connections: Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Connect supply and return piping to heat pump with unions and shutoff valves.
2. Connect heat-pump drain pan to nearest indirect waste connection, or as indicated.
B. Duct Connections: Connect supply and return ducts to heat pumps with flexible duct connections.
Provide transitions to match unit duct-connection size.
C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.

REV 00
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
ANSI/UL 486A-486B - 2004.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Replace filters used during construction.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the

field assembly of components and installation of water-source heat pumps, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services,

and report results in writing.
B. Operate fan motors and verify proper rotation and connections.
C. Operate controls and verify proper response to control inputs.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain water-source heat pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

REV 00

REV 00
SECTION 238219 - FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring
diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to

scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to
concealed units.

REV 00
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of
colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to

include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral
controls, and filters.
2. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter[s] for each filter installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt[s] for each unit installed.
REV 00
1.7 WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of the fan-coil units that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

weathering and use.
8. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be
5 year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service
2.2 GENERAL

REV 00
A. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33,
and UL 1995.
B. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed models.
C. Units shall have three speeds switch and shall be selected at medium speed.
D. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with
auxiliary water coil, valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor, and motor control.
E. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be sealed with a coating that is impervious
to moisture.
F. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan

operating speed selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the following values at
the midfrequency of each octave band:
OCTAVE BANDS
Frequency
(hertz) 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000
Power Level 60 55 53 50 48
G. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with
the test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units provided
with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard
cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no
variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative
arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.
H. Capacity of he units shall be as indicated. Room fan-coil units shall be certified as

complying with AHRI 440 and shall meet the requirements of UL 1995.
2.3 CONFIGURATION
A. Vertical Units: An assembly for floor-to-floor mounting, including cabinet, filter,

chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic or direct-
expansion cooling coil and electric heating coil.

REV 00
B. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan,
and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic or direct-expansion cooling coil and
electric heating coil.
C. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter,

chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic or direct-
expansion cooling coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: minimum 8 mm duct liner (coated glass fiber or foil-
covered, closed-cell foam) complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying
with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a combined

maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested
according to ASTM E 84 or equivalent European standard by a qualified testing agency.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be insulated
with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall extend to underside of valves,
strainers and accessories, and be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection.
D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, galvanized steel, with galvanized

steel discharge grilles and channel-formed edges and with insulation on back of panel.
2. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and
hinge and attached with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles.
E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Engineer, applied to factory-assembled and -
tested fan-coil unit before shipping.
[F.] Enclosure shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gage, 1.0 3 millimeter, galvanized
steel, properly reinforced and braced. Front panel of enclosure shall be removable and provided
with 1/2-inch (13 millimeter)8 millimeter thick insulation conforming to NFPA 90AEN13501, to

REV 00
prevent condensation. Discharge louvers shall be four-way adjustable and shall be designed to
properly distribute air throughout the conditioned space. All ferrous-metal surfaces shall be
galvanized. All exposed-to-view enclosure corners and edges shall be rounded. Discharge
louvers shall be mounted in a top panel that is removable for coil cleaning. Access doors shall be
hinged and shall be provided for all piping and control compartments. Enclosure finish shall be
manufacturer's standard in color selected by the Engineer.
2.5 WATER COILS
A. Cooling/Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins

spaced no closer than 2.5 mm and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum
working pressure of 1378 kPa (200 psig) and a maximum entering water temperature of 104 deg C
(220 deg F).
2.6 DIRECT-EXPANSION REFRIGERANT COILS
A. Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 2.5 mm
and brazed joints at fittings. Comply with AHRI 210/240, and leak test to minimum 450 psig
(3105 kPa) for a minimum working pressure of 2068 kPa (300 psig). Include thermal expansion
valve.
2.7 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS
A. Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 50-Hz hum, embedded
in magnesium-oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high-mass steel or corrosion-resistant
metallic sheath with fins no closer than 4 mm. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal box. Fin
surface temperature shall not exceed 288 deg C (550 deg F) at any point during normal operation.
1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection

and limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
2.8 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of

galvanized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor. Fan
shall be suitable for these speed operation. Fan-coil capacity shall be based on medium speed. The
noise level shall not exceed NC30 unless otherwise specified.
2.9 FAN MOTORS

REV 00
A. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."
B. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with

integral thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.
C. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled, with hinged mount,
adjustable motor pulley and permanently lubricated bearings.
D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power

circuit. Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Outdoor-air aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen, for fan-
coil units with outdoor-air intake.
B. Steel subbase, height as indicated.
C. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
D. Filters: 25-mm thick, washable type, aluminum filters and frames.
E. Dampers: Steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade length and
having factory-mounted electric operators for 25 percent open cycle.
2.11 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Two-Pipe, Valve Cycle: Wall-mounted electronic thermostat, with manual three-

speed fan- speed switch and electronic cycling of valves, suitable to be connected to the central
building control system specified in Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for public
areas. Residential FCUs are not connected to BMS..
A. Test and rate units according to AHRI 440.

REV 00
B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations
before fan-coil unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Instruments."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls at heights to match

lightingcontrols.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each
connection.

REV 00
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A - 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in
writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper
operation and electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial
Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 1 Section

REV 00

Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alamein Downtown Towers

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 2

23330 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 2

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

1.2 ACCURACY OF DATA AND CONTRACT DRAWINGS

D. Drawings shall not be scaled for determining exact dimensions or location of

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 1 of 28

G. Work indicated on drawings, but not mentioned in Specifications, or vice versa,

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 2 of 28

SUMMER Winter Remarks

Guest Rooms 40-50 (+-

Lounges/ Dining 40-50 (+-

Prayer rooms 40-50 (+-

Ball rooms 40-50 (+-

Toilets Ventilation Only [Indirect cooling

SUMMER Winter Remarks

Lobbies and Corridors

Kitchens 40-50 (+-

Laundries 40-50 (+-

Health Club 20 - 24 40-50 (+-

Locker Rooms 40-50 (+-

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 3 of 28

Lounges 40-50 (+-

Mechanical Equipment Rooms (MERs)

Public Assembly Areas, General 40-50 (+-

Restaurants 40-50 (+-

Housekeeping [Indirect cooling]

Trash refrigerator Walk in trash

SUMMER Winter Remarks

MCC rooms 26 ± 230 50 ± 5 [50% of the load to

Generator switchgear room 26 ± 2 50 ± 5

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 4 of 28

GSM room 20-23 [Stand-by AC

IDF-(Intermediate Distribution 20-23 [Stand-by AC

SUMMER Winter Remarks

Parks Ventilation Only

Loading dock Ventilation Only

 Temperature : +/- 1°C

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 5 of 28

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 013300, “Submittal Procedures”, and

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 6 of 28

3. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:

a. Complete HVAC floor plans with a minimum of 1/50 scale.

4. Submit shop drawings for review as required by the contract documents.

1. In line with contract documents and requirements specified in different

E. Where operating or warning instructions are provided or specified they shall be

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - Page 7 of 28

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

D. Installer shall be qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation

F. Manufacturer’s written directions and recommendations shall be followed. If these

H. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.

K. Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment

L. Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely

M. Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING